For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
2021 ROGUE
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
The information contained within this supplement revises or adds to the following
information in the 2021 Nissan Rogue Owner’s Manual:
•
“Vehicle Settings” section of the “Instruments and Controls” section.
•
“WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH” section of the “Instruments and Controls” section.
•
“Unlocking doors” section of the “INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION (models with request switch)”
section of the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
Read carefully and keep in the vehicle.
Printing: August 2021
Publication No. SU21EA 1T33U0
OWNER’S MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allows the user to
change the settings for the following
menus:
• Power Back Door (if so equipped)
• Lighting
• Locking
• Wipers
• Driving Position (if so equipped)
• Rear Door Alert
The vehicle settings can be changed using
the scroll dial
O
1
.
Power Back Door (if so equipped):
This allows user to urn the power liftgate
ON or OFF.
Lighting:
The “Lighting” menu has the following op-
tions:
• Welcome Headlight
The welcome lighting can be set to be
ON or OFF. Use the scroll dial
O
1
to turn
this feature ON or OFF.
• Auto Room Lamp
The interior light can be set to ON or OFF.
Use the scroll dial
O
1
to turn this feature
ON or OFF.
• Accent Lighting (if so equipped)
The brightness of the Accent Lighting
can be adjusted. Use the scroll dial
O
1
to
select the brightness.
• Auto Headlight
The sensitivity of the Intelligent Auto
Headlight can be adjusted. Use the scroll
dial
O
1
to select the required sensitivity.
The following options are available:
– Turn on earliest
– Turn on earlier
– Turn on standard
– Turn on later
• Light Off Delay
The duration of the automatic head-
lights can be changed from 0 to 180 sec-
onds. Use the scroll dial
O
1
to change the
duration.
Locking:
Type A
The “Locking” menu has the following op-
tions:
• Ex t. Door Switch (if so equipped)
When this item is turned on, the request
switch on the door is activated. Use the
scroll dial
O
1
to activate or deactivate
this function.
• Selective Unlock (if so equipped)
When this item is turned on, and the door
handle request switch is pushed, only
the corresponding door is unlocked. All
the doors can be unlocked if the door
handle request switch is pushed again
within 1 minute. When this item is turned
to off, all the doors will be unlocked when
the door handle request switch is
pushed once. Use the scroll dial
O
1
to
activate or deactivate this function.
• Auto Door Unlock
The “Auto Door Unlock” feature allows
user to customize the auto door unlock
options. Use the scroll dial
O
1
to change
the mode.
–– Shift to P
–– IGN OFF
–– OFF
• Horn beeps on lock (if so equipped)
When this item is turned on, the horn will
chirp and the hazard indicators will flash
twice when locking the vehicle with the
Intelligent Key. Use the scroll dial
O
1
to
activate or deactivate this function.
Type B:
The “Locking” menu has the following op-
tions:
• Ex t. Door Switch (if so equipped)
When this item is turned on, the request
switch on the door is activated. Use the
scroll dial
O
1
to activate or deactivate
this function.
• Selective Unlock (if so equipped)
When this item is turned on, and the door
handle request switch on the driver’s
side door or the liftgate request switch is
pushed, only the corresponding door/
liftgate is unlocked. All the doors can be
unlocked if the same request switch is
pushed again within 1 minute. When this
item is turned to off, all the doors will be
unlocked when the request switch is
pushed once. Use the scroll dial
O
1
to
activate or deactivate this function.
• Auto Door Unlock
The “Auto Door Unlock” feature allows
user to customize the auto door unlock
options. Use the scroll dial
O
1
to change
the mode.
–– Shift to P
–– IGN OFF
–– OFF
• Horn beeps on lock (if so equipped)
When this item is turned on, the horn will
chirp and the hazard indicators will flash
twice when locking the vehicle with the
Intelligent Key. Use the scroll dial
O
1
to
activate or deactivate this function.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may
lead to an accident. Warm the wind-
shield with the defroster before you
wash the windshield.
CAUTION
• If the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position while the wiper oper-
ates, the wiper may not operate the
next time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. If this oc-
curs, move the lever to the other po-
sition to operate the wiper again.
• Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
• Do not operate the washer if the res-
ervoir tank is empty.
• Do not fill the windshield-washer
reservoir with washer fluid concen-
trates at full strength. Some methyl
alcohol based washer fluid concen-
trates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the washer
reservoir tank.
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
• Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer res-
ervoir tank. Do not use the window
washer reservoir tank to mix the
washer fluid concentrate and water.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is in-
terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF
position and remove the snow or ice that
is on and around the wiper arms. In ap-
proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on
again to operate the wiper.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
OPERATION
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper
at the following speed:
䊊
1
Intermittent — intermittent operation
can be adjusted by turning the knob
toward
O
A
(faster) or
O
B
(slower). Also,
the intermittent operation speed varies
in accordance with the vehicle speed.
(For example, when the vehicle speed is
high, the intermittent operation speed
will be faster.)
䊊
2
Low — continuous low speed operation
䊊
3
High — continuous high speed
operation
Push the lever up
O
4
to have one sweep
operation of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you
O
5
to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
NOTE:
The Speed Dependent feature may be
disabled. For additional information, re-
fer to “Vehicle Settings” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this
manual.
WARNING
Do not operate the windshield wiper
while the wiper arm is pulled up. The
wiper arm may be damaged.
LIC4679
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
(models with request switch)
You can lock or unlock the doors without
taking the key out from your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,
you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing
the door handle request switch
O
A
(located
on the front and rear doors) or liftgate re-
quest switch
O
B
within the range of opera-
tion.
When you lock or unlock the doors, the haz-
ard indicator will flash and the outside
chime will sound as a confirmation. For de-
tails, see “Setting hazard indicator and horn
mode” in this section.
Welcome light function
When you unlock the doors or the liftgate,
the daytime running lights, parking lights
and the tail lights will illuminate for a period
of time. The welcome light function can be
disabled. For information about disabling
the welcome light function, see “Vehicle
Settings” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
Locking doors
1. Push the park button to engage the P
(Park) position. Place the ignition switch
in the OFF position and make sure you
carry the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push the door handle request switch
O
A
or the liftgate request switch
O
B
while
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the liftgate will lock.
5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice
and the outside buzzer sounds twice.
NOTE:
• Request switches for all doors can be
deactivated when the “Ext. Door
Switch” is turned off in the Vehicle Set-
tings of the vehicle information dis-
play. For additional information, see
“Vehicle Settings” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
• Doors lock with the door handle re-
quest switch while the ignition switch
is not in the OFF position.
• Doors do not lock by pushing the driv-
er’s door handle request switch while
the driver’s door is open. However,
doors lock with the mechanical key
even if any door is open.
• Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key
inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to
warn you. However, when an Intelligent
Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be
locked with another Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
• After locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure that the
doors have been securely locked by
operating the door handles or the
liftgate opener switch.
• When locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession
before operating the request switch
to prevent the Intelligent Key from
being left in the vehicle.
• The request switch is operational
only when the Intelligent Key has
been detected by the Intelligent Key
system.
Unlocking doors
Type A:
1. Push the door handle request switch
O
A
or the liftgate request switch
O
B
while
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and
outside chime sounds once. The corre-
sponding door or the liftgate will unlock
3. Push the request switch again within 1
minute.
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and
outside chime sounds once again. All
the doors and the liftgate will unlock.
All doors will be locked automatically un-
less one of the following operations is per-
formed within 1 minute after pushing the
request switch while the doors are locked.
• Opening any door.
• Pushing the ignition switch.
During this 1-minute time period, if the UN-
LOCK
button on the Intelligent Key is
pushed, all doors will be locked automati-
cally after another 1 minute.
NOTE:
The unlocking operation can be changed
in selective unlock in the Vehicle Settings
of the vehicle information display. For
additional information, see “Vehicle Set-
tings” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
Type B:
1. Push the door handle request switch
O
A
or the liftgate request switch
O
B
while
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and
outside chime sounds once.
• When the driver’s door handle request
switch or the liftgate request switch is
pushed:
The corresponding door or the liftgate
will unlock.
• When the other door handle request
switch is pushed:
All doors and the liftgate will unlock.
3. Push the driver’s door handle request
switch or the liftgate request switch
again within 1 minute.
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and
outside chime sounds once again. All
the doors and the liftgate will unlock.
All doors will be locked automatically un-
less one of the following operations is per-
formed within 1 minute after pushing the
request switch while the doors are locked.
• Opening any door.
• Pushing the ignition switch.
During this 1-minute time period, if the UN-
LOCK
button on the Intelligent Key is
pushed, all doors will be locked automati-
cally after another 1 minute.
NOTE:
The unlocking operation can be changed
in “Selective Unlock” under the Vehicle
Settings of the vehicle information dis-
play. For additional information, see “Ve-
hicle Settings” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
WARNING
Operating, servicing and main-
taining a passenger vehicle or
off-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals in-
cluding engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates, and
lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle
the engine except as neces-
sary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands
frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information
go to www.P65Warnings.ca.
gov/passenger-vehicle.
This manual was prepared to help you
understand the operation and mainte-
nance of your vehicle so that you may
enjoy many miles of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before
operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Book-
let explains details about the warranties
covering your vehicle. Additionally, a
separate Customer Care/Lemon Law
Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to
resolve any concerns you may have
with your vehicle, as well as clarify your
rights under your state’s lemon law.
In addition to factory installed options,
your vehicle may also be equipped with
additional accessories installed by NISSAN
or by your NISSAN dealer prior to delivery.
It is important that you familiarize your-
self with all disclosures, warnings, cau-
tions and instructions concerning proper
use of such accessories prior to operating
the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recom-
mended you see a NISSAN dealer for
details concerning the particular acces-
sories with which your vehicle is
equipped.
Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or
have any questions, we will be glad to
assist you with the extensive resources
available to us.
READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY
Before driving your vehicle, read your
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance
requirements, assisting you in the safe
operation of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules
to help ensure a safe and comforta-
ble trip for you and your passengers!
. NEVER drive under the influence
of alcohol or drugs.
. ALWAYS observe posted speed
limits and never drive too fast
for conditions.
. ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle
features or taking other actions
that could distract you.
. ALWAYS use your seat belts and
appropriate child restraint sys-
tems. Pre-teen children should
be seated in the rear seat.
. ALWAYS provide information
about the proper use of vehicle
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION
65 WARNING
Foreword
safety features to all occupants
of the vehicle.
. ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man-
ual for important safety informa-
tion.
On-pavement and off-road
driving
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger
car because it has a higher center of
gravity. As with other vehicles with
features of this type, failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or an accident. Be sure to
read “Avoiding collision and rollover”
and “Driving safety precautions” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHI-
CLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its perfor-
mance, safety or durability, and may
even violate governmental regula-
tions. In addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from
modification may not be covered un-
der NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that
uses the port during normal driving,
for example remote insurance com-
pany monitoring, remote vehicle di-
agnostics, telematics or engine
reprogramming, may cause interfer-
ence or damage to vehicle systems.
We do not recommend or endorse
the use of any aftermarket OBD
plug-in devices, unless specifically
approved by NISSAN. The vehicle
warranty may not cover damage
caused by any aftermarket plug-in
device.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all
features and equipment available on
this model. Features and equipment in
your vehicle may vary depending on
model, trim level, options selected, or-
der, date of production, region or avail-
ability. Therefore, you may find
information about features or equip-
ment that are not included or installed
on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustra-
tions in this manual are those in effect at
the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the
right to change specifications, perfor-
mance, design or component suppliers
without notice and without obligation.
From time to time, NISSAN may update
or revise this manual to provide Owners
with the most accurate information cur-
rently available. Please carefully read and
retain with this manual all revision up-
dates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure
you have access to accurate and up-to-
date information regarding your vehicle.
Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Man-
uals and any updates can also be found in
the Owner section of the NISSAN website
at https://owners.nissanusa.com/now-
ners/navigation/manualsGuide. If you
have questions concerning any informa-
tion in your Owner’s Manual, contact
NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See the NISSAN
CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this
Owner’s Manual for contact information.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this
manual. They are used in the following
ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence
of a hazard that could cause death or
serious personal injury. To avoid or
reduce the risk, the procedures must
be followed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence
of a hazard that could cause minor
or moderate personal injury or da-
mage to your vehicle. To avoid or
reduce the risk, the procedures must
be followed carefully.
SIC0697
If you see the symbol above, it means “Do
not do this” or “Do not let this happen”.
If you see a symbol similar to those above
in an illustration, it means the arrow
points to the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
those above indicate movement or ac-
tion.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
those above call attention to an item in
the illustration.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-
SORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium
batteries, may contain perchlorate ma-
terial. The following advisory is pro-
vided: “Perchlorate Material - special
handling may apply, see www.dtsc.ca.
gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
© 2020 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, me-
chanical, photocopying, recording or
otherwise, without the prior written per-
mission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.
NISSAN CARES ...
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and
service needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or
you would like to provide NISSAN directly
with comments or questions, please con-
tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-
ment using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will
ask for the following information:
. Your name, address, and telephone
number
. Vehicle identification number (at-
tached to the top of the instrument
panel on the driver’s side)
. Date of purchase
. Current odometer reading
. Your NISSAN dealer’s name
. Your comments or questions
OR
You can write to NISSAN with the infor-
mation at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.
com
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancana-
da.com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN
and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN
vehicle.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
Illustrated table of contents
0
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system
1
Instruments and controls
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone
systems
Starting and driving
In case of emergency
Appearance and care
Do-it-yourself
Maintenance and schedules
Technical and consumer information
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Table of
Contents
Index
11
0 Illustrated table of contents
Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) ..................................................................................... 0-2
Exterior front .................................................................................... 0-3
Exterior rear ...................................................................................... 0-4
Passenger compartment ....................................................... 0-5
Cockpit .................................................................................................. 0-6
Instrument panel .......................................................................... 0-7
Meters and gauges .................................................................... 0-8
Models with analog meter and
color display ............................................................................ 0-8
Models with full-screen display................................ 0-9
Engine compartment ............................................................ 0-10
PR25DD engine model................................................. 0-10
KR15DDT engine model ............................................. 0-11
Warning and indicator lights ........................................... 0-12
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
WAA0168X
1. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P.1-47)
2. Front passenger air bag status light
(P.1-55)
3. Occupant classification sensors (weight
sensors) (P.1-47)
4. Front central seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag* (P.1-47)
5. Seat belts (P.1-14)
6. Head restraints/headrests (P.1-10)
7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags (P.1-47)
8. Rear armrest (P.1-9)
9. Rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags (P.1-47)
10. Driver and front passenger supplemental
knee air bags (P.1-47)
11. Front seats (P.1-4)
12. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags* (P.1-47)
13. Seat belt pretensioners (P.1-66)
14. Rear seats (P.1-7)
— Child restraints (P.1-24)
15. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (for rear seats) (P.1-26)
16. Child restraint anchor points (for top
tether strap) (P.1-43)
*: if so equipped
SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
WAA0169X
1. Hood (P.3-22)
2. Windshield wiper and washer
— Switch operation (P.2-54)
— Window washer fluid (P.8-13)
3. Front camera* (P.2-61, P.5-44, P.5-47,
P.5-52, P.5-66, P.5-85, P.5-122)
4. Moonroof* (P.2-85)
5. Power windows (P.2-82)
6. Side turn signal light* (P.2-64)
7. Sonar sensors (center and corner)*
— Sonar system (P.5-162)
8. Front view camera* (P.4-9)
9. Fog lights* (P.2-64)
10. Headlights and turn signal lights (P.2-57)
11. Sonar sensors (side)*
— Sonar system (P.5-162)
12. Tires
— Wheels and tires (P.8-31, P.10-10)
— Spare tire (P.6-3)
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) (P.2-18, P.5-6)
13. Outside mirrors (P.3-35)
14. Side view camera* (P.4-9)
15. Doors
— Keys (P.3-3)
— Door locks (P.3-5)
— Intelligent Key system (P.3-7)
— Security system (P.2-52)
— Remote engine start* (P.3-19)
*: if so equipped
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
EXTERIOR FRONT
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
WAA0170X
1. Rear window defroster (P.2-57)
2. Rear window wiper and washer
— Switch operation (P.2-55)
— Window washer fluid (P.8-13)
3. High-mounted stop light (P.8-28)
4. Antenna (P.4-38)
5. Roof rack* (P.2-81)
6. Sonar sensors (center and corner)
— Sonar system* (P.5-162)
— Rear Sonar System (RSS)* (P.5-168)
— Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (P.5-143)
7. Liftgate (P.3-23)
— Intelligent Key system* (P.3-7)
8. Rear view camera* (P.4-2, P.4-9)
9. Rear combination light (P.8-28)
10. Sonar sensors (side)*
— Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (P.5-143)
— Sonar system (P.5-162)
11. Fuel-filler door (P.3-29)
— Fuel information (P.10-5)
12. Child safety rear door locks (P.3-7)
*: if so equipped
EXTERIOR REAR
WAA0171X
1. Inside mirror (P.3-33)
2. Sunglasses holder (P.2-78)
3. Map lights (P.2-88)
— Microphone**
4. Moonroof switch* (P.2-85)
5. Emergency Call (SOS) button* (P.2-72)
6. Sun visors (P.3-32)
7. Room light* (P.2-88)
8. Rear personal lights* (P.2-89)
9. Coat hooks (P.2-79)
10. Rear cup holders (P.2-73)
11. Cargo light (P.2-89)
12. Power window switch (P.2-82)
13. Outside mirror control switch (driver’s
side) (P.3-35)
14. Power door lock switches (P.3-6)
15. Memory seat switches (driver’s side)*
(P.3-37)
16. Lower console tray (P.2-78)
17. Front cup holders (P.2-73)
18. Console box (P.2-78)
— Power outlet (P.2-68)
— USB (Universal Serial Bus) charging
connector* (P.2-69)
— Heated rear seat switches* (P.2-65)
— Rear temperature control* (P.4-36)
19. Cargo area
— Power outlet (P. 2-68)
— Adjustable luggage floor* (P.2-75)
— Single luggage board* (P.2-75)
— Luggage hooks (P.2-80)
— Cargo cover* (P.2-80)
— Spare tire (P.6-5)
*: if so equipped
**: Refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
WAA0172X
1. Steering Assist switch* (models with Pro-
PILOT Assist) (P.2-67, P.5-85)
2. Head Up Display (HUD) switch* (P.2-49)
3. Headlight and turn signal switch (P.2-57)/
Fog light switch* (P.2-64)
4. Paddle shifters (P.5-23)
5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
— Audio control**
— Vehicle information display control
(P.2-23)
6. Steering wheel (P.3-31)
— Horn (P.2-65)
7. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-54)
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right
side)
— Cruise control switches* (P.5-83)
— ProPILOT Assist switch* (P.5-85, P.5-52,
P.5-66)
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
switches**
— Voice Recognition system switch**
— Siri® Eyes Free**
9. Hazard indicator flasher switch (P.6-2)
10. Shift lever
— Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) (P.5-19)
11. Instrument brightness control (P.2-11)
12. Power liftgate switch* (P.3-23)
13. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-14)
14. Parking brake switch (P.5-25)
15. Automatic brake hold switch (P.5-28)
16. Drive Mode Selector (P.5-31)
*: if so equipped
**: See the separate NissanConnect® Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
COCKPIT
WAA0173X
1. Side ventilator (P.4-25)
2. Meters and gauges (P.2-5)/Clock (P.2-48)
3. Head Up Display (HUD)* (P.2-49)
4. Center ventilator (P.4-25)
5. Audio system** or navigation system**
— RearView Monitor* (P.4-2)
— Intelligent Around View® Monitor*
(P.4-9)
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tem**
6. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P.1-47)
7. Hood release handle (P.3-22)
8. Fuse box cover (P.8-24)
9. Tilt and telescopic steering lock lever
(P.3-31)
10. Driver supplemental front-impact air bag
(P.1-47)
11. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P.1-47)
12. Heater and air conditioner control (P.4-26)
— Defroster switch (P.2-57)
— Heated seat switches* (P.2-65)
— Heated steering wheel switch* (P.2-65)
13. USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection
ports**
14. Wireless charger* (P.2-70)
15. Power outlet (P.2-68)
16. Front passenger supplemental knee air
bag (P.1-47)
17. Glove box (P.2-77)
*: if so equipped
**: See the separate NissanConnect® Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
INSTRUMENT PANEL
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
WAA0046X
MODELS WITH ANALOG METER AND
COLOR DISPLAY
1. Tachometer (P.2-9)
2. Warning and indicator lights (P.2-13)
3. Vehicle information display (P.2-22)
— Odometer (P.2-8)
4. Speedometer (P.2-8)
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-9)
6. Fuel gauge (P.2-10)
METERS AND GAUGES
WAA0167X
1. Tachometer (P.2-9)
2. Vehicle information display (P.2-22)
— Odometer (P.2-8)
3. Warning and indicator lights (P.2-13)
4. Speedometer (P.2-8)
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-9)
6. Fuel gauge (P.2-10)
MODELS WITH FULL-SCREEN DIS-
PLAY
The view of the meter screen can be
changed. (See “Changing the meter
screen view (models with full-screen dis-
play)” (P.2-23).)
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
WAA0302X
PR25DD ENGINE MODEL
1. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-6)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-8)
3. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-8)
4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-12)
5. Battery (P.8-15)
6. Fuse/fusible link box (P.8-22)
7. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-13)
8. Drive belt (P.8-17)
9. Air cleaner (P.8-19)
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WAA0301X
KR15DDT ENGINE MODEL
1. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-6)
2. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-8)
3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-8)
4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-12)
5. Battery (P.8-15)
6. Fuse/fusible link box (P.8-22)
7. Intercooler coolant reservoir (P.8-6)
8. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-13)
9. Drive belt (P.8-17)
10. Air cleaner (P.8-19)
Illustrated table of contents 0-11
0-12 Illustrated table of contents
Red light Name
Page
Brake warning light
2-14
Charge warning light
2-15
Electric shift control system
warning light
2-15
Electronic parking brake
warning light
2-15
Engine oil pressure warning
light
2-15
Hands OFF warning light (if
so equipped)
2-16
Master warning light
2-16
Seat belt warning light
2-16
Supplemental air bag
warning light
2-16
Yellow
light
Name
Page
Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
2-17
Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) system OFF
warning light
2-17
Electric power steering
warning light
2-17
Electronic parking brake
system warning light
2-18
Low tire pressure warning
light
2-18
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
2-19
Master warning light
2-20
Rear Automatic Braking
(RAB) system OFF warning
light
2-20
Slip indicator light
2-20
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) off indicator light
2-20
Other
light
Name
Page
Automatic brake hold indi-
cator light (white)
2-21
Automatic brake hold indi-
cator light (green)
2-21
Exterior light indicator
2-21
Front fog light indicator
light (if so equipped)
2-21
High beam assist indicator
light
2-21
High beam indicator light
2-21
Turn signal/hazard indica-
tor lights
2-21
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-
mental restraint system
Seats ....................................................................................................... 1-3
Front seats .................................................................................. 1-4
Rear seats .................................................................................... 1-7
Armrest ......................................................................................... 1-9
Head restraints/headrests ................................................. 1-10
Adjustable head
restraint/headrest components ............................. 1-11
Non-adjustable head
restraint/headrest components ............................. 1-11
Remove ....................................................................................... 1-11
Install............................................................................................. 1-12
Adjust............................................................................................ 1-12
Seat belts ......................................................................................... 1-14
Precautions on seat belt usage .............................. 1-14
Seat belt warning light and chime ....................... 1-16
Pregnant women ................................................................ 1-17
Injured persons ..................................................................... 1-17
Three-point type seat belt with retractor ...... 1-17
Seat belt extenders ........................................................... 1-20
Seat belt maintenance ................................................... 1-21
Child safety ..................................................................................... 1-21
Infants .......................................................................................... 1-22
Small children ........................................................................ 1-22
Larger children ...................................................................... 1-22
Child restraints ........................................................................... 1-24
Precautions on child restraints ............................. 1-24
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) system .................................................................. 1-26
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH ......................................................................... 1-31
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts........................................................ 1-33
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH ......................................................................... 1-36
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts........................................................ 1-39
Booster seats ....................................................................... 1-44
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..................... 1-47
Precautions on SRS ........................................................ 1-47
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats) ........................................................................... 1-53
Driver and front passenger supplemental
knee air bag.......................................................................... 1-62
Front, front central, rear outboard
seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact and rollover supplemental air
bag systems ......................................................................... 1-64
Seat belts with pretensioners (front and
rear outboard seats)...................................................... 1-66
SSS0133
WARNING
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle
when the seatback is reclined.
This can be dangerous. The
shoulder belt will not be against
your body. In an accident, you
could be thrown into it and re-
ceive neck or other serious inju-
ries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious
internal injuries.
. For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
well back and upright in the seat
with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. See
“Precautions on seat belt usage”
(P.1-14).
. After adjustment, gently rock in
the seat to make sure it is se-
curely locked.
. Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could
unknowingly activate switches
or controls. Unattended children
could become involved in serious
accidents.
. To help avoid risk of injury or
death through unintended opera-
tion of the vehicle and/or its
systems, do not leave children,
people who require the assis-
tance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle.
Additionally, the temperature in-
side a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk
of injury or death to people and
pets.
. Do not adjust the driver’s seat
while driving so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation. The
seat may move suddenly and
could cause loss of control of
the vehicle.
. The seatback should not be re-
clined any more than needed for
comfort. Seat belts are most ef-
fective when the passenger sits
well back and straight up in the
seat. If the seatback is reclined,
the risk of sliding under the lap
belt and being injured is in-
creased.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
SEATS
1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions,
be sure not to contact any moving
parts to avoid possible injuries and/
or damage.
FRONT SEATS
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted in
manual or power operation. For addi-
tional information about adjusting the
seats, refer to the steps outlined in this
section.
JVR0332X
Front manual seat adjustment
Forward and backward:
1. Pull up the adjusting lever
.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position.
3. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
seat in position.
Reclining:
1. Pull up the adjusting lever
.
2. Tilt the seatback to the desired posi-
tion.
3. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows the adjust-
ment of the seatback for occupants of
different sizes to help obtain the proper
seat belt fit. (See “Seat belts” (P.1-14).)
The seatback may be reclined to allow
occupants to rest when the vehicle is
parked.
JVR0333X
Seat lifter (if so equipped):
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever
to adjust the seat height until the desired
position is achieved.
Front power seat adjustment
Operating tips:
. The power seat motor has an auto-
reset overload protection circuit. If the
motor stops during the seat adjust-
ment, wait 30 seconds, then reacti-
vate the switch.
. To avoid discharge of the battery, do
not operate the power seats for a long
period of time when the engine is not
running.
See “Memory seat” (P.3-37) for the seat
position memory function (if so
equipped).
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WAB0160X
Forward and backward:
Move forward or backward the adjusting
switch
to the desired position.
Reclining:
Move forward or backward the adjusting
switch
to the desired position.
The reclining feature allows the adjust-
ment of the seatback for occupants of
different sizes to help obtain the proper
seat belt fit. (See “Seat belts” (P.1-14).)
The seatback may be reclined to allow
occupants to rest when the vehicle is
parked.
WAB0062X
Seat lifter (if so equipped):
Move the switch as shown to adjust the
angle of the front portion or height of the
seat.
WAB0063X
Lumbar support (if so equipped)
The lumbar support feature provides low-
er back support to the driver.
Push the switch as shown to adjust the
seat lumbar area until the desired posi-
tion is achieved.
NOTE:
The motor of the lumbar support will
continue to run while the switch is
pushed even after full travel in both
directions is achieved.
WAB0126X
REAR SEATS
Reclining (if so equipped)
1. Pull up the lever .
2. Tilt the seatback backward. It is re-
clined slightly.
3. Release the lever to lock the seatback
in position.
Folding
Before folding the rear seats
. Secure the outer seat belt on the seat
belt hook. (See “Seat belt hook” (P.1-
20).)
. If the rear seat is equipped with the
head restraints/headrests, slide the
front seat forward to make enough
room behind the seat so that the rear
seatback can be folded flat.
. Remove drink containers from the
rear cup holder.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WAB0126X
To fold down the seatback
. Pull up the lever
and fold the seat-
back flat.
WAB0132X
. Pull the lever (if so equipped)
located on the side of the luggage
area.
To return the seatback
To return the seatback to a seating
position, raise the seatback until it latches
in place.
When returning the seatback, make sure
that the seat belts are not interfering with
the seatback latch mechanism.
WARNING
. Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seats
when they are in the fold-down
position. In a collision, people
riding in these areas without
proper restraints are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts. Be sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and using a
seat belt properly.
. Do not allow more than one
person to use the same seat belt.
. Do not fold down the rear seats
when occupants are in the rear
seat area or any luggage is on the
rear seats.
— Make sure that the seat path
is clear before moving the
seat.
— Be careful not to allow hands
or feet to get caught or
pinched in the seat.
. Head restraints/headrests should
be adjusted properly as they may
provide significant protection
against injury in an accident. Al-
ways replace and adjust them
properly if they have been re-
moved for any reason.
. If the head restraints/headrests
are removed for any reason, they
should be securely stored to pre-
vent them from causing injury to
passengers or damage to the
vehicle in case of sudden braking
or an accident.
. When returning the seatbacks to
the upright position, be certain
they are completely secured in
the latched position. If they are
not completely secured, passen-
gers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
. Properly secure all cargo to help
prevent it from sliding or shifting.
Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo
could cause personal injury.
WARNING
. After adjustment, gently rock in
the seat to make sure it is se-
curely locked.
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle
when the seatback is reclined.
This can be dangerous. The
shoulder belt will not be against
your body. In an accident, you
could be thrown into it and re-
ceive neck or other serious inju-
ries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious
internal injuries.
. For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
well back and upright in the seat
with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly. (See
“Precautions on seat belt usage”
(P.1-14).)
JVR0327X
Rear seats
ARMREST
Pull the armrest down as shown.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
Head restraint/headrest supplement
the other vehicle safety systems.
They may provide additional protec-
tion against injury in certain rear end
collisions. Adjustable head re-
straints/headrests must be adjusted
properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the head restraint/head-
rest stalks or remove the head re-
straint/headrest. Do not use the seat
if the head restraint/headrest has
been removed. If the head restraint/
headrest was removed, reinstall and
properly adjust the head restraint/
headrest before an occupant uses
the seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions can reduce the
effectiveness of the head restraint/
headrest. This may increase the risk
of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion.
JVR0530X
The illustration shows the seating posi-
tions equipped with head restraint/head-
rest.
Indicates the seating position is
equipped with a head restraint.
Indicates the seating position is
equipped with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or head-
rest.
. Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be inte-
grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
. Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk
to lock them in a desired adjustment
position.
. The non-adjustable head restraints/
headrests have a single locking notch
to secure them to the seat frame.
. Proper Adjustment:
— For the adjustable type, align the
head restraint/headrest so the
center of your ear is approximately
level with the center of the head
restraint/headrest.
— If your ear position is still higher
than the recommended alignment,
place the head restraint/headrest
at the highest position.
. If the head restraint/headrest has
been removed, ensure that it is re-
installed and locked in place before
riding in that designated seating posi-
tion.
HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
SSS0992
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
JVR0203X
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RE-
STRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
SSS1037
REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove
the head restraint/headrest.
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest
properly in a secure place so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occu-
pant uses the seating position.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS1038
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest
stalks with the holes in the seat. Make
sure that the head restraint/headrest
is facing the correct direction. The
stalk with the adjustment notch
must be installed in the hole with the
lock knob
.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/
headrest before an occupant uses
the seating position.
SSS0997
ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the
center is level with the center of your ears.
If your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest posi-
tion.
JVR0259X
For non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
SSS0993
Raise
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull
it up.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
SSS0994
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob
and push the head restraint/headrest
down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted, and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on
the floor, your chances of being injured or
killed in an accident and/or the severity of
injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN
strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you
drive, even if your seating position in-
cludes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian pro-
vinces or territories specify that seat
belts be worn at all times when a
vehicle is being driven.
SSS0136
SSS0134
SEAT BELTS
SSS0016
SSS0014
WARNING
. Every person who drives or rides
in this vehicle should use a seat
belt at all times. Children should
be properly restrained in the rear
seat and, if appropriate, in a child
restraint.
. The seat belt should be properly
adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to
do so may reduce the effective-
ness of the entire restraint sys-
tem and increase the chance or
severity of injury in an accident.
Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn prop-
erly.
. Always route the shoulder belt
over your shoulder and across
your chest. Never put the belt
behind your back, under your
arm or across your neck. The belt
should be away from your face
and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
. Position the lap belt as low and
snug as possible AROUND THE
HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt
worn too high could increase the
risk of internal injuries in an
accident.
. Be sure the seat belt tongue is
securely fastened to the proper
buckle.
. Do not wear the seat belt inside
out or twisted. Doing so may
reduce its effectiveness.
. Do not allow more than one
person to use the same seat belt.
. Never carry more people in the
vehicle than there are seat belts.
. If the seat belt warning light
glows continuously while the
ignition is turned ON with all
doors closed and all seat belts
fastened, it may indicate a mal-
function in the system. Have the
system checked. It is recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
. No changes should be made to
the seat belt system. For exam-
ple, do not modify the seat belt,
add material, or install devices
that may change the seat belt
routing or tension. Doing so may
affect the operation of the seat
belt system. Modifying or tam-
pering with the seat belt system
may result in serious personal
injury.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
. Once a seat belt pretensioner has
activated, it cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with
the retractor. It is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
. All seat belt assemblies, including
retractors and attaching hard-
ware, should be inspected after
any collision. It is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service. NISSAN recommends that
all seat belt assemblies in use
during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor
and the belts show no damage
and continue to operate properly.
Seat belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be
inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is
noted.
. All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected
after any collision. Always follow
the restraint manufacturer’s in-
spection instructions and repla-
cement recommendations. The
child restraints should be re-
placed if they are damaged.
JVR0575X
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND
CHIME
The driver and front passenger seats are
equipped with an enhanced seat belt
reminder function. If your vehicle is
equipped with an enhanced seat belt
reminder function, a visual and audible
alert will operate if a driver or front
passenger seat belt is unbuckled at
speeds of approximately 10 MPH (15
km/h) or more under the following con-
ditions:
. If the driver seat belt is not fastened.
. The front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened and the seat is occupied by a
passenger for 7 seconds after the
ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
. The front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened and objects or external force
on the passenger seat change the
seat belt reminder classification to
“occupied”.
The seat belt warning light will flash
under the conditions shown above until
the necessary seat belt is securely fas-
tened.
A warning chime will sound for approxi-
mately 95 seconds or until one of the
following conditions is met:
. The unbuckled front passenger’s seat
belt is securely fastened.
. The seat belt reminder function in the
front passenger seat no longer de-
tects that the front passenger seat is
occupied.
. The ignition switch is turned off.
The below situations could result in the
seat belt warning light being illuminated
and the chime sounding, even with no
occupant present in the passenger seat:
. Heavy objects placed on the seat.
. Someone pushing or pulling on the
front passenger seat.
. An object placed under the front
passenger seat.
. An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or be-
tween the seat cushion and the door.
. An object hanging on the seat or
placed in the seatback pocket.
. A child restraint or other object press-
ing against the rear of the seatback.
The rear seats may be equipped with a
seat belt warning in the vehicle informa-
tion display. (See “11. Rear seat belt warn-
ing” (P.2-35).)
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant wo-
men use seat belts. The seat belt should
be worn snug, and always position the lap
belt as low as possible around the hips,
not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the lap/shoulder belt over your
abdominal area. Contact your doctor for
specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons
use seat belts, depending on the injury.
Check with your doctor for specific re-
commendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
. Every person who drives or rides
in this vehicle should use a seat
belt at all times. Children should
be in the rear seats and in an
appropriate restraint.
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle
when the seatback is reclined.
This can be dangerous. The
shoulder belt will not be against
your body. In an accident, you
could be thrown into it and re-
ceive neck or other serious inju-
ries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious
internal injuries.
. For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
well back and upright in the seat
with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.
. Do not allow children to play with
the seat belts. Most seating posi-
tions are equipped with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode seat belts. If the seat belt
becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode
activated, the child can be ser-
iously injured or killed if the seat
belt retracts and becomes tight.
This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt
to release the child. If the seat
belt can not be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the
child by cutting the seat belt with
a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” (P.1-3).)
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
JVR0572X
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the
retractor and insert the tongue into
the buckle
until you hear and feel
the latch engage.
.
The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on im-
pact. A slow pulling motion per-
mits the belt to move and allows
you some freedom of movement
in the seat.
.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.
JVR0573X
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips
as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
the retractor to take up extra slack
.
Be sure the shoulder belt is routed
over your shoulder and across your
chest.
The three-point seat belts in the front
passenger seat and the rear seating
positions have two modes of operation:
. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
mode allows the seat belt to extend and
retract to allow the driver and passengers
some freedom of movement in the seat.
The ELR locks the seat belt when the
vehicle slows down rapidly or during
certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode) locks the
seat belt for child restraint installation.
When ALR mode is activated the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat
belt tongue is detached from the buckle
and fully retracted. The seat belt returns
to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully
retracts. For additional information, see
“Child restraints” (P.1-24).
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During nor-
mal seat belt use by an occupant, the
ALR mode should not be activated. If it
is activated, it may cause uncomforta-
ble seat belt tension. It can also change
the operation of the front passenger air
bag.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be
certain that seatbacks are comple-
tely secured in the latched position.
If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an
accident or sudden stop.
JVR0574X
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, push the
button on the buckle
. The seat belt
automatically retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock
seat belt movement by two separate
methods:
. When the belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor.
. When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:
. Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-
ward quickly. The retractor should
lock and restrict further belt move-
ment.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service, or to learn more about
seat belt operation.
SSS0351A
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(for front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
(See “Precautions on seat belt usage” (P.1-
14).)
To adjust, pull the adjustment button
,
and then move the shoulder belt anchor
to the desired position
, so that the belt
passes over the center of the shoulder.
The belt should be away from your face
and neck, but not falling off of your
shoulder. Release the adjustment button
to lock the shoulder belt anchor into
position.
The range of height adjustment of the
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
shoulder belt may vary depending on the
model.
WARNING
. After adjustment, release the ad-
justment button and try to move
the shoulder belt anchor up and
down to make sure it is securely
fixed in position.
. The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the posi-
tion best for you. Failure to do so
may reduce the effectiveness of
the entire restraint system and
increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.
WAB0084X
Seat belt hook
When the seat belt is not in use and when
folding down the rear seats, hook the rear
outer seat belts on the seat belt hooks.
WARNING
Before folding up the rear seats,
ensure the seat belts are not ob-
structing the rear seatback latches
to avoid damage to the seat belt
webbing.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fit the lap/
shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
that is compatible with the installed seat
belts is available that can be purchased.
The extender adds approximately 8 in
(200 mm) of length and may be used for
either the driver or front passenger seat-
ing position. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-
chasing an extender if an extender is
required.
WARNING
. It is recommended that only
NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, be used with NISSAN seat
belts.
. Adults and children who can use
the standard seat belt should not
use an extender. Such unneces-
sary use could result in serious
personal injury in the event of an
accident.
. Never use seat belt extenders to
install child restraints. If the child
restraint is not secured properly,
the child could be seriously in-
jured or killed in a collision or a
sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
. To clean the seat belt webbing, apply
a mild soap solution or any solution
recommended for cleaning upholstery
or carpets. Then wipe with a cloth and
allow the seat belts to dry in the
shade. Do not allow the seat belts to
retract until they are completely dry.
. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the
seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry
cloth.
. Periodically check to see that the
seat belt and the metal components,
such as buckles, tongues, retractors,
flexible wires and anchors, work prop-
erly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts
or other damage on the webbing is
found, the entire seat belt assembly
should be replaced.
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If
the seat belt becomes wrapped
around a child’s neck with the ALR
mode activated, the child can be
seriously injured or killed if the seat
belt retracts and becomes tight. This
can occur even if the vehicle is
parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to
release the child. If the seat belt can
not be unbuckled or is already un-
buckled, release the child by cutting
the seat belt with a suitable tool
(such as a knife or scissors) to
release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect
them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, in-
cluding doctors, teachers, government
traffic safety offices, and community or-
ganizations. Every child is different, so be
sure to learn the best way to transport
your child.
There are three basic types of child
restraint systems:
. Rear-facing child restraint
. Forward-facing child restraint
. Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the
child’s size. Generally, infants up to about
1 year and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should
be placed in rear-facing child restraints.
Forward-facing child restraints are avail-
able for children who outgrow rear-facing
child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a
vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who
can no longer use a forward-facing child
restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special
protection. The vehicle’s seat belts
may not fit them properly. The
shoulder belt may come too close
to the face or neck. The lap belt may
not fit over their small hip bones. In
an accident, an improperly fitting
seat belt could cause serious or fatal
injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
CHILD SAFETY
1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
territories require the use of approved
child restraints for infants and small
children. See “Child restraints” (P.1-24).
A child restraint may be secured in the
vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system
or with the vehicle seat belt. See “Child
restraints” (P.1-24) for more information.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because
your vehicle has a supplemental re-
straint system (Air bag system) for the
front passenger. See “Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)” (P.1-47).
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
placed in a rear-facing child restraint.
NISSAN recommends that infants be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-
lation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and
weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain
in a rear-facing child restraint as long as
possible up to the height or weight limit
of the child restraint. Children who out-
grow the height or weight limit of the
rear-facing child restraint and are at least
1 year old should be secured in a forward-
facing child restraint with a harness. Refer
to the manufacturer’s instructions for
minimum and maximum weight and
height recommendations. NISSAN recom-
mends that small children be placed in
child restraints that comply with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Cana-
dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You
should choose a child restraint that fits
your vehicle and always follow the man-
ufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-
facing child restraint with a harness until
they reach the maximum height or
weight limit allowed by the child restraint
manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or
weight limit of the harness-equipped
forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN
recommends that the child be placed in
a commercially available booster seat to
obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt
to fit properly, the booster seat should
raise the child so that the shoulder belt is
properly positioned across the chest and
the top, middle portion of the shoulder.
The shoulder belt should not cross the
neck or face and should not fall off the
shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly
across the lower hips or upper thighs, not
the abdomen.
A booster seat can only be used in
seating positions that have a three-point
type seat belt. The booster seat should fit
the vehicle seat and have a label certify-
ing that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
A booster seat should be used until the
child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
. Are the child’s back and hips against
the vehicle seatback?
. Is the child able to sit without slouch-
ing?
. Do the child’s knees bend easily over
the front edge of the seat with feet flat
on the floor?
. Can the child safely wear the seat belt
(lap belt low and snug across the hips
and shoulder belt across mid-chest
and shoulder)?
. Is the child able to use the properly
adjusted head restraint/headrest?
. Will the child be able to stay in position
for the entire ride?
JVR0473X
If you answered no to any of these
questions, the child should remain in a
booster seat using a three-point type
seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow
different guidelines. Check local and
state regulations to confirm your child
is using the correct restraint system
before traveling.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on
any seat and do not allow a child in
the cargo area. The child could be
seriously injured or killed in a sudden
stop or collision.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0099
SSS0100
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE-
STRAINTS
WARNING
. Failure to follow the warnings
and instructions for proper use
and installation of child restraints
could result in serious injury or
death of a child or other passen-
gers in a sudden stop or collision:
— The child restraint must be
used and installed properly.
Always follow all of the child
restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for installation and
use.
— Infants and children should
never be held on anyone’s
lap. Even the strongest adult
cannot resist the forces of a
collision.
— Do not put a seat belt around
both a child and another pas-
senger.
— NISSAN recommends that all
child restraints be installed in
the rear seat. Studies show
that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seat than in the front seat. If
you must install a forward-
facing child restraint in the
front seat, see “Forward-fa-
cing child restraint installation
using the seat belts” (P.1-39).
— Even with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System, never
install a rear-facing child re-
straint in the front seat. An
inflating air bag could ser-
iously injure or kill a child. A
rear-facing child restraint
must only be used in the rear
seat.
— Be sure to purchase a child
restraint that will fit the child
and vehicle. Some child re-
straints may not fit properly
in your vehicle.
— Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only
those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach
adult seat belts, or other
items or equipment to the
vehicle. Doing so could da-
mage the child restraint an-
chorages. The child restraint
CHILD RESTRAINTS
will not be properly installed
using the damaged ancho-
rage, and a child could be
seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
— Never use the anchor points
for adult seat belts or har-
nesses.
— A child restraint with a top
tether strap should not be
used in the front passenger
seat.
— Keep seatbacks as upright as
possible after fitting the child
restraint.
— Infants and children should
always be placed in an appro-
priate child restraint while in
the vehicle.
. When the child restraint is not in
use, keep it secured with the
LATCH system or a seat belt. In a
sudden stop or collision, loose
objects can injure occupants or
damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle
can become very hot. Check the
seating surface and buckles before
placing a child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal
child restraint anchor system, referred to
as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child
restraints include rigid or webbing-
mounted attachments that can be con-
nected to these anchors.
For details, see “Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) system”
(P.1-26).
If you do not have a LATCH compatible
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can
be used.
Several manufacturers offer child re-
straints for infants and small children of
various sizes. When selecting any child
restraint, keep the following points in
mind:
. Choose only a restraint with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard 213.
. Check the child restraint in your
vehicle to be sure it is compatible with
the vehicle’s seat and seat belt sys-
tem.
. If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the
child restraint and check the various
adjustments to be sure the child
restraint is compatible with your child.
Choose a child restraint that is de-
signed for your child’s height and
weight. Always follow all recom-
mended procedures.
. If the combined weight of the child
and child restraint is less than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg), you may use either the
LATCH anchors or the seat belt to
install the child restraint (not both at
the same time).
. If the combined weight of the child
and child restraint is greater than 65
lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt
(not the lower anchors) to install the
child restraint.
. Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for instal-
lation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories require that infants and
small children be restrained in an ap-
proved child restraint at all times while
the vehicle is being operated. Canadian
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
law requires the top tether strap on
forward-facing child restraints be se-
cured to the designated anchor point
on the vehicle.
WAB0108X
LATCH system anchor location
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special
anchor points that are used with LATCH
system compatible child restraints. This
system may also be referred to as the
ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With
this system, you do not have to use a
vehicle seat belt to secure the child
restraint unless the combined weight of
the child and child restraint exceeds 65
lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
child and child restraint is greater than 65
lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt
(not the lower anchors) to install the child
restraint. Be sure to follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.
The LATCH anchor points can be used to
install child restraints in either of the rear
outboard seating positions or in the
center rear seating position. Please refer
to the following section of this Owner’s
Manual for specific information about
installing a child restraint in the center
rear seating position using the LATCH
anchors.
CAUTION
Store the loose LATCH covers (for
example, in the console box) where
they will not get damaged to avoid
losing them. (See “Console box” (P.2-
78).)
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use and in-
stallation of child restraints could
result in serious injury or death of a
child or other passengers in a sud-
den stop or collision:
. Only attach LATCH system com-
patible child restraints to the
Lower Anchors shown in the illus-
tration. For additional informa-
tion, refer to the following
sections of this Owner’s Manual
for installation guidance.
. Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the loca-
tions shown in the illustration.
. Inspect the lower anchors by in-
serting your fingers into the low-
er anchor area. Feel to make sure
there are no obstructions over
the anchors such as seat belt
webbing or seat cushion material.
The child restraint will not be
secured properly if the lower
anchors are obstructed.
. Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used to
attach adult seat belts, or other
items or equipment to the vehi-
cle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged an-
chorage, and a child could be
seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchor points are
provided to install child restraints in the
rear seats. Do not attempt to install child
restraints in the center and left out-
board seating positions simultaneously
using the LATCH lower anchors.
WAB0109X
LATCH lower anchor cover removal
The LATCH lower anchor points are
located under covers labelled ISOFIX at
the bottom of the rear seat cushions. To
access a LATCH lower anchor point, insert
your finger into the cover and pull the
cover off.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
CAUTION
Store the loose LATCH covers (for
example, in the console box) where
they will not get damaged to avoid
losing them. (See “Console box” (P.2-
78).)
WAB0117X
LATCH in the center rear seating
position
A 5th LATCH anchor can be found be-
tween the outboard LATCH anchor pairs.
It is specifically designed to be used
together with the inboard LATCH anchor
on the driver’s side, in order to install a
CRS in the rear center seating position.
These anchors utilize standard LATCH
anchor spacing,
of 11.02 in (280mm).
WARNING
Never attach two CRS attachments
to the same LATCH anchor. This may
overload the anchor in a collision,
which could increase the risk of the
occupant’s serious injury or death.
When installing the CRS in the center
rear seating position with the in-
board LATCH anchors, be careful to
ensure any occupant or CRS in the
outboard seating positions is prop-
erly restrained using the vehicle seat
belt and there is no interference with
the center CRS installation. If the
outboard occupants cannot be prop-
erly restrained, consider using the
vehicle seat belt to restrain the CRS
in the center seating position, or
moving the CRS to another position
instead.
When installing a CRS in the center
seating position, use the seat back
recline feature to align the left and
right sides of the seat back, creating
one evenly reclined surface. Never
install a CRS in the center seating
position when one part of the seat
back is further reclined than the
other. This may create an unstable
surface on which to install the CRS.
Failure to evenly recline the seat
backs before CRS installation could
increase the risk of the occupant’s
serious injury or death. Remember to
re-check that the CRS is properly
installed any time the seats are
reclined or adjusted.
WAB0118X
OK
WAB0119X
NG (the seatback recline is not aligned)
SSS0643
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH
lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include
two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-
ments that can be connected to two
anchors located at certain seating posi-
tions in your vehicle. With this system, you
do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your
child restraint for a label stating that it is
compatible with LATCH. This information
may also be in the instructions provided
by the child restraint manufacturer.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0644
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint.
Top tether anchor
WARNING
Properly secure cargo and do not
allow it to contact the top tether
strap when it is attached to the top
tether anchor. Cargo that is not
properly secured or cargo that con-
tacts the top tether strap may da-
mage the top tether strap during a
collision. If the cargo cover (if so
equipped) contacts the top tether
strap when it is attached to the top
tether anchor, remove the cargo
cover from the vehicle. If the cargo
cover is not removed, it may damage
the top tether strap during a colli-
sion. Your child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision if the
child restraint top tether strap is
damaged.
WAB0110X
Top tether anchor point locations
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances
are they to be used to attach adult
seat belts, or other items or equip-
ment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint an-
chorages. The child restraint will not
be properly installed using the da-
maged anchorage, and a child could
be seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
Anchor points are located on the back
side of the seatbacks.
If a child restraint has a top tether strap, it
must be used when installing with the
LATCH lower anchor attachments or seat
belts as instructed by the child restraint
manufacturer.
If you have any questions when instal-
ling a top tether strap child restraint on
the rear seat, it is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all
Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the
combined weight of the child and the
child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5
kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child re-
straint. Be sure to follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint man-
ufacturer’s instructions.
SSS0648
Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the LATCH lower an-
chors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to
the lower anchors.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0649
Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2
SSS0639
Rear-facing — step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of
the child restraint with your hand to
compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the
webbing of the anchor attachments.
SSS0650
Rear-facing — step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push
it from side to side while holding the
child restraint near the LATCH attach-
ment path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),
from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attach-
ment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the
LATCH attachment as necessary, or
put the restraint in another seat and
test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint or try installing
by using the vehicle seat belt (if
applicable). Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must
be used when installing a child re-
straint. Failure to use the ALR mode
will result in the child restraint not
being properly secured. The restraint
could tip over or be loose and cause
injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision.
For additional information, refer to all
Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the
combined weight of the child and the
child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5
kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child re-
straint. Be sure to follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts
in the rear seats:
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0100
Rear-facing — step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat. Position the child restraint
on the seat. Always follow the re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions.
SSS0654
Rear-facing — step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through
the child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the
latch engage. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for belt routing.
SSS0655
Rear-facing — step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat
belt retractor is in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child
restraint mode). It reverts to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
mode when the seat belt is fully
retracted.
SSS0656
Rear-facing — step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up
on the shoulder belt to remove any
slack in the belt.
SSS0657
Rear-facing — step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rear-
ward firmly in the center of the child
restraint to compress the vehicle seat
cushion and seatback while pulling up
on the seat belt.
SSS0658
Rear-facing — step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push
it from side to side while holding the
child restraint near the seat belt path.
The child restraint should not move
more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to
side. Try to tug it forward and check to
see if the belt holds the restraint in
place. If the restraint is not secure,
tighten the seat belt as necessary, or
put the restraint in another seat and
test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure that the child
restraint is properly secured prior to
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
each use. If the seat belt is not locked,
repeat steps 1 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and
the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-
STRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
For additional information, refer to all
Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the
combined weight of the child and the
child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5
kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child re-
straint. Be sure to follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.
Follow these steps to install a forward-
facing child restraint using the LATCH
system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint man-
ufacturer’s instructions.
SSS0645
Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the LATCH lower an-
chors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to
the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. See “Installing
top tether strap” (P.1-38). Do not install
child restraints that require the use of
a top tether strap in seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.
SSS0646
Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 2
3. The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seat-
back.
If necessary, adjust or remove the
head restraint/headrest to obtain the
correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. See
“Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-10) for
head restraint/headrest adjustment
information.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
SSS0647
Forward-facing — step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of
the child restraint with your knee to
compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the
webbing of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to
remove any slack.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0638
Forward-facing — step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push
it from side to side while holding the
child restraint near the LATCH attach-
ment path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),
from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attach-
ment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the
LATCH attachment as necessary, or
put the restraint in another seat and
test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 6.
WAB0110X
Installing top tether strap
WARNING
. Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used to
attach adult seat belts, or other
items or equipment to the vehi-
cle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged an-
chorage, and a child could be
seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
. Do not hook the top tether strap
on the seatback carpet. Be sure to
use the tether anchor point to
secure the top tether strap.
The child restraint top tether strap must
be used when installing forward-facing
child restraint with the LATCH lower
anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors.
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint/head-
rest when the child restraint is re-
moved.
See “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-
10) for head restraint/headrest adjust-
ment, removal and installation infor-
mation.
2. Position the top tether strap as
shown.
3. Secure the top tether strap to the
tether anchor point as shown.
4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint
installation procedure steps in this
section before tightening the tether
strap.
If you have any questions when instal-
ling a top tether strap, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-
STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE
SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must
be used when installing a child re-
straint. Failure to use the ALR mode
will result in the child restraint not
being properly secured. The restraint
could tip over or be loose and cause
injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the
operation of the front passenger air
bag. See “Front passenger air bag
and status light” (P.1-55).
For additional information, refer to all
Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the
combined weight of the child and the
child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5
kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child re-
straint. Be sure to follow the child re-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
straint manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.
Follow these steps to install a forward-
facing child restraint using the vehicle
seat belt in the rear seats or in the front
passenger seat:
SSS0640
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in
a forward-facing direction only.
Move the seat to the rearmost posi-
tion. Child restraints for infants must
be used in the rear-facing direction
and, therefore, must not be used in
the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint man-
ufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seat-
back.
If necessary, adjust or remove the
head restraint/headrest to obtain the
correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. See
“Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-10) for
head restraint/headrest adjustment,
removal and installation information.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
SSS0360B
Forward-facing — step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through
the child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the
latch engage. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point (rear seat
installation only). See “Installing top
tether strap” (P.1-43). Do not install
child restraints that require the use of
a top tether strap in seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.
SSS0651
Forward-facing — step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat
belt retractor is in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child
restraint mode). It reverts to Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
SSS0652
Forward-facing — step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up
on the shoulder belt to remove any
slack in the belt.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0653
Forward-facing — step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rear-
ward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to
remove any slack.
SSS0641
Forward-facing — step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push
it from side to side while holding the
child restraint near the seat belt path.
The child restraint should not move
more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to
side. Try to tug it forward and check to
see if the belt holds the restraint in
place. If the restraint is not secure,
tighten the seat belt as necessary, or
put the restraint in another seat and
test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 2 through 8.
JVR0192X
Forward-facing — step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the igni-
tion switch in the ON position. The
front passenger air bag status light
should illuminate. If this light is not
illuminated, see “Front passenger air
bag and status light” (P.1-55). Move
the child restraint to another seating
position. Have the system checked. It
is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and
the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR
mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
WAB0110X
Installing top tether strap
WARNING
. Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used to
attach adult seat belts, or other
items or equipment to the vehi-
cle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged an-
chorage, and a child could be
seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
. Do not hook the top tether strap
on the seatback carpet. Be sure to
use the tether anchor point to
secure the top tether strap.
The child restraint top tether strap must
be used when installing forward-facing
child restraint with the seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the
seat belt.
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint/head-
rest when the child restraint is re-
moved.
See “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-
10) for head restraint/headrest adjust-
ment, removal and installation infor-
mation.
2. Position the top tether strap as
shown.
3. Secure the top tether strap to the
tether anchor point as shown.
4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint
installation procedure steps in this
section before tightening the tether
strap.
If you have any questions when instal-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ling a top tether strap, it is recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the
instructions outlined in this section.
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child
being injured or killed in a sudden
stop or collision greatly increases:
. Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s
face and neck and the lap portion
of the belt does not cross the
stomach.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the
child’s arm.
. A booster seat must only be
installed in a seating position that
has a lap/shoulder belt.
Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following
points in mind:
. Choose only a booster seat with a
label certifying that it complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
. Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the
vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
LRS0453
LRS0455
. Make sure the child’s head will be
properly supported by the booster
seat or vehicle seat. The seatback
must be at or above the center of
the child’s ears. For example, if a low
back booster seat
is chosen, the
vehicle seatback must be at or above
the center of the child’s ears. If the
seatback is lower than the center of
the child’s ears, a high back booster
seat
should be used.
. If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the
booster seat and check the various
adjustments to be sure the booster
seat is compatible with your child.
Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures.
LRS0464
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories require that infants and
small children be restrained in an ap-
proved child restraint at all times while
the vehicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats
or the front passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use
the lap/shoulder belt Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when
using a booster seat with the seat
belts.
For additional information, refer to all
Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster
seats” sections earlier in this section
before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster
seat in the rear seat or in the front
passenger seat:
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0640
1. If you must install a booster seat in
the front seat, move the seat to the
rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a forward-facing
direction. Always follow the booster
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
LRS0454
Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the
head restraint/headrest to obtain the
correct booster seat fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the booster seat is removed. See
“Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-10)
for head restraint/headrest adjust-
ment, removal and installation infor-
mation.
If the head restraint/headrest of the
seating position is interfering with the
proper booster seat fit, try another
seating position or a different booster
seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat
belt low and snug on the child’s hips.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for ad-
justing the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for ad-
justing the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and
instructions for properly fastening a
seat belt shown in “Seat belts” (P.1-14).
JVR0192X
7. If the booster seat is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the igni-
tion switch in the ON position. The
front passenger air bag status light
may or may not illuminate de-
pending on the size of the child and
the type of booster seat used. See
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” (P.1-55).
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important in-
formation concerning the following sys-
tems:
. Driver and front passenger supple-
mental front-impact air bag (NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System)
. Driver and front passenger supple-
mental knee air bag
. Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-
plemental air bag
. Rear outboard seat-mounted side-
impact supplemental air bag
. Front central seat-mounted side-im-
pact supplemental air bag (if so
equipped)
. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
. Seat belt with pretensioner (front and
rear outboard seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-
tem: The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem can help cushion the impact force to
the head and chest of the driver and front
passenger in certain frontal collisions.
Driver and front passenger supplemen-
tal knee air bag system: This system can
help cushion the impact force to the
driver’s and front passenger’s knees in
certain collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-
plemental air bag system:This system
can help cushion the impact force to the
chest and pelvic area of the driver and
front passenger in certain side impact
collisions. The side air bag is designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted.
Rear outboard seat-mounted side-im-
pact supplemental air bag system: This
system can help cushion the impact force
to the chest and pelvic area of the rear
outboard seat passengers in certain side-
impact collisions. The side air bags are
designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted.
Front central seat-mounted side-im-
pact supplemental air bag (if so
equipped): This system can help cushion
the impact force to the head area of the
driver and front passenger in certain side-
impact collisions. The front central side-
impact air bag is designed to inflate in the
front central area where the vehicle is
impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system:
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the heads of occupants in front
and rear outboard seating positions in
certain side impact or rollover collisions.
In a side-impact, the curtain air bags are
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the
curtain air bags on both sides are de-
signed to inflate. Under both side-impact
and rollover situations, the curtain air
bags will remain inflated for a short
period of time.
These supplemental restraint systems are
designed to supplement the crash pro-
tection provided by the driver, passenger
and rear outboard seat belts and are not
a substitute for them. Seat belts should
always be correctly worn and the occu-
pant seated a suitable distance away
from the steering wheel, instrument pa-
nel and door finishers. (See “Seat belts”
(P.1-14) for instructions and precautions
on seat belt usage.)
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
After the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn
off after about 7 seconds if the systems
are operational.
SSS0131
SSS0132
WARNING
. The front air bags ordinarily will
not inflate in the event of a side
impact, rear impact, rollover, or
lower severity frontal collision.
Always wear your seat belts to
help reduce the risk or severity of
injury in various kinds of acci-
dents.
. The front passenger air bag and
passenger knee air bag will not
inflate if the front passenger air
bag status light is lit. See “Front
passenger air bag and status
light” (P.1-55).
. The seat belts and the front air
bags are most effective when you
are sitting well back and upright
in the seat with both feet on the
floor. The front air bags inflate
with great force. Even with the
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,
if you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out
of position in any way, you are at
greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive ser-
ious or fatal injuries from the
front air bag if you are up against
it when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far-
away as practical from the steer-
ing wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat
belts.
. The driver and front passenger
seat belt buckles are equipped
with sensors that detect if the
seat belts are fastened. The Ad-
vanced Air Bag System monitors
the severity of a collision and seat
belt usage then inflates the air
bags as needed. Failure to prop-
erly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.
. The front passenger seat is
equipped with occupant classifi-
cation sensors (weight sensors)
that turn the front passenger air
bag and front passenger knee air
bag OFF under some conditions.
These sensors are only used in
this seat. Failure to be properly
seated and wearing the seat belt
can increase the risk or severity
of injury in an accident. See
“Front passenger air bag and
status light” (P.1-55).
. Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them in-
side the steering wheel rim could
increase the risk that they are
injured if the front air bag in-
flates.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0007
SSS0006
SSS0008
SSS0009
SSS0099
SSS0100
WARNING
. Never let children ride unrest-
rained or extend their hands or
face out of the window. Do not
attempt to hold them in your lap
or arms. Some examples of dan-
gerous riding positions are
shown in the illustrations.
. Children may be severely injured
or killed when the front air bags,
side air bags or curtain air bags
inflate if they are not properly
restrained. Pre-teens and chil-
dren should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if
possible.
. Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, never install a
rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat. An inflating front air
bag could seriously injure or kill
your child. See “Child restraints”
(P.1-24) for details.
SSS0059A
Do not lean against doors or windows.
SSS0188A
SSS0140
SSS0162
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0159
WARNING
Front, front central and rear out-
board seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags:
. The side air bags ordinarily will
not inflate in the event of a
frontal impact, rear impact, roll-
over or lower severity side colli-
sion. Always wear your seat belts
to help reduce the risk or severity
of injury in various kinds of acci-
dents.
. The curtain air bags ordinarily will
not inflate in the event of a front
impact, rear impact, or lower
severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help
reduce the risk or severity of
injury in various kinds of acci-
dents.
. The seat belts, the side air bags
and curtain air bags are most
effective when you are sitting
well back and upright in the seat.
The side air bags and curtain air
bags inflate with great force. Do
not allow anyone to place their
hand, leg or face near the side air
bags on the side of the seatback
of the front and rear seat or near
the side roof rails. Do not allow
anyone sitting in the front seats
or rear outboard seats to extend
their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some ex-
amples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the previous
illustrations.
. When sitting in the rear seat, do
not hold onto the seatback of the
front seat. If the side air bags
inflate, you may be seriously in-
jured. Be especially careful with
children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some exam-
ples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the
illustrations.
. Do not use seat covers on the
front and rear seatbacks. They
may interfere with side air bag
inflation.
WAB0079X
1. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-
ules (NISSAN Advanced Air Bags)
2. Occupant classification system control
unit
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
4. Occupant classification sensors (weight
sensors)
5. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag modules
6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag inflators
7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag modules
8. Crash zone sensor
9. Driver and front passenger supplemental
knee air bags
10. Front door pressure sensors (driver’s side
shown; front passenger side similar)
11. Lap outer pretensioners (front seats)
12. Seat belt with pretensioners (front seats)
13. Front central seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (if so equipped)
14. Satellite sensors (driver’s side shown;
front passenger side similar)
15. Rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
16. Seat belt with pretensioners (rear out-
board seats)
NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS-
TEM (front seats)
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the
passenger’s Advanced Air Bag sys-
tem, please observe the following
items.
. Do not allow a passenger in the
rear seat to push or pull on the
seatback pocket.
. Do not place heavy loads heavier
than 9.1 lbs (4 kg) on the seat-
back, head restraint or in the
seatback pocket.
. Make sure nothing is pressing
against the rear of the seatback,
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
such as a child restraint installed
in the rear seat or an object
stored on the floor.
. Make sure that there is no object
placed under the front passenger
seat.
. Make sure that there is no object
placed between the seat cushion
and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.
. Be sure that the front passenger
seat does not contact the rear
seat, instrument panel, etc., or the
head restraint does not contact
the roof.
. Do not position the front passen-
ger seat so it contacts the rear
seat. If the front seat does con-
tact the rear seat, the air bag
system may determine a sensor
malfunction has occurred and the
front passenger air bag status
light may illuminate and the sup-
plemental air bag warning light
may flash.
. If a forward facing child restraint
is installed in the front passenger
seat, do not position the front
passenger seat so the child re-
straint contacts the instrument
panel. If the child restraint does
contact the instrument panel, the
system may determine the seat is
occupied and the passenger air
bag and front passenger knee air
bag may deploy in a collision.
Also the front passenger air bag
status light may not illuminate.
See “Child restraints” (P.1-24) for
information about installing and
using child restraints.
. Confirm the operating condition
with the front passenger air bag
status light.
. If you notice that the front pas-
senger air bag status light is not
operating as described in this
section, it is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer to check the
passenger seat Advanced Air Bag
System.
. Until you have confirmed with
your dealer that your passenger
seat Advanced Air Bag is working
properly, position the occupants
in the rear seating positions.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver
and front passenger seats. This system is
designed to meet certification require-
ments under U.S. regulations. It is also
permitted in Canada. All of the informa-
tion, cautions and warnings in this
manual apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air
bag is located in the center of the
steering wheel. The passenger supple-
mental front-impact air bag is mounted in
the instrument panel above the glove
box. The front air bags are designed to
inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,
although they may inflate if the forces in
another type of collision are similar to
those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal
collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is
not always an indication of proper front
air bag operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has
dual stage air bag inflators. The system
monitors information from the Air bag
Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sen-
sors and the occupant classification sen-
sors (weight sensors). Inflator operation is
based on the severity of a collision and
seat belt usage for the driver. For the
front passenger, the occupant classifica-
tion sensors are also monitored. Based on
information from the sensors, only one
front air bag may inflate in a crash,
depending on the crash severity and
whether the front occupants are belted
or unbelted. Additionally, the front pas-
senger air bag and front passenger knee
air bag may be automatically turned OFF
under some conditions, depending on the
information provided by the occupant
classification sensors. If the front passen-
ger air bag and front passenger knee air
bag are OFF, the front passenger air bag
status light will be illuminated. (See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” (P.1-
55) for further details.) One front air bag
inflating does not indicate improper per-
formance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, it is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer to obtain information
about the system. If you are considering
modification of your vehicle due to a
disability, you may also contact NISSAN.
Contact information is contained in the
front of this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by release
of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and
does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken not to inhale it, as it may cause
irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should
get fresh air promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the head and chest of the front occu-
pants. They can help save lives and
reduce serious injuries. However, an in-
flating front air bag may cause facial
abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags,
other than the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s knee air bags, do not provide
restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as
far as practical away from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. The front air
bags inflate quickly in order to help
protect the front occupants. Because of
this, the force of the front air bag inflating
can increase the risk of injury if the
occupant is too close to, or is against,
the air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.
The front air bags operate only when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
After the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn
off after about 7 seconds if the system
is operational.
JVR0192X
Front passenger air bag status light
Front passenger air bag and status
light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag and
front passenger knee air bag are
designed to automatically turn OFF
under some conditions. Read this
section carefully to learn how it
operates. Proper use of the seat,
seat belt and child restraints is ne-
cessary for most effective protec-
tion. Failure to follow all
instructions in this manual concern-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
1-56 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ing the use of seats, seat belts and
child restraints can increase the risk
or severity of injury in an accident.
Status light:
The front passenger seat is equipped with
occupant classification sensors (weight
sensors) that turn the front passenger air
bag and front passenger knee air bag on
or off depending on the weight applied to
the front passenger seat. The status of
the front passenger air bag and front
passenger knee air bag (ON or OFF) is
indicated by the front passenger air bag
status light
which is located on the
map light. After the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, the front
passenger air bag status light illuminates
for about 7 seconds and then turns off or
remains illuminated depending on the
front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
CONDITION DESCRIPTION
PASSENGER AIR BAG
INDICATOR LIGHT (
)
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG AND
FRONT PASSENGER KNEE AIR BAG
STATUS
Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated)
INHIBITED
Nobody/Somebody
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or
Small Adult in front passenger seat
ON (illuminated)
INHIBITED
Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark)
ACTIVATED
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
1-58 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may
also cause the light to operate as de-
scribed above depending on their weight.
For additional information related to the
normal operation and troubleshooting of
this occupant classification sensor sys-
tem, please refer to “Normal operation”
(P.1-59) and “Troubleshooting” (P.1-60) in
this section.
Front passenger air bag:
The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF when the
vehicle is operated under some condi-
tions as described below as permitted by
U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air
bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The
driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
inflating air bag to certain front passen-
ger seat occupants, such as children, by
requiring the air bag to be automatically
turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to
meet the requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this
vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the
seat by weight. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the Advanced
Air Bag System is designed to turn the
passenger air bag OFF in accordance
with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the
regulations is on the seat, its weight and
the child’s weight can be detected and
cause the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants
who are properly seated and using the
seat belt as outlined in this manual
should not cause the passenger air bag
and front passenger knee air bag to be
automatically turned OFF. For small
adults it may be turned OFF, however, if
the occupant takes his/her weight off the
seat cushion (for example, by not sitting
upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat,
or by otherwise being out of position), this
could cause the sensors to turn the air
bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and
wearing the seat belt properly for the
most effective protection by the seat belt
and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-
propriate child restraints and booster
seats be properly installed in a rear seat.
If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensors are designed to
operate as described above to turn the
front passenger air bag and front pas-
senger knee air bag OFF for specified
child restraints as required by the regula-
tions. Failing to properly secure child
restraints and to use the Automatic Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint
mode) may allow the restraint to tip or
move in an accident or sudden stop. This
can also result in the passenger air bag
and front passenger knee air bag inflating
in a crash instead of being OFF. (See
“Child restraints” (P.1-24) for proper use
and installation.)
If the front passenger seat is not occu-
pied, the passenger air bag and front
passenger knee air bag are designed not
to inflate in a crash. However, heavy
objects placed on the seat could result
in air bag inflation, because of the object’s
weight detected by the occupant classi-
fication sensors. Other conditions could
also result in air bag inflation, such as if a
child is standing on the seat, or if two
children are on the seat, contrary to the
instructions in this manual. Always be
sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status
light, you can monitor when the front
passenger air bag and front passenger
knee air bag are automatically turned
OFF.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is
illuminated (indicating that the front pas-
senger air bag and front passenger knee
air bag are OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on
the seat properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the
front seat, the front passenger air bag
status light may or may not be illumi-
nated, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being used.
If the front passenger air bag status light
is not illuminated (indicating that the air
bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
that the child restraint or seat belt is not
being used properly. Make sure that the
child restraint is installed properly, the
seat belt is used properly and the occu-
pant is positioned properly. If the front
passenger air bag status light is not
illuminated, reposition the occupant or
child restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light
will not illuminate even though you be-
lieve that the child restraint, the seat belts
and the occupant are properly positioned,
it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN
dealer can check the system status by
using a special tool. However, until you
have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposi-
tion the occupant or child restraint in a
rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
and front passenger air bag status light
will take a few seconds to register a
change in the passenger seat status. This
is normal system operation and does not
indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front
passenger air bag system, the supple-
mental air bag warning light
, located
in the meters and gauges area, will
illuminated (blinking or steadily lit). Have
the system checked. It is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation:
In order for the occupant classification
sensor system to classify the front pas-
senger based on weight, please follow the
precautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions:
. Make sure that there are no objects
weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg) hanging on
the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
. Make sure that a child restraint or
other object is not pressing against
the rear of the seatback.
. Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the
front passenger seat.
. Make sure that the front passenger
seat or seatback is not forced back
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
. Make sure that there is no object
placed under the front passenger
seat.
. Make sure that the front passenger
seat head restraint does not contact
the roof when adjusting the front
passenger seat.
Steps:
1. Adjust the seat as outlined. (See
“Seats” (P.1-3).) Sit upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with your feet
comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on
your lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined. (See
“Seat belts” (P.1-14).) Front passenger
seat belt buckle status is monitored
by the occupant classification system,
and is used as an input to determine
occupancy status. So, it is highly
recommended that the front passen-
ger fasten their seat belt.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the
front passenger before the vehicle is
put into motion.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
1-60 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
5. Ensure proper classification by check-
ing the front passenger air bag status
light.
NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification
sensor system generally keeps the
classification locked during driving, so
it is important that you confirm that the
front passenger is properly classified
prior to driving. However, the occupant
classification sensor system may recal-
culate the weight of the occupant under
some conditions (both while driving and
when stopped), so the front passenger
seat occupant should continue to re-
main seated as outlined above.
Troubleshooting:
If you think the front passenger air bag
status light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying
the front passenger seat:
. Occupant is a small adult — the front
passenger air bag status light is func-
tioning as intended. The front passen-
ger air bag and front passenger knee
air bag are suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small
adult, then this may be due to the
following conditions that may be interfer-
ing with the weight sensors:
. Occupant is not sitting upright, lean-
ing against the seatback, and cen-
tered on the seat cushion with his/her
feet comfortably extended to the
floor.
. A child restraint or other object press-
ing against the rear of the seatback.
. A rear passenger pushing or pulling
on the back of the front passenger
seat.
. Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
. An object placed under the front
passenger seat.
. An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or be-
tween the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions.
Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed dur-
ing which the front passenger air bag
status light will remain lit for about 7
seconds initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person
should be advised not to ride in the front
passenger seat and the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child
or child restraint occupying the front
passenger seat.
This may be due to the following condi-
tions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
. Small adult or child is not sitting
upright, leaning against the seatback,
and centered on the seat cushion with
his/her feet comfortably extended to
the floor.
. The child restraint is not properly
installed, as outlined. (See “Child re-
straints” (P.1-24).)
. An object weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.
. A child restraint or other object press-
ing against the rear of the seatback.
. A rear passenger pushing or pulling
on the back of the front passenger
seat.
. Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
. An object placed under the front
passenger seat.
. An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console.
. The front passenger seat head re-
straint contacting the roof.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions.
Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed dur-
ing which the front passenger air bag
status light will remain lit for about 7
seconds initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small
adult, child or child restraint should be
repositioned in the rear seat and it is
recommended that the vehicle should be
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger
and no objects on the front passenger
seat, the vehicle should be checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Other supplemental front-impact
air bag precautions
WARNING
. Do not place any objects on the
steering wheel pad or on the
instrument panel. Also, do not
place any objects between any
occupant and the steering wheel
or instrument panel. Such objects
may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the front
air bags inflate.
. Do not place objects with sharp
edges on the seat. Also, do not
place heavy objects on the seat
that will leave permanent impres-
sions in the seat. Such objects
can damage the seat or occupant
classification sensors (weight
sensors). This can affect the op-
eration of the air bag system and
result in serious personal injury.
. Do not use water or acidic clea-
ners (hot steam cleaners) on the
seat. This can damage the seat or
occupant classification sensors.
This can also affect the operation
of the air bag system and result in
serious personal injury.
. Immediately after inflation, sev-
eral front air bag system compo-
nents will be hot. Do not touch
them; you may severely burn
yourself.
. No unauthorized changes should
be made to any components or
wiring of the supplemental air
bag system. This is to prevent
accidental inflation of the supple-
mental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
. Do not make unauthorized
changes to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system, suspension system or
front end structure. This could
affect proper operation of the
front air bag system.
. Tampering with the front air bag
system may result in serious per-
sonal injury. Tampering includes
changes to the steering wheel
and the instrument panel assem-
bly by placing material over the
steering wheel pad and above the
instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around
the air bag system.
. Removing or modifying the front
passenger seat may affect the
function of the air bag system
and result in serious personal
injury.
. Modifying or tampering with the
front passenger seat may result
in serious personal injury. For
example, do not change the front
seats by placing material on the
seat cushion or by installing ad-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
1-62 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ditional trim material, such as
seat covers, on the seat that is
not specifically designed to as-
sure proper air bag operation.
Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passen-
ger seat or the seat cushion and
seatback. Such objects may inter-
fere with the proper operation of
the occupant classification sen-
sors.
. No unauthorized changes should
be made to any components or
wiring of the seat belt system.
This may affect the front air bag
system. Tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious
personal injury.
. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and
around the front air bag. It is also
recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. The Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) wiring
harnesses* should not be modi-
fied or disconnected. Unauthor-
ized electrical test equipment
and probing devices should not
be used on the air bag system.
. A cracked windshield should be
replaced immediately by a quali-
fied repair facility. A cracked
windshield could affect the func-
tion of the supplemental air bag
system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identifica-
tion.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man-
ual.
WAB0127X
Driver’s side
DRIVER AND FRONT PASSENGER
SUPPLEMENTAL KNEE AIR BAG
The knee air bag is located in the knee
bolster, on the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s sides. All of the information, cau-
tions and warnings in this manual apply
and must be followed. The knee air bag
is designed to inflate in higher severity
frontal collisions, although it may inflate if
the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity
frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain
collisions.
WAB0048X
Front passenger’s side
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not
always an indication of proper knee air
bag operation.
When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly
loud noise may be heard, followed by
release of smoke. This smoke is not
harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care
should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should
get fresh air promptly.
The knee air bag helps to cushion the
impact force on the knees of the driver
and front passenger. It can help reduce
serious injuries. However, an inflating
knee air bag may cause abrasions or
other injuries. The knee air bag provides
restraint to the lower body.
The knee air bag inflates quickly in order
to help protect the occupants. Because of
this, the force of the knee air bag inflating
can increase the risk of injury if the
occupant is too close to, or is against,
this air bag module during inflation. The
knee air bag will deflate quickly after the
collision is over OR the knee air bag will
remain inflated for a short time.
The knee air bag operates only when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn
off after about 7 seconds if the system
is operational.
WARNING
. Do not place any objects between
the knee bolster and the driver’s
or front passenger’s seat. Such
objects may become dangerous
projectiles and cause injury if a
knee air bag inflates.
. Right after inflation, the knee air
bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
. No unauthorized changes should
be made to any components or
wiring of the knee air bag system.
This is to prevent damage to or
accidental inflation of the knee
air bag system.
. Do not make unauthorized
changes to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system or suspension system.
This could affect proper opera-
tion of the knee air bag system.
. Tampering with the knee air bag
system may result in serious per-
sonal injury. For example, do not
change the driver or front pas-
senger knee bolster or install
additional trim material around
the knee air bag.
. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and
around the knee air bag. It is also
recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for installation of
electrical equipment. The SRS
wiring harnesses* should not be
modified or disconnected. Un-
authorized electrical test equip-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63
1-64 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ment and probing devices should
not be used on the knee air bag
system.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors
are yellow or orange for easy identifica-
tion.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the knee air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this manual.
WAB0128X
FRONT, FRONT CENTRAL*, REAR
OUTBOARD SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-
IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
AND ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN
SIDE-IMPACT AND ROLLOVER SUP-
PLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
*: if so equipped
The side air bags are located in the
outside of the seatback of the front and
rear seats. The front central side air bag (if
so equipped) is located in the inside of the
seatback of the driver’s seat. The curtain
air bags are located in the side roof rails.
All of the information, cautions and
warnings in this manual apply and must
be followed. The side air bags and
curtain air bags are designed to inflate
in higher severity side collisions, although
they may inflate if the forces in another
type of collision are similar to those of a
higher severity side impact. They are
designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted. They may not
inflate in certain side collisions.
Curtain air bags are also designed to
inflate in certain types of rollover colli-
sions or near rollovers. As a result, certain
vehicle movements (for example, during
severe off-roading) may cause the curtain
air bags to inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not
always an indication of proper side air
bag and curtain air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air
bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be
heard, followed by release of smoke. This
smoke is not harmful and does not
indicate a fire. Care should be taken not
to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breath-
ing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the chest and pelvic area of the front and
rear outboard occupants. Front central
side air bag, along with the use of seat
belts, helps to cushion the impact force
on the head area of the front occupants.
Curtain air bags help to cushion the
impact force to the head and chest area
of occupants in the front and rear out-
board seating positions. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries.
However, an inflating side air bag or
curtain air bag may cause abrasions or
other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air
bags do not provide restraint to the lower
body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn
and the driver, front passenger and rear
outboard occupants seated upright as far
as practical away from the side air bags.
Rear seat passengers should be seated as
far away as practical from the door
finishers and side roof rails. The side air
bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in
order to help protect the occupants.
Because of this, the force of the side air
bags and curtain air bags inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant
is too close to, or is against, these air bag
modules during inflation. The side air
bags will deflate quickly after the collision
is over. The front central side air bag and
curtain air bags will remain inflated for a
short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags
operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn
off after about 7 seconds if the systems
are operational.
WARNING
. Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front and rear
seats. Also, do not place any
objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.)
between the front and rear door
finisher, the center console, and
the front and rear seats. Such
objects may become dangerous
projectiles and cause injury if a
side air bag inflates.
. Right after inflation, several side
air bag and curtain air bag sys-
tem components will be hot. Do
not touch them; you may severely
burn yourself.
. No unauthorized changes should
be made to any components or
wiring of the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems. This is to
prevent damage to or accidental
inflation of the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems.
. Do not make unauthorized
changes to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system, suspension system or
side panel. This could affect prop-
er operation of the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems.
. Tampering with the side air bag
system may result in serious per-
sonal injury. For example, do not
change the front and rear seats
by placing material near the seat-
backs or by installing additional
trim material, such as seat covers,
around the side air bag.
. Removing or modifying the front
and rear passenger seat may
affect the function of the air bag
system and result in serious per-
sonal injury.
. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and
around the side air bag and
curtain air bag. It is also recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equip-
ment. The Supplemental Re-
straint System (SRS) wiring
harnesses* should not be modi-
fied or disconnected. Unauthor-
ized electrical test equipment
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65
1-66 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
and probing devices should not
be used on the side air bag or
curtain air bag systems.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identifica-
tion.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air
bag and curtain air bag systems and
guide the buyer to the appropriate sec-
tions in this Owner’s Manual.
SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS
(front and rear outboard seats)
WARNING
. The pretensioners cannot be re-
used after activation. They must
be replaced together with the
retractor and buckle as a unit.
. If the vehicle becomes involved in
a collision but a pretensioner is
not activated, be sure to have the
pretensioner system checked
and, if necessary, repaired. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
. No unauthorized changes should
be made to any components or
wiring of the pretensioner sys-
tem. This is to prevent damage to
or accidental activation of the
pretensioners. Tampering with
the pretensioner system may re-
sult in serious personal injury.
. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and
around the pretensioner system.
It is also recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for installation of
electrical equipment. Unauthor-
ized electrical test equipment
and probing devices should not
be used on the pretensioner sys-
tem.
. If you need to dispose of a pre-
tensioner or scrap the vehicle, it is
recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Correct
pretensioner disposal procedures
are set forth in the appropriate
NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect
disposal procedures could cause
personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate
with the supplemental air bag system in
certain types of collisions. Working with
the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the
seat belt when the vehicle becomes
involved in certain types of collisions,
helping to restrain front and rear out-
board seat occupants.
The pretensioner is encased with the seat
belt retractor. These seat belts are used
the same way as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is
released and a loud noise may be heard.
The smoke is not harmful and does not
indicate a fire. Care should be taken not
to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breath-
ing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters
allow the seat belt to release webbing (if
necessary) to reduce forces against the
chest.
The supplemental air bag warning light
is used to indicate malfunctions in
the pretensioner system. See “Supple-
mental air bag warning light” (P.1-67). If
the operation of the supplemental air bag
warning light indicates there is a mal-
function, have the system checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the preten-
sioner system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man-
ual.
SSS1020
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag system are placed in
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
SRS air bag
The warning labels are located on the
surface of the sun visors.
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child re-
straint on a seat protected by an air
bag in front of it. If the air bag
deploys, it may cause serious injury
or death.
SPA1097
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits for the air bag
systems, pretensioners and all related
wiring.
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds
and then turns off. This means the system
is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur,
the air bag and/or pretensioner systems
need servicing:
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67
1-68 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
. The supplemental air bag warning
light remains on after approximately
7 seconds.
. The supplemental air bag warning
light flashes intermittently.
. The supplemental air bag warning
light does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the air bag and/
or pretensioner systems may not operate
properly. They must be checked and
repaired. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the
front air bag, knee air bag, side air
bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-
sioner systems will not operate in an
accident. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO-
CEDURE
The front air bags, knee air bags, side air
bags, curtain air bags and pretensioners
are designed to activate on a one-time-
only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag
warning light will remain illuminated after
inflation has occurred. These systems
should be repaired and/or replaced as
soon as possible. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on
the vehicle, the front air bags, knee air
bags, side air bags, curtain air bags and
pretensioners and related parts should be
pointed out to the person performing the
maintenance. The ignition switch should
always be in the OFF position when
working under the hood or inside the
vehicle.
WARNING
. Once a front air bag, knee air bag,
side air bag or curtain air bag has
inflated, the air bag module will
not function again and must be
replaced. Additionally, the acti-
vated pretensioners must also
be replaced. The air bag module
and pretensioner should be re-
placed. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service. However, the air bag
modules and pretensioner sys-
tem cannot be repaired.
. The front air bag, knee air bag,
side air bag and curtain air bag
systems, and pretensioner sys-
tem should be inspected if there
is any damage to the front end or
side portion of the vehicle. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
. If you need to dispose of a sup-
plemental air bag or pretensioner
or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN deal-
er. Correct supplemental air bag
and pretensioner system dispo-
sal procedures are set forth in the
appropriate NISSAN Service Man-
ual. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
. If there is an impact to your
vehicle from any direction, your
Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) should be checked to verify
it is still functioning correctly. It is
recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
The OCS should be checked even
if no air bags deploy as a result of
the impact. Failure to verify prop-
er OCS function may result in an
improper air bag deployment re-
sulting in injury or death.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69
1-70 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
MEMO
2 Instruments and controls
Cockpit .................................................................................................. 2-3
Instrument panel .......................................................................... 2-4
Meters and gauges ..................................................................... 2-5
Models with analog meter and
color display ............................................................................... 2-5
Models with full-screen display .................................. 2-6
Speedometer and odometer........................................ 2-8
Tachometer ................................................................................ 2-9
Engine coolant temperature gauge ....................... 2-9
Fuel gauge ................................................................................ 2-10
Instrument brightness control................................. 2-11
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator ................................................................ 2-11
ECO Drive Report ................................................................ 2-11
Variable Compression Turbo (if
so equipped) ........................................................................... 2-12
Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders ..................................................................... 2-13
Checking lights ..................................................................... 2-14
Warning/indicator lights (red)................................... 2-14
Warning/indicator lights (yellow) ........................... 2-17
Warning/indicator lights (other) ............................. 2-21
Audible reminders .............................................................. 2-22
Vehicle information display ............................................... 2-22
Changing the meter screen view
(models with full-screen display) ............................ 2-23
How to use the vehicle
information display ......................................................... 2-23
Startup display ................................................................... 2-23
Settings .................................................................................... 2-24
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators ..................................................................... 2-34
Trip computer ..................................................................... 2-46
Clock and outside air temperature ................... 2-48
Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped) .................. 2-49
How to use the HUD ...................................................... 2-51
Driver Assistance/Navigation/Traffic
Sign/Audio/TEL/SMS linking ................................... 2-52
Security systems ....................................................................... 2-52
Vehicle Security System (if so equipped) ...... 2-52
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ................. 2-53
Wiper and washer switch ................................................... 2-54
Windshield wiper and washer operation ...... 2-55
Rear window wiper and
washer operation ............................................................. 2-55
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch ................................. 2-57
Headlight and turn signal switch ................................ 2-57
Headlight switch ............................................................... 2-57
Turn signal switch ........................................................... 2-64
Fog light switch (if so equipped) ......................... 2-64
Horn ..................................................................................................... 2-65
Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) .................. 2-65
Heated seats (if so equipped) .......................................... 2-65
Operation with switch .................................................... 2-66
Steering Assist switch (models with
ProPILOT Assist) .......................................................................... 2-67
Rear Door Alert ............................................................................ 2-67
Power outlets ............................................................................... 2-68
USB (Universal Serial Bus) charging
connector (if so equipped) .......................................... 2-69
Wireless charger (if so equipped) ........................... 2-70
Emergency Call (SOS) button (if
so equipped) .................................................................................. 2-72
Emergency support .......................................................... 2-72
Storage .............................................................................................. 2-73
Cup holders ............................................................................. 2-73
Soft bottle holders ............................................................. 2-74
Single luggage board (if so equipped)............... 2-75
Adjustable luggage floor (if so equipped) ....... 2-75
Glove box ................................................................................... 2-77
Console box .......................................................................... 2-78
Lower console tray ......................................................... 2-78
Sunglasses holder ............................................................ 2-78
Card holder ........................................................................... 2-79
Coat hooks ............................................................................ 2-79
Cargo cover (if so equipped) ................................... 2-80
Luggage hooks .................................................................. 2-80
Roof rack (if so equipped) .................................................. 2-81
Windows ........................................................................................... 2-82
Power windows ................................................................. 2-82
Moonroof (if so equipped) ................................................. 2-85
Automatic moonroof and sunshade ................ 2-85
Interior lights .............................................................................. 2-87
Interior light switch ........................................................ 2-88
Map lights ............................................................................... 2-88
Room lights (if so equipped) ................................... 2-88
Rear personal lights (if so equipped)................ 2-89
Vanity mirror light............................................................ 2-89
Cargo light ............................................................................. 2-89
WAA0172X
1. Steering Assist switch* (models with Pro-
PILOT Assist)
2. Head Up Display (HUD) switch*
3. Headlight and turn signal switch/Fog light
switch*
4. Paddle shifters
5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
— Audio control**
— Vehicle information display control
6. Steering wheel
— Horn
7. Wiper and washer switch
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right
side)
— Cruise control switches*
— ProPILOT Assist switch*
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
switches**
— Voice Recognition system switch**
— Siri® Eyes Free**
9. Hazard indicator flasher switch
10. Shift lever
— Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT)
11. Instrument brightness control
12. Power liftgate switch*
13. Push-button ignition switch
14. Parking brake switch
15. Automatic brake hold switch
16. Drive Mode Selector
*: if so equipped
**: See the separate NissanConnect® Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
Instruments and controls 2-3
COCKPIT
2-4 Instruments and controls
WAA0173X
1. Side ventilator
2. Meters and gauges/Clock
3. Head Up Display (HUD)*
4. Center ventilator
5. Audio system** or navigation system**
— RearView Monitor*
— Intelligent Around View® Monitor*
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tem**
6. Front passenger supplemental air bag
7. Hood release handle
8. Fuse box cover
9. Tilt and telescopic steering lock lever
10. Driver supplemental front-impact air bag
11. Driver supplemental knee air bag
12. Heater and air conditioner control
— Defroster switch
— Heated seat switches*
— Heated steering wheel switch*
13. USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection
ports**
14. Wireless charger*
15. Power outlet
16. Front passenger supplemental knee air
bag
17. Glove box
*: if so equipped
**: See the separate NissanConnect® Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
INSTRUMENT PANEL
WAA0046X
1. Tachometer
2. Warning and indicator lights
3. Vehicle information display
— Odometer
4. Speedometer
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge
6. Fuel gauge
MODELS WITH ANALOG METER AND
COLOR DISPLAY
CAUTION
. For cleaning, use a soft cloth,
dampened with water. Never use
a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,
thinner or any kind of solvent or
paper towel with a chemical
cleaning agent. They will scratch
or cause discoloration to the lens.
. Do not spray any liquid such as
water on the meter lens. Spraying
liquid may cause the system to
malfunction.
Instruments and controls 2-5
METERS AND GAUGES
2-6 Instruments and controls
WAA0167X
1. Tachometer
2. Vehicle information display
— Odometer
3. Warning and indicator lights
4. Speedometer
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge
6. Fuel gauge
MODELS WITH FULL-SCREEN DIS-
PLAY
CAUTION
. For cleaning, use a soft cloth,
dampened with water. Never use
a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,
thinner or any kind of solvent or
paper towel with a chemical
cleaning agent. They will scratch
or cause discoloration to the lens.
. Do not spray any liquid such as
water on the meter lens. Spraying
liquid may cause the system to
malfunction.
WAC0428X
1. Tachometer
2. Engine coolant temperature gauge
3. Personal Display
4. Speedometer
5. Fuel gauge
Changing the meter screen view
(models with full-screen display)
For models with full-screen display, the
meter screen view can be changed to
expand the vehicle information display
area.
To change the meter screen view:
1. Push the control switch
on the left
side of the steering wheel.
“Shortcut Menu” appears on the vehi-
cle information display area.
2. Select “Change Meter View” by rotat-
ing the scroll dial
and push it to
change the view.
Instruments and controls 2-7
2-8 Instruments and controls
JVI1006X
Example
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed
in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers
per hour (km/h).
WAC0429X
Example
Distance to empty (dte)/Odometer
Distance to empty (dte):
The distance to empty (dte)
provides an
estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The dte is con-
stantly being calculated, based on the
amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the
actual fuel consumption.
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
The dte mode includes a low range
warning feature. If the fuel level is low,
the warning is displayed on the screen.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the
dte display will change to “———”.
. If the amount of fuel added is small,
the display just before the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position
may continue to be displayed.
. When driving uphill or rounding
curves, the fuel in the tank shifts,
which may momentarily change the
display.
Odometer:
The odometer
is displayed in the
vehicle information display to display the
total distance the vehicle has been driven.
WAC0562X
Example
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev
the engine into the red zone
.
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the
red zone, shift to a higher gear or
reduce engine speed. Operating the
engine in the red zone may cause
serious engine damage.
WAC0430X
Full-screen model
JVI1296X
Analog model
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The engine coolant temperature gauge
indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture.
The engine coolant temperature is nor-
mal when the gauge needle points within
the zone
shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature will vary
with the outside air temperature and
driving conditions.
CAUTION
. If the gauge indicates the engine
coolant temperature is near the
hot (H) end of the normal range,
reduce vehicle speed to decrease
the temperature.
. If the gauge is over the normal
range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and let the engine
idle.
. If the engine is overheated, con-
tinued operation of the vehicle
may seriously damage the en-
gine. (See “If your vehicle over-
heats” (P.6-14) for immediate
action required.)
Instruments and controls 2-9
2-10 Instruments and controls
WAC0431X
Full-screen model
JVI0640X
Analog model
FUEL GAUGE
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate
fuel level in the tank when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
The gauge may move slightly during
braking, turning, accelerating, or going
up and down hills due to movement of
fuel in the tank.
The low fuel warning
appears on the
vehicle information display when the fuel
level in the tank is getting low. Refuel as
soon as it is convenient, preferably before
the gauge reads 0 (empty).
The arrow,
, indicates the location of
the fuel-filler door.
Refuel before the gauge reads the
empty (0) position.
There is a small reserve of fuel in the tank
when the fuel gauge reads the empty (0)
position.
CAUTION
. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
malfunction indicator light
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as
soon as possible. After a few
driving trips, the
light should
turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected. It is recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
. For additional information, see
“Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” (P.2-19).
WAC0566X
WAC0489X
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CON-
TROL
The instrument brightness control switch
can be operated when the ignition switch
is in the ON position. When the switch is
operated, the vehicle information display
switches to the brightness adjustment
mode.
Push the + side of the switch
to
brighten the instrument panel lights. The
bar
moves to the right side.
Push the - side of the switch
to dim the
lights. The bar
moves to the left side.
The vehicle information display returns to
the normal display when the instrument
brightness control switch is not operated
for more than 5 seconds.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-
MISSION (CVT) POSITION INDICA-
TOR
The Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) position indicator indicates the shift
lever position when the ignition switch is
in the ON position. (See “19. Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) position in-
dicator” (P.2-36).)
WAC0513X
Example
ECO DRIVE REPORT
When the ignition switch is placed in the
ON or OFF position, the ECO Drive Report
is displayed.
ECO evaluation
Previous 5 times (History)
Current fuel economy
Best fuel economy
The result of ECO evaluation is displayed
when the vehicle is driven for about 10
minutes or more.
: The more economically you drive, the
more
appear.
: The average fuel economy for the
previous 5 times will be displayed.
Instruments and controls 2-11
2-12 Instruments and controls
: The average fuel economy since the
last reset will be displayed.
: The best fuel economy of the past
history will be displayed.
When the “See Tire Pressure” message
appears in the ECO Drive Report, the
display can be switched to the Tire
Pressures display by pushing the scroll
dial on the steering wheel to show an
additional message.
WAC0658X
Example
VARIABLE COMPRESSION TURBO (if
so equipped)
Your engine is equipped with a variable
compression ratio system called “Variable
Compression Turbo”. This system can
vary the engine compression ratio con-
tinuously.
According to driving conditions, the sys-
tem applies optimum compression ratio
automatically to achieve both high out-
put and high fuel economy efficiency.
This is not a physical gauge. It is a display
option in the vehicle information display
that can be selected. (See “Vehicle infor-
mation display” (P.2-22).)
Compression ratio status display
Displays the status of compression ratio
controlled by Variable Compression Tur-
bo. The lowest compression ratio (8:1) and
the highest (14:1) are displayed as “Power”
and “Eco” respectively.
Turbo charger boost pressure gauge
Displays the turbo charger boost pres-
sure. The unit for the gauge can be
changed in the “Settings” menu. (See
“Unit/Language” (P.2-31).)
NOTE:
Under some conditions, the compres-
sion ratio may not change. This is not a
malfunction of the system.
CAUTION
If the Variable Compression Turbo
becomes faulty, the Malfunction In-
dicator Light (MIL) may come on. For
additional information, see “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” (P.2-19).
Warning/indicator lights (red) Warning/indicator lights (yellow)
Warning/indicator lights (other)
Brake warning light (red)
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warn-
ing light
Automatic brake hold indicator light
(white)
Automatic brake hold indicator light
(green)
Charge warning light
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
system OFF warning light
Exterior light indicator
Electric shift control system warning
light
Electric power steering warning light
Front fog light indicator light (if so
equipped)
Electronic parking brake warning light
Electronic parking brake system
warning light
High beam assist indicator light
Low tire pressure warning light
High beam indicator light
Engine oil pressure warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Hands OFF warning light (if so
equipped)
Master warning light
Master warning light
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system
OFF warning light
Seat belt warning light and chime Slip indicator light
Supplemental air bag warning light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
indicator light
Instruments and controls 2-13
WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
2-14 Instruments and controls
CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. The following lights (if
so equipped) will come on:
, , PARK or , , ,
The following lights (if so equipped) come
on briefly and then go off:
, , , , or , , or
(red), (yellow), .
If any light does not come on or operates
in a way other than described, it may
indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a
system malfunction. It is recommended
you have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red)
See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-22).
or Brake warning light
This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Low brake fluid warning light:
When the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position, the brake warning light
illuminates, and then turns off. If the light
illuminates while the engine is running
with the parking brake not applied, stop
the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake
fluid is necessary, add fluid and have
the system checked. It is recom-
mended you have this service per-
formed by a NISSAN dealer. (See
“Brake fluid” (P.8-12).)
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have
the warning system checked. It is
recommended you have this service
performed by a NISSAN dealer.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator:
When the parking brake is released and
the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both
the brake warning light and the Anti-lock
Braking System (ABS) warning light illu-
minate, it may indicate the ABS is not
functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked, and if necessary re-
paired. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. (See “Anti-
lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”
(P.2-17).)
WARNING
. Your brake system may not be
working properly if the warning
light is on. Driving could be dan-
gerous. If you judge it to be safe,
drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Other-
wise, have your vehicle towed
because driving it could be dan-
gerous.
. Pressing the brake pedal with the
engine stopped and/or low brake
fluid level may increase your
stopping distance and braking
will require greater pedal effort
as well as pedal travel.
. If the brake fluid level is below the
minimum or MIN mark on the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive
until the brake system has been
checked. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Charge warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the charge warning light illumi-
nates and then turns off.
If the light illuminates while the engine is
running, it may indicate the charging
system is not functioning properly. Turn
the engine off and check the alternator
belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or
if the light remains on, have your vehicle
serviced immediately. It is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the alter-
nator belt is loose, broken or miss-
ing.
Electric shift control system
warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the electric shift control system
warning light illuminates, and then turns
off. This indicates the electric shift control
system is operational.
The electric shift control system warning
light illuminates when a malfunction oc-
curs in the electric shift control system.
When the master warning light illumi-
nates, the chime sounds and the follow-
ing message is displayed in the vehicle
information display: “When parked apply
parking brake”.
When the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position, the chime sounds continu-
ously. Ensure the parking brake is applied.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
or Electronic parking
brake warning light
The electronic parking brake warning
light indicates that the electronic parking
brake system is operating.
When the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position, the electronic parking brake
warning light illuminates. When the en-
gine is started and the parking brake is
released, the warning light turns off.
If the parking brake is not released, the
electronic parking brake warning light
remains on. Be sure that the electronic
parking brake warning light has turned
off before driving. (See “Parking brake”
(P.5-25).)
If the electronic parking brake warning
light illuminates or flashes while the
electronic parking brake system warning
light
illuminates, it may indicate that
the electronic parking brake system is not
functioning properly. Have the system
checked, and if necessary repaired. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
Engine oil pressure warning
light
This light warns of low engine oil pres-
sure. When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the engine oil pressure warning
light illuminates. After starting the engine,
the engine oil pressure warning light
turns off. This indicates that the oil
pressure sensors in the engine are opera-
tional.
If the engine oil pressure warning light
illuminates or blinks while the engine is
running, it may indicate that the engine
oil pressure is low.
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble. Stop the engine immediately and call
a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
. Running the engine with the en-
gine oil pressure warning light
illuminated could cause serious
damage to the engine.
Instruments and controls 2-15
2-16 Instruments and controls
. The engine oil pressure warning
light is not designed to indicate a
low oil level. The oil level should
be checked using the dipstick.
(See “Engine oil” (P.8-8).)
Hands OFF warning light (if so
equipped)
When the Steering Assist is activated, it
monitors the driver’s steering wheel op-
eration. If the steering wheel is not
operated or the driver takes his/her
hands off the steering wheel for a period
of time, the warning light illuminates. If
the driver does not operate the steering
wheel after the warning light has been
illuminated, an audible alert sounds and
the warning flashes in the vehicle infor-
mation display, followed by a quick brake
application to request the driver to take
control of the vehicle again. If the driver
remains unresponsive, the vehicle will
automatically turn on the hazard lights
and slow to a complete stop. (See “Steer-
ing Assist” (P.5-113).)
Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the master warning light illumi-
nates if a warning message appears in
the vehicle information display.
See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-22).
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten
the seat belts.
The light illuminates whenever the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON position,
and will remain illuminated until the seat
belts are fastened.
The seat belt warning light for the front
passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is
not fastened when the front passenger’s
seat is occupied.
When the vehicle speed exceeds 10 MPH
(15 km/h), the light will continue to blink
for about 95 seconds until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened and the light will
blink unless the front passenger’s seat
belts is securely fastened and the chime
will sound for about 95 seconds unless
the front passenger’s seat belt is securely
fastened.
When the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position, the chime will sound for
about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat
belt is securely fastened.
When the vehicle speed exceeds 10 MPH
(15 km/h), the chime will sound unless the
rear passenger’s seat belts are securely
fastened. The chime will continue to
sound for about 35 seconds until the rear
passenger’s seat belts are fastened.
For additional information, refer to “Seat
belt warning light and chime” (P.1-16).
Supplemental air bag warning
light
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light will illuminate. The supplemental
air bag warning light will turn off after
about 7 seconds if the supplemental front
air bag and supplemental side air bag,
curtain air bag systems and/or preten-
sioner seat belt are operational.
If any of the following conditions occur,
the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air
bag and pretensioner systems need ser-
vicing.
. The supplemental air bag warning
light remains on after approximately
7 seconds.
. The supplemental air bag warning
light flashes intermittently.
. The supplemental air bag warning
light does not illuminate at all.
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the Supple-
mental Restraint Systems and/or the
pretensioners may not function properly.
For additional information, see “Supple-
mental Restraint System (SRS)” (P.1-47).
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air
bag and/or pretensioner systems
will not operate in an accident. To
help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked. It
is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (yel-
low)
See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-22).
or Anti-lock Braking Sys-
tem (ABS) warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light illuminates and then
turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera-
tional.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while
the engine is running, or while driving, it
may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-
lock function is turned off. The brake
system then operates normally, but with-
out anti-lock assistance. (See “Brake sys-
tem” (P.5-155).)
Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) system OFF warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the AEB system OFF warning
light illuminates. After starting the engine,
the warning light turns off.
This light illuminates when the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF
on the vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates or flashes when the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is
ON, it may indicate that the system is
unavailable. See “Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection
system” (P.5-122) or “Intelligent Forward
Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P.5-132).
Electric power steering warn-
ing light
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the electric power steering
warning light illuminates. After starting
the engine, the electric power steering
warning light turns off. This indicates the
electric power steering is operational.
If the electric power steering warning
light illuminates while the engine is run-
ning, it may indicate the electric power
steering is not functioning properly and
may need servicing. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the electric power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine running,
the power assist to the steering will cease
operation but you will still have control of
the vehicle. At this time, greater steering
efforts are required to operate the steer-
ing wheel, especially in sharp turns and at
low speeds.
(See “Electric power steering” (P.5-154).)
Instruments and controls 2-17
2-18 Instruments and controls
Electronic parking brake sys-
tem warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the electronic parking brake
system warning light illuminates and then
turns off.
The electronic parking brake system
warning light functions for the electronic
parking brake system. If the warning light
illuminates, it may indicate that the elec-
tronic parking brake system is not func-
tioning properly. Have the brake system
checked, and, if necessary, repaired. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that
monitors the tire pressure of all tires
except the spare tire.
The low tire pressure warning light warns
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position, this light illuminates for
about 1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning
also appears in the vehicle information
display.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
the tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The low tire
pressure warning light does not automa-
tically turn off when the tire pressure is
adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must
be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off
the low tire pressure warning light. Use a
tire pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure.
The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning
is active as long as the low tire pressure
warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, see “Vehicle
information display” (P.2-22), “Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-6)
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” (P.6-3).
TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly,
the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion. The light will remain on after the 1
minute. Have the system checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. The “Tire Pressure Low -
Add Air” warning does not appear if the
low tire pressure warning light illuminates
to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, see “Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-6).
WARNING
. If the light does not illuminate
with the ignition switch placed in
the ON position, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service as soon as possible.
. If the light illuminates while driv-
ing, avoid sudden steering man-
euvers or abrupt braking, reduce
vehicle speed, pull off the road to
a safe location and stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-
ing with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire
failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in ser-
ious personal injury. Check the
tire pressure for all four tires.
Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low
tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may be flat or
the TPMS may be malfunctioning.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible. If no tire is flat and all
tires are properly inflated, it is
recommended you consult a
NISSAN dealer.
. Since the spare tire is not
equipped with the TPMS, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for ap-
proximately 1 minute. The light
will remain on after 1 minute.
Have your tires replaced and/or
TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for these
services.
. Replacing tires with those not
originally specified by NISSAN
could affect the proper operation
of the TPMS.
CAUTION
. The TPMS is not a substitute for
the regular tire pressure check.
Be sure to check the tire pressure
regularly.
. If the vehicle is being driven at
speeds of less than 16 MPH (25
km/h), the TPMS may not operate
correctly.
. Be sure to install the specified
size of tires to the four wheels
correctly.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If the malfunction indicator light comes
on steady or blinks while the engine is
running, it may indicate a potential emis-
sion control and/or Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) malfunction.
The malfunction indicator light may also
illuminate steady if the vehicle runs out of
fuel. Check to make sure that the vehicle
has at least 3 US gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel
in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the
light
should turn off if no other potential
emission control system malfunction ex-
ists.
If this indicator light remains on for 20
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indi-
cates that the vehicle is not ready for an
emission control system inspection/
maintenance test. (See “Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test” (P.10-
31).)
Operation:
The malfunction indicator light will come
on in one of two ways:
. Malfunction indicator light on steady
— An emission control system and/or
CVT malfunction has been detected. It
Instruments and controls 2-19
2-20 Instruments and controls
is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed to
the dealer.
. Malfunction indicator light blinking —
An engine misfire has been detected
which may damage the emission
control system.
To reduce or avoid emission control
system damage:
1) Do not drive at speeds above 45
MPH (72 km/h).
2) Avoid hard acceleration or decel-
eration.
3) Avoid steep uphill grades.
4) If possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
The malfunction indicator light may
stop blinking and remain on.
Have the vehicle inspected. It is re-
commended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to
have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
and/or CVT system checked and
repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel econ-
omy, and possible damage to the
emission control system.
Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the master warning light illumi-
nates if a warning message appears in
the vehicle information display.
See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-22).
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
system OFF warning light
This light comes on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. It
turns off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the RAB sys-
tem is turned off in the vehicle informa-
tion display.
If the light illuminates when the RAB
system is on, it may indicate that the
system is unavailable. For additional in-
formation, see “Rear Automatic Braking
(RAB)” (P.5-143).
Slip indicator light
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the slip indicator light illumi-
nates and then turns off.
The light will blink when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system or the
traction control system is operating, thus
alerting the driver that the vehicle is
nearing its traction limits. The road sur-
face may be slippery.
If the light illuminates while the VDC
system is on, this light alerts the driver
to the fact that the VDC system’s fail-safe
mode is operating, for example the VDC
system may not be functioning properly.
Have the system checked. It is recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service. If a malfunction occurs in the
system, the VDC system function will be
canceled but the vehicle is still driveable.
For additional information, see “Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-157)
of this manual.
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
off indicator light
The light comes on when the VDC is
turned OFF. This indicates that the VDC
system and traction control system are
not operating.
Turn the VDC on using the vehicle in-
formation display, or restart the engine
and the system will operate normally.
(See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-
tem” (P.5-157).)
The light also comes on when placing the
ignition switch in the ON position. The
light will turn off after about 2 seconds if
the system is operational. If the light stays
on or comes on along with the
indicator light while you are driving, have
the VDC system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
WARNING
The VDC should remain on unless
freeing a vehicle from mud or snow.
While the VDC system is operating, you
might feel a slight vibration or hear the
system working when starting the vehicle
or accelerating, but this is not a malfunc-
tion.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
(other)
See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-22).
Automatic brake hold indica-
tor light (white)
The automatic brake hold indicator light
(white) illuminates when the automatic
brake hold system is on standby. (See
“Automatic brake hold” (P.5-28).)
Automatic brake hold indica-
tor light (green)
The automatic brake hold indicator light
(green) illuminates while the automatic
brake hold system is operating. (See
“Automatic brake hold” (P.5-28).)
Exterior light indicator
This indicator illuminates when the head-
light switch is turned to the AUTO,
or
position and the front parking lights,
rear combination lights, license plate
lights or headlights are on. The indicator
turns off when these lights are turned off.
Front fog light indicator light
(if so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illumi-
nates when the front fog lights are on.
(See “Fog light switch” (P.2-64).)
High beam assist indicator
light
The high beam assist indicator light
illuminates when the high beam assist
system is turned on and it is operational.
(See “High beam assist” (P.2-61).)
High beam indicator light
This light illuminates when the headlight
high beam is on and goes out when the
low beam is selected.
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The light flashes when the turn signal
switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.
Instruments and controls 2-21
2-22 Instruments and controls
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Light reminder chime
The light reminder chime will sound when
the headlight switch is placed in the
or position after the engine was
turned off, and the driver’s door is opened
with the light is on.
Turn the light switch to the OFF (if so
equipped) or AUTO position when you
leave the vehicle.
Driving Aid chimes (if so equipped)
An audible alert/chime may be heard if
any of the following systems (if so
equipped) are active:
. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
. Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI)
. Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
. ProPILOT Assist
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection
. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW)
. Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
. Sonar system
. Rear Sonar System (RSS)
For additional information, refer to the “5.
Starting and driving” section of this man-
ual.
Door lock warning chime
When the chime sounds, be sure to check
both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
See “Troubleshooting guide” (P.3-13).
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a brake pad requires
replacement, it will make a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in
motion. This scraping sound will first
occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake
pad, the sound will always be heard even
if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have
the brakes checked as soon as possible if
the warning sound is heard.
JVI1272X
Example
The vehicle information display is
located as shown above, and it displays
the warnings and information. The fol-
lowing items are also displayed if the
vehicle is equipped with them:
. Tachometer
. Speedometer
. Vehicle settings
. Trip computer information
. Driver Assistance
. Cruise control system information
. ProPILOT Assist
. Intelligent Key operation information
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
. Audio information
. Navigation - turn by turn
. Indicators and warnings
. Tire pressure information
. Other information
CHANGING THE METER SCREEN
VIEW (models with full-screen dis-
play)
For the model with full-screen display, the
meter screen view can be changed to
expand the vehicle information display
area. See “Changing the meter screen
view (models with full-screen display)”
(P.2-7) for how to change the view.
WAC0313X
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFOR-
MATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be
changed using the scroll dial
, ,
and
located on the steering
wheel.
Scroll dial - navigate through the items
and change or select an item in vehicle
information display
this scroll dial allows up/down navigation
and push to select
- go back to the previous menu
- change from one display screen
to the next (i.e. trip, Fuel economy)
STARTUP DISPLAY
When the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position, the vehicle information dis-
play may display the following screens if
the vehicle is equipped with them:
. Home
. Blank
. Speed
. Drive Computer — Average Speed-Trip
(Distance & Time)-Fuel Economy
. ECO Pedal Guide
. Tire Pressures
. 4x4–i
. Variable Compression Turbo
. Navigation
. Compass
. Audio
. Driving Aids
. ProPILOT Assist
. Speed Limit Sign
. Warnings
. Settings
Warnings will only display if there are any
present. For more information on warn-
ings and indicators, see “Vehicle informa-
tion display warnings and indicators” (P.2-
34).
To control what items display in the
vehicle information display, see “Settings”
Instruments and controls 2-23
2-24 Instruments and controls
(P.2-24).
SETTINGS
The setting mode allows user to change
the information displayed in the vehicle
information display and some settings:
. VDC Setting
. Driver Assistance
. Personal Display (if so equipped)
. Head-Up Display (if so equipped)
. ECO Mode Setting
. TPMS Setting
. Clock
. Vehicle Settings
. Maintenance
. Customize Display
. Unit/Language
. Key-Linked Settings (if so equipped)
. Factory Reset
VDC Setting
To change the setting, use the scroll dial
to select and push it.
. System
Allows user to turn the Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system ON or
OFF. By default the VDC system will be
turned ON. If the VDC system is turned
off, the VDC OFF indicator light will
illuminate.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be driven with the
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
ON for most driving conditions. (See
“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”
(P.5-157).)
Driver Assistance
To change the status, warnings or turn on
or off any of the systems/warnings dis-
played in the “Driver Assistance” menu,
use the scroll dial
to select and change
a menu item:
. Steering Assist (if so equipped)
. Lane
. Blind Spot
. Emergency Brake
. Speed Limit Sign (if so equipped)
. Speed Adjust by Route (if so equipped)
. Spd. Limit Assist (if so equipped)
. Parking Aids
. Cross Traffic Alert
. Driver Attention Alert
. Timer Alert
. Low Temp. Alert
Steering Assist (if so equipped):
. Allows user to turn the Steering Assist
ON/OFF.
(See “ProPILOT Assist” (P.5-85).)
Lane:
. Warning(LDW)
Allows user to turn the Lane Depar-
ture Warning (LDW) system ON/OFF.
. Prevention(LDP) (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the Intelligent Lane
Intervention (I-LI) system ON/OFF.
(See “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” (P.5-
47) and “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)”
(P.5-115).)
Blind Spot:
. Warning(BSW)
Allows user to turn the Blind Spot
Warning (BSW) system ON/OFF.
. Intervention(BSI) (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the Intelligent
Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) system
ON/OFF.
(See “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” (P.5-58)
and “Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI)” (P.5-66).)
Emergency Brake:
. Front
Allows user to turn the Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedes-
trian Detection system and Intelligent
Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) sys-
tem ON/OFF.
. Rear
Allows user to turn the Rear Auto-
matic Braking (RAB) system ON/OFF.
(See “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection system” (P.5-
122), “Intelligent Forward Collision Warn-
ing (I-FCW)” (P.5-132) and “Rear Automatic
Braking (RAB)” (P.5-143).)
Speed Limit Sign (if so equipped):
Allows user to turn the Traffic Sign
Recognition (TSR) ON/OFF. (See “Traffic
Sign Recognition (TSR)” (P.5-44).)
Speed Adjust by Route (if so equipped):
Allows user to turn the Speed Adjust by
Route (ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link)
function ON/OFF. (See “Speed Limit Assist
- a feature of ProPILOT Assist with Navi-
link” (P.5-103).)
Spd.Limit Assist (if so equipped):
Allows user to customize the Speed Limit
Assist (ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link)
options.
. OFF
. Manual
. Auto
(See “Speed Limit Assist - a feature of
ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link” (P.5-103).)
Parking Aids:
To change the status or turn on or off any
of the systems displayed in the “Parking
Aids” menu, use the scroll dial
to select
and change a menu item:
. Moving Object (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the Moving Object
Detection (MOD) ON/OFF.
. Auto Show Sonar (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the sonar system
or the Rear Sonar System (RSS) display
ON/OFF.
. Front (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the front sonar
sensors ON/OFF.
. Rear
Allows user to turn the rear sonar
sensors ON/OFF.
. Side (if so equipped)
Allows user to turn the side sonar
sensors ON/OFF.
. Distance
Allows user to select the sonar sen-
sor’s detection distance (Long, Med-
ium or Short).
. Volume
Allows user to select the volume of the
sonar tone (High, Medium or Low).
(See “Moving Object Detection (MOD)”
(P.4-21), “Sonar system” (P.5-162) and “Rear
Sonar System (RSS)” (P.5-168).)
Cross Traffic Alert:
Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA) system ON/OFF. (See “Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P.5-77).)
Driver Attention Alert:
Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver
Alertness (I-DA) on or off. (See “Intelligent
Driver Alertness (I-DA)” (P.5-141).)
Timer Alert:
Allows user to adjust the Timer Alert or
reset.
. (Current Time)/(Set Time)
. Reset
Low Temp. Alert:
Allows user to turn the Low Temperature
Alert function ON/OFF.
Personal Display (if so equipped)
To change the display in the “Personal
Display” menu, use the scroll dial
to
select and change a menu item:
. Blank
. Navigation
. Time to Destination
. Fuel Economy
— Manual Reset1
Instruments and controls 2-25
2-26 Instruments and controls
— Manual Reset2
— Auto Refuel
. Trip
— Manual Reset1
— Manual Reset2
— Auto Refuel
. Gear position
. Average speed
— Manual Reset1
— Manual Reset2
— Auto Refuel
Head-Up Display (if so equipped)
To change the status or turn on or off any
of the systems displayed in the “Head-Up
Display” menu, use the scroll dial
to
select and change a menu item:
. Brightness
. Height
. Rotation
. Contents selection
— Navigation (if so equipped)
— Driving Assist
— Speed Limit Sign
— Audio
— TEL/SMS
. Reset
(See “Head Up Display (HUD)” (P.2-49).)
ECO Mode Setting
This setting allows user to change the
ECO mode system settings.
To change the status or turn on or off any
of the systems displayed in the “ECO
Mode Settings” menu, use the scroll dial
to select and change a menu item:
. ECO Customize
— Cruise Control
. ECO Drive Assist
— ECO Indicator
— ECO Drive Report
. View History
To reset the View History:
1) Select “View History” using the
scroll dial
and push it.
2) Push the scroll dial
.
3) Select “Yes” by pushing the scroll
dial
.
. Tire Pres ECO advice
Push the scroll dial
to turn the “Tire
Pres ECO advice” ON/OFF.
TPMS Setting
The following submenu appears.
Tire Pressure Unit:
The unit for tire pressure that is shown in
the vehicle information display can be
changed to:
. psi
. kPa
. bar
. kgf/cm
2
Use the scroll dial to select and change
the unit.
If necessary, refer to the following table to
convert between units.
JVI0938X
When the tire pressure unit is changed,
the unit for the turbo charger boost
pressure gauge (if so equipped) is also
changed. (See “Variable Compression Tur-
bo” (P.2-12).)
Clock
Allows user to adjust the clock settings
and time within the vehicle information
display.
. Clock Mode (if so equipped)
. Clock Format
. Daylight Saving (if so equipped)
. Time Zone (if so equipped)
. Set Clock Manually
The clock may also be set in the center
display. For additional information, refer
to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s
Manual.
Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allows user to
change settings for the following menus.
. Power Back Door (if so equipped)
. Lighting
. Locking
. Wipers
. Driving Position (if so equipped)
. Rear Door Alert
The vehicle settings can be changed
using the scroll dial
.
Power Back Door (if so equipped):
This allows user to turn the power liftgate
ON or OFF.
Lighting:
The “Lighting” menu has the following
options:
. Welcome Headlight
The welcome lighting can be set to be
ON or OFF. Use the scroll dial
to turn
this feature ON or OFF.
. Auto Room Lamp
The interior light can be set to be ON
or OFF. Use the scroll dial
to turn
this feature ON or OFF.
. Accent Lighting (if so equipped)
The brightness of the Accent Lighting
can be adjusted. Use the scroll dial
to select the brightness.
Instruments and controls 2-27
2-28 Instruments and controls
. Auto Headlight
The sensitivity of the Intelligent Auto
Headlight can be adjusted. Use the
scroll dial
to select the required
sensitivity. The following options are
available:
— Turn on earliest
— Turn on earlier
— Turn on standard
— Turn on later
. Light Off Delay
The duration of the automatic head-
lights can be changed from 0 to 180
seconds. Use the scroll dial
to
change the duration.
Locking:
The “Locking” menu has the following
options:
. Ext. Door Switch (if so equipped)
When this item is turned on, the
request switch on the door is acti-
vated. Use the scroll dial
to activate
or deactivate this function.
. Selective Unlock (if so equipped)
When this item is turned on, and the
door handle request switch is pushed,
only the corresponding door is un-
locked. All the doors can be unlocked
if the door handle request switch is
pushed again within 1 minute. When
this item is turned to off, all the doors
will be unlocked when the door han-
dle request switch is pushed once. Use
the scroll dial
to activate or deacti-
vate this function.
. Auto Door Unlock
The “Auto Door Unlock” feature allows
user to customize the auto door
unlock options. Use the scroll dial
to change the mode.
— Shift to P
— IGN OFF
— OFF
. Horn beeps on lock (if so equipped)
When this item is turned on, the horn
will chirp and the hazard indicators
will flash twice when locking the
vehicle with the Intelligent Key. Use
the scroll dial
to activate or deacti-
vate this function.
Wipers:
The “Wipers” menu has the following
options:
. Speed Dependent
The “Speed Dependent” feature can be
activated or deactivated. Use the
scroll dial to turn this feature ON
or OFF.
. Reverse Link
The “Reverse Link” wiper feature can
be set to be ON or OFF. Use the scroll
dial
to turn this feature ON or OFF.
Driving Position (if so equipped):
. Exit Seat Slide
This allows user to turn the entry/exit
function ON or OFF. Use the scroll dial
to turn this function ON or OFF. (See
“Memory seat” (P.3-37).)
Rear Door Alert:
The “Rear Door Alert” feature allows user
to customize the Rear Door Alert options.
Use the scroll dial
to change the mode.
. Horn & Alert
When selected, the alert is displayed
and the horn sounds.
. Alert Only
When selected, only the alert is dis-
played.
. OFF
When selected, no alert or horn will be
active.
(See “Rear Door Alert” (P.2-67).)
Maintenance
The maintenance mode allows user to
check the distance to oil change or set
alerts for the reminding of maintenance
intervals. To change an item:
Select “Maintenance” using the scroll dial
and push it.
. Oil Control System
. Oil and Filter
. Tire
. Other
Oil Control System:
The Oil Control System informs the dis-
tance to oil change. Never exceed one
year or the following distance between oil
change intervals:
. 10,000 miles (16,000 km) for the
PR25DD engine
. 7,500 miles (12,000 km) for the
KR15DDT engine
Display
when
ignition
is ON
Display timing
Action Required
Engine
Oil Ser-
vice due
in xxx
miles
Remaining oil
life is less than
940 miles (1,500
km).
Plan to have
your vehicle ser-
viced.
Engine
Oil Ser-
vice due
Remaining oil
life is 0 miles (0
km).
Have your vehi-
cle serviced
within two
weeks or less
than 500 miles
(800 km).
The oil change interval cannot be ad-
justed manually.
The distance to oil change interval is
calculated depending on the driving con-
ditions and set automatically by the oil
control system. A reminder will be dis-
played when approaching the end of the
service interval.
When the Factory Reset option is selected
in the vehicle information display, the oil
control system will also be reset to initial
value. Please change the engine oil when
Factory Reset is selected.
CAUTION
If the oil replacement indicator is
displayed, change the engine oil
within two weeks or less than 500
miles (800 km).
Operating the vehicle with deterio-
rated oil can damage the engine.
To reset oil control system:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position.
2. Push the
and buttons on the
steering wheel until “Settings” appears
in the vehicle information display. Use
the scroll dial to select “Maintenance”.
Then, push the scroll dial.
3. Select the “Oil Control System” and
push the scroll dial.
4. Push the scroll dial according to the
reset instructions displayed at the
bottom of the “Oil Control System”
maintenance screen.
When the user sets an alert for chan-
ging the engine oil in the “Oil and Filter”
menu, reset both “Oil Control System”
and “Oil and Filter” after changing the
engine oil.
Instruments and controls 2-29
2-30 Instruments and controls
Oil and Filter:
This indicator appears when user set
distance comes for changing the engine
oil and filter. You can set or reset the
distance for checking or replacing these
items. For scheduled maintenance items
and intervals, refer to the “9. Maintenance
and schedules” section.
When the user sets an alert for chan-
ging the engine oil in the “Oil and Filter”
menu, reset both “Oil Control System”
and “Oil and Filter” after changing the
engine oil.
Tire:
This indicator appears when the user set
distance comes for replacing tires. You
can set or reset the distance for replacing
tires.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not
a substitute for regular tire checks,
including tire pressure checks. (See
“Changing wheels and tires” (P.8-
39).) Many factors including tire in-
flation, alignment, driving habits and
road conditions affect tire wear and
when tires should be replaced.
Setting the tire replacement indica-
tor for a certain driving distance
does not mean your tires will last
that long. Use the tire replacement
indicator as a guide only and always
perform regular tire checks. Failure
to perform regular tire checks, in-
cluding tire pressure checks could
result in tire failure. Serious vehicle
damage could occur and may lead to
a collision, which could result in
serious personal injury or death.
Other:
This indicator appears when the user set
distance comes for checking or replacing
maintenance items other than the engine
oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance
items can include such things as air filter
or tire rotation. You can set or reset the
distance for checking or replacing the
items.
Customize Display
The display settings allows user to
choose from the various meter selections.
The display settings can be changed
using the scroll dial
.
Main Menu Selection:
Displays available screens that can be
shown in the vehicle information display.
Route Guidance (if so equipped):
To change the setting, use the scroll dial
to select and push it.
. Alerts
The “Alerts” allows user to turn the
Navigation Settings alerts on or off.
Transition (Cruise) (if so equipped):
The ”Transition (Cruise)” allows user to
turn the cruise screen transition on or off.
Welcome Effect:
The “Welcome Effect” displays the avail-
able welcome effect settings.
. Gauges (if so equipped)
. Animation
Operation guidance:
The “Operation guidance” displays the
available operation guidance settings.
. Lights
. Wiper
— Front
— Rear
. Seat Memory (if so equipped)
. Cruise Control (if so equipped)
Unit/Language
The units that are shown in the vehicle
information display can be changed:
. Mileage/Fuel
. Tire Pressure
. Temperature
. Language
Use the scroll dial
to select and change
the units of the vehicle information dis-
play.
Mileage/Fuel:
The unit for the mileage that is shown in
the vehicle information display can be
changed.
. miles, MPG
. km, km/l
. km, l/100km
Use the scroll dial
to select and change
the unit.
Tire Pressure:
The unit for tire pressures that is shown
in the vehicle information display can be
changed to:
. psi
. kPa
. bar
. kgf/cm
2
(See “TPMS Setting” (P.2-26).)
When the tire pressure unit is changed,
the unit for the turbo charger boost
pressure gauge (if so equipped) is also
changed. (See “Variable Compression Tur-
bo” (P.2-12).)
Temperature:
The temperature that is shown in the
vehicle information display can be chan-
ged from:
. °C
. °F
Use the scroll dial
to toggle choices.
Language:
The language of the vehicle information
display can be changed.
Use the scroll dial
to select and change
the language of the vehicle information
display.
Key-Linked Settings (if so equipped)
The Key-Linked Settings can be turned
ON/OFF using the scroll dial
. It will
display the key synchronized and in use
for this vehicle.
Factory Reset
The settings in the vehicle information
display can be reset back to the factory
default. To reset the vehicle information
display:
1. Select “Factory Reset” using the scroll
dial
and push it.
2. Select “Yes” to return all settings back
to default by pushing the scroll dial
.
Instruments and controls 2-31
2-32 Instruments and controls
WAC0315X
WAC0659X
Instruments and controls 2-33
2-34 Instruments and controls
WAC0655X
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
The displayed images may differ depend-
ing on the model.
1. Engine start operation indicator
This indicator appears when the shift
position is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will
start by pushing the ignition switch with
the brake pedal depressed. You can start
the engine directly in any position of the
ignition switch.
2. No Key Detected warning
This warning appears when the door is
closed with the Intelligent Key left outside
the vehicle and the engine is running.
Make sure that the Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle.
See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7) for
more details.
3. Shift to Park warning (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when the door is
opened while the shift position is other
than P (Park).
If this warning appears, push the park
button to engage the P (Park) position.
An inside warning chime will also sound.
(See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7).)
4. Key Battery Low warning
This warning appears when the Intelli-
gent Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator appears, replace the
battery with a new one. See “Intelligent
Key battery replacement” (P.8-25).
5. Engine start operation for Intelli-
gent Key system indicator
This indicator appears when the Intelli-
gent Key battery is running out of power
and when the Intelligent Key system and
vehicle are not communicating normally.
If this indicator appears, touch the igni-
tion switch with the Intelligent Key while
depressing the brake pedal. (See “Intelli-
gent Key battery discharge” (P.5-17).)
6. Key System Error: See Owner’s
Manual warning
This warning appears if there is a mal-
function in the Intelligent Key system.
If this warning appears while the engine is
stopped, the engine cannot be started. If
this warning appears while the engine is
running, the vehicle can be driven. How-
ever, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as
possible.
7. Release Parking Brake warning
This warning appears when the accel-
erator pedal is depressed when the
electronic parking brake automatic re-
lease function cannot be used. Release
the electronic parking brake manually.
8. Low Fuel warning
This warning appears when the fuel level
in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as
soon as it is convenient, preferably before
the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There
will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank
when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0
(Empty).
9. Low Washer Fluid warning (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when the window
washer fluid is at a low level. Add window
washer fluid as necessary. For additional
information, refer to “Window washer
fluid” (P.8-13).
10. Door/liftgate open warning
This warning appears if any of the doors
and/or the liftgate are open or not closed
securely. The vehicle icon indicates which
door or the liftgate is open on the display.
11. Rear seat belt warning
This warning appears for 35 seconds
after the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
This warning shows the status of the
three rear seat belts. When one of the rear
seat belts is buckled, the corresponding
rear seat belt indicator will appear gray.
When one of the rear seat belts is buckled
and becomes unbuckled, the correspond-
ing rear seat belt indicator will appear in
red. If this occurs while the vehicle speed
exceeds 10 MPH (15 km/h), a buzzer will
sound.
For precautions on seat belt usage, see
“Seat belts” (P.1-14).
12. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air
warning
This warning appears when the low tire
pressure warning light in the meter
illuminates and low tire pressure is de-
tected. The warning appears each time
the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position as long as the low tire pressure
warning light remains illuminated. If this
warning appears, stop the vehicle and
adjust the pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. (See “Low tire
pressure warning light” (P.2-18) and “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-
6).)
13. Shift to P range warning
This warning appears when the driver’s
door is opened while the shift lever is in
any position other than P (Park).
If this warning appears, push the park
button to engage the P (Park) position.
An inside warning chime will also sound.
(See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7).)
14. CVT Malfunction Service now
warning
This warning appears when there is a
malfunction with the CVT system. If this
warning appears, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
15. CVT hot Power reduced warning
The CVT has a high fluid temperature
protection mode. If the fluid temperature
becomes too high (for example, climbing
steep grades in high temperatures with
heavy loads, such as when towing a
trailer), engine power and, under some
conditions, vehicle speed will be de-
creased automatically to reduce the
chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
speed can be controlled with the accel-
erator pedal, but the engine and vehicle
speed may be reduced.
Instruments and controls 2-35
2-36 Instruments and controls
16. CVT Malfunction Stop safely
warning
This warning appears when there is a
malfunction with the CVT system. If this
warning appears, stop the vehicle in a
safe place. Have the system checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
17. Check position of shift lever
warning
This warning appears if the system can-
not detect the shift position. Make sure
the vehicle is placed in a position properly.
Have the system checked. It is recom-
mended you contact a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
18. When parked apply parking
brake warning
This warning appears if a malfunction
occurs in the electric shift control system.
Contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible. When parking the vehicle, make
sure that the parking brake is applied. If
the parking brake is not applied, the
ignition switch may not be turned off.
19. Continuously Variable Trans-
mission (CVT) position indicator
This indicator shows the CVT shift posi-
tion.
In the manual shift mode, when the
transmission does not shift to the se-
lected gear due to a transmission protec-
tion mode, the CVT position indicator will
blink and a chime will sound.
See “Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT)” (P.5-19) for further details.
20. Drive Mode Selector indicator
When a driving mode is selected using the
Drive Mode Selector, the selected mode
indicator is displayed.
. OFF-ROAD (AWD models)
. SNOW (AWD models)
. STANDARD (2WD models)
. AUTO (AWD models)
. ECO
. SPORT
(See “Drive Mode Selector” (P.5-31).)
21. AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual
warning (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly while the engine is running.
Reduce vehicle speed and have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. (See “Intelligent
4x4” (P.5-151).)
22. AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle
warning (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the oil tem-
perature of the powertrain parts in-
creases due to the difference in rotation
between the front and rear wheels is
large (wheel slip), such as when driving
on rough roads, driving through sand or
mud, or freeing a stuck vehicle. If this
warning is displayed, stop the vehicle with
the engine idling, as soon as it is safe to
do so. In these cases, the AWD changes to
2WD to protect the powertrain parts.
Then if the warning turns off, you can
continue AWD driving. (See “Intelligent
4x4” (P.5-151).)
23. Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s
Manual warning (if so equipped)
This warning may appear if there is a
large difference between the diameters of
front and rear wheels and tires. Pull off
the road in a safe area, with the engine
idling. Check that all the tire sizes, brand,
construction and tread pattern are the
same, that the tire pressures are correct
and that the tires are not excessively
worn. If you have any problems, change
tires or adjust tire pressures correctly. Do
not select the SNOW or OFF-ROAD mode
with the Drive Mode Selector and do not
drive fast. (See “Intelligent 4x4” (P.5-151).)
24. Shipping Mode On Push Storage
Fuse warning (if so equipped)
This warning may appear if the extended
storage switch is not pushed in. When this
warning appears, push in the extended
storage switch to turn off the warning.
(See “Extended storage switch” (P.8-25).)
25. Power will turn off to save the
battery warning
Under the specific conditions, this warn-
ing may appear after the ignition switch is
in the ON position for a certain period of
time.
26. Power turned off to save the
battery warning
Under the specific conditions, this warn-
ing may appear after the ignition switch is
automatically turned OFF to save the
battery.
27. Reminder Turn OFF Headlights
warning
This warning appears when the driver
side door is opened with the headlight
switch is left ON and the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. Place the
headlight switch in OFF (if so equipped)
or AUTO position. For additional informa-
tion, (See “Headlight and turn signal
switch” (P.2-57).)
28. Headlight System Error: See
Owner’s Manual warning
This warning appears if the LED head-
lights are malfunctioning. Have the sys-
tem checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
29. Time for a break? indicator
This indicator appears when the set
Timer Alert activates. You can set the
time for up to 6 hours.
30. Chassis Control System Error:
See Owner’s Manual warning
This warning appears if the chassis con-
trol module detects a malfunction in the
chassis control system. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service. (See
“Chassis control” (P.5-160).)
31. Rear Door Alert is activated
indicator
When the system is enabled, this message
appears when the Rear Door Alert system
is active and can remind the driver to
check the rear seat.
. Using the steering switch, the driver
can select “Dismiss Message” to clear
the display for a period of time.
. Using the steering switch, the driver
can select “Disable Alert” to disable the
horn alert for the remainder of the
current trip.
For additional information, see “Rear Door
Alert” (P.2-67).
WARNING
Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a
stop within a trip temporarily dis-
misses the message for that stop
without turning the system off.
Instruments and controls 2-37
2-38 Instruments and controls
Alerts can be provided for other
stops during the trip. Selecting “Dis-
able Alert” turns off the Rear Door
Alert system for the remainder of a
trip and no audible alert will be
provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until the driver
enables it using the settings menu. See
“Vehicle Settings” (P.2-27).
32. Check Rear Seat For all articles
indicator
When the system is enabled, this message
appears when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop, the shift position is placed
from the D (Drive) to P (Park), and the
driver exits the vehicle. This message
alerts the driver, after a period of time,
to check for items in the rear seat after
the audible alert has been provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until the driver
enables it using the settings menu. See
“Vehicle Settings” (P.2-27).
33. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
indicator
This indicator appears when the Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) and/or Intelli-
gent Lane Intervention (I-LI) (if so
equipped) systems are engaged.
(See “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” (P.5-
47) or “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)”
(P.5-52).)
34. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Intel-
ligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)
indicator
This indicator appears when the Blind
Spot Warning (BSW) and/or Intelligent
Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) (if so
equipped) systems are engaged.
(See “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” (P.5-58) or
“Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)”
(P.5-66).)
35. Vehicle ahead detection indica-
tor
This indicator shows the status of the
following systems:
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection
. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW)
(See “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection system” (P.5-
122) or “Intelligent Forward Collision Warn-
ing (I-FCW)” (P.5-132).)
36. Cruise indicator (if so equipped)
Models without Intelligent Cruise Con-
trol (ICC) system:
This indicator shows the cruise control
system status. The status is shown by the
color.
(See “Cruise control” (P.5-83).)
Models with Intelligent Cruise Control
(ICC) system:
This indicator shows the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode status.
The status is shown by the color.
(See “Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode” (P.5-119).)
37. Speed control status/set dis-
tance/lane marker indicator (if so
equipped)
This indicator shows the status of the
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
and the detection of the lane markers.
The status is shown by the color and
shape. (See “ProPILOT Assist” (P.5-85).)
38. Malfunction warning
This warning appears when the following
systems malfunction.
. Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection
. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW)
(See “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P.5-
77), “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection system” (P.5-
122) or “Intelligent Forward Collision Warn-
ing (I-FCW)” (P.5-132).)
39. Malfunction See Owner’s Man-
ual warning (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the following
systems malfunction.
. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (if so
equipped)
. Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
(See “Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)” (P.5-
44) or “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)”
(P.5-143).)
40. Not Available System Malfunc-
tion warning
This warning appears when the following
systems malfunction.
. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) (if so
equipped)
. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
. Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI) (if so equipped)
. ProPILOT Assist (if so equipped)
(See “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” (P.5-
47), “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)”
(P.5-52), “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” (P.5-
58) or “ProPILOT Assist” (P.5-85).)
41. Unavailable High Cabin Tem-
perature warning (if so equipped)
This warning appears if the interior tem-
perature of the vehicle has reached such
a high temperature that the sensor for
the following systems can no longer
function reliably.
. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) (if so
equipped)
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection
. Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI) (if so equipped)
. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (if so
equipped)
Once the interior temperature has
reached normal levels, the warning
should disappear.
If the warning continues to display, have
the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
For additional information, refer to “Lane
Departure Warning (LDW)” (P.5-47), “Intelli-
gent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-115),
“Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection system” (P.5-122),
“Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)”
(P.5-66) or “Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)”
(P.5-44).
42. Currently not available warning
This warning appears when the Intelli-
gent Lane Intervention (I-LI) (if so
equipped), Intelligent Blind Spot Interven-
tion (I-BSI) (if so equipped) or the Intelli-
gent Cruise Control (ICC) system (if so
equipped) becomes unavailable in the
following conditions:
. The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system is turned off
. The SNOW mode or the OFF-ROAD
mode is selected (AWD models).
For additional information, refer to “In-
telligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-52),
Instruments and controls 2-39
2-40 Instruments and controls
“Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)”
(P.5-66) or “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”
(P.5-98).
43. Forward Driving Aids tempora-
rily disabled Front Sensor blocked
warning
If the front radar sensor area on the front
of the vehicle is covered with dirt or
obstructed, making it impossible to de-
tect a vehicle ahead, the following system
is automatically turned off.
. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (on
ProPILOT Assist system) (if so
equipped)
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection
. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW)
If the warning message appears, park the
vehicle in a safe location and turn the
engine off.
Check to see if the sensor area is blocked.
If the sensor area is blocked, remove the
blocking material. Restart the engine. If
the warning message continues to ap-
pear, have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
For more details, see “ProPILOT Assist”
(P.5-85), “Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system”
(P.5-122) or “Intelligent Forward Collision
Warning (I-FCW)” (P.5-132).
44. Unavailable Side Radar Ob-
struction warning
This warning appears when the following
systems become unavailable because a
radar blockage is detected.
. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
. Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI) (if so equipped)
. Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
(See “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” (P.5-58),
“Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)”
(P.5-66) or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)”
(P.5-77).)
45. I-LI ON indicator/I-BSI ON indi-
cator/ProPILOT Assist status indi-
cator (if so equipped)
This indicator appears when the following
systems are turned on:
. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) (if so
equipped)
. Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI) (if so equipped)
. ProPILOT Assist (if so equipped)
See “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)”
(P.5-52), “Intelligent Blind Spot Interven-
tion (I-BSI)” (P.5-66) or “ProPILOT Assist”
(P.5-85).
46. Steering Assist indicator (if so
equipped)
This indicator appears when the Steering
Assist system is engaged.
See “ProPILOT Assist” (P.5-85).
47. Hands on detection warning (if
so equipped)
This warning may appear when the
Steering Assist system is engaged and
the following condition(s) occur:
. When not holding the steering wheel
. When there is no steering wheel
operation
Hold on the steering wheel immediately.
When the steering operation is detected,
the warning turns off and the Steering
Assist function is automatically restored.
For additional information, refer to “Pro-
PILOT Assist” (P.5-85).
48. Press Brake Pedal indicator (if
so equipped)
This message may appear when the
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is
engaged and the following condition
occurs:
. While the vehicle is stopped by the ICC
system, the driver’s door is opened but
the electronic parking brake was not
activated.
Step on the brake pedal immediately.
49. Not Available Poor Road Condi-
tions warning (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the following
systems become unavailable because the
road is slippery.
. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) (if so
equipped)
. Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI) (if so equipped)
. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so
equipped)
(See “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)”
(P.5-52), “Intelligent Blind Spot Interven-
tion (I-BSI)” (P.5-66) or “Intelligent Cruise
Control (ICC)” (P.5-98).)
50. Not Available Seat Belt Not
Fastened indicator (if so equipped)
This message may appear when the
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is
engaged.
Under the following condition, the ICC
system is automatically canceled:
. When the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened.
The ICC system cannot be used when the
driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
51. Not Available Bad Weather in-
dicator (if so equipped)
This message may appear when the
Steering Assist system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the Steer-
ing Assist system is automatically can-
celed:
. When the wiper (HI) operates.
. When lane markers in the traveling
lane cannot be correctly detected for
a period of time due to such items as a
snow rut, reflection of light on a rainy
day or several unclear lane markers
are present.
If you want to use the Steering Assist
system again, cancel the ProPILOT Assist
system and set it again when lane
markers are clearly visible.
52. Not Available Front Camera
Obstructed indicator (if so
equipped)
This message may appear when the
Steering Assist system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the Steer-
ing Assist system is automatically can-
celed:
. The camera area of the windshield is
fogged up or covered with dirt, water,
drops, ice, snow, etc.
. Strong light, such as sunlight or high
beams from oncoming vehicles, enter
the front camera
53. Steering Assist Not Available
Cannot Detect Lane indicator (if so
equipped)
This indicator may appear when the
Steering Assist system is engaged. The
Steering Assist system is automatically
canceled when the lane markers in the
traveling lane cannot be correctly de-
tected for a period of time due to such
items as a snow rut, reflection of light on
a rainy day or several unclear lane mar-
kers are present.
If you want to use the Steering Assist
system again, cancel the ProPILOT sys-
tem and set it again when lane markers
are clearly visible.
54. Not Available Parking Brake On
indicator (if so equipped)
This message may appear when the
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is
engaged.
Under the following condition, the ICC
system is automatically canceled:
. The electronic parking brake is ap-
plied.
The above system cannot be used when
Instruments and controls 2-41
2-42 Instruments and controls
the electronic parking brake is activated.
55. Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) emergency warning indicator
This warning indicator appears along
with an audible warning, when the Auto-
matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe-
destrian Detection system detects the
possibility of a forward collision.
See “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection system” (P.5-
122).
56. Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
system warning indicator
This warning indicator appears to indi-
cate the status of the Rear Automatic
Braking (RAB) system.
See “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P.5-
143).
57. Sonar system/Rear Sonar Sys-
tem (RSS) indicator
This indicator appears to indicate the
status of the sonar system (if so
equipped) or the Rear Sonar System
(RSS) (if so equipped).
See “Sonar system” (P.5-162) or “Rear
Sonar System (RSS)” (P.5-168).
58. Parking Sensor Error warning
This warning appears when there is a
malfunction with the sonar system (if so
equipped) or the Rear Sonar System (RSS)
(if so equipped). (See “Sonar system” (P.5-
162) or “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P.5-
168).)
59. Press brake pedal to prevent
rolling warning
This warning appears in the following
situations:
. The driver tries to release the electro-
nic parking brake manually without
depressing the brake pedal.
. The vehicle is stopped on a steep hill
and there is a possibility of moving
backward, even if the electronic park-
ing brake is applied.
. This warning appears if the vehicle
moves while the automatic brake hold
is activated.
60. Press brake to operate switch
indicator
This indicator appears if the automatic
brake hold switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal while the
automatic brake hold function is acti-
vated. Depress the brake pedal and push
the switch to deactivate the automatic
brake hold function. (See “Automatic
brake hold” (P.5-28).)
61. Caution Steep slope indicator
This indicator appears when the auto-
matic brake hold function is activated
while the vehicle is on a steep hill. (See
“Automatic brake hold” (P.5-28).)
62. Steep Slope Apply foot brake
indicator
This indicator appears if “Caution Steep
slope indicator” has appeared over about
3 minutes. Then, the parking brake will
automatically be applied and the brake
force of the automatic brake hold will be
released, and vehicle may move or roll
away unexpectedly. Apply the foot brake
to stop the vehicle moving. (See “Auto-
matic brake hold” (P.5-28).)
63. Take a Break? indicator
This indicator appears when the Intelli-
gent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system detect
that the driver attention is decreasing.
(See “Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)”
(P.5-141).)
64. Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)
malfunction warning
This warning appears when the Intelli-
gent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system mal-
functions. (See “Intelligent Driver Alertness
(I-DA)” (P.5-141).)
65. Neutral Hold Mode guidance
indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator appears when the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position while
the shift position is in the N (Neutral)
position (Neutral hold mode is available).
(See “Neutral hold mode function” (P.5-
22).)
66. Neutral Hold Mode activated
indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator appears when the Neutral
hold mode is activated. To exit the Neutral
hold mode, place the vehicle in other than
N (Neutral) position. (See “Neutral hold
mode function” (P.5-22).)
67. Neutral Hold Mode was not
activated indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator appears when the Neutral
hold mode is unavailable. To activate the
Neutral hold mode, wait for a while with-
out shifting and then perform the opera-
tions again. (See “Neutral hold mode
function” (P.5-22).)
68. Low Oil Level warning (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when the engine oil
level is low. Warm up the engine on a level
surface. After at least 10 minutes have
passed since the engine was stopped, use
the engine oil dipstick to check the oil
level. (See “Engine oil” (P.8-8).) If the oil
level is low, add the engine oil.
If the warning appears again before
reaching the oil change interval shown
in the “9. Maintenance and schedules”
section, check the oil level. When the
warning appears and the oil level is low,
have the vehicle checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not on a level surface,
accurate measurement of the oil level
may not be possible. If “Low Oil Level”
warning message appears, but the level
shown by the oil dipstick is normal,
move the vehicle to a level surface and
stop the engine. After at least 10 min-
utes have passed, open the driver’s
door and place the ignition switch in
the ON position. If the “Low Oil Level”
warning message appears again, add
the engine oil or change the engine oil,
according to the instructions described
above.
69. Sensor Fault See Owner’s Man-
ual warning (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the engine oil
level sensor may be malfunctioning. It is
recommended you contact a NISSAN
dealer immediately.
70. Engine Oil Service due in – – –
miles
This distance to oil change is displayed if
the distance to oil change is less than 62
miles (100 km).
71. Stop the vehicle warning (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when the CVT
system judges the vehicle is reversed on
an uphill road with the shift position in D
(Drive), or moved forward on a downhill
road with the shift position in R (Reverse).
The engine may stall, so stop the vehicle
movement by depressing the brake ped-
Instruments and controls 2-43
2-44 Instruments and controls
al.
72. Service CVT Power reduced
warning (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the CVT
power is reduced. If this warning appears,
have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
WAC0660X
Instruments and controls 2-45
2-46 Instruments and controls
WAC0313X
TRIP COMPUTER
Switches for the trip computer are lo-
cated on the left side of the steering
wheel.
Scroll dial - navigate through the items
and change or select an item in vehicle
information display
this scroll dial allows up/down navigation
and push to select
- go back to the previous menu
- change from one display screen
to the next (i.e. trip, Fuel economy)
The displayed images may differ depend-
ing on the model.
1. Home
The Home mode shows the following
information.
. Vehicle speed
. Navigation (if so equipped)
. Audio
2. Speed and Average speed (if so
equipped)
The Speed and Average speed mode
shows the current vehicle speed and the
average vehicle speed since the last reset.
The Speed and Average speed mode have
three modes of operation. You can switch
between Manual Reset1, Manual Reset2 or
Auto Refuel by pushing the scroll dial
.
Manual Reset1 can be reset manually by
using the scroll dial
.
Manual Reset2 can be reset manually by
using the scroll dial
, or will be reset
automatically each time the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position (if so
equipped).
Auto Refuel will be reset automatically
each time when refueling.
3. Drive Computer
Average fuel consumption:
The average fuel consumption shows the
average fuel consumption since the last
reset.
Average speed:
The average speed shows the average
vehicle speed since the last reset.
Trip odometer:
The trip odometer shows the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven since
the last reset.
Elapsed time:
The elapsed time shows the time since
the last reset.
The Drive Computer mode have three
modes of operation. You can switch
between Manual Reset1, Manual Reset2
or Auto Refuel by pushing the scroll dial
.
Manual Reset1 can be reset manually by
using the scroll dial
.
Manual Reset2 can be reset manually by
using the scroll dial
, or will be reset
automatically each time the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position (if so
equipped).
Auto Refuel will be reset automatically
each time when refueling.
4. Fuel Economy display
Current fuel consumption:
The Fuel economy display mode shows
the current fuel consumption.
Average fuel consumption:
The Fuel economy display mode shows
the average fuel consumption since the
last reset.
The Fuel economy display mode have
three modes of operation. You can switch
between Manual Reset1, Manual Reset2 or
Auto Refuel by pushing the scroll dial
.
Manual Reset1 can be reset manually by
using the scroll dial
.
Manual Reset2 can be reset manually by
using the scroll dial
, or will be reset
automatically each time the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position (if so
equipped).
Auto Refuel will be reset automatically
each time when refueling.
5. ECO Pedal Guide
When the ECO mode is selected, you can
view the ECO Pedal Guide function for
improving fuel economy.
The ECO Pedal Guide mode have three
modes of operation. You can switch
between Manual Reset1, Manual Reset2
or Auto Refuel by pushing the scroll dial
.
Manual Reset1 can be reset manually by
using the scroll dial
.
Manual Reset2 can be reset manually by
using the scroll dial
, or will be reset
automatically each time the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position (if so
equipped).
Auto Refuel will be reset automatically
each time when refueling.
(See “ECO Pedal Guide function” (P.5-33).)
6. Tire Pressures
The tire pressure mode shows the pres-
sure of all four tires while the vehicle is
driven.
With the “Tire Pres ECO advice” function
ON, when the tire pressure is getting low,
”Check Tire Pressures for Best Fuel Econ-
omy” appears. (See “ECO Mode Setting”
(P.2-26) and “Tire Pres ECO advice” (P.5-
33).)
When the Tire Pressure Low — Add Air
warning appears, the display can be
switched to the tire pressure mode by
pushing the scroll dial
to reveal addi-
tional details on the displayed warning.
7. Intelligent 4x4 torque distribution
display (if so equipped)
When the Intelligent 4x4 torque distribu-
tion display is selected, you can view the
distribution ratio of the transmission
torque to the front and rear wheels
during driving.
8. Variable Compression Turbo (if
so equipped)
Variable Compression Turbo mode shows
the status of Variable Compression Turbo
information. (See “Variable Compression
Turbo” (P.2-12).)
9. Compass (if so equipped)
This display indicates the heading direc-
tion of the vehicle.
10. Navigation (if so equipped)
When the route guidance is set in the
navigation system, this item shows the
navigation route information.
Instruments and controls 2-47
2-48 Instruments and controls
11. Audio
The audio mode shows the status of
audio information.
12. Driver Assistance
The Driver Assistance mode shows the
operating condition for the following
systems.
. Forward:
— Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) with Pedestrian Detection
system
— Intelligent Forward Collision Warn-
ing (I-FCW)
. Lane:
— Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
— Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) (if
so equipped)
. Blind Spot:
— Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
— Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention
(I-BSI) (if so equipped)
For more details, see “Automatic Emer-
gency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian De-
tection system” (P.5-122), “Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)” (P.5-47), “Intelligent Lane
Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-52), “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)” (P.5-58) or “Intelligent
Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)” (P.5-66).
13. ProPILOT Assist (if so equipped)
The ProPILOT Assist mode shows the
operating conditions for the following
systems:
. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
. Steering Assist
The display will also be shown when the
ProPILOT Assist is turned on. For addi-
tional information, see “ProPILOT Assist”
(P.5-85).
14. Traffic Sign Recognition (if so
equipped)
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system
provides the driver with information
about the most recently detected speed
limit. See “Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)”
(P.5-44) for more details.
WAC0521X
CLOCK AND OUTSIDE AIR TEM-
PERATURE
The clock and outside air temperature
are displayed on the upper side of the
vehicle information display.
Clock
For clock adjustment, see “Clock” (P.2-27)
or the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped).
Outside air temperature (°F or °C)
The outside air temperature is displayed
in °F or °C in the range of −40 to 140°F (−40
to 60°C).
The outside air temperature mode in-
cludes a low temperature warning fea-
ture. If the outside air temperature is
below 27°F (−3°C), the indicator
is
displayed.
The outside temperature sensor is lo-
cated in front of the radiator. The sensor
may be affected by road or engine heat,
wind directions and other driving condi-
tions. The display may differ from the
actual outside temperature or the tem-
perature displayed on various signs or
billboards.
WAC0417X
WAC0544X
WARNING
. Failure to properly adjust the
brightness and position of the
displayed image may interfere
with the driver’s ability to see
through the windshield, which
could cause an accident leading
to severe injury or death.
. Do not use the Head Up Display
(HUD) for extended periods of
time as that can cause you to
not see other vehicles, pedes-
trians or objects, which could
cause an accident leading to se-
vere injury or death.
The Head Up Display (HUD) can display
one or more of the following features (if
so equipped):
Vehicle speed
Navigation
Driving Assist
Traffic Sign
Audio
TEL/SMS
Instruments and controls 2-49
HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) (if so equipped)
2-50 Instruments and controls
NOTE:
. Do not place any type of liquid on or
near the projector. Doing so may
cause malfunction of the equip-
ment.
WAC0515X
. Do not touch any internal parts of
the projector. Doing so may cause
malfunction of the equipment.
. To prevent scratches to the projec-
tor glass, do not place any sharp
objects on or near the projector
opening.
. Do not place any objects on the
instrument panel which may ob-
struct the display of the HUD.
. If you wear polarized sunglasses, the
display may be difficult to see. In-
crease the brightness of the HUD in
the vehicle information display or
remove your sunglasses.
. Depending on weather conditions
(rain, snow, sunlight, etc.), the dis-
play may be difficult to see.
JVI1787X
HOW TO USE THE HUD
To turn the HUD on, push the HUD switch.
To turn the HUD off, push the switch
again.
If the HUD is turned off, it will remain off
even if the vehicle is restarted.
The following settings can be changed in
the vehicle information display:
. Brightness
. Height
. Rotation
. Contents selection
— Navigation (if so equipped)
— Driving Assist
— Speed Limit Sign
— Audio
— TEL/SMS
. Reset
NOTE:
Emergency information may display
even if the HUD is turned off.
This product includes the following soft-
ware.
(1) Panasonic Corporation or software
developed for Panasonic Corporation
(2) Third-party software licensed to Pana-
sonic Corporation
(3) Open source software
Regarding (3) Open source software, it
includes open source software (OSS),
including various software to which li-
cense information applies.
Refer to the license web site at: http://car.
panasonic.jp/oss/i02lln39
Display brightness
The brightness of the display may be
controlled in the vehicle information dis-
play. The brightness will also be adjusted
automatically according to the exterior
ambient lighting brightness.
WAC0516X
NOTE:
. The HUD has a built-in sensor
that
controls the brightness of the dis-
played image. If you block the sen-
sor with an object, the display will
darken, making it difficult to see.
Instruments and controls 2-51
2-52 Instruments and controls
DRIVER ASSISTANCE/NAVIGATION/
TRAFFIC SIGN/AUDIO/TEL/SMS
LINKING
The HUD will display Driver Assistance and
navigation information.
The Driver Assistance display will show
warning situations for the following sys-
tems:
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection
. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW)
. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
. Hands-free warning (for vehicles with
ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped)
The Navigation System linking display will
show the following items:
. Intersection names
. Arrows indicating turning direction
. Distance to the next intersection
. Recommended lane indicator
The Traffic Signs Recognition (TSR) sys-
tem linking display will show the following
items:
. Speed Limit Sign
. No Entry Sign
The Audio System linking display will
show the following items:
. Songs
. Radio stations
The TEL/SMS linking display will show the
following item:
. Caller’s name or phone number
JVI1587X
Your vehicle has two types of security
systems, as follows:
. Vehicle security system (if so
equipped)
. NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
The vehicle security system provides
visual and audio alarm signals if someone
opens the doors, hood and liftgate when
the system is armed. It is not, however, a
motion detection type system that acti-
vates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
SECURITY SYSTEMS
theft of interior or exterior vehicle com-
ponents in all situations. Always secure
your vehicle even if parking for a brief
period. Never leave your keys in the
vehicle, and always lock it when unat-
tended. Be aware of your surroundings,
and park in secure, well-lit areas when-
ever possible.
Many devices offering additional protec-
tion, such as component locks, identifica-
tion markers, and tracking systems, are
available at auto supply stores and speci-
alty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also
offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be
eligible for discounts for various theft
protection features.
How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.
2. Remove the keys from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock
all doors. The doors can be locked
with Intelligent Key, door handle re-
quest switch (if so equipped).
Even when the driver and/or passen-
gers are in the vehicle, the system will
activate with all the doors, hood and
liftgate locked with the ignition switch
placed in the OFF position. When pla-
cing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the system will be released.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the
following alarm:
. The headlights or the hazard indicator
lights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
. The alarm automatically turns off
after approximately 30 seconds. How-
ever, the alarm reactivates if the
vehicle is tampered with again.
The alarm is activated by:
. opening any doors, the hood or lift-
gate without using Intelligent Key
(even if the door is unlocked by
releasing the door inside lock knob).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops by pushing the UNLOCK
button on the Intelligent Key, pushing
the request switch (if so equipped) in
range of the door handle or placing the
ignition switch in the ON position.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-
TEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.
If the engine does not start using the
registered Intelligent Key, it may be due to
interference caused by:
. Another Intelligent Key.
. Automated toll road device.
. Automated payment device.
. Other devices that transmit similar
signals.
Start the engine using the following
procedure:
1. Remove any items that may be caus-
ing the interference away from the
Intelligent Key.
2. Start the engine again.
If this procedure allows the engine to
start, NISSAN recommends placing the
registered Intelligent Key separate from
other devices to avoid interference.
Statement related to section 15 of FCC
rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System (CONT ASSY-SMART KEYLESS)
FCC Notice:
For USA:
FCC ID : KR5HFM401
Instruments and controls 2-53
2-54 Instruments and controls
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
For Canada:
IC ID : 7812D–HFM401
This device complies with Industry Ca-
nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the wind-
shield and obscure your vision which
may lead to an accident. Warm wind-
shield with the defroster before you
wash the windshield.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 30 sec-
onds.
. Do not operate the washer if the
reservoir tank is empty.
. Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength.
Some methyl alcohol based
washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the window
washer reservoir tank.
. Pre-mix washer fluid concen-
trates with water to the manu-
facturer’s recommended levels
before pouring the fluid into the
window washer reservoir tank. Do
not use the window washer re-
servoir tank to mix the washer
fluid concentrate and water.
If the windshield wiper operation is
interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper
may stop moving to protect its motor. If
this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the
OFF position and remove the snow or
ice that is on and around the wiper
arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn
the switch on again to operate the
wiper.
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
WAC0317X
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
OPERATION
The windshield wiper and washer oper-
ates when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper
at the following speed:
Intermittent — intermittent operation can
be adjusted by turning the knob toward
(Faster) or (Slower). Also, the inter-
mittent operation speed varies in accor-
dance with the vehicle speed. (For
example, when the vehicle speed is high,
the intermittent operation speed will be
faster.)
Low — continuous low speed operation
High — continuous high speed operation
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position while the wiper operates in the
high speed position, the wiper will not
operate the next time the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position. To operate
the wiper, move the lever to any position
other than high speed.
Push the lever up to have one sweep
operation of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you
to operate the
washer. Then the wiper will also operate
several times.
NOTE:
The Speed Dependent feature may be
disabled. For additional information,
refer to “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-27).
CAUTION
Do not operate the windshield wiper
while the wiper arm is pulled up. The
wiper arm may be damaged.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER
OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the rear
window glass and obscure your vi-
sion. Warm the rear window with the
defroster before you wash the rear
window.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 30 sec-
onds.
. Do not operate the washer if the
reservoir tank is empty.
. Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength.
Some methyl alcohol based
washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the window
washer reservoir tank.
Instruments and controls 2-55
2-56 Instruments and controls
. Pre-mix washer fluid concen-
trates with water to the manu-
facturer’s recommended levels
before pouring the fluid into the
window washer reservoir tank. Do
not use the window washer re-
servoir tank to mix the washer
fluid concentrate and water.
If the rear window wiper operation is
interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper
may stop moving to protect its motor. If
this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the
OFF position and remove the snow or
ice that is on and around the wiper
arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn
the switch on again to operate the
wiper.
WAC0318X
The rear window wiper and washer
operate when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF
position to operate the wiper.
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent opera-
tion (not adjustable)
Low (ON) — continuous low speed opera-
tion
Push the switch forward to operate the
washer. Then the wiper will also operate
several times.
Reverse Link feature:
When the windshield wiper switch is on,
moving the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
position will operate the rear window
wiper.
NOTE:
The Reverse Link feature may be dis-
abled. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-27).
WAC0418X
Type A (if so equipped)
WAC0419X
Type B (if so equipped)
WAC0536X
Type C (if so equipped)
To defog/defrost the rear window glass
and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start
the engine and push the switch on. The
indicator light
will illuminate. Push the
switch again to turn the defroster off.
It will automatically turn off in approxi-
mately 20 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the
rear window, be careful not to
scratch or damage the rear window
defroster.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine
running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Instruments and controls 2-57
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR
(if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCH
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
2-58 Instruments and controls
WAC0533X
Example
Lighting
Type A (if so equipped):
Rotate the switch to the position, and
the front parking, tail, license plate, and
instrument panel lights will come on.
Rotate the switch to the position, and
the headlights will come on and all the
other lights remain on. The daytime run-
ning light will turn off.
WAC0319X
Example
Type B (if so equipped):
Rotate the switch to the position, and
the front parking, tail, license plate, and
instrument panel lights will come on.
The Intelligent Auto Headlight system will
also be set in this position.
Rotate the switch to the position, and
the headlights will come on and all the
other lights remain on. The daytime run-
ning light will turn off.
WAC0560X
Example
Intelligent Auto Headlight system
Type A (if so equipped):
The Intelligent Auto Headlight system
allows the headlights to be set so they
turn on and off automatically.
To set the Intelligent Auto Headlight
system:
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position
.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position.
3. The Intelligent Auto Headlight system
automatically turns the headlights on
and off.
To turn the Intelligent Auto Headlight
system off, turn the switch to the OFF,
or position.
The Intelligent Auto Headlight system can
turn on the headlights automatically
when it is dark and turn off the headlights
when it is light.
The headlights will also be turned on
automatically at twilight or in rainy
weather (when the windshield wiper is
operated continuously).
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and one of the doors is opened
and this condition is continued, the head-
lights remain on for 5 minutes.
WAC0320X
Example
Type B (if so equipped):
The Intelligent Auto Headlight system
allows the headlights to be set so they
turn on and off automatically.
To set the Intelligent Auto Headlight
system:
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in
the
or AUTO position .
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position.
3. The Intelligent Auto Headlight system
automatically turns the headlights on
and off.
To turn the Intelligent Auto Headlight
system off, turn the switch to the
position.
The Intelligent Auto Headlight system can
turn on the headlights automatically
when it is dark and turn off the headlights
when it is light.
If the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position when the parking brake is ap-
plied, the headlights remain off.
With the
position selected, the head-
lights turn off when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, the shift
position is placed in the P (Park) position
or the parking brake is applied. (The front
parking, tail, license plate, and instrument
panel lights are on.)
The headlights will also be turned on
automatically at twilight or in rainy
weather (when the windshield wiper is
operated continuously).
With the AUTO position selected (head-
lights are on), if the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position and one of the
doors is opened and this condition is
continued, the headlights remain on for
5 minutes.
Instruments and controls 2-59
2-60 Instruments and controls
WAC0522X
Be sure not to put anything on top of
the photo sensor
located on the top
of the instrument panel. The photo
sensor controls the Intelligent Auto
Headlight; if it is covered, the photo
sensor reacts as if it is dark and the
headlights will illuminate.
Automatic headlights off delay:
You can keep the headlights on for up to
180 seconds after you place the ignition
switch in the OFF and open any door then
close all the doors. You can adjust the
period of the automatic headlights off
delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to 180 sec-
onds. The factory default setting is 45
seconds.
For automatic headlights off delay
setting, see “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-27).
WAC0321X
Example
Headlight beam select
To select the high beam, push the lever
forward and release it. The high beam
lights come on and the
light illumi-
nates.
Pull the lever back and release it to select
the low beam.
To flash the headlights when the high
beam is not selected, pull the lever
towards the rear position. To flash the
headlights when the high beam is se-
lected, pull the lever twice towards the
rear position.
High beam assist
The high beam assist system will operate
when the vehicle is driven at speeds of
approximately 19 MPH (30 km/h) and
above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading
vehicle appears in front of your vehicle
when the headlight high beam is on, the
headlight will be switched to the low
beam automatically.
Precautions on high beam assist:
WARNING
. The high beam assist system is a
convenience but it is not a sub-
stitute for safe driving operation.
The driver should remain alert at
all times, ensure safe driving
practices and switch the high
beams and low beam manually
when necessary.
. The high beam or low beam may
not switch automatically under
the following conditions. Switch
the high beam and low beam
manually.
— During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, wind, etc.).
— When a light source similar to
a headlight or tail light is in
the vicinity of the vehicle.
— When the headlights of the
oncoming vehicle or the lead-
ing vehicle are turned off,
when the color of the light is
affected due to foreign mate-
rials on the lights, or when the
light beam is out of position.
— When there is a sudden, con-
tinuous change in brightness.
— When driving on a road that
passes over rolling hills, or a
road that has level differ-
ences.
— When driving on a road with
many curves.
— When a sign or mirror-like
surface is reflecting intense
light towards the front of the
vehicle.
— When the container, etc. being
towed by a leading vehicle is
reflecting intense light.
— When a headlight on your
vehicle is damaged or dirty.
— When the vehicle is leaning at
an angle due to a punctured
tire, being towed, etc.
. The timing of switching the low
beam and high beam may
change under the following situa-
tions.
— The brightness of the head-
lights of the oncoming vehicle
or leading vehicle.
— The movement and direction
of the oncoming vehicle and
the leading vehicle.
— When only one light on the
oncoming vehicle or the lead-
ing vehicle is illuminated.
— When the oncoming vehicle or
the leading vehicle is a two-
wheeled vehicle.
— Road conditions (incline,
curve, the road surface, etc.).
— The number of passengers
and the amount of cargo.
Instruments and controls 2-61
2-62 Instruments and controls
WAC0322X
Example
High beam assist operations:
To activate the high beam assist system,
push the switch as illustrated with the
AUTO position (or
position, depend-
ing on the model). The high beam assist
indicator light in the meter will illuminate
while the headlights are turned on.
If the high beam assist indicator light
does not illuminate in the above condi-
tion, it may indicate that the system is not
functioning properly. It is recommended
you have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 13 MPH (20 km/h), the
headlight remains the low beam.
To turn off the high beam assist system,
push the switch again.
WAC0523X
Ambient image sensor maintenance:
The ambient image sensor
for the high
beam assist system is located in front of
the inside mirror. To keep the proper
operation of the high beam assist system
and prevent a system malfunction, be
sure to observe the following:
. Always keep the windshield clean.
. Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an
accessory near the ambient image
sensor.
. Do not strike or damage the areas
around the ambient image sensor. Do
not touch the sensor lens that is
located on the ambient image sensor.
If the ambient image sensor is damaged
due to an accident, it is recommended
you contact a NISSAN dealer.
Battery saver system
. When the headlight switch is in the
or position while the ignition
switch is in the ON position, the lights
will automatically turn off within a
period of time after the ignition switch
has been placed in the OFF position.
. When the headlight switch remains in
the
or position after the lights
automatically turn off, the lights will
turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
CAUTION
. When you turn on the headlight
switch again after the lights auto-
matically turn off, the lights will
not turn off automatically. Be
sure to turn the light switch to
the OFF (if so equipped) or the
AUTO position when you leave
the vehicle for extended periods
of time, otherwise the battery will
be discharged.
. Never leave the light switch on
when the engine is not running
for extended periods of time even
if the headlights turn off auto-
matically.
Daytime Running Light (DRL) sys-
tem
The LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
automatically illuminate when the engine
is started and the parking brake is
released. The LED DRL operate with the
headlight switch in the OFF (if so
equipped),
, or AUTO (when the head-
lights are off) position. When you turn the
headlight switch to the
position for
full illumination, the LED lights switch
from LED DRL to the park function.
Type A: If the parking brake is applied
before the engine is started, the LED DRL
do not illuminate. The LED DRL illuminate
when the parking brake is released. This
feature will work in the
, AUTO or OFF
position. The LED DRL will remain on until
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
Type B: If the parking brake is applied
before the engine is started, the LED DRL
do not illuminate. The LED DRL illuminate
when the parking brake is released. This
feature will work in the AUTO or
position. The LED DRL will remain on until
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active
with the headlight switch in the OFF
position (if so equipped), tail lights
on your vehicle are not on. It is
necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could
cause an accident injuring yourself
and others.
Instruments and controls 2-63
2-64 Instruments and controls
WAC0323X
Example
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is com-
pleted, the turn signals cancel automati-
cally.
Lane change signal
Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does
not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold
the lever until the lane change is com-
pleted.
Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does
not latch, and release the lever. The turn
signal will automatically flash three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal
a lane change based on road and traffic
conditions.
WAC0324X
Example
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the head-
light switch to the
position, then turn
the fog light switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights on with the head-
light switch in the AUTO position, the
headlights must be on, then turn the fog
light switch to the
position.
To turn them off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on for the fog
lights to operate.
The fog lights automatically turn off when
the high beam headlights are selected.
WAC0565X
To sound the horn, push the center pad
area of the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing
so could affect proper operation of
the supplemental front air bag sys-
tem. Tampering with the supple-
mental front air bag system may
result in serious personal injury.
WAC0420X
Example
Push the heated steering wheel switch to
warm the steering wheel after the engine
starts. The indicator light
on the switch
will illuminate.
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is below 86 to 104°F (30 to 40°C),
the system will heat the steering wheel
and cycle off and on to maintain a
temperature above 86 to 104°F (30 to
40°C). The indicator light will remain on as
long as the system is on.
The heated steering wheel system is
automatically turned off after 30 minutes.
Push the switch again to turn the heated
steering wheel system off manually. The
indicator light will turn off.
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occu-
pants cannot monitor elevated seat
temperatures or have an inability to
feel pain in body parts that contact
the seat. Use of the seat heater by
such people could result in serious
injury.
CAUTION
. The battery could run down if the
seat heater is operated while the
engine is not running.
. Do not use the seat heater for
extended periods or when no one
is using the seat.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates heat, such as a
blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.
Otherwise, the seat may become
overheated.
. Do not place anything hard or
heavy on the seat or pierce it with
a pin or similar object. This may
result in damage to the heater.
Instruments and controls 2-65
HORN
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped)
HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
2-66 Instruments and controls
. Any liquid spilled on the heated
seat should be removed immedi-
ately with a dry cloth.
. When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, thinner, or any similar
materials.
. If any malfunctions are found or
the heated seat does not operate,
turn the switch off and have the
system checked. It is recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
WAC0524X
Front
WAC0525X
Rear (if so equipped)
The front and rear (if so equipped) seats
are warmed by built-in heaters. The
switches are located on the instrument
panel and the back of the center console
box and can be operated independently
of each other.
OPERATION WITH SWITCH
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the heated seat switch and
select the desired heat range.
.
For high heat, push the switch once.
.
For medium heat, push the switch
twice.
.
For low heat, push the switch three
times.
.
The indicator light on the switch
will illuminate depending on the
heat level when the heater is on.
3. To turn off the heater, push the
heated seat switch until the indicator
light turns off.
The heater is controlled by a control
module, automatically adjusting the
heat level to maintain comfort accord-
ing to the selected heat range.
The indicator light will remain on as
long as the switch is on.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,
or before you leave the vehicle, be
sure to turn off the seat heater.
WAF0222X
The Steering Assist switch is used to
temporarily turn on and off the Steering
Assist system.
You can also use the “Driver Assistance”
menu in the vehicle information display to
turn on and off the Steering Assist
system. (See “How to enable/disable the
Steering Assist” (P.5-97).)
The Steering Assist system controls the
steering system to help keep your vehicle
near the center of the lane when driving.
(See “ProPILOT Assist” (P.5-85).)
The Rear Door Alert system functions
under certain conditions to indicate there
may be an object or passenger in the rear
seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting
the vehicle.
The Rear Door Alert system is initially
disabled. The driver can enable the sys-
tem using the vehicle information display.
(See “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-27).)
When the system is enabled:
. The system is activated when a rear
door is opened and closed. When the
vehicle is started and the system is
activated, a visual message appears in
the vehicle information display. (See
“31. Rear Door Alert is activated indi-
cator” (P.2-37).)
. If a rear door is opened and closed but
the vehicle is not driven, the system
will not be activated. A rear door must
be opened and closed and the car
driven for the system to activate.
. The time interval to activate the
system between when the rear door
is opened and closed and the vehicle
is started is about 10 minutes. A longer
interval does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
When the Rear Door Alert system is
activated:
. When the driver puts the vehicle in the
P (Park) position, a notification mes-
sage appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display with the options to
“Dismiss Message” or “Disable Alert” if
desired.
— Select “Disable Alert” to temporarily
disable for that stop.
— No selection or ‘Dismiss Message”
will keep the alert enabled for that
stop.
. If the alert is enabled when a driver
exits the vehicle, a message will ap-
pear in the vehicle information display
that states “Check Rear Seat for All
Articles.”
If “Horn & Alert” setting is selected:
— An audible horn sound will occur
after a short time unless a rear
door is opened and closed within a
short time to deactivate the alert.
— If the doors are locked before the
alert is deactivated by opening a
rear door, the horn will sound.
— If the liftgate is opened before a
rear door is opened, the horn will be
delayed until after the liftgate is
closed.
NOTE:
If “Alert Only” setting is selected, the
message alert will still be shown in the
Instruments and controls 2-67
STEERING ASSIST SWITCH (models
with ProPILOT Assist)
REAR DOOR ALERT
2-68 Instruments and controls
vehicle information display but the horn
will not sound.
WARNING
. If the driver selects “Disable
Alert”, no audible alert will be
provided regardless of rear door
open/close status.
. There may be times when there is
an object or passenger in the rear
seat(s) but the audible alert does
not sound. For example, this may
occur if rear seat passengers
enter or exit the vehicle during a
trip.
. The system does not directly
detect objects or passengers in
the rear seat(s). Instead, it can
detect when a rear door is
opened and closed, indicating
that there may be something in
the rear seat(s).
NOTE:
There may be times when the horn
sounds but there are no objects or
passengers in the rear seat(s).
(See “31. Rear Door Alert is activated
indicator” (P.2-37).)
WAC0325X
Instrument Panel
WAC0421X
Luggage area
The power outlets are located in the
lower part of the instrument panel and
in the luggage area.
CAUTION
. The outlet and plug may be hot
during or immediately after use.
. Do not use with accessories that
exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A)
power draw. Do not use double
adapters or more than one elec-
trical accessory.
. Use power outlet with the engine
running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
. Avoid using power outlet when
the air conditioner, headlights or
rear window defroster is on.
. This power outlet is not designed
for use with a cigarette lighter
unit.
. Push the plug in as far as it will
go. If good contact is not made,
the plug may overheat.
. Before inserting or disconnecting
a plug, be sure the electrical
accessory being used is turned
OFF.
POWER OUTLETS
. When not in use, be sure to close
the cap. Do not allow water or any
liquid to contact the outlet.
WAC0326X
USB (Universal Serial Bus) CHAR-
GING CONNECTOR (if so equipped)
The USB charging connector is located on
the back of the center console box.
The USB charging connector can be used
only for charging an external device.
Connect a USB device into the connector.
Charging will start automatically (max-
imum output up to 5 volt, 12W, 2.4A).
The external device will be charged con-
tinuously while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
Some mobile devices cannot be charged
depending on their specifications.
CAUTION
. Do not force a USB device into the
connector. Depending on the USB
connector, inserting the USB de-
vice tilted or upside down may
damage the connector. Make
sure that the USB device is con-
nected correctly into the connec-
tor.
. Do not use a reversible USB cable.
Using the reversible USB cable
may damage the connector.
Instruments and controls 2-69
2-70 Instruments and controls
WAC0327X
1. Charging pad
2. Indicator
WIRELESS CHARGER (if so equipped)
The wireless charger is located on the
front of the center console. Lay the
smartphone on the pad of the wireless
charger. Charging will start automatically.
The smartphone will be charged continu-
ously while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
WARNING
. Never put metallic materials be-
tween the wireless charger and a
smartphone.
. Those who use a pacemaker or
other medical equipment should
contact the electric medical
equipment manufacturer for the
possible influences before use.
. Never put cloth over the smart-
phone during charging process.
. Never charge a smartphone when
it is wet.
. Never put metallic materials or
small goods such as a cigarette
lighter, Intelligent Key or memory
drive.
CAUTION
. Do not put an RFID/NFC/credit
card between the wireless char-
ger and a smartphone. This could
cause data corruption in the card.
. Do not use the wireless charger
with dust accumulated or dirt on
the pad.
. Do not hit the surface of the
wireless charger.
. Do not spill liquid (water, drinks,
etc.) on the charging pad.
. Do not use grease, oil or alcohol
for cleaning charging pad.
Wireless charger Indicator
The indicator will illuminate in orange
when the charging process is started.
When the charging has completed, the
indicator illuminates in green.
If a malfunction occurs or the charging
process has stopped, the indicator will
blink in orange for 8 seconds then turn
off.
Operation of the wireless charger
To use the wireless charger, it is neces-
sary to seat the smartphone well within
the charging pad. To maximize charging
performance, ensure the smartphone is
fully seated on the center of the charging
pad over the "Qi" logo
. Because the
location of the power receiver may vary
depending on the smartphone, you will
need to try and find the area that suits
your smartphone.
Because some smartphone cases or ac-
cessories may adversely affect charging,
remove them before wireless charging.
Turn off the vibration function of the
smartphone before wireless charging.
NOTE:
. Only a Qi compatible smartphone
can be used.
. The smartphone may be warmed
during charging process and the
charging may stop by the protection
function of the wireless charger. This
is not a malfunction. If this occurs,
restart charging after the smart-
phone cooled down. The indicator
will blink in orange then turn off.
. The wireless charging process may
be stopped by the status of the
smartphone (battery temperature,
etc.).
. If a radio noise interference occurs
during charging process, put the
smartphone onto the center (“Qi”
logo) position of the wireless char-
ger.
. The wireless charging process will
stop during process of searching the
Intelligent Key.
. The wireless charging process will
not be started when a USB (Univer-
sal Serial Bus) cable is connected to
the smartphone. The indicator may
illuminate in orange or blink if the
smartphone is put on the wireless
charger with a USB cable connected.
However, charging is not performed.
. Depending on the type of the smart-
phone, the indicator may remain
illuminated in orange even when
the charging process has been com-
pleted.
FCC ID: BEJWC500MNM
IC: 2703H-WC500MNM
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This
equipment complies with FCC RF Radia-
tion exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
This device and its antenna must not be
co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with a minimum distance of
15cm between the radiator and your
body.
ISED Compliance Statement
This device complies with RSS-Gen of IC
Rules
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications made to this
device, not expressly approved by LG
Vehicle Components Company, will void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
ISED RF Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with ISED RF
Radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment. This de-
vice and its antenna must not be co-
located or operating in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter. This
equipment should be installed to oper-
ate with a minimum distance of 15cm
between the radiator and the end-
user’s body and arms.
Instruments and controls 2-71
2-72 Instruments and controls
EMERGENCY SUPPORT
NissanConnect® Services provide various
services to support dealing with emer-
gencies of the subscribed vehicle and the
driver.
For example, in case of an illness or
serious injury, you can seek support by
pushing the in-vehicle Emergency Call
(SOS) button and connecting to the
NissanConnect® Services Response Cen-
ter. The NissanConnect® Services Re-
sponse Center can specify the location
of the vehicle via GPS, and the informa-
tion will be sent to the police or other
agencies as needed.
For information about other NissanCon-
nect® Services emergency support re-
lated services, contact the
NissanConnect® Customer Support line
at 1-855-426-6628 or refer to the Nissan-
Connect® Services website www.nissanu-
sa.com/connect (for U.S.) or www.nissan.
ca/nissanconnect (English)/www.nissan.
ca/nissanconnect/fr (French) (for Cana-
da).
WARNING
. Please note that the Automatic
Collision Notification service and
Emergency Call function cannot
be used in the following condi-
tions:
— Emergency functions and ser-
vices will not be available
without a paid subscription
to NissanConnect® Services.
— The NissanConnect® Services
network system is disabled.
— The vehicle moves outside the
service area where the TCU
(Telematics Control Unit) is
connected to the system.
— The vehicle is outside the area
where the cellular network
service is receivable.
— The vehicle is in a location
with poor signal reception
such as tunnels, underground
parking garages, behind
buildings or in mountainous
areas.
— The line is busy.
— The TCU (Telematics Control
Unit) or other systems of your
vehicle are not working prop-
erly.
— It may not be possible to
make an emergency call de-
pending on the severity of a
collision and/or emergency.
. Park the vehicle in a safe location
and set the parking brake before
operating the Emergency Call
(SOS) button.
. Only use this service in case of an
emergency. There may be a pen-
alty for inappropriate use of the
service.
. Radio waves could adversely af-
fect electric medical equipment.
Individuals who use a pacemaker
should contact the device manu-
facturer regarding any possible
effects before using the system.
. The TCU (Telematics Control Unit)
antenna is installed inside the
upper central part of the instru-
ment panel. An occupant should
not get any closer to the antenna
than specified by the pacemaker
manufacturer. The radio waves
from the TCU antenna may ad-
versely affect the operation of the
pacemaker while using the Nis-
sanConnect® Services.
EMERGENCY CALL (SOS) BUTTON
(if so equipped)
WAC0491X
Making an emergency call
The Emergency Call (SOS) button is lo-
cated near the map light.
1. Push the cover to expose the Emer-
gency Call (SOS) button
.
2. Push the Emergency Call (SOS) button
to make an emergency call.
3. When the line is connected, speak to
the Response Specialist.
If you want to cancel the emergency call,
push and hold the Emergency Call (SOS)
button for a few seconds.
NOTE:
. After the Emergency Call (SOS) but-
ton is pushed, it may take some time
until the system initiates connec-
tion, depending on the technical
environment and whether the TCU
(Telematics Control Unit) is being
used by other services.
. An indicator light on the Emergency
Call (SOS) button shows the readi-
ness of the emergency support sys-
tem. If the indicator light is not
illuminated, pushing the Emergency
Call (SOS) button does not connect
your vehicle to the Response Spe-
cialist.
The indicator light blinks while con-
nected to the NissanConnect® Ser-
vices Response Center.
. Even when the indicator light is
illuminated, connection to the Nis-
sanConnect® Services Response
Center may not be possible. If this
occurs in an emergency situation,
contact the authorities by other
means.
. To avoid disconnecting the line,
keep the engine running during an
emergency call, if it is safe to do so.
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
. Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being
used to prevent spilling the drink.
If the liquid is hot, it can scald you
or your passenger.
. Use only soft cups in the cup
holder. Hard objects can injure
you in an accident.
Instruments and controls 2-73
STORAGE
2-74 Instruments and controls
WAC0422X
Center console
Front
JVI0873X
Rear seat
The rear cup holders are located in the
rear fold-down armrest.
SOFT BOTTLE HOLDERS
CAUTION
. Do not use bottle holder for any
other objects that could be
thrown about in the vehicle and
possibly injure people during
sudden braking or an accident.
. Do not use bottle holder for open
liquid containers.
WAC0423X
Door (front and rear)
WAC0657X
SINGLE LUGGAGE BOARD (if so
equipped)
The luggage board is secured by two
retainer pins
.
To ensure proper removal and prevent
part damage, perform the following pro-
cedure:
1. Pull the board slightly up. Do not lift up
largely.
2. Pull the board rearward to disengage
front retainer pins
.
3. Remove the board from the vehicle.
When reinstalling the board to the vehicle,
put the retainer pins
in the original
location.
ADJUSTABLE LUGGAGE FLOOR (if so
equipped)
You can use the luggage compartment in
different ways using the adjustable lug-
gage boards.
WARNING
Do not put objects heavier than 165
lbs (75 kg) on the load floor while in
the upper position.
CAUTION
. Do not push the front edge of the
luggage board forcibly. Doing so
may cause the luggage board to
be tilted, resulting in personal
injury.
. Do not handle the luggage board
forcibly as this may deform it.
. While in the upper position, do
not recline the seatbacks.
. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo
could cause personal injury.
Instruments and controls 2-75
2-76 Instruments and controls
WAC0527X
Before moving the rear (outer) luggage
board, release the lock on the both sides
of the board as shown.
WAC0328X
Two-stage mode
1. Pull the rear board upward to
approximately 30°.
2. Pull the rear board toward the rear of
the vehicle
and then push it into the
bottom of the luggage under space
.
3. Pull up the front (inner) board and
push it into the bottom of the luggage
under space in the same way
.
WAC0526X
Vertical mode
1. Pull the rear board upward to 90°.
2. Push down the board until it stops.
WAC0561X
Luggage under space
To use the luggage under space, pull off
the rear board.
WAC0532X
GLOVE BOX
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driv-
ing to help prevent injury in an
accident or a sudden stop.
To open the glove box, pull the handle.
To close, push the lid in until the lock
latches. The glove box light (if so
equipped) illuminates when the headlight
switch is turned on.
Instruments and controls 2-77
2-78 Instruments and controls
WAC0424X
CONSOLE BOX
To open the console box lids, push the
knob
in the rearward.
To close, push each lid down until the lock
latches.
If something is put on top of either side of
the lids, that side lid may not open.
Remove any object and push the knob
again to open the lid.
WAC0545X
LOWER CONSOLE TRAY
CAUTION
Do not place any objects in lower
console tray that could be thrown
about in the vehicle and cause injury
during sudden braking or collision.
WAC0425X
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to avoid obstructing
the driver’s view and to help prevent
an accident.
CAUTION
. Do not use for anything other
than sunglasses.
. Do not leave sunglasses in the
sunglasses holder while parking
in direct sunlight. The heat may
damage the sunglasses.
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release. Only store one pair of sunglasses
in the holder.
WAC0490X
CARD HOLDER
Slide a card in the card holder.
SIC3505
COAT HOOKS
The coat hook is located above the rear
side window.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more
than 2 lb (1 kg) to the hook.
Instruments and controls 2-79
2-80 Instruments and controls
WAC0329X
CARGO COVER (if so equipped)
The cargo cover keeps the luggage com-
partment contents hidden from the out-
side.
To use the cargo cover, pull it out
and
insert both sides to the guide
.
To remove the cargo cover, stow the
cover and push the button
.
WARNING
. Never put anything on the cargo
cover, no matter how small. Any
object on it could cause an injury
in an accident or sudden stop.
. Do not leave the cargo cover in
the vehicle with it disengaged
from the holder.
. The child restraint top tether
strap may be damaged by con-
tact with the cargo cover or items
in the luggage area. Remove the
cargo cover from the vehicle or
secure it in the luggage area. Also
secure any items in the luggage
area. Your child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision if the
top tether strap is damaged.
WAC0534X
LUGGAGE HOOKS
To use the hook, pull it down as illu-
strated.
WARNING
. Always make sure that the cargo
is properly secured. Use the sui-
table ropes and hooks.
. Unsecured cargo can become
dangerous in an accident or sud-
den stop.
. Do not apply a total load of more
than 22 lb (10 kg) to a single hook.
JVI0889X
Do not apply any load directly to the roof
side rails. Cross bars must be installed
before applying load/cargo/luggage to
the roof of the vehicle. Genuine NISSAN
accessory cross bars are available
through a NISSAN dealer. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
additional information.
The service load capacity for the roof side
rails is 163 lb (74 kg), however do not
exceed the accessory cross bars load
capacity.
Be careful that your vehicle does not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and
GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.
M.S.S. certification label (located on the
driver’s door pillar). For additional infor-
mation regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer
to “Vehicle loading information” (P.10-15).
WARNING
. Always install the cross bars onto
the roof side rails before loading
cargo of any kind. Loading cargo
directly onto the roof side rails or
the vehicle’s roof may cause ve-
hicle damage.
. Drive extra carefully when the
vehicle is loaded at or near the
cargo carrying capacity, espe-
cially if the significant portion of
that load is carried on the cross
bars.
. Heavy loading of the cross bars
has the potential to affect the
vehicle stability and handling
during sudden or unusual hand-
ling maneuvers.
. Roof rack cross bars should be
evenly distributed.
. Do not exceed maximum roof
rack cross bars load.
. Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. In a sud-
den stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal in-
jury.
CAUTION
Use care when placing or removing
items from the roof rack. If you
cannot comfortably lift the items
onto the roof rack from the ground,
use a ladder or a stool.
Instruments and controls 2-81
ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
2-82 Instruments and controls
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
. Make sure that all passengers
have their hands, etc. inside the
vehicle while it is in motion and
before closing the windows. Use
the window lock switch to pre-
vent unexpected use of the
power windows.
. To help avoid risk of injury or
death through unintended opera-
tion of the vehicle and or its
systems, including entrapment
in windows or inadvertent door
lock activation, do not leave chil-
dren, people who require the
assistance of others or pets un-
attended in your vehicle. Addi-
tionally, the temperature inside a
closed vehicle on a warm day can
quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury
or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the
ignition switch is in the ON position, or for
a period of time after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s
or front passenger’s door is opened dur-
ing this period of time, power to the
windows is canceled.
WAC0426X
1. Window lock button
2. Driver side window
3. Rear left passenger side window
4. Front passenger side window
5. Rear right passenger side window
Main power window switch (driver’s
side)
To open or close the window, push down
or pull up the switch and hold it. The
main switch (driver side switches) will
open or close all the windows.
WINDOWS
Locking rear passenger’s windows
When the window lock button is pushed
(the indicator illuminates), the rear pas-
senger’s windows cannot be operated
with the rear passenger’s power window
switch. The rear passenger’s windows
can only be operated with the main
switch (driver side switches). To cancel
the passenger’s windows lock, push the
window lock button again.
WAC0535X
Passenger side power window
switch
The passenger’s switch can control its
corresponding window. When the win-
dow lock button on the driver’s switch is
pushed, the rear passenger’s switch can-
not be operated.
WAC0427X
Automatic operation (driver’s side)
The automatic function enables a win-
dow to fully open or close without holding
the switch down or up.
To fully open the window, push the power
window switch down to the second
detent and release the switch. To fully
close the window, pull the power window
switch up to the second detent and
release the switch. The switch does not
have to be held during window operation.
To stop the window open/close opera-
tion during the automatic function, push
down or pull up the switch in opposite
directions.
Instruments and controls 2-83
2-84 Instruments and controls
Auto-reverse function (driver’s side)
WARNING
There are some small distances im-
mediately before the closed position
which cannot be detected. Make sure
that all passengers have their hands,
etc., inside the vehicle before closing
the window.
The auto-reverse function enables a win-
dow to automatically reverse when
something is caught in the window as it
is closing by the automatic function.
When the control unit detects an obsta-
cle, the window will be lowered immedi-
ately.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function
may activate if an impact or load similar
to something being caught in the window
occurs.
Window timer:
The window timer allows the window
switch to be operated for a short time
even if the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position. The window timer will be
cancelled when the driver’s or front
passenger’s side door is opened or the
preset time has expired.
When power window switch does
not operate
If the power window automatic function
does not operate properly, perform the
following procedure to initialize the
power window functions.
1. Close the door.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position.
3. Pull the power window switch and
hold it to fully close the window.*1
4. Release the power window switch.
5. Pull the power window switch and
hold it for approximately 5 seconds or
more.*2
6. Push the power window switch down
and hold it to fully open the window.
7. Release the power window switch.
8. Push the power window switch down
and hold it for approximately 5 sec-
onds or more.*2
9. Pull the power window switch and
hold it to fully close the window.*1
10. Operate the window by the automatic
function (window open and close) to
confirm that the initialization is com-
plete.
*1: If the window stops before reaching
the fully closed position, release the
switch, then pull and hold it again to fully
close the window.
*2: After pulling or pushing the power
window switch and holding it for approxi-
mately 5 seconds or more, the window
will move again.
If the window cannot automatically be
closed since the auto-reverse function
activated due to a malfunction, perform
the following procedure to cancel the
auto-reverse function.
1. Pull the power window switch up until
the auto-reverse function is activated,
then the window will reverse automa-
tically.
2. Repeat the procedure twice.
3. Pull the power window switch and
hold it to close the window to confirm
that the cancellation is completed.
WARNING
When the auto-reverse function is
canceled, the window will not auto-
matically reverse even if the control
unit detects an obstacle. Make sure
that all passengers have their hands,
etc. inside the vehicle before closing
the windows.
If the power window functions do not
operate properly after performing the
procedure above, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
. In an accident you could be
thrown from the vehicle through
an open moonroof. Always use
seat belts and child restraints.
. Do not allow anyone to stand up
or extend any portion of their
body out of the moonroof open-
ing while the vehicle is in motion
or while the moonroof is closing.
CAUTION
. Remove water drops, snow, ice or
sand from the moonroof before
opening.
. Do not place any heavy object on
the moonroof or surrounding
area.
WAC0330X
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF AND
SUNSHADE
Sliding sunshade and moonroof
When the sunshade switch is pushed to
the OPEN position
, the sunshade open.
(If the sunshade starts to open from the
position between close and half open, the
sunshade will stop half. When the switch
is pushed again, the sunshade will open
fully.) When the moonroof switch is
pushed to the OPEN position
, the
moonroof opens to the comfort mode
position. (If the sunshade is close, the
sunshade will open half first. When the
switch is pushed again, the moonroof will
open fully.)
Instruments and controls 2-85
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
2-86 Instruments and controls
When the moonroof switch is pushed to
the CLOSE position
, the moonroof will
automatically close. When the sunshade
switch is pushed to the CLOSE position
,
the sunshade will close. (If the sunshade
starts to close from the position between
full and half open, the sunshade will stop
half. When the switch is pushed again, the
sunshade will close fully. However, if the
moonroof is open or tilted up, the sun-
shade will not close beyond half.)
To stop the sunshade or moonroof dur-
ing the operation, push the moonroof
switch to either of the OPEN
, , CLOSE
, or UP position.
Tilting moonroof
To tilt up the moonroof, push the moon-
roof switch to the up position
.
To tilt down the moonroof, push the
switch to the CLOSE position
.
Comfort mode
This is the position used when driving
with the moonroof open. When driving
with the moonroof fully open, wind noise
may be very loud. Use the comfort mode
position when driving.
Auto-reverse function
WARNING
There are some small distances just
before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that
all passengers have their hands, etc.
inside the vehicle before closing the
moonroof and sunshade.
The auto-reverse function enables the
moonroof and sunshade to automatically
reverse when something is caught in the
moonroof and sunshade as it is closing.
When the control unit detects an obsta-
cle, the moonroof and sunshade will open
immediately.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function
may activate if an impact or load similar
to something being caught in the moon-
roof and sunshade occurs.
If the auto-reverse function activates
consecutively or the battery is dis-
charged, the moonroof and sunshade
may not close properly. In this case, push
and hold the switch to the CLOSE position
to close the moonroof.
If the moonroof does not operate
If the moonroof and sunshade do not
operate properly, perform the following
procedure to initialize the operation sys-
tem.
1. If the moonroof and sunshade are
open, close them fully by repeatedly
pushing the moonroof switch to the
CLOSE
and position.
2. Push and hold the moonroof switch to
the CLOSE
position for 10 seconds.
3. After the moonroof and sunshade
move slightly to the closed position
and then move back a little, release
the moonroof switch.
4. Push and hold the moonroof switch to
the CLOSE
position, and the glass
and shade will move.
5. Release the moonroof switch. Then
the moonroof and sunshade will fully
open and then fully close.
6. Check if the moonroof switch oper-
ates normally.
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for
operating the moonroof properly,
including the operation by all pas-
sengers. Failure to follow the warn-
ings and instructions for proper use
of the moonroof could result in
serious injury or death.
. Do not allow children to operate
the moonroof. Improper opera-
tion by children may cause an
accident. If children or others get
caught in the moonroof, it could
cause serious injury.
. To help avoid risk of injury or
death through unintended opera-
tion of the moonroof, place the
ignition switch in the OFF position
when leaving the vehicle, and do
not leave children and the Intelli-
gent Key inside the vehicle.
. Do not activate the auto-reverse
function intentionally. If hands or
face, etc. get caught in the moon-
roof, it could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
. Do not place objects (such as
newspapers, handkerchiefs, etc.)
on the sunshade when it is ex-
tending or retracting causing im-
proper operation or damage to
the sunshade.
. Do not push the sunshade arm
with your hands, etc., as this may
deform it. Improper operation or
damage to the sunshade may
result.
. Do not put any object into the
sunshade inlet port as this may
result in improper operation or
damage the sunshade.
. Do not hang any object on the
arm rail as this may result in
improper operation or damage
the sunshade.
. Do not forcefully pull the sun-
shade. Doing so may elongate
the sunshade. Improper opera-
tion or damage to the sunshade
may result.
If the moonroof does not operate prop-
erly after performing the procedure
above, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
. Do not leave the light switch on
when the engine is not running
for extended periods of time to
prevent the battery from being
discharged.
. Turn off the lights when you leave
the vehicle.
Instruments and controls 2-87
INTERIOR LIGHTS
2-88 Instruments and controls
WAC0066X
INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH
The interior light can be turned ON
regardless of door position. The light will
go off after a period of time unless the
ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion when any door is opened.
The interior lights can be set to operate
when the doors are opened. To turn off
the interior lights when a door is open,
push the switch, the interior lights will not
illuminate, regardless of door position.
The lights will go off when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or the
driver’s door is closed and locked.
WAC0067X
MAP LIGHTS
Push the button to turn the map lights
on. To turn them off, push the button
again.
The lights will also turn off after a
period of time when the lights remain
illuminated to prevent the battery from
becoming discharged.
WAC0090X
ROOM LIGHTS (if so equipped)
Push the button to turn the room lights
on. To turn them off, push the button
again.
The lights will also turn off after a
period of time when the lights remain
illuminated to prevent the battery from
becoming discharged.
WAC0509X
REAR PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so
equipped)
To turn the rear personal lights on, push
the button. To turn them off, push the
button again.
The lights will also turn off after a
period of time when the lights remain
illuminated to prevent the battery from
becoming discharged.
WAC0492X
VANITY MIRROR LIGHT
The light over the vanity mirror will turn
on when the cover on the vanity mirror is
opened.
When the cover is closed, the light will
turn off.
The lights will also turn off after a
period of time when the lights remain
illuminated to prevent the battery from
becoming discharged.
JVI0248X
CARGO LIGHT
The cargo light has a three-position
switch.
ON position
When the cargo light switch is in the ON
position
, the cargo light illuminates,
regardless of any condition.
DOOR position
When the cargo light switch is in the
DOOR position
, the cargo light illumi-
nates when the liftgate is opened.
OFF position
When the cargo light switch is in the OFF
position
, the cargo light does not
illuminate, regardless of any condition.
Instruments and controls 2-89
2-90 Instruments and controls
The light will also turn off after a period
of time when the light remains illumi-
nated to prevent the battery from
becoming discharged.
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys ......................................................................................................... 3-3
Intelligent Key ........................................................................... 3-3
Doors ...................................................................................................... 3-5
Locking with key .................................................................... 3-5
Locking with inside lock knob ..................................... 3-6
Locking with power door lock switch................... 3-6
Automatic door locks ......................................................... 3-7
Child safety rear door lock ............................................. 3-7
Intelligent Key system .............................................................. 3-7
Intelligent Key operating range (models with
request switch) ........................................................................ 3-9
Door locks/unlocks precaution (models with
request switch) ..................................................................... 3-10
Intelligent Key operation (models with
request switch) ..................................................................... 3-11
Battery saver system ....................................................... 3-12
Warning lights and audible reminders .............. 3-12
Troubleshooting guide ................................................... 3-13
How to use remote keyless entry function ...... 3-15
Remote engine start (if so equipped) ....................... 3-19
Remote engine start operating range............... 3-20
Remote starting the engine ....................................... 3-20
Extending engine run time ......................................... 3-20
Canceling a remote engine start ........................... 3-21
Conditions the remote engine start will
not work ..................................................................................... 3-21
Hood .................................................................................................... 3-22
Liftgate .............................................................................................. 3-23
Operating manual liftgate (if
so equipped) ......................................................................... 3-23
Operating power liftgate (if so equipped) ...... 3-24
Motion-activated liftgate (if
so equipped) ......................................................................... 3-26
Garage mode system (if so equipped) ............ 3-27
Auto closure (if so equipped) .................................. 3-28
liftgate release lever....................................................... 3-28
Fuel-filler door ............................................................................. 3-29
Opening the fuel-filler door...................................... 3-29
How to refuel ....................................................................... 3-29
When refueling from a portable
fuel container ...................................................................... 3-30
Tilt/telescopic steering ........................................................ 3-31
Tilt and telescopic operation .................................. 3-31
Sun visors ........................................................................................ 3-32
Rear sunshade (if so equipped) .................................... 3-32
Mirrors .............................................................................................. 3-33
Inside mirror ......................................................................... 3-33
Outside mirrors .................................................................. 3-35
Vanity mirror ........................................................................ 3-36
Memory seat (if so equipped) ......................................... 3-37
Memory storage function .......................................... 3-37
SPA2406
Type A (if so equipped)
JVP0177X
Type B (if so equipped)
JVP0155X
Type C (if so equipped)
1. Intelligent Key (2 sets)
2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2
sets)
3. Key number plate
INTELLIGENT KEY
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to
your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com-
ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System components. As many as 4 In-
telligent Keys can be registered and used
with one vehicle. The new keys must be
registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use
with the Intelligent Key system and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of
your vehicle. Since the registration pro-
cess requires erasing all memory in the
Intelligent Key components when regis-
tering new keys, be sure to take all
Intelligent Keys that you have to the
NISSAN dealer.
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it
in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in
the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record any key numbers
so it is very important to keep track of
your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it
can be duplicated without knowing the
key number.
CAUTION
. Be sure to carry the Intelligent
Key with you when driving. The
Intelligent Key is a precision de-
vice with a built-in transmitter. To
avoid damaging it, please note
the following.
— The Intelligent Key is water
resistant; however, wetting
may damage the Intelligent
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
KEYS
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets
wet, immediately wipe until it
is completely dry.
— Do not bend, drop or strike it
against another object.
— If the outside temperature is
below 14°F (-10°C) degrees, the
battery of the Intelligent Key
may not function properly.
— Do not place the Intelligent
Key for an extended period in
a place where temperatures
exceed 140°F (60°C).
— Do not change or modify the
Intelligent Key.
— Do not use a magnet key
holder.
— Do not place the Intelligent
Key near an electric appliance
such as a television set, per-
sonal computer or cellular
phone.
— Do not allow the Intelligent
Key to come into contact with
water or salt water, and do
not wash it in a washing
machine. This could affect
the system function.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code
of that Intelligent Key. This will prevent
the Intelligent Key from unauthorized use
to unlock the vehicle. For information
regarding the erasing procedure, it is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer.
SPA2033
Mechanical key
To remove the mechanical key, release
the lock knob at the back of the Intelli-
gent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert
it into the Intelligent Key until the lock
knob returns to the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock
the driver’s door. (See “Doors” (P.3-5).)
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key
installed in the Intelligent Key.
WARNING
. Always have the doors locked
while driving. Along with the use
of seat belts, this provides great-
er safety in the event of an
accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from
the vehicle. This also helps keep
children and others from unin-
tentionally opening the doors,
and will help keep out intruders.
. Before opening any door, always
look for and avoid oncoming
traffic.
. To help avoid risk of injury or
death through unintended opera-
tion of the vehicle and or its
systems, including entrapment
in windows or inadvertent door
lock activation, do not leave chil-
dren, people who require the
assistance of others or pets un-
attended in your vehicle. Addi-
tionally, the temperature inside a
closed vehicle on a warm day can
quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury
or death to people and pets.
WAD0251X
LOCKING WITH KEY
To lock the driver’s door, turn the driver’s
door key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle
.
To unlock the driver’s door, turn the
driver’s door key cylinder to the front of
the vehicle
.
To lock or unlock the other doors and the
liftgate, use the Intelligent Key function.
(See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7).)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
DOORS
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
SPA2726
Example
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move
the inside lock knob to the lock position
then close the door.
To unlock, move the inside lock knob to
the unlock position
.
To unlock and open the front door with-
out using the lock knob, pull once on the
door handle to unlock it, and again to
open it.
When locking the door without a key, be
sure not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
WAD0239X
Driver’s armrest
WAD0240X
Front passenger’s armrest
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCH
Operating the power door lock switch
(located on the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s doors) will lock or unlock all the
doors.
To lock the doors, push the power door
lock switch to the lock position
with the
driver’s and front passenger’s doors open,
then close the door.
When locking the door this way, be sure
not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock the doors, push the power door
lock switch to the unlock position
.
Lockout protection
Lockout protection function helps to
prevent the keys from being accidentally
locked inside the vehicle.
When the power door lock switch (driver’s
or front passenger’s side) is moved to the
lock position with the Intelligent Key left
in the vehicle and any door open, all doors
will unlock automatically and a chime will
sound after the door is closed.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
. All doors lock automatically when the
vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24
km/h).
. All doors unlock automatically when
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position or when the shift position is
placed in the P (Park) position, if
selected.
NOTE:
The Automatic door unlock feature can
be changed using the "Vehicle Settings"
menu on the vehicle information dis-
play. (See “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-27).)
WAD0021X
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety rear door locks help prevent
the rear doors from being opened acci-
dentally, especially when small children
are in the vehicle.
When the levers are in the lock position
, the rear doors can be opened only
from the outside.
To disengage, move the levers to the
unlock position
.
WARNING
. Radio waves could adversely af-
fect electric medical equipment.
Those who use a pacemaker
should contact the electric med-
ical equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before
use.
. The Intelligent Key transmits
radio waves when the buttons
are pushed. The FAA advises that
the radio waves may affect air-
craft navigation and communica-
tion systems. Do not operate the
Intelligent Key while on an air-
plane. Make sure the buttons are
not operated unintentionally
when the unit is stored during a
flight.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all
the door locks using the remote control-
ler function or pushing the request switch
(if so equipped) on the vehicle without
taking the key out from a pocket or purse.
The operating environment and/or con-
ditions may affect the Intelligent Key
system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using
the Intelligent Key system.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
CAUTION
. Be sure to carry the Intelligent
Key with you when operating the
vehicle.
. Never leave the Intelligent Key in
the vehicle when you leave the
vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communi-
cating with the vehicle as it receives radio
waves. The Intelligent Key system trans-
mits weak radio waves. Environmental
conditions may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Intelligent Key system under
the following operating conditions.
. When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted,
such as a TV tower, power station and
broadcasting station.
. When in possession of wireless equip-
ment, such as a cellular phone, trans-
ceiver, and CB radio.
. When the Intelligent Key is in contact
with or covered by metallic materials.
. When any type of radio wave remote
control is used nearby.
. When the Intelligent Key is placed near
an electric appliance such as a perso-
nal computer.
. When the vehicle is parked near a
parking meter.
In such cases, correct the operating
conditions before using the Intelligent
Key function or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies
depending on the operating conditions,
the battery’s life is approximately 2 years.
If the battery is discharged, replace it with
a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an
indicator illuminates in the vehicle infor-
mation display. (See “4. Key Battery Low
warning” (P.2-34).)
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously
receiving radio waves, if the key is left
near equipment which transmits strong
radio waves, such as signals from a TV
and personal computer, the battery life
may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of
a battery, see “Intelligent Key battery
replacement” (P.8-25).
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. For
information about the purchase and use
of additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-
mended that you contact a NISSAN deal-
er.
CAUTION
. Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
which contains electrical compo-
nents, to come into contact with
water or salt water. This could
affect the system function.
. Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
. Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
. Do not change or modify the
Intelligent Key.
. Wetting may damage the Intelli-
gent Key. If the Intelligent Key
gets wet, immediately wipe until
it is completely dry.
. If the outside temperature is be-
low 14°F (−10°C) degrees, the bat-
tery of the Intelligent Key may not
function properly.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key
for an extended period in an area
where temperatures exceed
140°F (60°C).
. Do not attach the Intelligent Key
with a key holder that contains a
magnet.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key
near equipment that produces a
magnetic field, such as a TV,
audio equipment, personal com-
puters, cellular phone or wireless
charger.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code
of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
This may prevent the unauthorized use of
the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle.
For information regarding the erasing
procedure, it is recommended that you
contact a NISSAN dealer.
For models with request switch: The
Intelligent Key function can be disabled.
For information about disabling the In-
telligent Key function, it is recommended
that you contact a NISSAN dealer.
WAD0230X
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING
RANGE (models with request
switch)
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within
the specified operating range from the
request switch
.
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged or strong radio waves are pre-
sent near the operating location, the
Intelligent Key system’s operating range
becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80
cm) from each request switch
.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the
door glass, handle or rear bumper, the
request switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the
operating range, it is possible for anyone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key to
push the request switch to lock/unlock
the doors including the liftgate.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
SPA2407
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-
TION (models with request switch)
. Do not push the door handle request
switch with the Intelligent Key held in
your hand as illustrated. The close
distance to the door handle will cause
the Intelligent Key system to have
difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-
gent Key is outside the vehicle.
. After locking with the door handle
request switch, verify the doors are
securely locked by testing them.
. To prevent the Intelligent Key from
being left inside the vehicle, make sure
you carry the key with you and then
lock the doors.
. Do not pull the door handle before
pushing the door handle request
switch.
SPA2408
SPA2710
Example
WAD0147X
Example
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
(models with request switch)
You can lock or unlock the doors without
taking the key out from your pocket or
bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with
you, you can lock or unlock all doors by
pushing the door handle request switch
(located on the front and rear doors) or
liftgate request switch
within the range
of operation.
When you lock or unlock the doors, the
hazard indicator will flash and the outside
chime will sound as a confirmation. For
details, see “Setting hazard indicator and
horn mode” (P.3-18).
Welcome light function
When you unlock the doors or the liftgate,
the daytime running lights, parking lights
and the tail lights will illuminate for a
period of time. The welcome light func-
tion can be disabled. For information
about disabling the welcome light func-
tion, see “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-27).
Locking doors
1. Push the park button to engage the P
(Park) position. Place the ignition
switch in the OFF position and make
sure you carry the Intelligent Key with
you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push the door handle request switch
or the liftgate request switch
while carrying the Intelligent Key with
you.
4. All doors and the liftgate will lock.
5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice
and the outside buzzer sounds twice.
NOTE:
. Request switches for all doors can
be deactivated when the “Ext. Door
Switch” is turned off in the Vehicle
Settings of the vehicle information
display. For additional information,
see “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-27).
. Doors lock with the door handle
request switch while the ignition
switch is not in the OFF position.
. Doors do not lock by pushing the
driver’s door handle request switch
while the driver’s door is open. How-
ever, doors lock with the mechanical
key even if any door is open.
. Doors do not lock with the door
handle request switch with the In-
telligent Key inside the vehicle and a
beep sounds to warn you. However,
when an Intelligent Key is inside the
vehicle, doors can be locked with
another Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
. After locking the doors using the
request switch, make sure that
the doors have been securely
locked by operating the door
handles or the liftgate opener
switch.
. When locking the doors using the
request switch, make sure to
have the Intelligent Key in your
possession before operating the
request switch to prevent the
Intelligent Key from being left in
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
the vehicle.
. The request switch is operational
only when the Intelligent Key has
been detected by the Intelligent
Key system.
Unlocking doors
1. Push the door handle request switch
or the liftgate request switch
while carrying the Intelligent Key with
you.
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and
outside chime sounds once. The cor-
responding door or the liftgate will
unlock.
3. Push the request switch again within 1
minute.
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and
outside chime sounds once again. All
the doors and the liftgate will unlock.
All doors will be locked automatically
unless one of the following operations is
performed within 1 minute after pushing
the request switch while the doors are
locked.
. Opening any door.
. Pushing the ignition switch.
During this 1-minute time period, if the
UNLOCK
button on the Intelligent Key
is pushed, all doors will be locked auto-
matically after another 1 minute.
NOTE:
The unlocking operation can be chan-
ged in selective unlock in the Vehicle
Settings of the vehicle information dis-
play. For additional information, see
“Vehicle Settings” (P.2-27).
Opening liftgate
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the liftgate opener switch
.
3. The liftgate will unlock and then open.
BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
When all the following conditions are met
for a period of time, the battery saver
system will cut off the power supply to
prevent battery discharge.
. The ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion. (See “Push-button ignition switch
positions” (P.5-16).)
WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE RE-
MINDERS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
the Intelligent Key listed on the following
chart or to help prevent the vehicle from
being stolen, chime or beep sounds inside
and outside the vehicle and the warning
display appears on the vehicle informa-
tion display.
When a chime or beep sounds or the
warning display appears, be sure to check
the vehicle and Intelligent Key.
See “Troubleshooting guide” (P.3-13) and
“Vehicle information display” (P.2-22).
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle,
the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.
Symptom Possible cause
Action to take
When stopping the engine
The Shift to P range warning appears on
the display and the inside warning chime
sounds continuously.
The shift position is not in the P
(Park) position.
Push the park button to engage the P
(Park) position.
“No Key Press and Hold to Stop Engine”
message appears on the display.
The Intelligent Key is not inside the
vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key inside the
vehicle and push the ignition switch
once to stop the engine.
There is not the Intelligent Key or
the battery charge is low.
Rapidly push the ignition switch 3
consecutive times or push and hold
the ignition switch for more than 2
seconds to stop the engine.
When opening the driver’s
door to get out of the vehicle
The door/liftgate open warning appears
on the display.
The ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When closing the door after
getting out of the vehicle
The No Key Detected warning appears
on the display, the outside chime sounds
three times and the inside warning
chime sounds for approximately 3 sec-
onds.
The engine is running.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The Rear Door Alert warning message
appears on the display, the horn sounds
three times, pauses, and sounds three
more times, or a Check Rear Seat for All
Articles warning appears on the display.
The Rear Door Alert is activated.
Check the rear seat for all articles,
clear the Rear Door Alert warning
message by using the steering
switches.
When pushing the door han-
dle request switch (if so
equipped)
The outside chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds.
The Intelligent Key is inside the
vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When pushing the ignition
switch to start the engine
The Key Battery Low warning appears
on the display.
The Intelligent Key battery charge
is low.
Replace the battery with a new one.
(See “Intelligent Key battery replace-
ment” (P.8-25).)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Symptom Possible cause
Action to take
When pushing the ignition
switch
The Key System Error warning appears
on the display.
It warns of a malfunction with the
Intelligent Key system.
It is recommended that you contact a
NISSAN dealer.
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY FUNCTION
WARNING
. Radio waves could adversely af-
fect electric medical equipment.
Those who use a pacemaker
should contact the electric med-
ical equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before
use.
. The Intelligent Key transmits
radio waves when the buttons
are pushed. The FAA advises that
the radio waves may affect air-
craft navigation and communica-
tion systems. Do not operate the
Intelligent Key while on an air-
plane. Make sure the buttons are
not operated unintentionally
when the unit is stored during a
flight.
CAUTION
. Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
which contains electrical compo-
nents, to come into contact with
water or salt water. This could
affect the system function.
. Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
. Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
. Do not change or modify the
Intelligent Key.
. Wetting may damage the Intelli-
gent Key. If the Intelligent Key
gets wet, immediately wipe until
it is completely dry.
. If the outside temperature is be-
low 14°F (-10°C) degrees, the bat-
tery of the Intelligent Key may not
function properly.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key
for an extended period in an area
where temperatures exceed
140°F (60°C).
. Do not attach the Intelligent Key
with a key holder that contains a
magnet.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key
near equipment that produces a
magnetic field, such as a TV,
audio equipment, personal com-
puters, cellular phone or wireless
charger.
The remote keyless entry function can
operate all door locks using the remote
keyless entry function of the Intelligent
Key. The remote keyless entry function
can operate at a distance of approxi-
mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The
operating distance depends upon the
conditions around the vehicle.)
The remote keyless entry function will not
operate:
. When the Intelligent Key is not within
the operational range.
. When the Intelligent Key battery is
discharged.
The remote keyless entry function can
also operate the vehicle alarm.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
SPA1926B
Type A (if so equipped)
WAD0148X
Type B (if so equipped)
WAD0030X
Type C (if so equipped)
LOCK button
UNLOCK button
Power liftgate button
PANIC button
Remote engine start button
When you lock or unlock the doors or the
liftgate, the hazard indicator will flash and
the horn will sound as a confirmation. For
details, see “Setting hazard indicator and
horn mode” (P.3-18).
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.*
3. Close all the doors.
4. Push the LOCK
button on the
Intelligent Key.
5. All the doors and the liftgate will lock.
6. The hazard indicator flashes twice
and the horn chirps once.
*: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Operate the door handles to confirm that
the doors have been securely locked.
Unlocking doors
1. Push the UNLOCK button on
the Intelligent Key once.
2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The
driver’s door will unlock.
3. Push the UNLOCK
button again
within 1 minute.
4. The hazard indicator flashes once. All
the doors and the liftgate will unlock.
All doors will be locked automatically
unless one of the following operations is
performed within 1 minute after pushing
the UNLOCK
button while the doors
are locked.
. Opening any door (including the lift-
gate).
. Pushing the ignition switch.
During this 1-minute time period, if the
UNLOCK
button is pushed, all doors
will be locked automatically after another
1 minute.
NOTE:
The unlocking operation can be chan-
ged in selective unlock in the Vehicle
Settings of the vehicle information dis-
play. For additional information, see
“Vehicle Settings” (P.2-27).
Opening/closing liftgate (if so
equipped)
1. Push the power liftgate button
for more than 1 second.
2. The liftgate will automatically open.
The outside chime sounds 3 times for
approximately 3 seconds.
To close the liftgate, push the power
liftgate button
for more than 1
second.
The liftgate will automatically close.
If the button
is pushed while the
liftgate is being opened or closed, the
liftgate will immediately stop. Pushing the
button
again will reverse the direc-
tion of the liftgate. However, when the
liftgate is near the fully open position, it
moves in the closing direction and when
the liftgate is near the fully close position,
it moves in the opening direction.
Using panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel
threatened, you may activate the alarm
to call attention as follows:
1. Push the PANIC
button on the
Intelligent Key for more than 0.5
seconds.
2. The theft warning alarm and head-
lights will stay on for 25 seconds.
3. The panic alarm stops when:
.
It has run for 25 seconds, or
.
Any of the buttons on the Intelligent
Key is pushed.
Remote engine start (if so
equipped)
The remote engine start button is
on the Intelligent Key if the vehicle has
remote engine start function. This func-
tion allows the engine to start from
outside the vehicle. See “Remote engine
start” (P.3-19).
WAD0031X
Intelligent Key button operation
light
The light blinks only when you push any
button on the Intelligent Key. The light
illumination only signifies that the Intelli-
gent Key has transmitted a signal. You
may look and/or listen to verify that the
vehicle has performed the intended op-
eration. If the light does not blink, your
battery may be too weak to communi-
cate to the vehicle. If this occurs, the
battery may need to be replaced.
For additional information regarding the
replacement of a battery, see “Intelligent
Key battery replacement” (P.8-25).
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Setting hazard indicator and horn
mode
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and
horn mode when you first receive the
vehicle.
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when
the LOCK
button is pushed, the
hazard indicator flashes twice and the
horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK
button is pushed, the hazard indicator
flashes once.
If horns are not necessary, the system
can be switched to the hazard indicator
mode.
In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
button is pushed, the hazard indica-
tor flashes twice. When the UNLOCK
button is pushed, neither the hazard
indicator nor the horn operates.
Hazard indicator and horn mode:
Operation DOOR LOCK
DOOR UNLOCK
Pushing door handle request switch
or liftgate request switch (if so
equipped)
HAZARD - twice
OUTSIDE CHIME - twice
HAZARD - once
OUTSIDE CHIME - once
Pushing
or button
HAZARD - twice
HORN - once
HAZARD - once
HORN - none
Hazard indicator mode:
Operation DOOR LOCK
DOOR UNLOCK
Pushing door handle request switch
(if so equipped)
or liftgate request switch
HAZARD - twice
OUTSIDE CHIME - none
HAZARD - none
OUTSIDE CHIME - none
Pushing
or button
HAZARD - twice
HORN - none
HAZARD - none
HORN - none
Switching procedure:
To switch the hazard indicator and horn
(chime) operation, push the LOCK
and UNLOCK buttons on the Intel-
ligent Key simultaneously for more than 4
seconds.
. When the hazard indicator mode is
set, the hazard indicator flashes 3
times.
. When the hazard indicator and horn
mode is set, the hazard indicator
flashes once and the horn chirps once.
The horn operation can also be turned on
or off in the vehicle information display.
See “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-27).
WARNING
To avoid risk of injury or death, do
not use the remote engine start
function when the vehicle is in an
enclosed area such as a garage.
JVP0446X
Example
The remote engine start button is on
the Intelligent Key if the vehicle has
remote engine start function. This func-
tion allows the engine to start from
outside the vehicle.
Some systems, such as the air conditioner
system, will turn on during a remote
engine start, if the system was on the
last time the ignition switch was turned
off.
Laws in some local communities may
restrict the use of remote engine starters.
For example, some laws require a person
using remote engine start to have the
vehicle in view. Check local regulations for
any requirements.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Other conditions may affect the remote
engine start function. See “Conditions the
remote engine start will not work” (P.3-21).
Other conditions can affect the perfor-
mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.
See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7) for
additional information.
REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING
RANGE
The remote engine start function can
only be used when the Intelligent Key is
within the specified operating range from
the vehicle.
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged or other strong radio wave
sources are present near the operating
location, the Intelligent Key operating
range becomes narrower, and the Intelli-
gent Key may not function properly.
The remote engine start operating range
is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the
vehicle.
REMOTE STARTING THE ENGINE
To use the remote start function to start
the engine, perform the following:
1. If the doors are unlocked, push the
LOCK
button to lock all doors.
2. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
3. Push the LOCK
button again.
4. Within 5 seconds push and hold the
remote engine start
button until
the turn signal lights flash and the tail
lights illuminate. If the vehicle is not
within view, push and hold the remote
engine start
button for at least 2
seconds.
The following events will occur when the
engine starts:
. The front parking lights will turn on
and remain on as long as the engine is
running.
. The doors will be locked and the air
conditioner system may turn on.
. The engine will continue to run for
about 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to
extend the time for an additional 10
minutes. See “Extending engine run
time” (P.3-20).
Depress and hold the brake pedal, then
place the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion before driving. For further instruc-
tions, see “Driving the vehicle” (P.5-19).
EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The remote engine start function can be
extended one time by performing the
steps listed in “Remote starting the en-
gine” (P.3-20). Run time will be calculated
as follows:
. The first 10 minute run time will start
when the remote engine start func-
tion is performed.
. The second 10 minutes will start im-
mediately when the remote engine
start function is performed. For exam-
ple, if the engine has been running for
5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added,
the engine will run for a total of 15
minutes.
. Extending engine run time will count
towards the two remote engine start
limit.
A maximum of two remote engine starts,
or a single start with an extension can be
used.
The vehicle needs to be driven at speeds
of 4 MPH (7 km/h) before the remote
engine start procedure can be used
again.
CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE
START
To cancel a remote engine start, perform
one of the following:
. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle
and push the remote engine start
button until the front parking lights
turn off.
. Turn on the hazard indicator flashers.
. Cycle the ignition switch ON and then
OFF.
. The extended engine run time has
expired.
. The first 10 minute timer has expired.
. The engine hood has been opened.
. The shift position is shifted out of the
P (Park) position.
. The theft alarm sounds due to illegal
entry into the vehicle.
. The ignition switch is pushed without
an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
. The ignition switch is pushed with an
Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the
brake pedal is not depressed.
. The accelerator pedal is depressed.
. The vehicle moves after a remote
engine start. (The hazard indicator
flashers blink once and the engine is
stopped.)
CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE
START WILL NOT WORK
The remote engine start will not operate
if any of the following conditions are
present:
. The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
. The hood is not securely closed.
. The hazard indicator flashers are on.
. The engine is still running. The engine
must be completely stopped. This is
not applicable when extending engine
run time.
. The remote engine start
button is
not pushed and held for at least 2
seconds.
. The remote engine start
button is
not pushed and held within 5 seconds
of pushing the LOCK
button.
. The doors are not closed and locked.
(The hazard indicator flashers blink
twice to indicate the function is not
operated.)
. The liftgate is open. (The hazard
indicator flashers blink twice to indi-
cate the function is not operated.)
. The Key System Error warning mes-
sage remains on in the vehicle infor-
mation display.
. The theft alarm sounds due to illegal
entry into the vehicle. (The hazard
indicator flashers blink twice to indi-
cate the function is not operated.)
. Two remote engine starts, or a single
remote engine start with an exten-
sion, have already been used. (To use
the remote engine start function
again, the vehicle needs to be driven
at speeds of 4 MPH (7 km/h).)
. The shift position is not in the P (Park)
position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WARNING
. Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the
hood to fly open and result in an
accident.
. Never open the hood if steam or
smoke is coming from the engine
compartment to avoid injury.
WAD0150X
1. Pull the hood lock release handle
located below the driver’s side instru-
ment panel; the hood springs up
slightly.
2. Push the lever
underneath the front
of the hood sideways as illustrated
with your fingertips.
3. Raise the hood.
4. Remove the support rod and insert it
into the slot
.
Hold the coated parts
when removing
or resetting the support rod. Avoid
direct contact with the metal parts, as
they may be hot immediately after the
engine has been stopped.
When closing the hood:
1. While supporting the hood, return the
support rod to its original position.
2. Slowly lower the hood to about 8 to 12
in (20 to 30 cm) above the hood lock,
then let it drop.
3. Make sure it is securely latched.
HOOD
WARNING
. Always be sure the liftgate has
been closed securely to prevent it
from opening while driving.
. Do not drive with the liftgate
open. This could allow dangerous
exhaust gases to be drawn into
the vehicle. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Exhaust gas
(carbon monoxide)” (P.5-5).
. To help avoid risk of injury or
death through unintended opera-
tion of the vehicle and or its
systems, including entrapment
in windows or inadvertent door
lock activation, do not leave chil-
dren, people who require the
assistance of others or pets un-
attended in your vehicle. Addi-
tionally, the temperature inside a
closed vehicle on a warm day can
quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury
or death to people and pets.
. Always be sure that hands and
feet are clear of the door frame to
avoid injury while closing the
liftgate.
CAUTION
Do not use accessory carriers that
attach to the liftgate. Doing so will
cause damage to the vehicle.
WAD0151X
OPERATING MANUAL LIFTGATE (if
so equipped)
To open the liftgate, unlock it. Pull up the
liftgate to open.
The liftgate can be unlocked by:
. pushing the UNLOCK
button on
the Intelligent Key twice.
. pushing the liftgate request switch (if
so equipped).
. pushing the door handle request
switch (if so equipped).
To close the liftgate, pull down until it
securely locks.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
LIFTGATE
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
OPERATING POWER LIFTGATE (if so
equipped)
To operate the power liftgate, the vehicle
must be in the P (Park) position.
The power liftgate will not operate if the
battery voltage is low.
The power liftgate operation can be
activated or deactivated in the vehicle
information display. (See “Vehicle Set-
tings” (P.2-27).)
NOTE:
. For models with motion-activated
liftgate: When washing, waxing or
maintaining your vehicle, placing or
replacing the body cover, or splash-
ing water to the area around the kick
motion sensor, turn off the power
liftgate.
. If the power open or close operation
is performed consecutively, the
safety mode activates and the op-
eration cannot be performed for a
certain period of time. In this case,
wait for a while and then perform
the operation.
WAD0233X
Power liftgate switch — Instrument panel
WAD0236X
Liftgate opener switch
WAD0152X
Power liftgate button - Key (example)
WAD0153X
Power liftgate close and lock switches — Liftgate
Power open (using switches)
When the liftgate is fully closed, the
liftgate will fully open automatically by:
. pushing the power liftgate switch
on the instrument panel for more
than 1 second
. pushing the liftgate opener switch
. pushing the power liftgate button
on the key for more than 1 second
The outside chime sounds when the
liftgate starts opening.
NOTE:
The liftgate can be opened by the
power liftgate switch
or the power
liftgate button
even if the
liftgate is locked. The liftgate can be
unlocked and opened independently of
the other doors, even when they are
locked. The liftgate must be unlocked
(or the Intelligent Key must be within
range) to open with the liftgate opener
switch
.
Power close (using switches)
When the liftgate is fully opened, the
liftgate will fully close automatically by:
. pushing the power liftgate switch
on the instrument panel for more
than 1 second
. pushing the power liftgate button
on the key for more than 1 second
. pushing the power liftgate close
switch
on the lower part of the
liftgate for 1 second
The outside chime sounds when the
liftgate starts closing.
Power close and lock
When the liftgate is fully opened and the
Intelligent Key is carried with you near the
liftgate, the liftgate will fully close and lock
automatically by pushing the power lift-
gate lock switch
on the lower part of
the liftgate.
The outside chime sounds when the
liftgate starts closing.
Stop and reverse function (if so
equipped)
The power liftgate will stop immediately if
one of the following actions is performed
during power open or close.
. pushing the power liftgate switch
. pushing the liftgate opener switch
. pushing the power liftgate close
switch
on the lower part of the
liftgate
. pushing the power liftgate button
on the key
And then the power liftgate will move in
the reverse direction if one of the above
actions is performed again.
The outside chime sounds when the
liftgate starts to reverse.
Auto reverse function
The auto-reverse function enables the
liftgate to automatically reverse when
something is caught in the liftgate as it
is opening or closing. When the control
unit detects an obstacle, the liftgate will
reverse and return to the full open or full
close position.
If a second obstacle is detected, the
liftgate motion will stop. The liftgate will
enter the manual mode.
A pinch sensor is mounted on each side
of the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected
by the pinch sensor during power close,
the liftgate will reverse and return to the
full open position immediately.
NOTE:
If the pinch sensor is damaged or
removed, the power close function will
not operate.
WARNING
There is a small distance immedi-
ately before the closed position that
cannot be detected. Make sure that
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
all passengers keep their hands, etc.,
clear from the liftgate opening be-
fore closing the liftgate.
Manual mode
If power operation is not available, the
liftgate can be operated manually. Power
operation may not be available if multiple
obstacles have been detected in a single
power cycle or if the battery voltage is
low. When the power liftgate is turned off,
the liftgate can be opened manually by
pushing the liftgate opener switch. If the
power liftgate opener switch is pushed
during power open or close, the power
operation will be canceled and the liftgate
can be operated manually. This will allow
normal power operation functions to
resume.
WAD0154X
JVP0487X
MOTION-ACTIVATED LIFTGATE (if so
equipped)
The liftgate can be operated using a quick
kicking motion under the center of the
rear bumper.
The kick motion sensor
is located on
the back of the rear bumper. when you
move your foot under and then away
from the operating range
similar to a
kicking motion, while carrying the Intelli-
gent Key with you, the liftgate will open or
close automatically.
Proper operation technique
. While at the rear of the vehicle, begin
making a quick forward kicking mo-
tion.
. Raise your foot straight under the
center of the rear bumper then im-
mediately return your foot to the
ground in a continuous motion.
. You do not need to hold your foot
under the bumper or move it side to
side. Immediately return your foot to
the ground.
. The kicking motion should be straight,
smooth and consistent.
. After your kick motion is complete,
step back and allow the liftgate to
open/close.
. Three beeps will sound and the lift-
gate will begin moving within 2 sec-
onds after the kick.
WARNING
Prevent unintentional liftgate open-
ing/closing. There may be conditions
when opening/closing the liftgate is
not desired. Keep the Intelligent Key
out of range of the liftgate, (7 ft (2 m)
or more) or inside the vehicle, when
washing or working around the back
of the vehicle.
NOTE:
. The kick motion sensor may not
function under the following condi-
tions:
— When operating near a location
where strong radio waves are
transmitted, such as a TV tower,
power station or broadcasting
station.
— When the vehicle is parked near a
parking meter.
. The power liftgate may not operate
when your foot remains in the oper-
ating range
.
CAUTION
. When the Intelligent Key is carried
with you near the liftgate, even
someone, who does not carry the
Intelligent Key, may be able to
open or close the liftgate with a
kick motion.
. Do not perform a kick motion
near the exhaust system compo-
nents while they are hot. You may
severely burn yourself.
. Do not perform a kick motion on
an unstable place (for example,
on a slope or a muddy ground,
etc.).
Power open or close function
The liftgate will fully open automatically
using the kick motion sensor.
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Move your foot under and away from
the rear bumper similarly to a kicking
motion within the operation range of
the kick motion sensor.
3. The liftgate will automatically open or
close.
Stop and reverse function
The power liftgate will stop immediately if
a kick motion is performed during power
open or close. The liftgate can be stopped
even if you do not carry the Intelligent
Key.
And then the power liftgate will move in
the reverse direction if a kick motion is
performed again. The power liftgate can
be reversed when you carry the Intelli-
gent Key.
GARAGE MODE SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
The liftgate can be set to open to a
specific height by performing the follow-
ing:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired
position and hold the liftgate (the
liftgate will have some resistance
when being manually adjusted).
3. While holding the liftgate in position,
press and hold the power liftgate
close and lock switch
located on
the liftgate for approximately 3 sec-
onds or until 2 beeps are heard.
The liftgate will open to the selected
position setting. To change the position
of the liftgate, repeat steps 1-3 for setting
the position of the liftgate.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
CAUTION
Do not set the height of the liftgate
below approximately 1/3 of the way
to the floor using garage mode. Even
if you set the height below approxi-
mately 1/3 of the way to the floor,
the height will automatically be set
to approximately 1/3 of the way to
the floor.
AUTO CLOSURE (if so equipped)
When the liftgate reaches the secondary
position, the closure motor engages and
pulls the liftgate to its primary latch
position.
Do not apply excessive force when the
auto closure is operating. Excessive
force applied may cause the mechan-
ism to malfunction.
CAUTION
. The liftgate will automatically
close from the secondary posi-
tion. To avoid pinching, keep
hands and fingers away from
liftgate opening.
. Do not let children operate the
liftgate.
WAD0155X
LIFTGATE RELEASE LEVER
If the liftgate cannot be opened with the
power door lock switch due to a dis-
charged battery, follow these steps.
1. Fold the rear seats down. (See “Seats”
(P.1-3).)
2. Insert a suitable tool in the access
opening. Move the release lever to the
left. The liftgate will be unlatched.
3. Push the liftgate up to open.
Contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for repair.
CAUTION
. Avoid applying direct water pres-
sure, such as high-pressured
sprayer, on or around the fuel-
filler door.
. Be sure to close the fuel-filler
door before using an automatic
car wash or a high-pressured car
wash.
WAD0231X
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR
To open the fuel-filler door, push the
middle left side of the door.
JVP0524X
HOW TO REFUEL
The fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel-
filler cap. After opening the fuel-filler door,
insert the fuel pump nozzle directly into
the fuel-filler opening. When the fuel
pump nozzle is pulled out, the fuel-filler
opening will be sealed.
To refuel:
Be sure to insert the fuel pump nozzle
slowly into the fuel-filler opening as far as
it will go before fueling.
Never move the nozzle during refueling.
Pull out the nozzle approximately 5 sec-
onds after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically (initial shut-off).
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Close the fuel-filler door after refueling.
If you need to refuel from a portable fuel
container, use the funnel supplied with
your vehicle. (See “When refueling from a
portable fuel container” (P.3-30).)
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to open the flaps
on the fuel-filler opening using
any tool other than the fuel pump
nozzle.
. This fuel-filler opening is only
conformable to normal fuel pump
nozzles at gas stations. Using a
nozzle with a small diameter may
damage the opening and the fuel
system.
. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle
body, flush it away with water to
avoid paint damage.
WARNING
. Gasoline is extremely flammable
and highly explosive under cer-
tain conditions. You could be
burned or seriously injured if it is
misused or mishandled. Always
stop engine and do not smoke or
allow open flames or sparks near
the vehicle when refueling.
. Do not attempt to top off the fuel
tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically. Contin-
ued refueling may cause fuel
overflow, resulting in fuel spray
and possibly a fire.
. Never pour fuel into the throttle
body to attempt to start your
vehicle.
. Do not fill a portable fuel contain-
er in the vehicle or trailer. Static
electricity can cause an explosion
of flammable liquid, vapor or gas
in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce
the risk of serious injury or death
when filling portable fuel contain-
ers:
— Always place the container on
the ground when filling.
— Do not use electronic devices
when filling.
— Keep the pump nozzle in con-
tact with the container while
you are filling it.
— Use only approved portable
fuel containers for flammable
liquid.
WAD0214X
WHEN REFUELING FROM A PORTA-
BLE FUEL CONTAINER
If you need to refuel from a portable fuel
container, use the funnel
stored in the
tool bag (located under the luggage
board).
Be sure to insert the funnel into the fuel-
filler opening slowly and fully. Insert the
nozzle of the portable fuel container into
the opening along the funnel and fill the
fuel tank.
After refueling, remove the funnel from
the fuel-filler opening. Wipe the funnel
clean and return it to the tool bag.
CAUTION
. Do not insert the nozzle of the
portable fuel container directly
into the fuel-filler opening. Doing
so may damage the opening and
the fuel system.
. Use only the funnel provided with
your vehicle. Otherwise, the fuel-
filler opening and the fuel system
may be damaged.
WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving. You could lose con-
trol of your vehicle and cause an
accident.
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
any closer to you than is neces-
sary for proper steering opera-
tion and comfort. The driver’s air
bag inflates with great force. If
you are unrestrained, leaning for-
ward, sitting sideways or out of
position in any way, you are at
greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive ser-
ious or fatal injuries from the air
bag if you are up against it when
it inflates. Always sit back against
the seatback and as far away as
practical from the steering wheel.
Always use the seat belts.
WAD0127X
TILT AND TELESCOPIC OPERATION
Pull the lock lever down and adjust the
steering wheel up, down, forward or
rearward to the desired position. Push
the lock lever up securely to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WAD0250X
1. To block glare from the front, swing
down the main sun visor
.
2. To block glare from the side, remove
the main sun visor from the center
mount and swing it to the side
.
3. Slide the sun visor
in or out as
needed.
CAUTION
. Do not store the sun visor before
returning the extension to its
original position.
. Do not pull the extension sun
visor forcedly downward.
WAD0237X
CAUTION
. Do not release the rear sunshade
during operation. This could da-
mage the sunshade or cause in-
jury.
. Do not forcefully pull the sun-
shade. Doing so may elongate
the sunshade. This could cause
improper operation or could da-
mage the sunshade.
. Do not place objects on or near
the rear sunshade. This could
cause improper operation or
SUN VISORS REAR SUNSHADE (if so equipped)
could damage the sunshade.
The rear sunshades are equipped on the
rear seat windows.
To raise the sunshade, pull the knob
up
and hang the sunshade on the hooks
.
To store the sunshade, remove the sun-
shade from the hooks and lower it.
SPA2447
INSIDE MIRROR
Adjust the angle of the inside mirror to
the desired position.
SPA2143
Manual anti-glare type (if so
equipped)
The night position will reduce glare
from the headlights of vehicles behind
you at night.
Use the day position
when driving in
daylight hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when
necessary, because it reduces rear
view clarity.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33
MIRRORS
3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
SPA2162
Automatic anti-glare type (if so
equipped)
Type A (if so equipped):
The inside mirror is designed so that it
automatically changes reflection accord-
ing to the intensity of the headlights of
the following vehicle.
The anti-glare system will be automati-
cally turned on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
When the anti-glare system is turned on,
the indicator light
will illuminate and
excessive glare from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you will be reduced.
Push the
switch to make the inside
rearview mirror operate normally. The
indicator light will turn off. Push the
switch again to turn the system on.
Do not hang any objects on the mirror
or apply glass cleaner. Doing so will
reduce the sensitivity of the sensor
,
resulting in improper operation.
WAD0281X
Type B (if so equipped):
The inside mirror is designed so that it
automatically dims during night time
conditions and according to the intensity
of the headlights of the following vehicle.
The anti-glare system will be automati-
cally turned on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
Do not hang any objects on the mirror
or apply glass cleaner. Doing so will
reduce the sensitivity of the sensor
,
resulting in improper operation.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror
on the passenger side are closer
than they appear. Be careful when
moving to the right. Using only this
mirror could cause an accident. Use
the inside mirror or glance over your
shoulder to properly judge distances
to other objects.
WAD0229X
Adjusting outside mirrors
The outside mirror control switch is
located on the driver’s armrest.
The outside mirror will operate only when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push either the right or left switch to
select the right or left side mirror
(the
indicator light
on the selected mirror
switch illuminates), then adjust
using
the control switch.
Defrosting outside mirrors (if so
equipped)
The outside mirrors will be heated when
the rear window defroster switch is
operated. (See “Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch” (P.2-57).)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35
3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WAD0121X
Example
Foldable outside mirrors
Fold the outside mirror by pushing it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
Reverse tilt-down feature (if so
equipped)
When backing up the vehicle, the right or
left outside mirror will turn downward
automatically to provide better rear visi-
bility.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position.
2. Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
position.
3. Choose the right or left outside mirror
by operating the outside mirror con-
trol switch.
4. The selected outside mirror surface
moves downward.
When one of the following conditions has
occurred, the outside mirror surface will
return to its original position.
. The shift lever is moved out of the R
(Reverse) position for a short period of
time when the vehicle speed is lower
than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
. The vehicle speed exceeds 5 MPH (8
km/h).
. The selected outside mirror is dese-
lected using the outside mirror control
switch.
. The ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position.
. The engine is stopped.
WAD0238X
VANITY MIRROR
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
sun visor and pull up the cover.
The memory seat system has the follow-
ing features:
. Memory storage function
. Entry/exit function
WAD0228X
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Two positions for the driver’s seat and
outside mirrors can be stored in the
memory switch. Follow these procedures
to use the memory system.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside
mirrors to the desired positions by
manually operating each adjusting
switch. For additional information, re-
fer to “Seats” (P.1-3) and “Outside
mirrors” (P.3-35).
2. Push the SET switch and, within 5
seconds, push the memory switch (1
or 2).
3. The indicator light for the pushed
memory switch will come on and stay
on for approximately 5 seconds.
4. The chime will sound if the memory
has been stored.
NOTE:
If a new memory position is stored in
the same memory switch, the previous
memory position will be overwritten by
the new stored position.
Confirming memory storage
Push the SET switch. If a memory position
has not been stored in the switch (1 or 2)
the indicator light for the respective
switch will come ON for approximately
0.5 seconds. If a memory position has
been stored in the switch (1 or 2) then the
indicator light for the respective switch
will stay ON for approximately 5 seconds.
Recalling switch memory positions
To recall the manually stored positions,
push the memory switch (1 or 2). The
driver’s seat and the outside mirrors will
move to the positions stored in the
memory switch.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37
MEMORY SEAT (if so equipped)
3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Linking log-in function to a stored
memory position (models with na-
vigation system)
The log-in function can be linked to a
stored memory position with the follow-
ing procedure.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position while carrying the Intelligent
Key that was registered to the vehicle
with a log-in function.
NOTE:
Make sure the Intelligent Key is far
apart. Otherwise, the vehicle may
detect the wrong Intelligent Key.
2. Adjust the position of the driver’s seat
and outside mirrors. (See “Seats” (P.1-3)
and “Outside mirrors” (P.3-35).)
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The next time you log in (selecting the
user on the display) after placing the
ignition switch in the ON position while
carrying the Intelligent Key, the system
will automatically adjust to the memor-
ized driving position. (See the separate
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.)
Linking an Intelligent Key to a
stored memory position (models
without navigation system)
Each Intelligent Key can be linked to a
stored memory position (memory switch
1 or 2) with the following procedure.
1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory sto-
rage function” (P.3-37) for storing the
memory position.
2. The indicator light for the pushed
memory switch will come on. While
the indicator light is on for 5 seconds,
press the
button and the
button on the Intelligent Key in suc-
cession. The indicator light of the
linked memory switch will blink. After
the indicator light goes off, the Intel-
ligent Key is linked to that memory
setting.
Once it is linked, when ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, pressing the
button on the Intelligent Key will
move the driver’s seat and outside mir-
rors to the linked memory switch posi-
tion.
NOTE:
If a new memory position is stored in
the linked memory switch, then the
Intelligent Key will link the new position
and overwrites the previous position.
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the
driver’s seat will automatically move
when the shift position is in the P (Park)
position. This allows the driver to get into
and out of the driver’s seat more easily.
The driver’s seat will slide backward:
. When the driver’s door is opened with
the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position.
. When the ignition switch is changed
from ON to OFF with the driver’s door
open.
The driver’s seat will return to the pre-
vious position:
. When the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position while the shift posi-
tion is in the P (Park) position.
The entry/exit function can be canceled
through “Vehicle Settings” in the vehicle
information display by performing the
following:
. Switch the “Exit Seat Slide” from ON to
OFF. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-27).
SYSTEM OPERATION
The memory seat system will not work or
will stop operating under the following
conditions:
. When the vehicle is moving. (The
driver’s seat returning function can
be operated if the vehicle speed is
below 2 MPH (3 km/h).)
. When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the memory seat sys-
tem is operating.
. When the switch for the driver’s seat is
pushed while the memory seat sys-
tem is operating.
. When the seat has already been
moved to the memorized position.
. When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
. When the shift lever is moved from P
(Park) to any other position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39
3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
MEMO
4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio
and phone systems
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual .................................... 4-2
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ................................. 4-2
RearView Monitor system operation ..................... 4-3
How to read the displayed lines ................................ 4-3
Difference between predictive and
actual distances ...................................................................... 4-4
How to park with predictive course lines .......... 4-5
Adjusting the screen ........................................................... 4-7
How to turn on and off predictive
course lines ................................................................................. 4-7
RearView Monitor system limitations.................... 4-7
System maintenance .......................................................... 4-8
Intelligent Around View® Monitor (if
so equipped) ..................................................................................... 4-9
Intelligent Around View® Monitor
system operation ................................................................ 4-10
Difference between predictive and
actual distances ................................................................... 4-14
How to park with predictive course lines ....... 4-16
How to switch the display ........................................... 4-17
Adjusting the screen ........................................................ 4-18
Intelligent Around View® Monitor
system limitations .............................................................. 4-18
System maintenance ....................................................... 4-20
Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if
so equipped) ................................................................................. 4-21
MOD system operation ................................................ 4-22
Turning MOD on and off ............................................ 4-23
MOD system limitations .............................................. 4-23
System maintenance .................................................... 4-24
Ventilators ...................................................................................... 4-25
Center ventilators ............................................................ 4-25
Side ventilators .................................................................. 4-25
Rear ventilators .................................................................. 4-26
Heater and air conditioner................................................ 4-26
Manual air conditioner and heater .................... 4-27
Automatic air conditioner (models without
rear control) .......................................................................... 4-31
Automatic air conditioner (models with
rear control) .......................................................................... 4-34
Operating tips (for automatic
air conditioner) ................................................................... 4-36
Servicing air conditioner............................................. 4-37
Antenna ............................................................................................ 4-38
Shark fin antenna ............................................................ 4-38
Car phone or CB radio ......................................................... 4-38
4-2 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
For models with NissanConnect® System,
refer to NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual
that includes the following information.
Available functions may vary depending
on the models and specifications.
. Audio
. Hands-Free Phone
. Apple CarPlay®
. Android Auto
TM
. NissanConnect® Services powered by
SiriusXM®
. Navigation system
. Voice recognition
. Information and settings viewable on
NissanConnect®
WAE0334X
1. CAMERA button
WARNING
. Failure to follow the warnings
and instructions for proper use
of the RearView Monitor could
result in serious injury or death.
. RearView Monitor is a conveni-
ence feature and is not a sub-
stitute for proper backing. Always
turn and look out the windows,
and check mirrors to be sure that
it is safe to move before operat-
NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S MANUAL
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)
ing the vehicle. Always back up
slowly.
. The system is designed as an aid
to the driver in showing large
stationary objects directly behind
the vehicle, to help avoid dama-
ging the vehicle.
. The distance guide line and the
vehicle width line should be used
as a reference only when the
vehicle is on a level paved sur-
face. The distance viewed on the
monitor is for reference only and
may be different than the actual
distance between the vehicle and
displayed objects.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front
of the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automati-
cally shows a rear view of the vehicle
when the shift lever is placed in the R
(Reverse) position.
The radio can still be heard while the
RearView Monitor is active.
WAE0335X
To display the rear view, the RearView
Monitor system uses a camera
located
just above the vehicle’s license plate.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OP-
ERATION
When the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position, move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) position to operate the Rear-
View Monitor.
WAE0241X
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle
width and distances to objects with
reference to the bumper line
are
displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
. Red line
: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
. Yellow line
: approximately 3 ft (1 m)
. Green line
: approximately 7 ft (2 m)
Vehicle width guide lines
:
Indicate the vehicle width when backing
up.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3
4-4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Predictive course lines :
Indicate the predictive course when back-
ing up. The predictive course lines will be
displayed on the monitor when the shift
lever is in the R (Reverse) position and if
the steering wheel is turned. The predic-
tive course lines will move depending on
how much the steering wheel is turned
and will not be displayed while the steer-
ing wheel is in the straight ahead position.
The vehicle width guide lines and the
width of the predictive course lines are
wider than the actual width and course.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guide lines and their loca-
tions on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or down-
hill surfaces or projecting objects will be
actually located at distances different
from those displayed in the monitor
relative to the guide lines (refer to illustra-
tions). When in doubt, turn around and
view the objects as you are backing up, or
park and exit the vehicle to view the
positioning of objects behind the vehicle.
WAE0286X
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the
actual distance. Note that any object on
the hill is farther than it appears on the
monitor.
WAE0287X
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill,
the distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines are shown farther than
the actual distance. Note that any object
on the hill is closer than it appears on the
monitor.
WAE0288X
Backing up near a projecting object
The predictive course lines do not
touch the object in the display. However,
the vehicle may hit the object if it projects
over the actual backing up course.
JVH1216X
Backing up behind a projecting
object
The position is shown farther than the
position
in the display. However, the
position
is actually at the same dis-
tance as the position
. The vehicle may
hit the object when backing up to the
position
if the object projects over the
actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE
COURSE LINES
WARNING
. If the tires are replaced with
different sized tires, the predic-
tive course lines may be dis-
played incorrectly.
. On a snow-covered or slippery
road, there may be a difference
between the predictive course
line and the actual course line.
. If the battery is disconnected or
becomes discharged, the predic-
tive course lines may be dis-
played incorrectly. If this occurs,
please perform the following pro-
cedures:
— Turn the steering wheel from
lock to lock while the engine is
running.
— Drive the vehicle on a straight
road for more than 5 minutes.
. When the steering wheel is
turned with the ignition switch in
the ON position, the predictive
course lines may be displayed
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5
4-6 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
incorrectly.
WAE0289X
1. Visually check that the parking space
is safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is dis-
played on the screen
when the shift
lever is moved to the R (Reverse)
position.
WAE0290X
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting
the steering wheel so that the pre-
dictive course lines
enter the park-
ing space
.
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
the vehicle width guide lines
parallel
to the parking space
while referring
to the predictive course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the
space completely, place the shift posi-
tion to the P (Park) position and apply
the parking brake.
WAE0034X
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. Push the MENU button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key and then
touch the “Camera” key.
3. Touch the “Display Settings” key.
4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”,
“Tint”, “Color”, or “Black Level” key.
5. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or
“–” key on the touch screen display.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the RearView Monitor while the
vehicle is moving. Make sure the park-
ing brake is firmly applied.
HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF PRE-
DICTIVE COURSE LINES
Pushing the CAMERA button while the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position
can turn on and off the predictive course
lines.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIM-
ITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for RearView Monitor. Failure to
operate the vehicle in accordance
with these system limitations could
result in serious injury or death.
. The system cannot completely
eliminate blind spots and may
not show every object.
. Underneath the bumper and the
corner areas of the bumper can-
not be viewed on the RearView
Monitor because of its monitoring
range limitation. The system will
not show small objects below the
bumper, and may not show ob-
jects close to the bumper or on
the ground.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7
4-8 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
. Objects viewed in the RearView
Monitor differ from actual dis-
tance because a wide-angle lens
is used.
. Objects in the RearView Monitor
will appear visually opposite
compared to when viewed in the
rearview and outside mirrors.
. Use the displayed lines as a re-
ference. The lines are highly af-
fected by the number of
occupants, fuel level, vehicle po-
sition, road conditions and road
grade.
. Make sure that the liftgate is
securely closed when backing up.
. Do not put anything on the rear-
view camera. The rearview cam-
era is installed above the license
plate.
. When washing the vehicle with
high-pressure water, be sure not
to spray it around the camera.
Otherwise, water may enter the
camera unit causing water con-
densation on the lens, a malfunc-
tion, fire or an electric shock.
. Do not strike the camera. It is a
precision instrument. Otherwise,
it may malfunction or cause da-
mage resulting in a fire or an
electric shock.
The following are operating limitations
and do not represent a system malfunc-
tion:
. When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not clearly
display objects.
. When strong light directly shines on
the camera, objects may not be dis-
played clearly.
. Vertical lines may be seen in objects
on the screen. This is due to strong
reflected light from the bumper.
. The screen may flicker under fluores-
cent light.
. The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from
the actual color of objects.
. Objects on the monitor may not be
clear in a dark environment.
. There may be a delay when switching
between views.
. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on
the camera, the RearView Monitor
may not display objects clearly. Clean
the camera.
. Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with a diluted mild clean-
ing agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
WAE0335X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
. Do not use alcohol, benzine or
thinner to clean the camera. This
will cause discoloration.
. Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera
, RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then
wiping it with a dry cloth.
WAE0475X
1. CAMERA button
WARNING
. Failure to follow the warnings
and instructions for the proper
use of the Intelligent Around
View® Monitor system could re-
sult in serious injury or death.
. The Intelligent Around View®
Monitor is a convenience feature
and is not a substitute for proper
vehicle operation because it has
areas where objects cannot be
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW®
MONITOR (if so equipped)
4-10 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
viewed. The four corners of the
vehicle in particular, are areas
where objects do not always ap-
pear in the bird’s-eye, front, or
rear views. Always check your
surroundings to be sure that it is
safe to move before operating
the vehicle. Always operate the
vehicle slowly.
. The driver is always responsible
for safety during parking and
other maneuvers.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the lens when clean-
ing dirt or snow from the front of the
camera.
The Intelligent Around View® Monitor
system is designed as an aid to the driver
in situations such as slot parking or
parallel parking.
The monitor displays various views of the
position of the vehicle in a split screen
format. Not all views are available at all
times.
Available views:
. Front view
A view of the front of the vehicle
. Rear view
A view of the rear of the vehicle
. Bird’s-eye view
The surrounding view of the vehicle
from above
. Front-side view
The view around and ahead of the
front passenger’s side wheel
. Front-wide view
A wider area view of the front view
. Rear-wide view
A wider area view of the rear view
WAE0360X
To display the multiple views, the Intelli-
gent Around View® Monitor system uses
cameras
located on the front grille, on
the vehicle’s outside mirrors and one just
above the vehicle’s rear license plate.
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW®
MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
When the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position, push the CAMERA button on
the instrument panel or move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position to
operate the Intelligent Around View®
Monitor.
The screen displayed on the Intelligent
Around View® Monitor will automatically
return to the previous screen 3 minutes
after the CAMERA button has been
pushed with the shift lever in a position
other than the R (Reverse) position.
Available views
WARNING
. The distance guide lines and the
vehicle width guide lines should
be used as a reference only when
the vehicle is on a paved, level
surface. The apparent distance
viewed on the monitor may be
different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and dis-
played objects.
. Use the displayed lines and the
bird’s-eye view as a reference.
The lines and the bird’s-eye view
are greatly affected by the num-
ber of occupants, fuel level, vehi-
cle position, road condition and
road grade.
. If the tires are replaced with
different sized tires, the predic-
tive course lines and the bird’s-
eye view may be displayed incor-
rectly.
. When driving the vehicle up a hill,
objects viewed in the monitor are
farther than they appear. When
driving the vehicle down a hill,
objects viewed in the monitor are
closer than they appear.
. Objects in the rear view will ap-
pear visually opposite compared
to when viewed in the rearview
and outside mirrors.
. Use the mirrors or actually look to
properly judge distances to other
objects.
. The distance between objects
viewed in the rear view differs
from actual distance because a
wide-angle lens is used.
. On a snow-covered or slippery
road, there may be a difference
between the predictive course
line and the actual course line.
. The vehicle width and predictive
course lines are wider than the
actual width and course.
WAE0538X
Front view
WAE0539X
Rear view (example)
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11
4-12 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Front and rear view:
Guiding lines that indicate the approx-
imate vehicle width and distances to
objects with reference to the vehicle body
line
, are displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
. Red line
: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
. Yellow line
: approximately 3 ft (1 m)
. Green line
: approximately 7 ft (2 m)
. Green line
(if so equipped): approxi-
mately 10 ft (3 m)
Vehicle width guide lines
:
Indicate the vehicle width.
Predictive course lines
:
Indicate the predictive course when op-
erating the vehicle. The predictive course
lines will move depending on how much
the steering wheel is turned. The predic-
tive course lines in the rear view will not
be displayed while the steering wheel is in
the straight ahead position.
The front view will not be displayed when
the vehicle speed is above 6 MPH (10
km/h).
NOTE:
. When the monitor displays the front
view and the steering wheel turns
about 90 degrees or less from the
straight ahead position, both the
right and left predictive course lines
are displayed. When the steering
wheel turns about 90 degrees or
more, the predictive course line is
displayed only on the opposite side
of the turn.
WAE0530X
Bird’s-eye view:
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead
view of the vehicle which helps confirm
the vehicle position and the predictive
course to a parking space.
The vehicle icon
shows the position of
the vehicle. Note that the distance be-
tween objects viewed in the bird’s-eye
view differs from the actual distance.
The areas between the camera views
(if
so equipped) are indicated in black.
After the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position, the non-viewable area
(if
so equipped) is highlighted in yellow for a
few seconds after the bird’s-eye view is
displayed.
The amber markers are displayed when
the sonar is turned off or the sonar is not
available at the corner.
The predictive course lines
indicate the
predicted course when operating the
vehicle.
WARNING
. Objects in the bird’s-eye view will
appear farther than the actual
distance.
. Tall objects, such as a curb or
vehicle, may be misaligned or not
displayed at the seam of the
views.
. Objects that are above the cam-
era cannot be displayed.
. The view for the bird’s-eye view
may be misaligned when the
camera position alters.
. A line on the ground may be
misaligned and is not seen as
being straight at the seam of the
views. The misalignment will in-
crease as the line proceeds away
from the vehicle.
WAE0501X
Front-side view:
Guiding lines:
Guiding lines that indicate the approx-
imate width and the front end of the
vehicle are displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line
shows the
front part of the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line
shows the
vehicle width including the outside mir-
rors.
The extensions
of both the front and
side
lines are shown with a green
dotted line.
CAUTION
The turn signal light may look like
the side-of-vehicle line. This is not a
malfunction.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13
4-14 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
WAE0540X
Front-wide view
WAE0541X
Rear-wide view
Front-wide/rear-wide view:
While the front view/rear view shows a
normal view on the split screens, the
front-wide view/rear-wide view shows a
wider area on the entire screen and
allows checking of the blind corners on
the right and left sides.
Distance guide lines
- :
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
. Red line
: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
. Yellow line
: approx. 3 ft (1 m)
. Green line
: approx. 7 ft (2 m)
. Green line
(front-wide view only):
approx. 10 ft (3 m)
Vehicle width guide lines
:
Indicate the approximate vehicle width.
Predictive course lines
:
Indicate the predictive course when op-
erating the vehicle. The predictive course
lines will move depending on how much
the steering wheel is turned. The predic-
tive course lines in the rear-wide view will
not be displayed while the steering wheel
is in the straight ahead position.
The front-wide view will not be displayed
when the vehicle speed is above 6 MPH
(10 km/h).
NOTE:
. When the monitor displays the
front-wide view and the steering
wheel turns about 90 degrees or
less from the straight ahead posi-
tion, both the right and left predic-
tive course lines
are displayed.
When the steering wheel turns
about 90 degrees or more, the pre-
dictive course line is displayed only
on the opposite side of the turn.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guide lines and their loca-
tions on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or down-
hill surfaces or projecting objects will be
actually located at distances different
from those displayed in the monitor
relative to the guide lines (refer to illustra-
tions). When in doubt, turn around and
view the objects as you are backing up, or
park and exit the vehicle to view the
positioning of objects behind the vehicle.
WAE0542X
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the
actual distance. Note that any object on
the hill is farther than it appears on the
monitor.
WAE0543X
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill,
the distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines are shown farther than
the actual distance. Note that any object
on the hill is closer than it appears on the
monitor.
WAE0545X
Backing up near a projecting object
The predictive course lines do not
touch the object in the display. However,
the vehicle may hit the object if it projects
over the actual backing up course.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15
4-16 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
JVH1216X
Backing up behind a projecting
object
The position is shown farther than the
position
in the display. However, the
position
is actually at the same dis-
tance as the position
. The vehicle may
hit the object when backing up to the
position
if the object projects over the
actual moving course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE
COURSE LINES
WARNING
. If the tires are replaced with
different sized tires, the predic-
tive course lines may be dis-
played incorrectly.
. On a snow-covered or slippery
road, there may be a difference
between the predictive course
line and the actual course line.
. If the battery is disconnected or
becomes discharged, the predic-
tive course lines may be dis-
played incorrectly. If this occurs,
please perform the following pro-
cedures:
— Turn the steering wheel from
lock to lock while the engine is
running.
— Drive the vehicle on a straight
road for more than 5 minutes.
. When the steering wheel is
turned with the ignition switch in
the ON position, the predictive
course lines may be displayed
incorrectly.
WAE0546X
1. Visually check that the parking space
is safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is dis-
played on the screen
when the shift
lever is moved to the R (Reverse)
position.
WAE0547X
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting
the steering wheel so that the pre-
dictive course lines
enter the park-
ing space
.
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
the vehicle width guide lines
parallel
to the parking space
while referring
to the predictive course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the
space completely, place the shift posi-
tion in the P (Park) position and apply
the parking brake.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, push the CAMERA button or
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
position to operate the Intelligent Around
View® Monitor.
The Intelligent Around View® Monitor dis-
plays different split screen views depend-
ing on the position of the shift lever. Push
the CAMERA button to switch between
the available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position, the available views are:
. Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
. Rear view/front-side view split screen
. Rear-wide view
If the shift lever is out of the R (Reverse)
position, the available views are:
. Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
. Front view/front-side view split screen
. Front-wide view
The display will switch from the Intelligent
Around View® Monitor screen when:
. The shift lever is in the D (Drive)
position and the vehicle speed in-
creases above approximately 6 MPH
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17
4-18 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
(10 km/h).
. A different screen is selected.
WAE0034X
Type A
WAE0472X
Type B
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. Push the MENU button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key and then
touch the “Camera” key.
3. Touch the “Display Settings” key.
4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”,
“Tint”, “Color”, or “Black Level” key.
5. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or
“–” key on the touch screen display.
NOTE:
Do not adjust the display settings of the
Intelligent Around View® Monitor while
the vehicle is moving. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly applied.
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW®
MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for Intelligent Around View®
Monitor. Failure to operate the vehi-
cle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious
injury or death.
. Do not use the Intelligent Around
View® Monitor with the outside
mirrors in the stored position,
and make sure that the liftgate
is securely closed when operating
the vehicle using the Intelligent
Around View® Monitor.
. The apparent distance between
objects viewed on the Intelligent
Around View® Monitor differs
from the actual distance.
. The cameras are installed on the
front grille, the outside mirrors
and above the rear license plate.
Do not put anything on the cam-
eras.
. When washing the vehicle with
high pressure water, be sure not
to spray it around the cameras.
Otherwise, water may enter the
camera unit causing water con-
densation on the lens, a malfunc-
tion, fire or an electric shock.
. Do not strike the cameras. They
are precision instruments. Doing
so could cause a malfunction or
cause damage resulting in a fire
or an electric shock.
WAE0345X
There are some areas where the system
will not show objects and the system
does not warn of moving objects. When in
the front or the rear view display, an
object below the bumper or on the
ground may not be viewed
. When in
the bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the
seam
of the camera viewing areas will
not appear in the monitor.
The following are operating limitations
and do not represent a system malfunc-
tion:
. There may be a delay when switching
between views.
. When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not
display objects clearly.
. When strong light directly shines on
the camera, objects may not be dis-
played clearly.
. The screen may flicker under fluores-
cent light.
. The colors of objects on the Intelligent
Around View® Monitor may differ
somewhat from the actual color of
objects.
. Objects on the Intelligent Around
View® Monitor may not be clear and
the color of the object may differ in a
dark environment.
. There may be differences in sharpness
between each camera view of the
bird’s-eye view.
. Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
that has been dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe
with a dry cloth.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19
4-20 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
WAE0473X
System temporarily unavailable
When the “ ” icon is displayed on the
screen, there will be abnormal conditions
in the Intelligent Around View® Monitor.
This will not hinder normal driving opera-
tion but the system should be inspected.
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer.
WAE0474X
When the “ ” icon is displayed on the
screen, the camera image may be receiv-
ing temporary electronic disturbances
from surrounding devices. This will not
hinder normal driving operation but the
system should be inspected. It is recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN dealer.
WAE0360X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
. Do not use alcohol, benzine or
thinner to clean the camera. This
will cause discoloration.
. Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras
, the Intelligent Around
View® Monitor may not display objects
clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a
cloth dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent and then wiping with a
dry cloth.
WAE0475X
1. CAMERA button
WARNING
. Failure to follow the warnings
and instructions for proper use
of the Moving Object Detection
system could result in serious
injury or death.
. The MOD system is not a substi-
tute for proper vehicle operation
and is not designed to prevent
contact with objects surrounding
the vehicle. When maneuvering,
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION
(MOD) (if so equipped)
4-22 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
always use the outside mirror
and rearview mirror and turn
and check the surroundings to
ensure it is safe to maneuver.
. The system is deactivated at
speeds above 5 MPH (8 km/h). It
is reactivated at lower speeds.
. The MOD system is not designed
to detect the surrounding sta-
tionary objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of
moving objects near the vehicle when
driving out of garages, maneuvering in
parking lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects
by using image processing technology on
the image shown in the display.
MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
The MOD system will turn on automati-
cally under the following conditions:
. When the shift lever is in the R
(Reverse) position.
. When the CAMERA button is pushed
to activate the Intelligent Around
View® Monitor system on the display.
. When vehicle speed decreases below
approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h).
The MOD system operates in the follow-
ing conditions when the camera view is
displayed:
. When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is
stopped, the MOD system detects the
moving objects in the bird’s-eye view.
The MOD system will not operate if
either door is opened. If outside mir-
rors are folded, MOD may not operate
properly.
. When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)
position, and the vehicle speed is
below approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h),
the MOD system detects moving ob-
jects in the front view or front-wide
view.
. When the shift lever is in the R
(Reverse) position and the vehicle
speed is below approximately 5 MPH
(8 km/h), the MOD system detects
moving objects in the rear view or
rear-wide view. The MOD system will
not operate if the liftgate is open.
The MOD system does not detect moving
objects in the front-side view. The MOD
icon is not displayed on the screen when
in this view.
When the MOD system detects a moving
object near the vehicle, the yellow frame
will be displayed on the view where the
object is detected and a chime will sound
once. While the MOD system continues to
detect moving objects, the yellow frame
continues to be displayed.
NOTE:
While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is
beeping, the MOD system does not
chime.
WAE0548X
Front and bird’s-eye views
WAE0365X
Rear and bird’s-eye views
WAE0549X
Rear and front-side views
WAE0550X
Front-wide view / rear-wide view
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame
is displayed on each camera image (front,
rear, right, left) depending on where
moving objects are detected.
The yellow frame
is displayed on the
front view, rear view, front-wide view and
rear-wide view.
A green MOD icon
is displayed in the
view where the MOD system is operative.
A gray MOD icon
is displayed in the view
where the MOD system is not operative.
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD
icon
is not displayed.
TURNING MOD ON AND OFF
The MOD system can be turned on and
off using the vehicle information display.
(See “Driver Assistance” (P.2-24).)
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for MOD. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in
serious injury or death.
. Do not use the MOD system when
towing a trailer. The system may
not function properly.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23
4-24 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
. Excessive noise (for example,
audio system volume or open
vehicle window) will interfere
with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.
. The MOD system performance
will be limited according to en-
vironmental conditions and sur-
rounding objects such as:
— When there is low contrast
between background and the
moving objects.
— When there is blinking source
of light.
— When strong light such as
another vehicle’s headlight or
sunlight is present.
— When camera orientation is
not in its usual position, such
as when the outside mirror is
folded.
— When there is dirt, water drops
or snow on the camera lens.
— When the position of the mov-
ing objects in the display is
not changed.
. The MOD system might detect
flowing water droplets on the
camera lens, white smoke from
the muffler, moving shadows, etc.
. The MOD system may not func-
tion properly depending on the
speed, direction, distance or
shape of the moving objects.
. If your vehicle sustains damage
to the parts where the camera is
installed, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be
altered and the MOD system may
not detect objects properly.
. When the temperature is extre-
mely high or low, the screen may
not display objects clearly. This is
not a malfunction.
NOTE:
The green MOD icon will change to
orange if one of the following has
occurred.
. When the system is malfunctioning.
. When the component temperature
reaches a high level.
. When the rear view camera has
detected a blockage.
If the icon light continues to illuminate
in orange, have the MOD system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WAE0360X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
. Do not use alcohol, benzine or
thinner to clean the camera. This
will cause discoloration.
. Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras
, the MOD system may not
operate properly. Clean the camera by
wiping with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then
wiping with a dry cloth.
WAE0346X
Right side
CENTER VENTILATORS
Open/close the ventilators by moving the
control to either direction.
Adjust the air flow direction of the venti-
lators by moving the center knob (up/
down, left/right) until the desired position
is achieved.
WAE0347X
Right side
SIDE VENTILATORS
Open/close the ventilators by moving the
control to either direction.
Adjust the air flow direction of the venti-
lators by moving the center knob (up/
down, left/right) until the desired position
is achieved.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25
VENTILATORS
4-26 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
JVH0940X
REAR VENTILATORS
Open/close the ventilators by moving the
control to either direction.
: This symbol indicates that the venti-
lators are open. Moving the side
control to this direction will open the
ventilators.
: This symbol indicates that the venti-
lators are closed. Moving the side
control to this direction will close the
ventilators.
Adjust the air flow direction of the venti-
lators by moving the center knob (up/
down, left/right) until the desired position
is achieved.
WARNING
. The heater and air conditioner
operate only when the engine is
running.
. Never leave children or adults
who would normally require the
support of others alone in the
vehicle. Pets should not be left
alone either. They could unknow-
ingly activate switches or con-
trols and inadvertently become
involved in a serious accident
and injure themselves. On hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly be-
come high enough to cause se-
vere or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
. Do not use the recirculation mode
for long periods as it may cause
the interior air to become stale
and the windows to fog up.
. Do not adjust the heating and air
conditioning controls while driv-
ing so that full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
The heater and air conditioner operate
when the engine is running. The air
blower will operate even if the engine is
turned off and the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
NOTE:
. Odors from inside and outside the
vehicle can build up in the air condi-
tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas-
senger compartment through the
ventilators.
. When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air
recirculation to allow fresh air into
the passenger compartment. This
should help reduce odors inside the
vehicle.
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
WAE0349X
1. (fan speed control) dial
2. Dial pointers
3. A/C (air conditioner) button
4. Air flow control buttons
5. Temperature control dial
6.
(front defroster) button
7.
(rear window defroster) button (See
“Rear window and outside mirror defros-
ter switch” (P.2-57).)
8.
(air recirculation) button
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER AND
HEATER
Controls
Turning system on/off:
To turn on the system, turn the
dial
out of the OFF position. Turn the dial
counterclockwise to the OFF position to
turn off the system.
Fan speed control:
Turn the
dial clockwise to increase
the fan speed.
Turn the
dial counterclockwise to
decrease the fan speed.
The dial pointer indicates the fan speed
level.
Temperature control:
Turn the temperature control dial to set
the desired temperature. Turn the dial
between the middle and the right posi-
tion to select the hot temperature. Turn
the dial between the middle and the left
position to select the cool temperature.
The dial pointer indicates the tempera-
ture level.
Air flow control:
Push one of the air flow control buttons
to select the air flow outlets.
— Air flows mainly from center and side
ventilators.
— Air flows mainly from center and side
ventilators and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from the foot outlet
and partly from the defroster.
— Air flows mainly from the defroster
and foot outlets.
Air intake control:
The air intake control mode will change
each time the
button is pushed.
. When the indicator light is turned on,
the air recirculates inside the vehicle.
. When the indicator light is turned off,
the air flow is drawn from outside the
vehicle.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27
4-28 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
A/C (Air Conditioner) operation:
Push the A/C button to turn on or off the
air conditioner. When the air conditioner
is on, the A/C indicator light on the button
illuminates.
MAX A/C (Quick Air Conditioning) op-
eration:
To turn on the MAX A/C mode for
maximum cooling and dehumidifying,
turn the temperature control dial coun-
terclockwise until the dial pointer is at the
"MAX A/C" position.
When the MAX A/C mode is turned on, the
air flow mode indicator light will turn off
with the air flow mode fixed at
.
At the same time, the indicator light on
the A/C button and the air recirculation
mode will turn on.
To turn off the MAX A/C mode, turn the
temperature control dial clockwise so
that the dial pointer is out of the "MAX
A/C" position. When the MAX A/C mode is
turned off, most of the settings will return
to the previous state, while the indicator
light on the A/C button will stay on.
Heater operation
Heating:
This mode is used to direct heated air
from the foot outlets. Some air also flows
from the defroster outlets and the side
ventilator outlets.
1. Push the
button for normal heat-
ing. (The indicator light will turn off.)
2. Push the
button. (The indicator
light will turn on.)
3. Turn the
dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot (right) position.
Ventilation:
This mode directs outside air from the
side and center ventilators.
1. Push the
button. (The indicator
light will turn off.)
2. Push the
button. (The indicator
light will turn on.)
3. Turn the
dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Defrosting or defogging:
This mode directs the air to the defroster
outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
1. Push the
button. (The indicator
light will turn on.)
2. Turn the
dial to the desired
position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot (right) position.
To remove frost from the windshield
quickly, turn the temperature control
dial to the maximum hot (right) posi-
tion and the
dial to the maximum
position.
When the front defroster mode is
selected, the air conditioner automa-
tically turns on if the outside tempera-
ture is more than slightly above
freezing. This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
The air recirculation indicator light
automatically turns off, allowing out-
side air to be drawn into the passen-
ger compartment to further improve
the defogging performance. The re-
circulation mode cannot be activated
in the front defroster mode.
Bi-level heating:
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to
the side and center ventilators and to the
front and rear floor outlets.
1. Push the
button. (The indicator
light will turn off.)
2. Push the
button. (The indicator
light will turn on.)
3. Turn the
dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Heating and defogging:
This mode heats the interior and defogs
the windows.
1. Push the
button. (The indicator
light will turn on.)
2. Turn the
dial to the desired
position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the maximum hot (right) position.
When the
button is pushed, the air
conditioner automatically turns on if the
outside temperature is more than slightly
above freezing. This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield. The air
recirculation indicator light automatically
turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn
into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging perfor-
mance.
NOTE:
Clear snow and ice from the wiper
blades and air inlet in front of the
windshield. This improves heater op-
eration.
Air conditioner operation
Start the engine, turn the dial to the
desired position, and push the A/C button
to activate the air conditioner. When the
air conditioner is on, cooling and dehu-
midifying functions are added to the
heater operation. The air conditioner
cooling function operates only when the
engine is running.
Cooling:
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify
the air.
1. Push the
button. (The indicator
light will turn on.)
2. Turn the
dial to the desired
position.
3. Push the A/C button. (The indicator
light will turn on.)
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the cool (left) position.
For quick cooling, turn on the MAX A/C
mode by turning the temperature control
dial until the dial pointer is at the "MAX
A/C" position. When the MAX A/C mode is
turned on, it will activate the air recircula-
tion mode. The amount of air coming
through the ventilators is the highest it
can go when in MAX A/C mode regardless
of the position of the
dial.
Dehumidified heating:
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify
the air.
1. Push the
button. (The indicator
light will turn off.)
2. Push the
button. (The indicator
light will turn on.)
3. Turn the
dial to the desired
position.
4. Push the A/C button on. (The indicator
light will turn on.)
5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot (right) position.
Dehumidified defogging:
This mode is used to defog the windows
and dehumidify the air.
1. Push the
button. (The indicator
light will turn on.)
2. Turn the
dial to the desired
position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
When the
or mode is selected, the
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29
4-30 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
air conditioner automatically turns on if
the outside temperature is more than
slightly above freezing. This dehumidifies
the air which helps defog the windshield.
The air recirculation mode automatically
turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn
into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging perfor-
mance.
The air conditioner is always turned on in
the
or
mode, regardless of
whether the indicator light is on or off.
NOTE:
. The air conditioner system should
be operated for approximately 10
minutes at least once a month. This
helps prevent damage to the air
conditioner system due to the lack
of lubrication.
. A visible mist may be seen coming
from the ventilators in hot, humid
conditions as the air is cooled ra-
pidly. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
. If the engine coolant temperature
becomes too high, the air recircula-
tion mode will be activated and the
indicator light will turn on automa-
tically.
. If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. (See “If your
vehicle overheats” (P.6-14).)
WAE0352X
Models with heated steering wheel
WAE0353X
Models without heated steering wheel
1. Temperature control dial (driver’s side)
2. AUTO (automatic) button
3. Display screen
4. SYNC (synchronize) button
5. Temperature control dial (passenger’s
side)
6. ON·OFF button
7.
(air recirculation) button
8.
(fan speed control) buttons
9.
(air flow control) button
10.
(front defroster) button
11.
(rear window defroster) button
(See “Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch” (P.2-57).)
12. A/C (air conditioner) button
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER
(models without rear control)
Automatic operation
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO):
This mode may be used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a
constant temperature. Air flow distribu-
tion and fan speed are also controlled
automatically.
1. Push the AUTO button on. (The in-
dicator light on the button will illumi-
nate.)
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31
4-32 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
2. Turn the temperature control dial on
the corresponding side to set the
desired temperature.
.
You can individually set tempera-
tures for the driver’s side and front
passenger’s side when the indica-
tor light on the SYNC button is not
illuminated.
A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as
the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
Heating (A/C OFF):
The air conditioner does not activate in
this mode. Use this mode when you only
need to heat.
1. Push the AUTO button on. (The in-
dicator light on the button will illumi-
nate.)
2. Push the A/C button. (The indicator
light will turn off.)
3. Turn the temperature control dial on
the corresponding side to set the
desired temperature.
.
You can individually set tempera-
tures for the driver’s side and front
passenger’s side when the indica-
tor light on the SYNC button is not
illuminated.
.
The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained
automatically. Air flow distribution
and fan speed are also controlled
automatically.
NOTE:
. Do not set the temperature lower
than the outside air temperature or
the system may not work properly.
. Not recommended if windows fog
up.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:
1. Push the
button. (The indicator
light on the button will turn on.)
2. Turn the temperature control dial on
the corresponding side to set the
desired temperature.
.
To quickly remove ice from the
outside of the windows, use the
button to set the fan speed to
maximum.
.
As soon as possible after the wind-
shield is clean, push the AUTO
button to return to the automatic
mode.
.
When the button is pushed, the
air conditioner will automatically be
turned on at outside temperatures
more than slightly above freezing.
The air recirculation mode auto-
matically turns off, allowing outside
air to be drawn into the passenger
compartment to further improve
the defogging performance.
Manual operation
Fan speed control:
Push the
buttons to manually control
the fan speed.
Air intake control:
The air intake control mode will change
each time the
button is pushed.
. When the indicator light is turned on,
the air recirculates inside the vehicle.
. When the indicator light is turned off,
the air flow is drawn from outside the
vehicle.
. To switch to automatic control mode,
push and hold the
button for
about 2 seconds. The indicator light
will blink, and then the air intake will
be controlled automatically.
Air flow control:
Pushing the
button manually con-
trols air flow and selects the air outlet:
— Air flows mainly from center and side
ventilators.
— Air flows mainly from center and side
ventilators and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from the foot outlet
and partly from the defroster.
— Air flows mainly from the defroster
and foot outlets.
Synchronize temperature settings:
Push the SYNC button to turn on the
SYNC mode. (The indicator light on the
button will turn on.)
When the SYNC mode is active, the
driver’s side temperature control dial will
control the driver’s and front passenger’s
side temperatures.
To exit the SYNC mode, change the
passenger’s side temperature using the
temperature control dial on the front
passenger’s side. (The indicator light on
the SYNC button will turn off.)
To turn the system off
Push the ON·OFF button.
Remote engine start logic (if so
equipped)
When the remote engine start function is
activated, the vehicles equipped with the
automatic air conditioner and heater may
go into automatic heating or cooling
mode depending on the outside and
cabin temperatures. During this period,
the display and the buttons will be
inoperable until the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. When the
temperature is low, the rear defroster
and the heated steering wheel (if so
equipped) may also be activated auto-
matically with the activation of the re-
mote engine start function. (See “Remote
engine start” (P.3-19).)
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33
4-34 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
WAE0354X
1. Temperature control dial (driver’s side)
2. AUTO (automatic) button
3.
(air recirculation) button
4.
(outside air circulation) button
5. Display screen
6. SYNC (synchronize) button
7. Temperature control dial (passenger’s
side)
8. ON·OFF button
9. Rear temperature control buttons
10.
(fan speed control) buttons
11.
(air flow control) button
12.
(front defroster) button
13.
(rear window defroster) button
(See “Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch” (P.2-57).)
14. A/C (air conditioner) button
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER
(models with rear control)
Automatic operation
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO):
This mode may be used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a
constant temperature. Air flow distribu-
tion and fan speed are also controlled
automatically.
1. Push the AUTO button on. (The in-
dicator light on the button will illumi-
nate.)
2. Turn the temperature control dial on
the corresponding side to set the
desired temperature.
.
You can individually set tempera-
tures for the driver’s side and front
passenger’s side when the indica-
tor light on the SYNC button is not
illuminated.
A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as
the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
Heating (A/C OFF):
The air conditioner does not activate in
this mode. Use this mode when you only
need to heat.
1. Push the AUTO button on. (The in-
dicator light on the button will illumi-
nate.)
2. Push the A/C button. (The indicator
light will turn off.)
3. Turn the temperature control dial on
the corresponding side to set the
desired temperature.
.
You can individually set tempera-
tures for the driver’s side and front
passenger’s side when the indica-
tor light on the SYNC button is not
illuminated.
.
The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained
automatically. Air flow distribution
and fan speed are also controlled
automatically.
NOTE:
. Do not set the temperature lower
than the outside air temperature or
the system may not work properly.
. Not recommended if windows fog
up.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:
1. Push the
button. (The indicator
light on the button will come on.)
2. Turn the temperature control dial on
the corresponding side to set the
desired temperature.
.
To quickly remove ice from the
outside of the windows, use the
button to set the fan speed to
maximum.
.
As soon as possible after the wind-
shield is clean, push the AUTO
button to return to the automatic
mode.
.
When the button is pushed, the
air conditioner will automatically be
turned on at outside temperatures
more than slightly above freezing.
The air recirculation mode auto-
matically turns off, allowing outside
air to be drawn into the passenger
compartment to further improve
the defogging performance.
Manual operation
Fan speed control:
Push the
buttons to manually control
the fan speed.
Air intake control:
. Push the
button to recirculate
interior air inside the vehicle. The
indicator light on the button will come
on.
. Push the
button to draw outside
air into the passenger compartment.
The indicator light on the button will
come on.
. To control the air intake automatically,
push and hold either the
button
or the
button. The indicator light
will blink, and then the air intake will
switch to automatic control. When the
automatic control is set, the system
automatically alternates between the
outside air circulation and the air
recirculation modes. (The indicator
light of the active mode will turn on.)
Air flow control:
Pushing the
button manually con-
trols air flow and selects the air outlet:
— Air flows mainly from center and side
ventilators.
— Air flows mainly from center and side
ventilators and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from the foot outlet
and partly from the defroster.
— Air flows mainly from the defroster
and foot outlets.
Synchronize temperature settings:
Push the SYNC button to turn on the
SYNC mode. (The indicator light on the
button will turn on.)
When the SYNC mode is active, the
driver’s side temperature control dial will
control the driver’s side, front passenger’s
side and rear temperatures.
When the passenger’s side temperature
control dial or the rear temperature
control buttons are operated, it will can-
cel the SYNC mode of the individual zone.
(The indicator light on the SYNC button
will remain on.)
Operating both the passenger’s side
temperature control dial and the rear
temperature control buttons will turn off
the SYNC mode. (The indicator light on
the SYNC button will turn off.) (See “Rear
temperature control” (P.4-36).)
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35
4-36 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
To turn the system off
Push the ON·OFF button.
JVH1847X
1. Rear temperature display
2. “
” Rear temperature increase button
3. “
” Rear temperature decrease button
Rear temperature control (if so
equipped)
You can adjust the temperature for rear
seat passengers using the buttons lo-
cated on the back side of the console box.
Remote engine start logic
When the remote engine start function is
activated, the vehicles equipped with the
automatic air conditioner and heater may
go into automatic heating or cooling
mode depending on the outside and
cabin temperatures. During this period,
the display and the buttons will be
inoperable until the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. When the
temperature is low, the rear defroster
and the heated steering wheel (if so
equipped) may also be activated auto-
matically with the activation of the re-
mote engine start function. (See “Remote
engine start” (P.3-19).)
OPERATING TIPS (for automatic air
conditioner)
When the engine coolant temperature
and outside air temperature are low, the
air flow from the foot outlets may be
limited when in the automatic mode.
However, this is not a malfunction. After
the coolant temperature warms up, air
flow from the foot outlets will operate
normally.
For rear temperature control (if so
equipped):
. The purpose of the rear temperature
control is to vary the temperature of
the rear airflow.
. The amount of airflow to the rear
ventilators is primarily controlled by
the front passenger’s blower and
mode settings.
. The amount of airflow to the rear
ventilators is also affected by the rear
temperature setting. Higher rear tem-
perature settings have lower airflow
amounts than cooler temperature
settings. This condition ensures better
comfort to the head and face area,
while primary heating for the rear
passenger seats is provided through
the foot outlets.
WAE0350X
WAE0351X
Sensors:
The sensors
and , located on the
instrument panel, help maintain a con-
stant temperature. Do not put anything
on or around the sensors.
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains
refrigerant under high pressure. To
avoid personal injury, any air condi-
tioner service should be done only by
an experienced technician with the
proper equipment.
The air conditioner system in your vehicle
is charged with a refrigerant designed
with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant will not harm the
earth’s ozone layer. However, it may
contribute in a small part to global
warming.
Special charging equipment and lubricant
are required when servicing your vehicle’s
air conditioner. Using improper refriger-
ants or lubricants will cause severe da-
mage to the air conditioner system. (See
“Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations” (P.10-8).)
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37
4-38 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
A NISSAN dealer will be able to service
your environmentally friendly air condi-
tioner system.
In-cabin microfilter
The air conditioner system is equipped
with an in-cabin microfilter. To make sure
the air conditioner heats, defogs, and
ventilates efficiently, replace the filter
according to the specified maintenance
intervals listed in the "9. Maintenance and
schedules" section. It is recommended to
visit a NISSAN dealer to replace the filter.
The filter should be replaced if the air flow
decreases significantly or if windows fog
up easily when operating the heater or air
conditioner.
SHARK FIN ANTENNA
The shark fin antenna is located on the
rear part of the vehicle roof.
The radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the radio
signal. If possible, do not put cargo near
the shark fin antenna.
A build up of ice on the shark fin antenna
can affect radio performance. Remove
the ice to restore radio reception.
When installing a car phone or a CB radio
in your vehicle, be sure to observe the
following precautions, otherwise the new
equipment may adversely affect the elec-
tronic control modules and electronic
control system harness.
WARNING
. A cellular phone should not be
used for any purpose while driv-
ing so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation. Some juris-
dictions prohibit the use of cellu-
lar phones while driving.
. If you must make a call while your
vehicle is in motion, the hands-
free cellular phone operational
mode (if so equipped) is highly
recommended. Exercise extreme
caution at all times so full atten-
tion may be given to vehicle
operation.
. If a conversation in a moving
vehicle requires you to take
notes, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle
before doing so.
ANTENNA CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
CAUTION
. Keep the antenna as far away as
possible from the electronic con-
trol modules.
. Keep the antenna wire more than
8 in (20 cm) away from the
electronic control system har-
ness. Do not route the antenna
wire next to any harness.
. Adjust the antenna standing-
wave ratio as recommended by
the manufacturer.
. Connect the ground wire from the
CB radio chassis to the body.
. For details, it is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39
4-40 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
MEMO
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ...................... 5-5
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ................................ 5-5
Three-way catalyst ............................................................... 5-6
Turbocharger system (if so equipped) ................. 5-6
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........... 5-6
Avoiding collision and rollover ................................. 5-10
On-pavement and off-road
driving precautions ........................................................... 5-10
Off-road recovery ............................................................... 5-11
Rapid air pressure loss ................................................... 5-11
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ..................... 5-12
Driving safety precautions .......................................... 5-12
Push-button ignition switch ............................................. 5-14
Operating range for engine start function ...... 5-15
Push-button ignition switch operation............. 5-15
Push-button ignition switch positions .............. 5-16
Emergency engine shut off ........................................ 5-16
Intelligent Key battery discharge ........................... 5-17
Before starting the engine................................................. 5-17
Starting the engine .................................................................. 5-18
Remote engine start (if so equipped)................. 5-18
Driving the vehicle .................................................................... 5-19
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ............................................................ 5-19
Parking brake ............................................................................... 5-25
Automatic operation ..................................................... 5-26
Manual operation ............................................................. 5-27
Automatic brake hold ........................................................... 5-28
How to activate/deactivate the automatic
brake hold function ........................................................ 5-29
How to use the automatic brake
hold function........................................................................ 5-30
Drive Mode Selector ............................................................... 5-31
OFF-ROAD mode (AWD models) ........................... 5-32
SNOW mode (AWD models) ...................................... 5-32
STANDARD mode (2WD models)/AUTO
mode (AWD models) ....................................................... 5-32
ECO mode .............................................................................. 5-32
SPORT mode ........................................................................ 5-34
Driver Assistance systems ................................................. 5-35
How to enable/disable the systems ................. 5-38
Common troubleshooting guide ......................... 5-40
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (if
so equipped) ................................................................................. 5-44
System operation ............................................................. 5-44
How to enable/disable the TSR system ........ 5-46
System temporarily unavailable ........................... 5-46
System malfunction ....................................................... 5-46
System maintenance .................................................... 5-47
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ...................................... 5-47
LDW system operation ................................................... 5-48
How to enable/disable the LDW system.......... 5-49
LDW system limitations.................................................. 5-49
System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-50
System malfunction .......................................................... 5-51
System maintenance ....................................................... 5-51
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) (if
so equipped) .................................................................................. 5-52
I-LI system operation ....................................................... 5-53
How to enable/disable the I-LI system ............. 5-54
I-LI system limitations ..................................................... 5-54
System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-56
System malfunction .......................................................... 5-56
System maintenance ....................................................... 5-57
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ................................................... 5-58
BSW system operation ................................................... 5-59
How to enable/disable the BSW system.......... 5-60
BSW system limitations.................................................. 5-60
BSW driving situations .................................................... 5-61
System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-64
System malfunction .......................................................... 5-64
System maintenance ....................................................... 5-65
Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) (if
so equipped) .................................................................................. 5-66
I-BSI system operation ................................................... 5-67
How to enable/disable the I-BSI system ......... 5-69
I-BSI system limitations ................................................. 5-69
I-BSI driving situations .................................................... 5-71
System temporarily unavailable ........................... 5-75
System malfunction ....................................................... 5-75
System maintenance .................................................... 5-76
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ...................................... 5-77
RCTA system operation .............................................. 5-77
How to enable/disable the RCTA system ...... 5-79
RCTA system limitations............................................. 5-80
System temporarily unavailable ........................... 5-82
System malfunction ....................................................... 5-82
System maintenance .................................................... 5-82
Cruise control (if so equipped) ....................................... 5-83
Precautions on cruise control................................ 5-84
Cruise control operations.......................................... 5-84
ProPILOT Assist (if so equipped) ................................... 5-85
ProPILOT Assist system operation ..................... 5-87
ProPILOT Assist switches ........................................... 5-89
ProPILOT Assist system display
and indicators ..................................................................... 5-90
Turning the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode ON ............................................. 5-92
Operating ProPILOT Assist........................................ 5-92
How to enable/disable the
Steering Assist .................................................................... 5-97
How to cancel the ProPILOT
Assist system ....................................................................... 5-98
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) .............................. 5-98
Steering Assist ................................................................ 5-113
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode ................................................................... 5-119
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection system ....................................... 5-122
AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system operation ............................................................ 5-123
Turning the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system ON/OFF ................................................................ 5-125
AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system limitations .......................................................... 5-125
System temporarily unavailable ......................... 5-129
System malfunction ...................................................... 5-130
System maintenance ................................................... 5-131
Intelligent Forward Collision
Warning (I-FCW) ....................................................................... 5-132
I-FCW system operation ............................................ 5-134
Turning the I-FCW system ON/OFF ................. 5-135
I-FCW system limitations .......................................... 5-137
System temporarily unavailable ......................... 5-138
System malfunction ...................................................... 5-139
System maintenance ................................................... 5-139
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) .............................. 5-141
I-DA system operation ................................................ 5-141
How to enable/disable the I-DA system ...... 5-142
I-DA system limitations .............................................. 5-142
System malfunction ...................................................... 5-143
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) .................................... 5-143
RAB system operation ................................................ 5-145
Turning the RAB system ON/OFF...................... 5-145
RAB system limitations .............................................. 5-146
System malfunction ...................................................... 5-148
System maintenance ................................................ 5-148
Break-in schedule ................................................................. 5-149
Fuel Efficient Driving Tips ............................................... 5-149
Increasing fuel economy ................................................ 5-150
Intelligent 4x4 (if so equipped) .................................. 5-151
Parking/parking on hills .................................................. 5-153
Electric power steering .................................................... 5-154
Brake system ........................................................................... 5-155
Braking precautions ................................................... 5-155
Brake assist ............................................................................... 5-156
Brake assist ....................................................................... 5-156
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ........................ 5-156
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .............. 5-157
How to turn off the VDC system ..................... 5-158
Brake Force Distribution......................................... 5-159
Chassis control ....................................................................... 5-160
Intelligent Trace Control......................................... 5-160
Active Ride Control ..................................................... 5-160
Hill Start Assist system ..................................................... 5-161
Sonar system (if so equipped) ................................... 5-162
System operation ......................................................... 5-163
How to enable/disable the
sonar system ................................................................... 5-165
Sonar system limitations ....................................... 5-166
System temporarily unavailable ....................... 5-167
System maintenance ................................................ 5-167
Rear Sonar System (RSS) (if so equipped) ........ 5-168
System operation ......................................................... 5-168
How to enable/disable the RSS ........................ 5-170
RSS limitations .................................................................. 5-170
System temporarily unavailable ......................... 5-171
System maintenance ................................................... 5-172
Cold weather driving .......................................................... 5-172
Freeing a frozen door lock...................................... 5-172
Anti-freeze ............................................................................ 5-172
Battery ..................................................................................... 5-172
Draining of coolant water ........................................ 5-172
Tire equipment ............................................................... 5-173
Special winter equipment ..................................... 5-173
Driving on snow or ice ............................................. 5-173
Active noise cancellation (if so equipped)/
Active sound enhancement (if
so equipped) ............................................................................. 5-174
Active noise cancellation ....................................... 5-174
Active sound enhancement................................. 5-174
WARNING
. Do not leave children or adults
who would normally require the
support of others alone in your
vehicle. Pets should not be left
alone either. They could acciden-
tally injure themselves or others
through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny
days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to people or
animals.
. Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
. Do not breathe exhaust gas; it
contains colorless and odorless
carbon monoxide. Carbon mon-
oxide is dangerous. It can cause
unconsciousness or death.
. If you suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering the vehicle, drive
with all windows fully open, and
have the vehicle inspected imme-
diately.
. Do not run the engine in closed
spaces such as a garage.
. Do not park the vehicle with the
engine running for an extended
period of time.
. Keep the liftgate closed while
driving, otherwise exhaust gas
could be drawn into the passen-
ger compartment. If you must
drive with the liftgate open, fol-
low these precautions:
— Open all the windows.
— Turn the air recirculation
mode off and set the fan
speed control to the highest
level to circulate the air.
. If a special body or other equip-
ment is added for recreational or
other usage, follow the manufac-
turer’s recommendation to pre-
vent carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle. (Some recreational
vehicle appliances such as stoves,
refrigerators, heaters, etc. may
also generate carbon monoxide.)
. If electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass to a trailer
through the seal on the liftgate or
the body, follow the manufac-
turer’s recommendation to pre-
vent carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle.
. The exhaust system and body
should be inspected by a quali-
fied mechanic whenever:
— Your vehicle is raised while
being serviced.
— You suspect that exhaust
fumes are entering into the
passenger compartment.
— You notice a change in the
sound of the exhaust system.
— You have had an accident
involving damage to the ex-
haust system, underbody, or
rear of the vehicle.
Starting and driving 5-5
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
5-6 Starting and driving
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission
control device installed in the exhaust
system. Exhaust gases in the three-way
catalyst are burned at high temperatures
to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
. The exhaust gas and the exhaust
system are very hot. Keep people,
animals and flammable materials
away from the exhaust system
components.
. Do not stop or park the vehicle
over flammable materials such as
dry grass, wastepaper or rags.
They may ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
. Do not use leaded gasoline. De-
posits from leaded gasoline will
seriously reduce the three-way
catalyst’s ability to help reduce
exhaust pollutants.
. Keep your engine tuned up. Mal-
functions in the ignition, fuel in-
jection, or electrical systems can
cause overrich fuel flow into the
three-way catalyst, causing it to
overheat. Do not keep driving if
the engine misfires, or if notice-
able loss of performance or other
unusual operating conditions are
detected. Have the vehicle in-
spected. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
. Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of fuel
could cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the three-way catalyst.
. Do not race the engine while
warming it up.
. Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
The turbocharger system uses engine oil
for lubrication and cooling of its rotating
components. The turbocharger turbine
turns at extremely high speeds and it
can reach an extremely high tempera-
ture. It is essential to maintain a clean
supply of oil flowing through the turbo-
charger system. A sudden interruption of
oil supply may cause a malfunction in the
turbocharger.
To ensure prolonged life and perfor-
mance of the turbocharger, it is essential
to comply with the following mainte-
nance procedure.
CAUTION
. Change your engine oil according
to the recommended intervals
shown in the “Maintenance and
schedules” (P.9-1).
. Use only the recommended en-
gine oil. (See “Capacities and re-
commended fluids/lubricants”
(P.10-3).)
. If the engine has been operating
at high rpm for an extended
period of time, let it idle for a
few minutes prior to turn off.
. Do not accelerate your engine to
high rpm immediately after start-
ing it.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the ve-
hicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumi-
nates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping abil-
ity.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating prop-
erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure tell-
tale. When the system detects a malfunc-
tion, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then re-
main continuously illuminated. This se-
quence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction indica-
tor is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Additional information
. Since the spare tire is not equipped
with the TPMS, the TPMS does not
monitor the tire pressure of the spare
tire.
. The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16
MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may
not detect a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
. The low tire pressure warning light
does not automatically turn off when
the tire pressure is adjusted. After the
tire is inflated to the recommended
pressure, the vehicle must be driven at
speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to
activate the TPMS and turn off the low
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire
pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure.
. The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”
warning appears in the vehicle infor-
mation display when the low tire
pressure warning light is illuminated
and low tire pressure is detected. The
“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning
turns off when the low tire pressure
warning light turns off.
The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”
warning does not appear if the low
tire pressure warning light illuminates
to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
. Tire pressure rises and falls depending
on the heat caused by the vehicle’s
operation and the outside tempera-
ture. Do not reduce the tire pressure
after driving because the tire pressure
rises after driving. Low outside tem-
perature can lower the temperature
of the air inside the tire which can
cause a lower tire inflation pressure.
Starting and driving 5-7
5-8 Starting and driving
This may cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. If the
warning light illuminates in low ambi-
ent temperature, check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires.
. You can also check the tire pressure of
all tires (except the spare tire) in the
vehicle information display. (See “Trip
computer” (P.2-46).)
For additional information, see “Low tire
pressure warning light” (P.2-18) and “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6-
3).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneu-
vers or abrupt braking, reduce
vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-
ing with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire
failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in ser-
ious personal injury. Check the
tire pressure for all four tires.
Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low
tire pressure warning light OFF. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with
a spare tire as soon as possible.
(See “Flat tire” (P.6-3) for chan-
ging a flat tire.)
. Since the spare tire is not
equipped with the TPMS, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for ap-
proximately 1 minute. The light
will remain on after 1 minute.
Have your tires replaced and/or
TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for these
services.
. Replacing tires with those not
originally specified by NISSAN
could affect the proper operation
of the TPMS.
. Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction
of the tire pressure sensors.
CAUTION
. The TPMS may not function prop-
erly when the wheels are
equipped with tire chains or the
wheels are buried in snow.
. Do not place metalized film or
any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on
the windows. This may cause
poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors,
and the TPMS will not function
properly.
Some devices and transmitters may tem-
porarily interfere with the operation of
the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. Some exam-
ples are:
. Facilities or electric devices using
similar radio frequencies are near the
vehicle.
. If a transmitter set to similar frequen-
cies is being used in or near the
vehicle.
. If a computer (or similar equipment) or
a DC/AC converter is being used in or
near the vehicle.
Low tire pressure warning light may
illuminate in the following cases.
. If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
and tire without TPMS.
. If the TPMS has been replaced and the
ID has not been registered.
. If the wheel is not originally specified
by NISSAN.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter
FCC ID: KR5TIS-10DL
Body Control Module (BCM)
40406556
Continental
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
For Canada:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter
Continental
Model: TIS-10DL
IC: 7812D-TIS10DL
Body Control Module (BCM)
Model: 40406556
IC: 7812D-5235RXDP
Continental
This device complies with Industry Ca-
nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert
WARNING
After rotating the tires, do not use
the Easy-Fill Tire Alert to adjust the
tire pressure. Instead use a gauge to
adjust the tires to the correct pres-
sure in accordance with Tire and
Loading Information label.
When adding air to an under-inflated tire,
the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides
visual and audible signals outside the
vehicle to help you inflate the tires to
the recommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level
place.
2. Apply the parking brake and push the
park button to shift to the P (Park)
position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position. Do not start the engine.
Operation:
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard in-
dicators will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is
reached, the horn beeps once and
the hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
. If the tire is over-inflated more than
approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn
beeps and the hazard indicators flash
3 times. To correct the pressure, push
the core of the valve stem on the tire
briefly to release pressure. When the
pressure reaches the designated
pressure, the horn beeps once.
Starting and driving 5-9
5-10 Starting and driving
. If the hazard indicator does not flash
within approximately 15 seconds after
starting to inflate the tire, it indicates
that the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert
is not operating.
. The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill
Tire Alert under the following condi-
tions:
— If there is interference from an
external device or transmitter
— The air pressure from the inflation
device such as those using a power
socket is not sufficient to inflate the
tire
— If an electrical equipment is being
used in or near the vehicle
— There is a malfunction in the TPMS
system
— There is a malfunction in the horn
or hazard indicators
. If the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert
does not operate due to TPMS inter-
ference, move the vehicle about 3 ft
(1m) backward or forward and try
again.
If the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert is not
working, use a tire pressure gauge.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-
OVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a
safe and prudent manner may result
in loss of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces-
sive speed, high speed cornering, or
sudden steering maneuvers, because
these driving practices could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle. As with
any vehicle, a loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles
or objects, or cause the vehicle to roll-
over, particularly if the loss of control
causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be
attentive at all times, and avoid driving
when tired. Never drive when under the
influence of alcohol or drugs (including
prescription or over-the-counter drugs
which may cause drowsiness). Always
wear your seat belt as outlined in “Seat
belts” (P.1-14) of this manual, and also
instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted or improperly belted
person is significantly more likely to be
injured or killed than a person properly
wearing a seat belt.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Utility vehicles have a significantly high-
er rollover rate than other types of
vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than
passenger cars to make them capable of
performing in a variety of on-pavement
and off-road applications. This gives them
a higher center of gravity than ordinary
cars. An advantage of higher ground
clearance is a better view of the road,
allowing you to anticipate problems.
However, they are not designed for cor-
nering at the same speeds as conven-
tional passenger cars any more than low-
slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If
at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. As
with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control or vehicle rollover. Seat
belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted or improperly belted person
is significantly more likely to be injured or
killed than a person properly wearing a
seat belt.
Be sure to read “Driving safety precau-
tions” (P.5-12).
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
If the right side or left side wheels leave
the road surface, maintain control of the
vehicle by following the procedure below.
Please note that this procedure is only a
general guide. The vehicle must be driven
as appropriate based on the conditions of
the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold
a straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow
the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while the
vehicle speed is reduced. Do not
attempt to drive the vehicle back onto
the road surface until vehicle speed is
reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
the steering wheel until both tires
return to the road surface. When all
tires are on the road surface, steer the
vehicle to stay in the appropriate
driving lane.
.
If you decide that it is not safe to
return the vehicle to the road sur-
face based on vehicle, road or
traffic conditions, gradually slow
the vehicle to a stop in a safe place
off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is
damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole.
Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused
by driving on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the
handling and stability of the vehicle,
especially at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by
maintaining the correct air pressure and
visually inspect the tires for wear and
damage. See “Wheels and tires” (P.8-31) of
this manual.
If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or
“blows-out” while driving, maintain con-
trol of the vehicle by following the proce-
dure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The
vehicle must be driven as appropriate
based on the conditions of the vehicle,
road and traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase
the chance of losing control of the
vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire
air pressure. Losing control of the
vehicle may cause a collision and
result in personal injury.
. The vehicle generally moves or
pulls in the direction of the flat
tire.
. Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
. Do not rapidly release the accel-
erator pedal.
. Do not rapidly turn the steering
wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold
a straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow
the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe
location off the road and away from
traffic if possible.
Starting and driving 5-11
5-12 Starting and driving
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gra-
dually stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers
and either contact a roadside emer-
gency service to change the tire or see
“Changing a flat tire” (P.6-4) of this
Owner’s Manual.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of
alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the
bloodstream reduces coordination,
delays reaction time and impairs
judgement. Driving after drinking
alcohol increases the likelihood of
being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if
you are injured in an accident, alco-
hol can increase the severity of the
injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving.
However, you must choose not to drive
under the influence of alcohol. Every year
thousands of people are injured or killed
in alcohol-related accidents. Although the
local laws vary on what is considered to
be legally intoxicated, the fact is that
alcohol affects all people differently and
most people underestimate the effects of
alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t
mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-
the-counter, prescription, and illegal
drugs). Don’t drive if your ability to oper-
ate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,
drugs, or some other physical condition.
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your vehicle is designed for both normal
and off-road use. However, avoid driving
in deep water or mud as your vehicle is
mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a
conventional off-road vehicle.
Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD)
models are less capable than All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) models for rough road driving
and extrication when stuck in deep snow,
mud, or the like.
Please observe the following precautions:
WARNING
. Drive carefully when off the road
and avoid dangerous areas. Every
person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should be seated with
their seat belt fastened. This will
keep you and your passengers in
position when driving over rough
terrain.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead drive either straight up or
straight down the slopes. Off-
road vehicles can tip over side-
ways much more easily than they
can forward or backward.
. Many hills are too steep for any
vehicle. If you drive up them, you
may stall. If you drive down them,
you may not be able to control
your speed. If you drive across
them, you may roll over.
. Do not shift ranges while driving
on downhill grades as this could
cause loss of control of the vehi-
cle.
. Stay alert when driving to the top
of a hill. At the top there could be
a drop-off or other hazard that
could cause an accident.
. If your engine stalls or you cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill,
never attempt to turn around.
Your vehicle could tip or roll over.
Always back straight down in R
(Reverse) range. Never back down
in N (Neutral), using only the
brake, as this could cause loss of
control.
. Heavy braking going down a hill
could cause your brakes to over-
heat and fade, resulting in loss of
control and an accident. Apply
brakes lightly and use a low
range to control your speed.
. Unsecured cargo can be thrown
around when driving over rough
terrain. Properly secure all cargo
so it will not be thrown forward
and cause injury to you or your
passengers.
. To avoid raising the center of
gravity excessively, do not exceed
the rated capacity of the roof rack
(if so equipped) and evenly dis-
tribute the load. Secure heavy
loads in the cargo area as far
forward and as low as possible.
Do not equip the vehicle with tires
larger than specified in this man-
ual. This could cause your vehicle
to roll over.
. Do not grip the inside or spokes
of the steering wheel when driv-
ing off-road. The steering wheel
could move suddenly and injure
your hands. Instead drive with
your fingers and thumbs on the
outside of the rim.
. Before operating the vehicle, en-
sure that the driver and all pas-
sengers have their seat belts
fastened.
. Always drive with the floor mats
in place as the floor may became
hot.
. Lower your speed when encoun-
tering strong crosswinds. With a
higher center of gravity, your
vehicle is more affected by strong
side winds. Slower speeds ensure
better vehicle control.
. Do not drive beyond the perfor-
mance capability of the tires,
even with AWD engaged.
. For AWD equipped vehicles, do
not attempt to raise two wheels
off the ground and shift the
transmission to any drive or re-
verse position with the engine
running. Doing so may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could
result in serious vehicle damage
or personal injury.
. Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel
dynamometer (such as the dy-
namometers used by some
states for emissions testing), or
similar equipment even if the
other two wheels are raised off
the ground. Make sure you inform
test facility personnel that your
vehicle is equipped with AWD
before it is placed on a dynam-
ometer. Using the wrong test
equipment may result in drive-
train damage or unexpected ve-
hicle movement which could
result in serious vehicle damage
or personal injury.
. When a wheel is off the ground
due to an unlevel surface, do not
spin the wheel excessively (AWD
model).
. Accelerating quickly, sharp steer-
ing maneuvers or sudden braking
may cause loss of control.
. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turning maneuvers, particularly
at high speeds. Your vehicle has
a higher center of gravity than a
conventional passenger car. The
vehicle is not designed for cor-
nering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger cars.
Failure to operate this vehicle
correctly could result in loss of
control and/or a rollover acci-
dent.
Starting and driving 5-13
5-14 Starting and driving
. Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), and tread
pattern on all four wheels. Install
traction devices on the front
wheels when driving on slippery
roads and drive carefully.
. Be sure to check the brakes im-
mediately after driving in mud or
water. See “Brake system” (P.5-
155) for wet brakes.
. Avoid parking your vehicle on
steep hills. If you get out of the
vehicle and it rolls forward, back-
ward or sideways, you could be
injured.
. Whenever you drive off-road
through sand, mud or water as
deep as the wheel hub, more
frequent maintenance may be
required. See the maintenance
schedule shown in the “9. Main-
tenance and schedules” section.
. Spinning the front wheels on
slippery surfaces may cause the
AWD warning message to display
and the AWD system to automa-
tically switch from the AWD mode
to the 2WD mode. This could
reduce traction. Be especially
careful when towing a trailer
(AWD models).
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button
ignition switch while driving the ve-
hicle except in an emergency. (The
engine will stop when the ignition
switch is pushed 3 consecutive times
or the ignition switch is pushed and
held for more than 2 seconds.) If the
engine stops while the vehicle is
being driven, this could lead to a
crash and serious injury.
Before operating the push-button igni-
tion switch, be sure to push the park
button to shift to the P (Park) position.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
SSD0436
OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE
START FUNCTION
The Intelligent Key can only be used for
starting the engine when the Intelligent
Key is within the specified operating
range
.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are
present near the operating location, the
Intelligent Key system’s operating range
becomes narrower and may not function
properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operat-
ing range, it is possible for anyone, even
someone who does not carry the Intelli-
gent Key, to push the ignition switch to
start the engine.
. The cargo room area is not included in
the operating range but the Intelligent
Key may function.
. If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel, inside the glove box
or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may
not function.
. If the Intelligent Key is placed near the
door or window outside the vehicle,
the Intelligent Key may function.
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is
discharged, see “Intelligent Key battery
discharge” (P.5-17).
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
OPERATION
CAUTION
. Do not leave the vehicle for ex-
tended periods of time when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion and the engine is not run-
ning. This can discharge the
battery.
. Use electrical accessories with
the engine running to avoid dis-
charging the vehicle battery. If
you must use accessories while
the engine is not running, do not
use them for extended periods of
time and do not use multiple
electrical accessories at the same
time.
Starting and driving 5-15
5-16 Starting and driving
JVS1053X
When the ignition switch is pushed with-
out depressing the brake pedal, the igni-
tion switch will illuminate.
Push the ignition switch center:
. once to change to ON.
. two times to change to OFF.
When the ignition switch cannot be
placed in the OFF position, proceed as
follows:
1. Push the park button to shift to the P
(Park) position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition
switch position will change to the ON
position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the
OFF position.
The shift position can be shifted from
the P (Park) position if the ignition
switch is in the ON position and the
brake pedal is depressed.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
ON (Normal operating position)
The ignition system and the electrical
accessory power activate at this position
without the engine turned on.
The ON position has a battery saver
feature that will place the ignition switch
in the OFF position, if the vehicle is not
running, after some time under the fol-
lowing conditions:
. all doors are closed.
. vehicle is in P (Park) position.
OFF position
The engine is turned off in this position.
Auto ACC position
With the vehicle in the P (Park) position,
the Intelligent Key with you and the
ignition placed from ON to OFF, the radio
can still be used for a period of time, or
until the driver’s door is opened. After a
period of time, functions such as radio,
navigation (if so equipped), and Blue-
tooth® Hands-Free Phone System may
be restarted by turning on the audio
system (see the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual), or by pushing the UN-
LOCK button on the Intelligent Key for up
to a total of 30 minutes.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving or when the In-
telligent Key battery is discharged, per-
form the following procedure:
. Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch 3 consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or
. Push and hold the push-button igni-
tion switch for more than 2 seconds.
After engine shut-off, open the door to
return to the normal condition.
JVS0404X
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS-
CHARGE
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is
discharged, or environmental conditions
interfere with the Intelligent Key opera-
tion, start the engine according to the
following procedure:
1. Push the park button to shift to the P
(Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the
Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime
will sound.)
4. Push the ignition switch while depres-
sing the brake pedal within 10 sec-
onds after the chime sounds. The
engine will start.
After step 3 is performed, when the
ignition switch is pushed without depres-
sing the brake pedal, the ignition switch
position will change to ON.
NOTE:
. When the ignition switch is pushed
to the ON position or the engine is
started by the above procedures, the
“Key Battery Low” warning appears
(on the vehicle information display)
even if the Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle. This is not a malfunction.
To turn off the warning, touch the
ignition switch with the Intelligent
Key again.
. If the “Key Battery Low” warning
appears, replace the battery as soon
as possible. (See “Intelligent Key
battery replacement” (P.8-25).)
. Make sure the area around the vehicle
is clear.
. Check fluid levels such as engine oil,
coolant, brake fluid, and window
washer fluid as frequently as possible,
or at least whenever you refuel.
. Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
. Visually inspect tires for their appear-
ance and condition. Also check tires
for proper inflation.
. Lock all doors.
. Position seat and adjust head re-
straints/headrests.
. Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
. Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-
gers to do likewise.
. Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position. (See “Warning lights,
indicator lights and audible remin-
ders” (P.2-13).)
Starting and driving 5-17
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
5-18 Starting and driving
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Confirm that the vehicle is in the P
(Park) position.
The Intelligent Key must be carried
when operating the ignition switch.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON
position. Depress the brake pedal and
push the ignition switch to start the
engine.
To start the engine immediately, push
and release the ignition switch while
depressing the brake pedal with the
ignition switch in any position.
.
If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when
restarting, depress the accelerator
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to
the floor) and while holding, crank
the engine. Release the accelerator
pedal when the engine starts.
.
If the engine is very hard to start
because it is flooded, depress the
accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and hold it. Push the ignition
switch to the ON position to start
cranking the engine. After 5 or 6
seconds, stop cranking by pushing
the ignition switch to OFF. After
cranking the engine, release the
accelerator pedal. Crank the engine
with your foot off the accelerator
pedal by depressing the brake
pedal and pushing the push-button
ignition switch to start the engine.
If the engine starts, but fails to run,
repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the
engine does not start, push the
ignition switch to OFF and wait 10
seconds before cranking again,
otherwise the starter could be da-
maged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
seconds after starting. Do not race the
engine while warming it up. Drive at
moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather. In cold
weather, keep the engine running for
a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before
shutting it off. Starting and stopping
the engine over a short period of time
may make the vehicle more difficult to
start.
When the engine is racing with no load
and cold, the engine speed is limited
to about 4,500 rpm.
5. To stop the engine, push the park
button to shift to the P (Park) position,
and push the ignition switch to the
OFF position.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery dis-
charge and potential no-start condi-
tions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume
battery power when the engine is
not running (Phone chargers, GPS,
DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/
or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
Vehicles started with the remote engine
start function require the ignition switch
to be placed in the ON position before the
shift position can be shifted from the P
(Park) position. To place the ignition
switch in the ON position, perform the
following steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is
carried with you.
STARTING THE ENGINE
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the
ON position.
For additional information about the
remote engine start function, see “Re-
mote engine start” (P.3-19).
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-
MISSION (CVT)
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically
controlled to produce maximum power
and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures
for this transmission are shown on the
following pages. Follow these procedures
for maximum vehicle performance and
driving enjoyment.
Engine power may be automatically
reduced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving
on slippery roads or while being tested
on some dynamometers.
WARNING
. Do not depress the accelerator
pedal while shifting from P (Park)
or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D
(Drive), or M (Manual shift mode).
Always depress the brake pedal
until shifting is completed. Failure
to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
. Cold engine idle speed is high, so
use caution when shifting into a
forward or reverse gear before
the engine has warmed up.
. Do not downshift abruptly on
slippery roads. This may cause a
loss of control.
. Never shift to either the P (Park)
or R (Reverse) position while the
vehicle is moving forward and P
(Park) or D (Drive) position while
the vehicle is reversing. This could
cause an accident or damage the
transmission.
. Except in an emergency, do not
shift to the N (Neutral) position
while driving. Coasting with the
transmission in the N (Neutral)
position may cause serious da-
mage to the transmission.
CAUTION
. To avoid possible damage to your
vehicle, when stopping the vehi-
cle on an uphill grade, do not hold
the vehicle by depressing the
accelerator pedal. The foot brake
should be used for this purpose.
. Do not hang items on the shift
lever. This may cause an accident
due to a sudden start.
Starting and driving 5-19
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
5-20 Starting and driving
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before attempt-
ing to place the shift position out of
the P (Park) position. This CVT is
designed so that the foot brake
pedal must be depressed before
shifting from P (Park) to any driving
position while the ignition switch is
in the ON position. The shift position
cannot be placed out of the P (Park)
position and into any of the other
positions if the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and move the shift lever into a driving
position.
3. Release the parking brake, the foot
brake pedal, and then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.
CAUTION
. DEPRESS THE FOOT BRAKE PEDAL
- Shifting the shift lever to D
(Drive), R (Reverse) or M (Manual
shift mode) without depressing
the foot brake pedal causes the
vehicle to move slowly when the
engine is running. Make sure the
foot brake pedal is depressed
fully and the vehicle is stopped
before shifting the shift lever.
. MAKE SURE OF THE SHIFT LEVER
POSITION - Make sure the shift
position is in the desired position
on the vehicle information dis-
play. D (Drive) and M (Manual shift
mode) are used to move forward
and R (Reverse) to back up.
. WARM UP THE ENGINE - Due to the
higher idle speeds when the en-
gine is cold, extra caution must
be exercised when shifting the
shift lever into the driving posi-
tion immediately after starting
the engine.
WAF0556X
Home position (central position)
To move the shift lever,
: Push the button to shift.
: Shift without pushing the button .
Shifting
Push the park button to shift to the P
(Park) position.
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal, push the shift lever button
and move the shift lever from the P (Park)
position
to any of the desired shift
positions.
Confirm that the vehicle is in the desired
shift position by checking the shift indi-
cator located on the shift lever or on the
vehicle information display.
WARNING
Apply the electronic parking brake if
the shift lever is in any position while
the engine is not running. Failure to
do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and
result in serious personal injury or
property damage.
CAUTION
. Use the P (Park), R (Reverse) or D
(Drive) position only when the
vehicle is completely stopped.
. When switching to the desired
shift position by operating the
shift lever, check that the shift
lever returns to the central posi-
tion by releasing your hand from
the lever. Holding the shift lever in
a mid-way position may also
damage the shift control system.
. Do not operate the shift lever
while the accelerator pedal is
depressed. This may cause a
sudden start which could result
in an accident.
. The following operations are not
allowed because excessive force
would be applied to the transmis-
sion and this may result in da-
mage to the vehicle:
— Moving the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) position when driv-
ing forward
— Moving the shift lever to the D
(Drive) position when rever-
sing
If these operations are at-
tempted, a chime sounds and
the vehicle shifts to the N (Neu-
tral) position.
P (Park):
CAUTION
. To prevent transmission damage,
use the P (Park) position only
when the vehicle is completely
stopped.
. Do not slide the shift lever while
pushing the park button. This
may damage the shift control
system.
Use this position when the vehicle is
parked or starting the engine. Always
make sure that the vehicle is completely
stopped before pushing the park button
to engage the P (Park) position. For
maximum safety, the brake pedal must
be depressed before engaging the P
(Park) position. Use this position together
with the electronic parking brake. When
parking on a hill, first depress the brake
pedal, apply the electronic parking brake
and then engage the P (Park) position.
The parking lock should not be used as a
brake when parking. In order to secure
the vehicle, always apply the electronic
parking brake in addition to the parking
lock.
In the event of a malfunction of the
vehicle’s electronics, the transmission
may lock in the P (Park) position. Have
the vehicle’s electronics checked immedi-
ately. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
The P (Park) position is automatically
engaged if:
. You switch off the ignition switch
. You unfasten the driver’s seat belt and
open the driver side door when the
vehicle is stationary or driving at very
low speed and the transmission is in
the D (Drive) position, the R (Reverse)
position or the N position unless the
Starting and driving 5-21
5-22 Starting and driving
Neutral hold mode is engaged.
CAUTION
To avoid CVT malfunction, it is re-
commended that you manually
place the shift position in the P (Park)
position under the above conditions.
R (Reverse):
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage,
use the R (Reverse) position only
when the vehicle is completely
stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)
position. The brake pedal must be de-
pressed and the shift lever button
pushed to move the shift lever from
the home position to R (Reverse). If the
vehicle is placed in the R (Reverse)
position while the vehicle is moving
forward, the chime will sound and the
vehicle will switch into the N (Neutral)
position.
N (Neutral):
Neither the forward nor reverse gear is
engaged. The engine can be started in
this position. You may shift to the N
(Neutral) position and restart a stalled
engine while the vehicle is moving.
You can select this position by holding
the shift lever at this position for 0.5
seconds.
D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward
driving. The CVT changes gears automa-
tically. All forward gears are available. If
the vehicle is placed in the D (Drive)
position while the vehicle is reversing,
the chime will sound and the vehicle will
switch into the N (Neutral) position.
Neutral hold mode function
This function enables you to turn off the
engine with the vehicle in the N (Neutral)
position. While this function is activated,
the vehicle can be moved by pushing with
hand (when car washing) even if the
ignition switch is in the OFF position.
When using this function, release the
electronic parking brake.
WARNING
. Use this function on a level sur-
face only. Failure to do so may
cause the vehicle to move acci-
dentally and could result in a
collision or serious personal in-
jury.
. Do not use this function for a
purpose other than car washing.
. When the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position after activating
this function, depress the brake
pedal to stop the vehicle because
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
. If this function is not activated
regardless of proper operation,
transmission may malfunction. It
is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
To activate the Neutral hold mode, per-
form the following operations.
1. Push the ignition switch to start the
engine.
2. Release the electronic parking brake.
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
4. Push the P position switch.
5. Slide the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position, and hold it for 0.5 second
until “N” appears in the vehicle infor-
mation display.
6. Slide the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position again, and hold it for 0.5
second, until a message “Neutral Hold
Mode has been activated” appears in
the vehicle information display. (See
“66. Neutral Hold Mode activated in-
dicator” (P.2-43).)
7. Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position. The engine will turn off with
holding the N (Neutral) position.
To exit the Neutral hold mode, place the
vehicle in other than N (Neutral) position.
NOTE:
. It is necessary to perform the steps
4 through 6 within approximately 5
seconds to prevent incorrect opera-
tion.
. When the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position while the shift lever
is in the N (Neutral) position, a
message will appear in the vehicle
information display. (See “65. Neu-
tral Hold Mode guidance indicator”
(P.2-43).)
. If the Neutral hold mode is unavail-
able, a message will appear in the
vehicle information display. (See “67.
Neutral Hold Mode was not activated
indicator” (P.2-43).) To activate the
Neutral hold mode, wait for a while
without shifting operation and then
perform the operations again.
WAF0417X
Paddle shifter
Manual shift mode
When the shift lever is moved to the D
(Drive) position again with the vehicle in
the D (Drive) position while driving, the
transmission enters the manual shift
mode. Shift range can be selected manu-
ally using the paddle shifters on the
steering wheel.
When shifting up, pull the right-side
paddle shifter (+)
. The transmission
shifts to the higher range.
When shifting down, pull the left-side
paddle shifter (−)
. The transmission
shifts to the lower range.
When canceling the manual shift mode,
Starting and driving 5-23
5-24 Starting and driving
move the shift lever to the D (Drive)
position again. The transmission returns
to the normal driving mode.
When you pull the paddle shifter while in
the D (Drive) position, the transmission
will shift to the upper or lower range
temporarily. The transmission will auto-
matically return to the D (Drive) position
after a short period of time. If you want to
return to the D (Drive) position manually,
pull and hold the paddle shifter for about
1.5 seconds.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range
is displayed in the vehicle information
display.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as
follows:
1
M
?
/
2
M
?
/
3
M
?
/
4
M
?
/
5
M
?
/
6
M
?
/
7
M
?
/
8
M
8
M
(8th):
Use this position for all normal forward
driving at highway speeds.
7
M
(7th), 6
M
(6th) and 5
M
(5th):
Use these positions when driving up long
slopes, or for engine braking when driving
down long slopes.
4
M
(4th), 3
M
(3rd) and 2
M
(2nd):
Use these positions for hill climbing or
engine braking on downhill grades.
1
M
(1st):
Use this position when climbing steep
hills slowly or driving slowly through deep
snow, or for maximum engine braking on
steep downhill grades.
. Remember not to drive at high speeds
for extended periods of time in lower
than 8th gear. This reduces fuel econ-
omy.
. Pulling the same paddle shifter twice
will shift the ranges in succession.
However, if this motion is rapidly done,
the second shifting may not be com-
pleted properly.
. In the manual shift mode, the trans-
mission may not shift to the se-
lected gear. This helps maintain
driving performance and reduces
the chance of vehicle damage or
loss of control.
. When this situation occurs, the Con-
tinuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) position indicator will blink
and the chime will sound.
. In the manual shift mode, the trans-
mission may shift up automatically
to a higher range than selected if the
engine speed is too high. When the
vehicle speed decreases, the trans-
mission automatically shifts down
and shifts to 1st gear before the
vehicle comes to a stop.
. CVT operation is limited to automatic
drive mode when CVT fluid tempera-
ture is extremely low even if manual
shift mode is selected. This is not a
malfunction. When CVT fluid warms
up, manual shift mode can be se-
lected.
. When the CVT fluid temperature is
high, the shift range may upshift in
lower rpm than usual. This is not a
malfunction.
Accelerator downshift - in D (Drive)
position -
For passing or climbing hills, depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts
the transmission down into a lower gear,
depending on the vehicle speed.
High fluid temperature protection
mode
This transmission has a high fluid tem-
perature protection mode. If the fluid
temperature becomes too high, (for ex-
ample, when climbing steep grades in
high temperatures with heavy loads, such
as when towing a trailer), engine power
and, under some conditions, vehicle
speed will be decreased automatically to
reduce the chance of transmission da-
mage. Vehicle speed can be controlled
with the accelerator pedal, but the engine
and vehicle speed may be limited.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the
Continuously Variable Transmission will
not be shifted into the selected driving
position.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel
spinning and subsequent hard braking,
the fail-safe system may be activated.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may come on to indicate the fail-safe
mode is activated. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” (P.2-19). This will occur even
if all electrical circuits are functioning
properly. In this case, place the ignition
switch in the OFF position and wait for
10 seconds. Then place the ignition
switch back in the ON position. The
vehicle should return to its normal
operating condition. (The MIL may be
illuminated even when the vehicle has
returned to its normal operating condi-
tion.) If it does not return to its normal
operating condition, have the transmis-
sion checked and repaired, if necessary,
by a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature
protection mode or fail-safe opera-
tion occurs, vehicle speed may be
gradually reduced. The reduced
speed may be lower than other
traffic, which could increase the
chance of a collision. Be especially
careful when driving. If necessary,
pull to the side of the road at a safe
place and allow the transmission to
return to normal operation, or have it
repaired if necessary.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
parking brake applied. The brake
will overheat and fail to operate
and will lead to an accident.
. Never release the parking brake
from outside the vehicle. If the
vehicle moves, it will be impossi-
ble to push the foot brake pedal
and will lead to an accident.
. Never use the shift lever in place
of the parking brake. When park-
ing, be sure the parking brake is
fully applied.
. To help avoid risk of injury or
death through unintended opera-
tion of the vehicle and/or its
systems, do not leave children,
people who require the assis-
tance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle.
Additionally, the temperature in-
side a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk
of injury or death to people and
pets.
Starting and driving 5-25
PARKING BRAKE
5-26 Starting and driving
WAF0517X
Apply
Release
Indicator light
The electronic parking brake can be
applied or released automatically or by
operating the parking brake switch.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The electronic parking brake will apply
automatically under any of the following
conditions while the brake force is main-
tained by the automatic brake hold func-
tion:
. When the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position.
. When the shift position is placed in the
P (Park) position.
. When the driver’s door is opened.
. When the driver’s seat belt is unfas-
tened.
The electronic parking brake is automati-
cally released as soon as the vehicle
starts while the accelerator pedal is
depressed under the following condi-
tions.
. While the engine is running.
. When the shift position is in the D
(Drive) or R (Reverse) position.
. When the driver’s door is closed.
The electronic parking brake is automati-
cally released within 5 seconds after the
shift position is placed in the D (Drive) or R
(Reverse) position even if the driver’s door
is opened. Be sure to close the door
before starting the vehicle.
WARNING
. When the automatic brake hold
function is activated, the electro-
nic parking brake will not be
automatically applied when the
engine is stopped without using
the ignition switch (for example,
by engine stalling).
Without the vehicle stationary,
the electronic parking brake will
not be automatically applied
even if the engine is turned off
with the ignition switch.
. Before leaving the vehicle, place
the shift position in the P (Park)
position and check that the elec-
tronic parking brake warning
light is illuminated to confirm
that the electronic parking brake
is applied. The electronic parking
brake warning light will remain
on for a period of time after the
driver’s door is locked.
CAUTION
When parking in an area where the
outside temperature is below 32°F
(0°C), the electronic parking brake, if
applied, may freeze in place and may
be difficult to release.
For safe parking, it is recommended
that you place the shift position in
the P (Park) position and securely
block the wheels.
NOTE:
. To keep the electronic parking brake
released after the engine is turned
off, place the ignition switch in the
OFF position, depress the brake
pedal and push down the parking
brake switch before opening the
driver’s door.
. If a malfunction occurs in the elec-
tronic parking brake system (for
example, due to battery discharge),
it is recommended to contact a
NISSAN dealer.
. Under the following conditions, the
electronic parking brake will auto-
matically be applied and the brake
force of the automatic brake hold
will be released.
— The braking force is applied by
the automatic brake hold function
for 3 minutes or longer.
— The vehicle is placed in the P
(Park) position.
— The driver’s seat belt is unfas-
tened.
— The driver’s door is opened.
— The ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position.
— The electronic parking brake is
applied manually.
— If a malfunction occurs in the
automatic brake hold function.
. Make sure that the electronic park-
ing brake system warning light is
OFF before starting the vehicle.
MANUAL OPERATION
To apply: When the vehicle is stopped,
pull the parking brake switch
up. (The
electronic parking brake will apply even if
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.) The indicator light
on the
switch and the electronic parking brake
warning light PARK or
(red) will
illuminate.
To release: With the ignition switch in the
ON position, depress the brake pedal and
push the parking brake switch down
.
The indicator light
and the electronic
parking brake warning light (red) will turn
off.
Before driving, check that the electronic
parking brake warning light (red) turns
off. For additional information, see “Warn-
ing lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders” (P.2-13).
NOTE:
. While the electronic parking brake is
applied or released, an operating
sound is heard from the lower side
of the rear seat. This is normal and
does not indicate a malfunction.
. When the electronic parking brake is
frequently applied and released in a
short period of time, the electronic
parking brake system warning light
may blink and the electronic parking
brake may not operate in order to
prevent the electronic parking brake
system from overheating. If this
occurs, operate the parking brake
switch again after waiting approxi-
mately 1 minute.
. If the electronic parking brake must
be applied while driving in an emer-
gency, pull up and hold the parking
brake switch. When you release the
parking brake switch, the electronic
parking brake will be released.
. While pulling up the parking brake
switch during driving, the electronic
parking brake is applied and a chime
sounds. The electronic parking
brake warning light (red) and the
indicator light on the parking brake
switch illuminate. This does not in-
dicate a malfunction. The electronic
parking brake warning light (red)
and the indicator light on the park-
ing brake switch will turn off when
the electronic parking brake is re-
leased.
. When pulling the parking brake
switch up with the ignition switch
in the OFF position, the indicator
Starting and driving 5-27
5-28 Starting and driving
light on the parking brake switch will
continue to illuminate for a short
period of time.
When towing a trailer
Depending on the weight of the vehicle
and trailer and the steepness of the slope,
there may be a tendency for the vehicle
to move backwards when starting from a
standstill. When this occurs, you can use
the parking brake switch in the same way
as a conventional lever type parking
brake.
Before starting on sloping roads when
towing a trailer, be sure to read the
following to prevent the vehicle from
moving backward unintentionally.
. Release the parking brake switch as
soon as the engine is delivering en-
ough torque to the wheels.
The automatic brake hold function main-
tains the braking force without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal when
the vehicle is stopped at a traffic light or
intersection. As soon as the driver de-
presses the accelerator pedal again, the
automatic brake hold function is deacti-
vated and the braking force is released.
The operating status of the automatic
brake hold can be displayed on the
vehicle information display. (See “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible remin-
ders” (P.2-13).)
WARNING
. The automatic brake hold func-
tion is not designed to hold the
vehicle on a steep hill or slippery
road. Never use the automatic
brake hold when the vehicle is
stopped on a steep hill or slippery
road. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to move.
. The automatic brake hold warn-
ing may appear in the vehicle
information display to request
that the driver retake control by
depressing the brake pedal.
. When the automatic brake hold
function is activated but fails to
maintain the vehicle at a stand-
still, depress the brake pedal to
stop the vehicle. If the vehicle
unexpectedly moves due to out-
side conditions, the chime may
sound and automatic brake hold
warning may illuminate in the
vehicle information display.
. Be sure to deactivate the auto-
matic brake hold function when
using a car wash or towing your
vehicle.
. Make sure to push the park but-
ton to shift to the P (Park) posi-
tion and apply the electronic
parking brake when parking your
vehicle, riding on or off the vehi-
cle, or loading luggage. Failure to
do so could cause the vehicle to
move or roll away unexpectedly
and result in serious personal
injury or property damage.
. If any of the following conditions
occur, the automatic brake hold
function may not function. Have
the system checked promptly. It
is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Failure to operate the vehicle in
accordance with these conditions
could cause the vehicle to move
or roll away unexpectedly and
result in serious personal injury
AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD
or property damage.
— A warning message appears
in the vehicle information dis-
play.
— The indicator light on the
automatic brake hold switch
does not illuminate when the
switch is pushed.
. The automatic brake hold func-
tion will not be activated if the
slip indicator light, electronic
parking brake warning light, elec-
tronic parking brake system
warning light, or master warning
light illuminates and the Chassis
Control System Error warning
message appears in the vehicle
information display.
. To maintain the braking force to
keep the vehicle to a standstill, a
noise may be heard. This is not a
malfunction.
WAF0516X
HOW TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD
FUNCTION
How to activate the automatic
brake hold function
1. With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push the automatic brake
hold switch
. The indicator light on
the automatic brake hold switch
illuminates.
2. When the automatic brake hold func-
tion goes into standby, the automatic
brake hold indicator light (white) illu-
minates.
To use the automatic brake hold function,
the following conditions need to be met.
. The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
. The electronic parking brake is re-
leased.
. The vehicle is not in the P (Park)
position.
NOTE:
The automatic brake hold function re-
sets to OFF every time the ignition
switch is switched from the OFF posi-
tion to the ON position.
How to deactivate the automatic
brake hold function
While the automatic brake hold function
is activated, push the automatic brake
hold switch to turn off the automatic
brake hold indicator light and deactivate
the automatic brake hold function. To
deactivate the automatic brake hold
function while the brake force has been
maintained by the automatic brake hold
function, depress the brake pedal and
push the automatic brake hold switch.
WARNING
Make sure to firmly depress and hold
the brake pedal when turning off the
automatic brake hold function while
the brake force is applied. When the
Starting and driving 5-29
5-30 Starting and driving
automatic brake hold function is
deactivated, the brake force will be
released. This could cause the vehi-
cle to move or roll away unexpect-
edly.
Failure to prevent the vehicle from
rolling may result in serious personal
injury or property damage.
HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC
BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION
For additional information on using the
automatic brake hold function, refer to
the instructions outlined in this section.
To maintain braking force auto-
matically
With the automatic brake hold function
activated and the automatic brake hold
indicator light (white) illuminated on the
meter, depress the braking pedal to stop
the vehicle. The brake force is automati-
cally applied without your foot depressed
on the brake pedal. While the brake hold is
maintained, the automatic brake hold
indicator light (green) illuminates on the
meter.
To start the vehicle from a stand-
still
With the vehicle not in the P (Park) or the
shift lever not in the N (Neutral) position,
depress the accelerator pedal while the
brake force is maintained. The brake force
will automatically be released to restart
the vehicle. The automatic brake hold
indicator light (white) on the meter illu-
minates and the automatic brake hold
returns to standby.
Parking
When the park button is pushed to
engage the P (Park) position with the
brake force maintained by the automatic
brake hold function, the electronic park-
ing brake will automatically be applied
and the brake force of the automatic
brake hold will be released. The auto-
matic brake hold indicator light turns off.
When the electronic parking brake is
applied with the brake force maintained
by the automatic brake hold function, the
brake force of the automatic brake hold
will be released. The automatic brake
hold indicator light turns off.
NOTE:
. Under the following conditions, the
electronic parking brake will auto-
matically be applied and the brake
force of the automatic brake hold
will be released:
— The braking force is applied by
the automatic brake hold function
for 3 minutes or longer.
— The driver’s seat belt is unfas-
tened.
— The ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position.
— If a malfunction occurs in the
automatic brake hold function.
— The vehicle is placed in the P
(Park) position.
— The driver’s door is opened.
— The electronic parking brake is
applied manually.
. When the vehicle stops, but the
brake force is not automatically
applied, depress the brake pedal
firmly until the automatic brake hold
indicator light (green) illuminates.
WAF0514X
Drive Mode Selector: 2WD models
WAF0515X
Drive Mode Selector: AWD models
WAF0540X
Vehicle information display: 2WD models
WAF0541X
Vehicle information display: AWD models
Multiple driving modes can be selected by
using the Drive Mode Selector.
2WD: SPORT, STANDARD and ECO
To change the mode, push the Drive
Mode Selector up or down.
AWD: OFF-ROAD, SNOW, AUTO, ECO and
SPORT
To change the mode, turn the Drive Mode
Selector right or left.
NOTE:
When the Drive Mode Selector selects a
mode, the mode may not switch im-
mediately. This is not a malfunction.
The current mode is displayed in the
vehicle information display. The mode list
will appear in the vehicle information
display and you can select the mode.
NOTE:
The mode list will be turned off in
approximately 5 seconds after the
mode is selected.
If the driving mode cannot be switched
using the Drive Mode Selector when the
ignition switch is in the ON position, have
the system checked. It is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Starting and driving 5-31
DRIVE MODE SELECTOR
5-32 Starting and driving
WARNING
Do not stare at the Drive Mode
Selector or the display while driving
so that full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
OFF-ROAD MODE (AWD models)
Allows for easier driving or starting on a
bumpy road surface such as an uneven
dirt road or a steep uphill slope or
through sand.
CAUTION
Never drive on dry, hard surface
roads in the OFF-ROAD mode, as this
will overload the powertrain and
may cause a serious malfunction.
Additionally, this will cause prema-
ture tire wear and reduced fuel
economy.
When the OFF-ROAD mode is selected,
small tight-corner braking phenomenon
or small vibration in cornering may occur.
This is not a malfunction.
SNOW MODE (AWD models)
This mode makes it easier to start and
run from snowy roads and frozen roads.
CAUTION
Never drive on dry, hard surface
roads in the SNOW mode, as this will
overload the powertrain and may
cause a serious malfunction. Addi-
tionally, this will cause premature
tire wear and reduced fuel economy.
When the SNOW mode is selected, small
vibration in cornering may occur. This is
not a malfunction.
STANDARD MODE (2WD models)/
AUTO MODE (AWD models)
This is the standard mode that is most
suitable for normal driving.
This mode will be selected first each time
the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
ECO MODE
Assists the driver’s ECO-driving. The en-
gine and transmission points are adjusted
for improved fuel economy, providing
such a driving features as smooth start-
ing or constant cruising.
NOTE:
Selecting the ECO mode will not neces-
sarily improve fuel economy as many
driving factors influence its effective-
ness.
Operation
Select the ECO mode using the Drive
Mode Selector. The ECO indicator illumi-
nates.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
within the range of economy drive, the
ECO indicator illuminates in green. When
the accelerator pedal is depressed above
the range of economy drive, the ECO
indicator turns off.
The ECO indicator will not illuminate in
the following cases:
. When the shift lever is in the R
(Reverse) position.
. When the vehicle speed is below 2
MPH (3.2 km/h) or over 90 MPH (144
km/h).
. When the cruise control (if so
equipped) or the Intelligent Cruise
Control (ICC) system (if so equipped)
is operated.
ECO Mode Customize
The “ECO Mode Customize” is a function
that can change the priority from the
Cruise Control (if so equipped) or the
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) function
to fuel efficiency improvements. It can be
set when the ECO mode is selected. To
activate or deactivate this function, see
“ECO Mode Setting” (P.2-26).
. Cruise Control
When the setting is ON, the fuel
efficiency while cruising will be im-
proved by lowering the acceleration
target from normal (setting OFF)
mode.
NOTE:
When the vehicle speed is reduced (for
example, when the vehicle is driven on
an uphill road from a flat road), it will
take more time to return to the pre-
viously set speed than normal mode.
Tire Pres ECO advice
The “Tire Pres ECO advice” is a function to
show an ECO advice message in the
vehicle information display when low tire
pressure is detected. To activate or deac-
tivate this function, see “ECO Mode
Setting” (P.2-26).
When the setting is ON, the ECO Drive
Report display shows “Check Tire Pres-
sures for Best Fuel Economy”. You can
switch the display to the Tire Pressures
display by pushing the
button on
the steering wheel.
WAF0126X
ECO Pedal Guide function
The ECO Pedal Guide display can be
selected in the vehicle information display
in the ECO mode. (See “5. ECO Pedal
Guide” (P.2-47).) Use the ECO Pedal Guide
function for improving fuel economy.
When the ECO Pedal Guide bar is in the
green range
, it indicates that the
vehicle is being driven within range of
the super economy drive.
When the ECO Pedal Guide bar is in the
light green range
, it indicates that the
vehicle is being driven within range of the
economy drive.
If the ECO Pedal Guide bar is out of the
Starting and driving 5-33
5-34 Starting and driving
green range ( and ), it indicates that
the accelerator pedal is depressed over
the range of economy drive.
The ECO Pedal Guide bar is not displayed
when:
. The vehicle speed is less than approxi-
mately 2 MPH (4 km/h).
. The shift lever is in the P (Park), N
(Neutral) or R (Reverse) position.
SPORT MODE
. Adjusts the engine and transmission
points for a higher response.
. The setting of the steering system is
adjusted to moderately increase
steering wheel effort for a sporty feel.
NOTE:
In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may
be reduced.
Each Driver Assistance system is designed to help the driver in different ways as they drive. The following Driver Assistance systems (if
so equipped) are available on this vehicle:
Category System Symbol System description (See the specified page for detailed information.)
Page
Forward Driving
Aids
Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) with Pedes-
trian Detection
Assists the driver with a warning and/or braking operation when there is a risk
of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane, or with a
pedestrian or a cyclist.
5-122
Intelligent Forward Colli-
sion Warning (I-FCW)
Helps alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second vehicle
traveling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane.
5-132
Intelligent Cruise Control
(ICC) (models with ProPI-
LOT Assist)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
.
Helps the driver maintain a selected distance from the vehicle ahead and
can reduce the speed to match a slower vehicle ahead.
.
Decelerates the vehicle to a standstill when a vehicle ahead slows to a stop.
5-98
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
.
Allows the driver to drive the vehicle at a fixed speed without keeping his/
her foot on the accelerator pedal.
5-119
Cruise control (models
without ProPILOT Assist)
Allows the driver to drive the vehicle at a fixed speed without keeping his/her
foot on the accelerator pedal. (For vehicles equipped with the ProPILOT Assist,
see “Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode” (P.5-119).)
5-83
Side Driving Aids
(Lane and Blind
Spot)
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW)
Warns the driver that the vehicle is about to cross a lane marker with an
indicator and a steering wheel vibration.
5-47
Intelligent Lane Interven-
tion (I-LI)
.
Warns the driver that the vehicle is about to cross a lane marker with an
indicator and a steering wheel vibration.
.
Assists the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane.
5-52
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
Warns the driver of a vehicle in an adjacent lane when changing lanes with an
indicator.
5-58
Intelligent Blind Spot In-
tervention (I-BSI)
.
Warns the driver of a vehicle in an adjacent lane when changing lanes.
.
Assists the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane.
5-66
Steering Assist
Assists the driver to help keep the vehicle within the center of the traveling lane
(this system is integrated in the ProPILOT Assist).
5-113
Starting and driving 5-35
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
5-36 Starting and driving
Category System Symbol System description (See the specified page for detailed information.)
Page
Rear Driving Aids
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)
Assists the driver when backing out from a parking space by detecting other
vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle.
5-77
Rear Automatic Braking
(RAB)
Assists the driver when the vehicle is backing up and approaching stationary
objects directly behind the vehicle by providing a warning and automatic
braking if needed.
5-143
Parking Aids
RearView Monitor -
Shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is placed in the R (Reverse)
position.
4-2
Intelligent Around View®
Monitor
-
Assists the driver in parking situations by showing various views of the position
of the vehicle in a split screen format.
4-9
Moving Object Detection
(MOD)
- Informs the driver of moving objects near the vehicle in parking situations.
4-21
Sonar system -
Informs the driver with a visual and audible alert of stationary obstacles near the
bumpers or the vehicle sides (flanks) (if so equipped).
5-162
Rear Sonar System (RSS) -
Informs the driver with a visual and audible alert of stationary obstacles to the
rear of the vehicle when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
5-168
ProPILOT Assist
ProPILOT Assist
Consists of Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) and Steering Assist.
5-85
Speed Limit Assist - a fea-
ture of ProPILOT Assist
with Navi-link
Detects a change of the speed limit, indicates the detected speed limit and can
apply it to the vehicle set speed automatically or manually.
5-103
Speed Adjust by Route - a
feature of ProPILOT Assist
with Navi-link
Adjusts the vehicle speed depending on curves, junctions and exits, using road
information provided by the navigation system.
5-106
Category System Symbol System description (See the specified page for detailed information.)
Page
Other Driving
Aids
High beam assist
Switches the headlights to the low beam automatically when an oncoming
vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle.
2-61
Traffic Sign Recognition
(TSR)
Provides the driver with information about the most recently detected speed
limit.
5-44
Intelligent Driver Alertness
(I-DA)
Helps alert the driver when a lack of attention or driving fatigue is detected.
5-141
Hill Start Assist -
Helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards in the time it takes the driver to
release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator when the vehicle is stopped
on a hill.
5-161
Starting and driving 5-37
5-38 Starting and driving
WAF0412X
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
Vehicle information display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
SYSTEMS
The following systems (if so equipped)
can be enabled or disabled using the
settings menu in the vehicle information
display. Select each setting item using the
scroll dial on the steering-wheel-
mounted controls.
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection
. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW)
. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)*
. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
. Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI)*
. Steering Assist
. Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
. Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
. Moving Object Detection (MOD)
. Sonar system
. Rear Sonar System (RSS)
. Speed Limit Assist (ProPILOT Assist
with Navi-link)
. Speed Adjust by Route (ProPILOT As-
sist with Navi-link)
. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
. Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)
*: To operate the I-LI and I-BSI systems,
you need to push the ProPILOT Assist
switch after enabling each system in the
settings menu.
Driver Assistance display
The Driver Assistance display appears in
the vehicle information display when
selected using the scroll dial, or for a
short period of time when the ProPILOT
Assist switch (if so equipped) is pushed.
The status of the following systems can
be shown in each zone of the display.
Zone
Driving Aid
Forward
Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) with Pedestrian Detec-
tion
Intelligent Forward Collision
Warning (I-FCW)
Lane
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-
LI) (if so equipped)
Blind Spot
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
Intelligent Blind Spot Interven-
tion (I-BSI) (if so equipped)
. When any of the “Warning” systems
are enabled, the “
” mark is shown
in each zone.
. When any of the “Intervention” sys-
tems are enabled, the “
” mark is
shown in each zone.
. When no system is enabled, “OFF” is
shown in each zone.
The display changes as the following
examples:
WAF0522X
All: outline
Zone Driving Aid
Status
Forward
Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) with Pe-
destrian Detection
Enabled
(outline)
Intelligent Forward
Collision Warning (I-
FCW)
Lane
Lane Departure Warn-
ing (LDW)
Enabled
(outline)
Intelligent Lane Inter-
vention (I-LI)
Disabled
Blind
Spot
Blind Spot Warning
(BSW)
Enabled
(outline)
Intelligent Blind Spot
Intervention (I-BSI)
Disabled
WAF0585X
Forward: outline, Other: shaded
Zone Driving Aid
Status
Forward
Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) with Pe-
destrian Detection
Enabled
(outline)
Intelligent Forward
Collision Warning (I-
FCW)
Lane
Lane Departure Warn-
ing (LDW)
Enabled
Intelligent Lane Inter-
vention (I-LI)
Enabled
(shaded)
Blind
Spot
Blind Spot Warning
(BSW)
Enabled
Intelligent Blind Spot
Intervention (I-BSI)
Enabled
(shaded)
Starting and driving 5-39
5-40 Starting and driving
COMMON TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Some of the Driver Assistance systems use the common parts (camera, radar, etc.) to function. When a pop-up warning message
appears in the vehicle information display, or the warning light flashes/illuminates, check the system condition. For details, see
“System temporarily unavailable” and “System malfunction” sections in this Owner’s Manual for each applicable system.
For camera and radar temporary blockage
Warning message/
Warning light
Symptom Possible cause System affected
Action to take
“Unavailable
High Cabin
Temperature”
High camera
temperature
Direct sunlight/High cabin
temperature
TSR, LDW, I-LI and I-
BSI and Steering
Assist
When the interior temperature is reduced, the system
resumes automatically. (Push the ProPILOT Assist switch
to turn back on the I-LI and I-BSI systems.)
Flashing
AEB with Pedes-
trian Detection and
I-FCW
“Not Available
Front Camera
Obstructed”
or
Flashing
Poor camera
visibility
Direct sunlight
Steering Assist and
AEB with Pedes-
trian Detection
When the condition no longer exists, the system resumes
automatically.
Camera
obstruction
Windshield glass misted,
frozen or covered with dirt
Clean the windshield glass of the camera area. Use the
wipers and the defroster to help clear the windshield glass.
“Forward Driving Aids
temporarily disabled
Front Sensor blocked
See Owner’s Manual”
and
Flashing
Front radar
obstruction
Inclement weather (rain,
fog, snow, etc.)
ICC, AEB with Pe-
destrian Detection
and I-FCW
When the condition no longer exists, the system resumes
automatically. (Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn
back on the ICC system.)
Sensor covered with dirt
or obstructed
Clean the front radar sensor area on the front of the
vehicle.
Roads with limited road
structures or buildings
When the condition no longer exists, the system resumes
automatically. (Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn
back on the ICC system.)
Flashing
Front radar
interruption
Interference from another
radar source
ICC, AEB with Pe-
destrian Detection
and I-FCW
When the condition no longer exists, the system resumes
automatically. (Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn
back on the ICC system.)
Warning message/
Warning light
Symptom Possible cause System affected
Action to take
“Unavailable
Side Radar
Obstruction”
Side radar
obstruction
Radar blockage
BSW, I-BSI and
RCTA
Clean the side rear radar area on the rear of the vehicle.
When the condition no longer exists, the system resumes
automatically. (Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn
back on the I-BSI system.)
For system temporarily unavailable
Warning light/Warning
message
Possible cause System to check
Action to take
Illuminating
VDC turned off AEB with Pedestrian Detection
Turn on the VDC.
“Currently not available”
VDC turned off
I-LI, I-BSI and ICC
Turn on the VDC.
SNOW mode or OFF-ROAD mode
selected (AWD models)
Select a mode other than SNOW and OFF-
ROAD.
For system malfunction
Warning light/Warning
message
Symptom System to check
Action to take
“Malfunction”
and
Illuminating
System malfunction
RCTA, AEB with Pedestrian
Detection and I-FCW
Stop the vehicle in a safe location. Turn the engine off and restart
the engine. If the warning light/message continues to illuminate,
have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
“Malfunction
See Owner’s Manual”
TSR and RAB
“Not Available
System Malfunction”
LDW, I-LI, BSW, I-BSI, ICC and
Steering Assist
“Parking Sensor Error
See Owner’s Manual”
Sonar system and RSS
“Driver Attention Alert
Malfunction”
I-DA
Starting and driving 5-41
5-42 Starting and driving
Camera, radar and sonar locations
The camera, radar and sonar that are
used by each Driver Assistance systems
are located on the front and rear of the
vehicle. For the maintenance of each
component, see “System maintenance”
section in this Owner’s Manual for each
application system.
WAF0644X
Vehicle front
Front camera unit
— Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection
— Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
— Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
— Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI)
— Steering Assist
— High beam assist
— Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
Front radar sensor
— Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection
— Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-
FCW)
— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
WAF0414X
Vehicle rear
Side radar sensor
— Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
— Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI)
— Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
WAF0649X
Sonar
Front and side (if so equipped) sonar
sensors
— Sonar system
Rear and side (if so equipped) sonar
sensors
— Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
— Sonar system
— Rear Sonar System (RSS)
Starting and driving 5-43
5-44 Starting and driving
WAC0523X
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system
provides the driver with information
about the most recently detected speed
limit. The system captures the road sign
information with the multi-sensing front
camera unit
located on the windshield
in front of the inside mirror and displays
the detected signs in the vehicle informa-
tion display. For vehicles equipped with
navigation system, the speed limit dis-
played is based on a combination of
navigation system data and live camera
recognition. TSR information is shown in
the vehicle information display and in the
Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped).
(See “Head Up Display (HUD)” (P.2-49).)
WARNING
The TSR system is only intended to
be a support device to provide the
driver with information. It is not a
replacement for the driver’s atten-
tion to traffic conditions or respon-
sibility to drive safely. It cannot
prevent accidents due to careless-
ness. It is the driver’s responsibility
to stay alert and drive safely at all
times.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The TSR system displays the following
types of road sign:
WAF0787X
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR)
(if so equipped)
WAF0788X
Latest detected speed limit
Reduce speed limit caution
No passing zone
CAUTION
. The TSR system is intended as an
aid to careful driving. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay
alert, drive safely, and observe
all road regulations that currently
apply, including looking out for
road signs.
. The TSR system may not function
properly under all conditions. Be-
low are some examples:
— When the road sign is not
clearly visible, for example,
due to damage or weather
conditions.
— When rain, snow or dirt ad-
heres to the windshield in
front of the multi-sensing
front camera unit.
— When the headlights are not
bright due to dirt on the lens
or if the aiming is not adjusted
properly.
— When strong light enters the
camera unit. (For example, the
light directly shines on the
front of the vehicle at sunrise
or sunset.)
— When a sudden change in
brightness occurs. (For exam-
ple, when the vehicle enters or
exits a tunnel or under a
bridge.)
— In areas not covered by the
navigation system.
— If there are deviations in rela-
tion to the navigation, for ex-
ample due to changes in the
road routing.
— When overtaking buses or
trucks with speed stickers.
— When the data from the navi-
gation system is not up-to-
date or is unavailable.
. The TSR system may display a
traffic sign, though there is no
traffic sign in front of the vehicle.
It may display a different speed
limit from that for a passenger
vehicle. (The maximum speed
limit sign may show a higher or
lower number than the actual
maximum speed, for example,
when detecting a speed limit sign
for truck, advisory sign, different
speed limit sign between daytime
and nighttime, or speed limit sign
written in different unit near the
border, etc.)
Starting and driving 5-45
5-46 Starting and driving
WAF0412X
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
Vehicle information display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE TSR
SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the TSR system:
1. Push the
button until “Set-
tings” appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display and then push the scroll
dial. Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance”. Then push the scroll dial.
2. Select “Speed Limit Sign” and push the
scroll dial to turn the system on or off.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-
ABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
under high temperature conditions (over
approximately 104°F (40°C) and then
started, the TSR system may be deacti-
vated automatically. The “Unavailable
High Cabin Temperature” warning mes-
sage will appear in the vehicle informa-
tion display.
Action to take:
When the interior temperature is reduced,
the TSR system will resume operating
automatically.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the TSR system malfunctions it will be
turned off automatically and the TSR
“Malfunction See Owner’s Manual” warn-
ing message will appear in the vehicle
information display.
Action to take
If the warning message appears, pull off
the road at a safe location and stop the
vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart
the engine. If the warning message con-
tinues to appear, have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The TSR system uses the same multi-
sensing front camera unit that is used by
the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys-
tem, located in front of the inside mirror.
For maintenance of the camera, see
“System maintenance” (P.5-51).
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the
LDW system could result in serious
injury or death.
. This system is only a warning
device to inform the driver of a
potential unintended lane depar-
ture. It will not steer the vehicle or
prevent loss of control. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay
alert, drive safely, keep the vehi-
cle in the traveling lane, and be in
control of the vehicle at all times.
WAC0523X
The LDW system will operate when the
vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi-
mately 37 MPH (60 km/h) and above, and
the lane markings are clearly visible on
the road.
The LDW system monitors the lane mar-
kers on the traveling lane using the
camera unit
located above the inside
mirror.
The LDW system warns the driver that the
vehicle is beginning to leave the driving
lane with an indicator and a steering
wheel vibration. (See “LDW system opera-
tion” (P.5-48).)
Starting and driving 5-47
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
5-48 Starting and driving
WAF0411X
LDW indicator (on the vehicle information
display)
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
LDW SYSTEM OPERATION
The LDW system provides a lane depar-
ture warning function when the vehicle is
driven at speeds of approximately 37 MPH
(60 km/h) and above and the lane mark-
ings are clear. When the vehicle ap-
proaches either the left or the right side
of the traveling lane, the steering wheel
will vibrate and the LDW indicator on the
vehicle information display will blink to
alert the driver.
The warning function will stop when the
vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.
WAF0412X
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
Vehicle information display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW
SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the LDW system.
1. Push the
button until “Set-
tings” appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display and then push the scroll
dial. Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance”. Then push the scroll dial.
2. Select “Lane” and push the scroll dial.
3. Select “Warning (LDW)” and push the
scroll dial.
NOTE:
If you disable the LDW system, the
system will remain disabled the next
time you start the vehicle’s engine.
LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the LDW system. Failure to
follow the warnings and instructions
for proper use of the LDW system
could result in serious injury or
death.
. The system will not operate at
speeds below approximately 37
MPH (60 km/h) or if it cannot
detect lane markers.
. Do not use the LDW system under
the following conditions as it may
not function properly:
— During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.).
Starting and driving 5-49
5-50 Starting and driving
— When driving on slippery
roads, such as on ice or snow.
— When driving on winding or
uneven roads.
— When there is a lane closure
due to road repairs.
— When driving in a makeshift or
temporary lane.
— When driving on roads where
the lane width is too narrow.
— When driving without normal
tire conditions (for example,
tire wear, low tire pressure,
installation of spare tire, tire
chains, non-standard wheels).
— When the vehicle is equipped
with non-original brake parts
or suspension parts.
— When towing a trailer or other
vehicle.
. The system may not function
properly under the following con-
ditions:
— On roads where there are
multiple parallel lane markers;
lane markers that are faded or
not painted clearly; yellow
painted lane markers; non-
standard lane markers; or
lane markers covered with
water, dirt, snow, etc.
— On roads where discontinued
lane markers are still detect-
able.
— On roads where there are
sharp curves.
— On roads where there are
sharply contrasting objects,
such as shadows, snow,
water, wheel ruts, seams or
lines remaining after road re-
pairs. (The LDW system could
detect these items as lane
markers.)
— On roads where the traveling
lane merges or separates.
— When the vehicle’s traveling
direction does not align with
the lane marker.
— When traveling close to the
vehicle in front of you, which
obstructs the lane camera
unit detection range.
— When rain, snow, dirt or object
adheres to the windshield in
front of the lane camera unit.
— When the headlights are not
bright due to dirt on the lens
or if the aiming is not adjusted
properly.
— When strong light enters the
lane camera unit. (For exam-
ple, the light directly shines on
the front of the vehicle at
sunrise or sunset.)
— When a sudden change in
brightness occurs. (For exam-
ple, when the vehicle enters or
exits a tunnel or under a
bridge.)
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-
ABLE
Condition A:
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
under high temperature conditions (over
approximately 104°F (40°C)) and then
started, the LDW system may be deacti-
vated automatically, the LDW indicator
will flash and the following message will
appear in the vehicle information display.
. “Unavailable High Cabin Temperature”
When the interior temperature is reduced,
the LDW system will resume operating
automatically and the LDW indicator will
stop flashing.
Condition B:
The warning function of the LDW system
is not designed to work under the follow-
ing conditions:
. When you operate the lane change
signal and change traveling lanes in
the direction of the signal. (The LDW
system will become operable again
approximately 2 seconds after the
lane change signal is turned off.)
. When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h).
Action to take:
After the above conditions have finished
and the necessary operating conditions
are satisfied, the LDW system will resume.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the LDW system malfunctions, it will
cancel automatically and “Not Available
System Malfunction” warning message
will appear in the vehicle information
display. If the warning message appears,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle. Place the ignition switch
in the OFF position and restart the
engine. If the warning message continues
to appear, have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
WAC0523X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The lane camera unit for the LDW
system is located above the inside mirror.
To keep the proper operation of the LDW
system and prevent a system malfunc-
tion, be sure to observe the following:
. Always keep the windshield clean.
. Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an
accessory near the camera unit.
. Do not place reflective materials, such
as white paper or a mirror, on the
instrument panel. The reflection of
sunlight may adversely affect the
camera unit’s capability of detecting
the lane markers.
. Do not strike or damage the areas
around the camera unit. Do not touch
the camera lens or remove the screw
located on the camera unit. If the
camera unit is damaged due to an
accident, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.
Starting and driving 5-51
5-52 Starting and driving
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the I-LI
system could result in serious injury
or death.
. The I-LI system will not steer the
vehicle or prevent loss of control.
It is the driver’s responsibility to
stay alert, drive safely, keep the
vehicle in the traveling lane, and
be in control of the vehicle at all
times.
. The I-LI system is primarily in-
tended for use on well-developed
freeways or highways. It may not
detect the lane markers in certain
road, weather, or driving condi-
tions.
WAC0523X
The I-LI system must be turned on with
the ProPILOT Assist switch on the steer-
ing wheel, every time the ignition is
placed in the ON position.
The I-LI system will operate when the
vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi-
mately 37 MPH (60 km/h) and above, and
only when the lane markings are clearly
visible on the road. The I-LI system warns
the driver when the vehicle has left the
center of the traveling lane with an
indicator and steering wheel vibration.
The system helps assist the driver to
return the vehicle to the center of the
traveling lane by applying the brakes to
the left or right wheels individually (for a
short period of time).
The I-LI system monitors the lane mar-
kers on the traveling lane using the
camera unit
located above the inside
mirror.
INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION
(I-LI) (if so equipped)
WAF0518X
I-LI ON indicator (on the vehicle informa-
tion display)
I-LI indicator (on the vehicle information
display)
Vehicle information display
ProPILOT Assist switch
I-LI SYSTEM OPERATION
The I-LI system operates above approxi-
mately 37 MPH (60 km/h) and when the
lane markings are clear. When the vehicle
approaches either the left or the right
side of the traveling lane, steering wheel
will vibrate and the I-LI indicator (orange)
on the vehicle information display will
blink to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI
system will automatically apply the
brakes for a short period of time to help
assist the driver to return the vehicle to
the center of the traveling lane.
To turn on the I-LI system, push the
ProPILOT Assist switch on the steering
wheel after starting the engine. The I-LI
ON indicator on the vehicle information
display will illuminate. Push the ProPILOT
Assist switch again to turn off the I-LI
system. The I-LI ON indicator will turn off.
Starting and driving 5-53
5-54 Starting and driving
WAF0519X
Steering-wheel-mounted control (left
side)
Vehicle information display
ProPILOT Assist switch
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-LI
SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the I-LI system.
1. Push the
button until “Settings”
appears in the vehicle information
display and then push the scroll dial.
Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance.” Then push the scroll dial.
2. Select “Lane” and push the scroll dial.
3. Select “Prevention (LDP)” and push the
scroll dial.
4. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to
turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Turning on the ProPILOT Assist system
will turn on the I-LI and I-BSI systems at
the same time. If the I-LI system is
disabled in the settings menu, the I-LI
will automatically be turned on when
the Steering Assist system is active.
(See “ProPILOT Assist” (P.5-85).)
I-LI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the I-LI system. Failure to
follow the warnings and instructions
for proper use of the I-LI system
could result in serious injury or
death.
. The I-LI system may activate if
you change lanes without first
activating your turn signal or, for
example, if a construction zone
directs traffic to cross an existing
lane marker. If this occurs you
may need to apply corrective
steering to complete your lane
change.
. Because the I-LI may not activate
under the road, weather, and lane
marker conditions described in
this section, it may not activate
every time your vehicle begins to
leave its lane and you will need to
apply corrective steering.
. The I-LI system will not operate at
speeds below approximately 37
MPH (60 km/h) or if it cannot
detect lane markers.
. When the I-LI system is operating,
avoid excessive or sudden steer-
ing maneuvers. Otherwise, you
could lose control of the vehicle.
. Do not use the I-LI system under
the following conditions as it may
not function properly:
— During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.).
— When driving on slippery
roads, such as on ice or snow.
— When driving on winding or
uneven roads.
— When there is a lane closure
due to road repairs.
— When driving in a makeshift or
temporary lane.
— When driving on roads where
the lane width is too narrow.
— When driving without normal
tire conditions (for example,
tire wear, low tire pressure,
installation of spare tire, tire
chains, non-standard wheels).
— When the vehicle is equipped
with non-original brake parts
or suspension parts.
— When towing a trailer or other
vehicle.
— On roads where there are
multiple parallel lane markers;
lane markers that are faded or
not painted clearly; yellow
painted lane markers; non-
standard lane markers; or
lane markers covered with
water, dirt, snow, etc.
— On roads where discontinued
lane markers are still detect-
able.
— On roads where there are
sharp curves.
— On roads where there are
sharply contrasting objects,
such as shadows, snow,
water, wheel ruts, seams or
lines remaining after road re-
pairs. (The I-LI system could
detect these items as lane
markers.)
— On roads where the traveling
lane merges or separates.
— When the vehicle’s traveling
direction does not align with
the lane marker.
— When traveling close to the
vehicle in front of you, which
obstructs the lane camera
unit detection range.
— When rain, snow or dirt ad-
heres to the windshield in
front of the lane camera unit.
— When the headlights are not
bright due to dirt on the lens
or if the aiming is not adjusted
properly.
— When strong light enters the
lane camera unit. (For exam-
ple, the light directly shines on
the front of the vehicle at
sunrise or sunset.)
Starting and driving 5-55
5-56 Starting and driving
— When a sudden change in
brightness occurs. (For exam-
ple, when the vehicle enters or
exits a tunnel or under a
bridge.)
While the I-LI system is operating, you
may hear a sound of brake operation.
This is normal and indicates that the I-LI
system is operating properly.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-
ABLE
Condition A:
The warning and assist functions of the I-
LI system are not designed to work under
the following conditions:
. When you operate the lane change
signal and change the traveling lanes
in the direction of the signal. (The I-LI
system will be deactivated for ap-
proximately 2 seconds after the lane
change signal is turned off.)
. When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h).
Action to take:
After the above conditions have finished
and the necessary operating conditions
are satisfied, the warning and assist
functions will resume.
Condition B:
The assist function of the I-LI system is
not designed to work under the following
conditions (warning is still functional):
. When the brake pedal is depressed.
. When the steering wheel is turned as
far as necessary for the vehicle to
change lanes.
. When the vehicle is accelerated during
the I-LI system operation.
. When the Intelligent Cruise Control
(ICC) approach warning occurs (if so
equipped).
. When the hazard warning flashers are
operated.
. When driving on a curve at high speed.
Action to take:
After the above conditions have finished
and the necessary operating conditions
are satisfied, the I-LI system application of
the brakes will resume.
Condition C:
If the following message appears in the
vehicle information display, a chime will
sound and the I-LI system will be turned
off automatically.
. "Currently not available":
— When the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system is turned off.
— When the SNOW mode and the
OFF-ROAD mode is selected (AWD
models).
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer
exist, turn off the I-LI system. Push the
ProPILOT Assist switch again to turn the I-
LI system back on.
Temporary disabled status at high tem-
perature:
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
under high temperature conditions (over
approximately 104°F (40°C)) and then the
I-LI system is turned on, the I-LI system
may be deactivated automatically and
the following message will appear on
the vehicle information display:
. “Unavailable High Cabin Temperature”
When the interior temperature is reduced,
the system will resume operating auto-
matically.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I-LI system malfunctions, it will
cancel automatically. The I-LI indicator
(orange) will illuminates and the “Not
Available System Malfunction” warning
message will appear in the vehicle infor-
mation display.
If the I-LI indicator (orange) illuminates,
pull off the road to a safe location. Turn
the engine off and restart the engine. If
the I-LI indicator (orange) continues to
illuminate, have the I-LI system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
WAC0523X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The lane camera unit
for the I-LI system
is located above the inside mirror. To
keep the proper operation of the I-LI
system and prevent a system malfunc-
tion, be sure to observe the following:
. Always keep the windshield clean.
. Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an
accessory near the camera unit.
. Do not place reflective materials, such
as white paper or a mirror, on the
instrument panel. The reflection of
sunlight may adversely affect the
camera unit’s capability of detecting
the lane markers.
. Do not strike or damage the areas
around the camera unit. Do not touch
the camera lens or remove the screw
located on the camera unit. If the
camera unit is damaged due to an
accident, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.
Starting and driving 5-57
5-58 Starting and driving
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the
BSW system could result in serious
injury or death.
. The BSW system is not a replace-
ment for proper driving proce-
dure and is not designed to
prevent contact with vehicles or
objects. When changing lanes, al-
ways use the side and rear mir-
rors and turn and look in the
direction your vehicle will move
to ensure it is safe to change
lanes. Never rely solely on the
BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when
changing lanes.
WAF0414X
The BSW system uses radar sensors
installed near the rear bumper to detect
other vehicles in an adjacent lane.
SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on
either side of your vehicle within the
detection zone shown as illustrated. This
detection zone starts from the outside
mirror of your vehicle and extends ap-
proximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear
bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m)
sideways.
When the turn signal is activated, the
detection zone may extend more than
approximately 10 ft (3.0 m).
BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)
WAF0413X
Side indicator light
BSW indicator (on the vehicle information
display)
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approxi-
mately 20 MPH (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the
detection zone, the side indicator light
illuminates.
If the turn signal is then activated, the
system chimes (twice) and the side in-
dicator light flashes. The side indicator
light continues to flash until the detected
vehicle leaves the detection zone.
The side indicator light illuminates for a
few seconds when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side indicator light
is adjusted automatically depending on
the brightness of the ambient light.
Starting and driving 5-59
5-60 Starting and driving
WAF0412X
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
Vehicle information display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW
SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the BSW system.
1. Push the
button until “Set-
tings” appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display and then push the scroll
dial. Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance”. Then push the scroll dial.
2. Select “Blind Spot” and push the scroll
dial.
3. Select “Warning (BSW)” and push the
scroll dial.
NOTE:
The system will retain current settings
in the vehicle information display even
if the engine is restarted.
BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the BSW system. Failure to
operate the vehicle in accordance
with these system limitations could
result in serious injury or death.
. The BSW system cannot detect all
vehicles under all conditions.
. The radar sensors may not be
able to detect and activate BSW
when certain objects are present
such as:
— Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.
— Vehicles such as motorcycles,
low height vehicles, or high
ground clearance vehicles.
— Oncoming vehicles.
— Vehicles remaining in the de-
tection zone when you accel-
erate from a stop.
— A vehicle merging into an
adjacent lane at a speed ap-
proximately the same as your
vehicle.
— A vehicle approaching rapidly
from behind.
— A vehicle which your vehicle
overtakes rapidly.
— A vehicle that passes through
the detection zone quickly.
— When overtaking several vehi-
cles in a row, the vehicles after
the first vehicle may not be
detected if they are traveling
close together.
. The radar sensor’s detection zone
is designed based on a standard
lane width. When driving in a
wider lane, the radar sensors
may not detect vehicles in an
adjacent lane. When driving in a
narrow lane, the radar sensors
may detect vehicles driving two
lanes away.
. The radar sensors are designed
to ignore most stationary objects,
however objects such as guard-
rails, walls, foliage and parked
vehicles may occasionally be de-
tected. This is a normal operation
condition.
. The following conditions may re-
duce the ability of the radar to
detect other vehicles:
— Severe weather
— Road spray
— Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the
vehicle
. Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install ac-
cessories or apply additional
paint near the radar sensors.
These conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles.
. Excessive noise (for example,
audio system volume, open vehi-
cle window) will interfere with the
chime sound, and it may not be
heard.
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on
Indicator off
Indicator flashing
Starting and driving 5-61
5-62 Starting and driving
JVS0737X
Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind
Another vehicle approaching from
behind
Illustration 1: The side indicator light
illuminates if a vehicle enters the detec-
tion zone from behind in an adjacent lane.
JVS0738X
Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
. The radar sensors may not detect
vehicles which are approaching ra-
pidly from behind.
JVS0739X
Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side indicator light
illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and
that vehicle stays in the detection zone
for approximately 2 seconds.
JVS0740X
Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
. When overtaking several vehicles in
a row, the vehicles after the first
vehicle may not be detected if they
are traveling close together.
. The radar sensors may not detect
slower moving vehicles if they are
passed quickly.
. If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will
flash but no chime will sound when
the other vehicle is detected.
JVS0741X
Illustration 5 – Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side indicator light
illuminates if a vehicle enters the detec-
tion zone from either side.
Starting and driving 5-63
5-64 Starting and driving
WAF0555X
Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
. The radar sensors may not detect a
vehicle which is traveling at about
the same speed as your vehicle
when it enters the detection zone.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-
ABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the BSW
system will be turned off automatically, a
chime will sound and the “Unavailable
Side Radar Obstruction” warning mes-
sage will appear in the vehicle informa-
tion display.
The system is not available until the
conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by
temporary ambient conditions such as
splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked
condition may also be caused by objects
such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI) (if so equipped) and the Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems will also
stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer
exist, the system will resume automati-
cally.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
When the BSW system malfunctions, it will
be turned off automatically, the BSW
indicator illuminates and the “Not Avail-
able System Malfunction” warning mes-
sage will appear in the vehicle
information display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI) (if so equipped) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems will also
stop working.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn
the engine off and restart the engine. If
the message continues to appear, have
the BSW system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
WAF0414X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors for the BSW
system are located near the rear bumper.
Always keep the area near the radar
sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by
temporary ambient conditions such as
splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be
caused by objects such as ice, frost or
dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstruct-
ing the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including trans-
parent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the radar
sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors.
See a NISSAN dealer or other authorized
repair shop if the area around the radar
sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: LTQRN5TR
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS of the Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation
For Canada
Model: RN5TR
IC: 3659A-RN5TR
This device complies with Industry Ca-
nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Starting and driving 5-65
5-66 Starting and driving
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the I-
BSI system could result in serious
injury or death.
. The I-BSI system is not a replace-
ment for proper driving proce-
dures and is not designed to
prevent contact with vehicles or
objects. When changing lanes, al-
ways use the side and rear mir-
rors and turn and look in the
direction your vehicle will move
to ensure it is safe to change
lanes. Never rely solely on the I-
BSI system.
. There is a limitation to the detec-
tion capability of the radar. Not
every moving object or vehicle
will be detected. Using the I-BSI
system under some road, ground,
lane marker, traffic or weather
conditions could lead to improper
system operation. Always rely on
your own operation to avoid ac-
cidents.
The I-BSI system helps alert the driver of
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when
changing lanes, and helps assist the
driver to return the vehicle to the center
of the traveling lane.
WAF0633X
The I-BSI system uses radar sensors
installed near the rear bumper to detect
other vehicles in an adjacent lane. In
addition to the radar sensors, the I-BSI
system uses a camera
installed behind
the windshield to monitor the lane mar-
kers of your traveling lane.
INTELLIGENT BLIND SPOT
INTERVENTION (I-BSI) (if so equipped)
SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on
either side of your vehicle within the
detection zone shown as illustrated.
This detection zone starts from the out-
side mirror of your vehicle and extends
approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the
rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0
m) sideways.
WAF0415X
Side indicator light
I-BSI ON indicator (on the vehicle informa-
tion display)
I-BSI indicator (on the vehicle information
display)
Vehicle information display
ProPILOT Assist switch
I-BSI SYSTEM OPERATION
The I-BSI system operates above approxi-
mately 37 MPH (60 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the
detection zone, the side indicator light
illuminates.
If the turn signal is then activated, the
Starting and driving 5-67
5-68 Starting and driving
system chimes (twice) and the side in-
dicator light flashes. The side indicator
light continues to flash until the detected
vehicle leaves the detection zone.
If the I-BSI system is ON and your vehicle
approaches a lane marker while another
vehicle is in the detection zone, the
system chimes (three times) and the side
indicator light flashes. The I-BSI system
activates to help return the vehicle back
to the center of the driving lane. The I-BSI
system operates regardless of turn signal
usage.
To turn on the I-BSI system, push the
ProPILOT Assist switch on the steering
wheel after starting the engine. The I-BSI
ON indicator on the vehicle information
display will illuminate. Push the ProPILOT
Assist switch again to turn off the I-BSI
system.
NOTE:
. I-BSI warning and system applica-
tion will only be activated if the side
indicator light is already illuminated
when your vehicle approaches a
lane marker. If another vehicle
comes into the detection zone after
your vehicle has crossed a lane
marker, no I-BSI warning or system
application will be activated. (For
additional information, see “I-BSI
driving situations” (P.5-71).)
. The I-BSI system is typically acti-
vated earlier than the Intelligent
Lane Intervention (I-LI) system when
your vehicle is approaching a lane
marker.
WAF0519X
Steering-wheel-mounted control (left
side)
Vehicle information display
ProPILOT Assist switch
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-BSI
SYSTEM
1. Push the button until “Settings”
appears in the vehicle information
display and then push the scroll dial.
Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance.” Then push the scroll dial.
2. Select “Blind Spot” and push the scroll
dial.
3. Select “Intervention (BSI)” and push
the scroll dial.
4. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to
turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Turning on the ProPILOT Assist system
will turn on the I-BSI and I-LI systems at
the same time. For additional informa-
tion, see “Intelligent Lane Intervention
(I-LI)” (P.5-52).
Turning the BSW system off will deacti-
vate the I-BSI system at the same time.
I-BSI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the I-BSI system. Failure to
operate the vehicle in accordance
with these system limitations could
result in serious injury or death.
. The I-BSI system cannot detect all
vehicles under all conditions.
. The radar sensors may not be
able to detect and activate I-BSI
when certain objects are present
such as:
Starting and driving 5-69
5-70 Starting and driving
— Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.
— Vehicles such as motorcycles,
low height vehicles, or high
ground clearance vehicles.
— Vehicles remaining in the de-
tection zone when you accel-
erate from a stop.
— Oncoming vehicles.
— A vehicle merging into an
adjacent lane at a speed ap-
proximately the same as your
vehicle.
— A vehicle approaching rapidly
from behind.
— A vehicle which your vehicle
overtakes rapidly.
— A vehicle that passes through
the detection zone quickly.
. The radar sensor’s detection zone
is designed based on a standard
lane width. When driving in a
wider lane, the radar sensors
may not detect vehicles in an
adjacent lane. When driving in a
narrow lane, the radar sensors
may detect vehicles driving two
lanes away.
. The radar sensors are designed
to ignore most stationary objects,
however objects such as guard-
rails, walls, foliage and parked
vehicles may occasionally be de-
tected. This is a normal operation
condition.
. The following conditions may re-
duce the ability of the radar to
detect other vehicles:
— Severe weather
— Road spray
— Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the
vehicle
. Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install ac-
cessories or apply additional
paint near the radar sensors.
These conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles.
. The camera may not detect lane
markers in the following situa-
tions and the I-BSI system may
not operate properly.
— On roads where there are
multiple parallel lane markers;
lane markers that are faded or
not painted clearly; yellow
painted lane markers; non-
standard lane markers; lane
markers covered with water,
dirt, snow, etc.
— On roads where discontinued
lane markers are still detect-
able.
— On roads where there are
sharp curves.
— On roads where there are
sharply contrasting objects,
such as shadows, snow,
water, wheel ruts, seams or
lines remaining after road re-
pairs.
— On roads where the traveling
lane merges or separates.
— When the vehicle’s traveling
direction does not align with
the lane markers.
— When traveling close to the
vehicle in front of you, which
obstructs the lane camera
unit detection range.
— When rain, snow or dirt ad-
heres to the windshield in
front of a lane camera unit.
— When the headlights are not
bright due to dirt on the lens
or if aiming is not adjusted
properly.
— When strong light enters a
lane camera unit. (For exam-
ple: light directly shines on the
front of the vehicle at sunrise
or sunset.)
— When a sudden change in
brightness occurs. (For exam-
ple: when the vehicle enters or
exits a tunnel or under a
bridge.)
. Do not use the I-BSI system under
the following conditions because
the system may not function
properly.
— During bad weather. (For ex-
ample: rain, fog, snow, etc.)
— When driving on slippery
roads, such as on ice or snow,
etc.
— When driving on winding or
uneven roads.
— When there is a lane closure
due to road repairs.
— When driving in a makeshift or
temporary lane.
— When driving on roads where
the lane width is too narrow.
— When driving with a tire that is
not within normal tire condi-
tions (for example, tire wear,
low tire pressure, installation
of spare tire, tire chains, non-
standard wheels).
— When the vehicle is equipped
with non-original steering
parts or suspension parts.
— When towing a trailer or other
vehicle.
. Excessive noise (for example,
audio system volume, open vehi-
cle window) will interfere with the
chime sound, and it may not be
heard.
I-BSI DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on
Indicator off
Indicator flashing
Starting and driving 5-71
5-72 Starting and driving
JVS0737X
Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind
Another vehicle approaching from
behind
Illustration 1: The side indicator light
illuminates if a vehicle enters the detec-
tion zone from behind in an adjacent lane.
JVS0738X
Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the
turn signal then the system chimes a
sound (twice) and the side indicator light
flashes.
JVS0760X
Illustration 3 - Approaching from behind
Illustration 3: If the I-BSI system is on and
your vehicle approaches a lane marker
while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, the system chimes (three times)
and the side indicator light flashes. The I-
BSI system activates to help return the
vehicle back to the center of the driving
lane.
NOTE:
. The radar sensors may not detect
vehicles which are approaching ra-
pidly from behind.
JVS0739X
Illustration 4 - Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: The side indicator light
illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and
that vehicle stays in the detection zone
for approximately 3 seconds.
JVS0740X
Illustration 5 - Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 5: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
JVS0761X
Illustration 6 - Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 6: If the I-BSI system is on and
your vehicle approaches a lane marker
while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, the system chimes (three times)
and the side indicator light flashes. The I-
BSI system activates to help return the
vehicle back to the center of the driving
lane.
NOTE:
. When overtaking several vehicles in
a row, the vehicles after the first
vehicle may not be detected if they
are traveling close together.
. The radar sensors may not detect
slower moving vehicles if they are
passed quickly.
Starting and driving 5-73
5-74 Starting and driving
JVS0741X
Illustration 7 - Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 7: The side indicator light
illuminates if a vehicle enters the detec-
tion zone from either side.
NOTE:
The radar sensors may not detect a
vehicle which is traveling at about the
same speed as your vehicle when it
enters the detection zone.
WAF0555X
Illustration 8 - Entering from the side
Illustration 8: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the side indicator
light flashes and a chime will sound twice.
NOTE:
If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when another
vehicle is detected.
JVS0761X
Illustration 9 - Entering from the side
Illustration 9: If the I-BSI system is on and
your vehicle approaches the lane marker
while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, the system chimes (three times)
and the side indicator light flashes. The I-
BSI system activates to help return the
vehicle back to the center of the driving
lane.
JVS0742X
Illustration 10 - Entering from the side
Illustration 10: The I-BSI system will not
operate if your vehicle is on a lane marker
when another vehicle enters the detec-
tion zone. In this case only the BSW
system operates.
NOTE:
. The radar sensors may not detect a
vehicle which is traveling at about
the same speed as your vehicle
when it enters the detection zone.
. I-BSI will not operate or will stop
operating and only a warning chime
will sound under the following con-
ditions.
— When the brake pedal is de-
pressed.
— When the vehicle is accelerated
during I-BSI system operation
— When steering quickly
— When the ICC, I-FCW or AEB warn-
ings sound.
— When the hazard warning flashers
are operated.
— When driving on a curve at a high
speed.
— When the BSW system is turned
off.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-
ABLE
When any of the following messages
appear on the vehicle information display,
a chime will sound and the I-BSI system
will be turned off automatically.
. “Not Available Poor Road Conditions”:
When the VDC system (except traction
control system function) or ABS oper-
ates.
. “Currently not available”:
— When the VDC system is turned off.
— When the SNOW mode and the
OFF-ROAD mode is selected (AWD
models).
. “Unavailable High Cabin Temperature”:
If the vehicle is parked in direct sun-
light under high temperature condi-
tions (over approximately 104°F
(40°C)).
. “Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction”:
When side radar blockage is detected.
Turn off the I-BSI system and turn it on
again when the above conditions no
longer exist.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
When the I-BSI system malfunctions, it will
be turned off automatically, the I-BSI
indicator illuminates and a chime will
sound, and the “Not Available System
Malfunction” warning message will ap-
pear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location and
push the park button to engage the P
(Park) position. Turn the engine off and
restart the engine. If the warning mes-
sage continues to appear, It is recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Starting and driving 5-75
5-76 Starting and driving
WAF0633X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors for the I-BSI
system are located near the rear bumper.
Always keep the area near the radar
sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by
temporary ambient conditions such as
splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be
caused by objects such as ice, frost or
dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstruct-
ing the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including trans-
parent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the radar
sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors.
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer if the area around the radar
sensors is damaged due to a collision.
The lane camera unit
for I-BSI system is
located above the inside mirror. To keep
the proper operation of I-BSI and prevent
a system malfunction, be sure to observe
the following:
. Always keep the windshield clean.
. Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an
accessory near the camera unit.
. Do not place reflective materials, such
as white paper or a mirror, on the
instrument panel. The reflection of
sunlight may adversely affect the
camera unit’s capability of detecting
the lane markers.
. Do not strike or damage the areas
around the camera unit. Do not touch
the camera lens or remove the screw
located on the camera unit. It is
recommended you contact a NISSAN
dealer if the camera unit is damaged
due to an accident.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: LTQRN5TR
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS of the Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation
For Canada
Model: RN5TR
IC: 3659A-RN5TR
This device complies with Industry Ca-
nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the
RCTA system could result in serious
injury or death.
. The RCTA system is not a replace-
ment for proper driving proce-
dures and is not designed to
prevent contact with vehicles or
objects. When backing out of a
parking space, always use the
side and rear mirrors and turn
and look in the direction your
vehicle will move. Never rely so-
lely on the RCTA system.
The RCTA system will assist you when
backing out from a parking space. When
the vehicle is in reverse, the system is
designed to detect other vehicles ap-
proaching from the right or left of the
vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic,
it will alert you.
WAF0416X
Side indicator light
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
The RCTA system can help alert the driver
of an approaching vehicle when the
driver is backing out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse)
and the vehicle speed is less than ap-
proximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the RCTA
Starting and driving 5-77
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)
5-78 Starting and driving
system is operational.
If the radar detects an approaching
vehicle from either side, the system
chimes (once) and the side indicator light
flashes on the side the vehicle is ap-
proaching from.
JVS0173X
WAF0414X
The RCTA system uses radar sensors
installed on both sides near the rear
bumper to detect an approaching vehicle.
The radar sensors can detect an ap-
proaching vehicle from up to approxi-
mately 66 ft (20 m) away.
WAF0412X
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
Vehicle information display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the RCTA system.
1. Push the
button until “Set-
tings” appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display and then push the scroll
dial. Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance”. Then push the scroll dial.
2. Use the button to select “Cross Traffic
Alert” then press the scroll dial.
3. Use the scroll dial to enable or disable
the system.
NOTE:
The system setting will be retained
even if the engine is restarted.
Starting and driving 5-79
5-80 Starting and driving
JVS0479X
RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the RCTA system. Failure to
operate the vehicle in accordance
with these system limitations could
result in serious injury or death.
. Always check surroundings and
turn to check what is behind you
before backing up. The radar
sensors detect approaching
(moving) vehicles. The radar sen-
sors cannot detect every object
such as:
— Pedestrians, bicycles, motor-
cycles, animals or child-oper-
ated toy vehicles
— A vehicle that is passing at
speeds greater than approxi-
mately 19 MPH (30 km/h)
— A vehicle that is passing at
speeds lower than approxi-
mately 5 MPH (8 km/h)
. The radar sensors may not detect
approaching vehicles in certain
situations:
— Illustration : When a vehicle
parked next to you obstructs
the beam of the radar sensor.
— Illustration
: When the vehi-
cle is parked in an angled
parking space.
— Illustration
: When the vehi-
cle is parked on inclined
ground.
— Illustration
: When an ap-
proaching vehicle turns into
your vehicle’s parking lot aisle.
— Illustration
: When the angle
formed by your vehicle and
approaching vehicle is small
. The following conditions may re-
duce the ability of the radar to
detect other vehicles:
— Severe weather
— Road spray
— Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the
vehicle
. Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install ac-
cessories or apply additional
paint near the radar sensors.
These conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles
. Excessive noise (e.g. audio sys-
tem volume, open vehicle win-
dow) will interfere with the
chime sound, and it may not be
heard.
JVS0172X
Illustration 1
JVS0173X
Illustration 2
Starting and driving 5-81
5-82 Starting and driving
NOTE:
In the case of several vehicles ap-
proaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in
the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a
chime may not be sounded by the RCTA
system after the first vehicle passes the
sensors.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-
ABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the
system will be deactivated automatically.
The “Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction”
warning message will appear in the
vehicle information display.
The systems are not available until the
conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by
temporary ambient conditions such as
splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be
caused by objects such as ice, frost or
dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA and Intelligent Blind Spot Inter-
vention (I-BSI) (if so equipped) systems
will also stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer
exist, the system will resume automati-
cally.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it
will turn off automatically. The “Malfunc-
tion” warning message will appear in the
vehicle information display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA and I-BSI system will also stop
working.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn
the engine off and restart the engine. If
the message continues to appear, have
the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
WAF0414X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors for the RCTA
system are located near the rear bumper.
Always keep the area near the radar
sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by
temporary ambient conditions such as
splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be
caused by objects such as ice, frost or
dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstruct-
ing the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including trans-
parent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the radar
sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area
around the radar sensors is damaged
due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: LTQRN5TR
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS of the Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation
For Canada
Model: RN5TR
IC: 3659A-RN5TR
This device complies with Industry Ca-
nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
WAF0421X
1. RES+ switch
2. SET- switch
3. CANCEL switch
4. Cruise ON/OFF switch
For models with the ProPILOT Assist
system, see “Conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode” (P.5-119).
WARNING
. Always observe the posted speed
limits and do not set the speed
over them.
. Do not use the cruise control
when driving under the following
Starting and driving 5-83
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
5-84 Starting and driving
conditions. Doing so could cause
a loss of vehicle control and result
in an accident.
— When it is not possible to keep
the vehicle at a constant
speed
— When driving in heavy traffic
— When driving in traffic that
varies speed
— When driving in windy areas
— When driving on winding or
hilly roads
— When driving on slippery (rain,
snow, ice, etc.) roads
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON-
TROL
. If the cruise control system malfunc-
tions, it will cancel automatically. The
cruise indicator in the vehicle informa-
tion display will then blink to warn the
driver.
. If the cruise indicator blinks and “Un-
available: Cruise system trouble” mes-
sage appears in the display, turn the
Cruise ON/OFF switch off and have
the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
. The cruise indicator may blink when
the Cruise ON/OFF switch is turned
ON while pushing up the RES+, push-
ing down the SET-, or pushing the
CANCEL switch. To properly set the
cruise control system, perform the
following procedures.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at
speeds above 25 MPH (40 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
The cruise control will automatically be
canceled if the vehicle slows down more
than approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h)
below the vehicle set speed. (“Unavailable:
Under specified speed” message appears
in the display.)
Moving the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position will cancel the cruise control.
Turning on cruise control
Push the Cruise ON/OFF switch. The
cruise indicator and “Standby Push SET-
to active” message in the vehicle informa-
tion display will appear.
Setting cruising speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Push the SET- switch down or RES+
switch up and release it.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
The vehicle will maintain the set speed. (“+
/- Change Set speed” message appears in
the display.)
NOTE:
If pushed the RES+ switch and released
it when there is no vehicle set speed,
the set speed is set to the current
vehicle speed.
Passing another vehicle:
Depress the accelerator pedal to accel-
erate. After releasing the accelerator
pedal, the vehicle will return to the pre-
viously set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep hills.
In such cases, drive without the cruise
control.
Resetting to slower speed:
Use any one of the following methods to
reset to a slower speed.
. Lightly tap the foot brake pedal. When
the vehicle reaches the desired speed,
push down and release the SET-
switch.
. Push down and hold the SET- switch.
When the vehicle reaches the desired
speed, release the SET- switch.
. Quickly push down and release the
SET- switch. This will reduce the
vehicle speed by about 1 MPH (1.6
km/h).
Resetting to faster speed:
Use any one of the following methods to
reset to a faster speed.
. Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle reaches the desired speed,
push down and release the SET-
switch.
. Push up and hold the RES+ switch.
When the vehicle reaches the desired
speed, release the RES+ switch.
. Quickly push up and release the RES+
switch. This will increase the vehicle
speed by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
Resuming at preset speed:
Push up and release the RES+ switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set
cruising speed when the vehicle speed is
over 25 MPH (40 km/h). (“Resumed” mes-
sage appears in the display.)
Cancelling cruising speed
Use any one of the following methods to
cancel the vehicle set speed. (“Standby
Push RES+ to resume” message appears
in the display.)
. Push the CANCEL switch.
. Tap the foot brake pedal.
. Push the Cruise ON/OFF switch. The
cruise indicator will turn off.
This section contains the information
about the following system features:
. ProPILOT Assist (general system op-
eration)
. ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link (addi-
tional functionality, if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the
ProPILOT Assist system could result
in serious injury or death.
. ProPILOT Assist is not a self-driv-
ing system. Within the limits of its
capabilities, as described in this
manual, it helps the driver with
certain driving activities.
. The ProPILOT Assist system is not
a replacement for proper driving
procedures and is not designed
to correct careless, inattentive or
absent-minded driving. ProPILOT
Assist will not always steer the
vehicle to keep it in the lane. The
ProPILOT Assist system is not
designed to prevent loss of con-
trol. It is the driver’s responsibility
to stay alert, drive safely, keep
the vehicle in the traveling lane,
and be in control of the vehicle at
Starting and driving 5-85
PROPILOT ASSIST (if so equipped)
5-86 Starting and driving
all times.
. There are limitations to the Pro-
PILOT Assist system capability.
The ProPILOT Assist system does
not function in all driving, traffic,
weather, and road conditions. It is
the driver’s responsibility to stay
alert, drive safely, keep the vehi-
cle in the traveling lane, and be in
control of the vehicle at all times.
. The ProPILOT Assist system is
only an aid to assist the driver
and is not a collision warning or
avoidance device.
. The ProPILOT Assist system is for
highway use only and is not
intended for city driving. Failure
to apply the brakes or steer the
vehicle when necessary may re-
sult in a serious accident.
. Always observe posted speed
limits and do not set the speed
over them.
. Never take your hands off the
steering wheel when driving. Al-
ways keep your hands on the
steering wheel and drive your
vehicle safely.
. Never unfasten your safety belt
when using ProPILOT Assist.
Doing so automatically cancels
the ProPILOT Assist system.
. The ProPILOT Assist system does
not react when approaching sta-
tionary and slow moving vehicles.
. Always drive carefully and atten-
tively when using the ProPILOT
Assist system. Read and under-
stand the Owner’s Manual thor-
oughly before using the ProPILOT
Assist system. To avoid serious
injury or death, do not rely on the
system to prevent accidents or to
control the vehicle’s speed in
emergency situations. Do not
use the ProPILOT Assist system
except in appropriate road and
traffic conditions.
WAF0644X
The ProPILOT Assist system is intended to
enhance the operation of the vehicle
when following a vehicle traveling in the
same lane and direction.
The ProPILOT Assist system uses a multi-
sensing front camera
installed behind
the windshield to monitor the lane mar-
kers and a radar sensor
located on the
front of the vehicle to measure the
distance to the vehicle ahead in the same
lane. If the system detects a slower
moving vehicle ahead, the system will
reduce the vehicle speed so that your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the
selected distance. The system will also
help keep the vehicle centered in the
traveling lane when clear lane markings
are detected.
NOTE:
It is important to ensure the front
camera and radar sensors are clear at
all times. (See “ICC sensor maintenance”
(P.5-112) and “Steering Assist mainte-
nance” (P.5-118) for more details.)
WAF0557X
Steering-wheel-mounted control (left)
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted control (right)
ProPILOT Assist switch
Steering Assist switch
PROPILOT ASSIST SYSTEM OPERA-
TION
The ProPILOT Assist system has the
following two functions:
Starting and driving 5-87
5-88 Starting and driving
1. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
The ICC system can be set to one of two
cruise control modes:
. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-
trol mode:
For cruising at a preset vehicle speed
For additional information, see “Turning
the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode ON” (P.5-92).
NOTE:
Steering Assist is not available in the
conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-
trol mode.
. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode:
The ICC system maintains a selected
distance from the vehicle in front of
you within the speed range of 0 to 90
MPH (0 to 144 km/h) up to the vehicle
set speed. The vehicle set speed can
be selected by the driver between 20
to 90 MPH (30 to 144 km/h). When the
vehicle ahead slows to a stop, your
vehicle gradually decelerates to a
standstill. When the vehicle is stopped,
the ICC system maintains braking
force to keep your vehicle stopped.
. When your vehicle is stopped for less
than approximately 3 seconds and the
vehicle ahead begins to move, your
vehicle will start moving again auto-
matically.
. When your vehicle is at a standstill for
more than approximately 3 seconds
and the vehicle ahead begins to
accelerate, push up the RES+ switch
or lightly depress the accelerator ped-
al. The ICC system starts to follow the
vehicle ahead.
. Always check surroundings before
restarting the vehicle.
. For vehicles equipped with ProPILOT
Assist with Navi-link and only when on
a limited access freeway (as identified
in the navigation map data):
— The time the vehicle can remain
stopped and automatically restart
is extended from 3 seconds to 30
seconds.
— If a vehicle ahead cuts in or out of
the lane ahead, the vehicle may not
automatically start when the traffic
ahead begins to move. You need to
push up the RES+ switch or lightly
depress the accelerator pedal to
follow the vehicle directly ahead
when it is safe to do so.
. When no vehicle is detected ahead
within the driver selected distance, the
vehicle travels at the speed set by the
driver. The speed must be above 20
MPH (30 km/h) to use this function.
NOTE:
Even if the Automatic Emergency Brak-
ing (AEB) setting is turned off by the
driver using the “Settings” menu in the
vehicle information display, AEB will be
automatically turned on when ICC is
used.
2. Steering Assist
The Steering Assist function helps the
driver to keep the vehicle centered within
the traveling lane.
When there is no vehicle ahead, Steering
Assist is not available at speeds under 37
MPH (60 km/h).
WAF0422X
PROPILOT ASSIST SWITCHES
1. RES+ switch:
Resumes vehicle set speed or in-
creases speed incrementally
2. SET- switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
speed incrementally
3. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the ProPILOT Assist sys-
tem
4. ProPILOT Assist switch:
Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on
or off
5. DISTANCE switch:
.
Long
.
Middle
.
Short
6. Steering Assist switch:
Turns the Steering Assist function on
or off
NOTE:
For ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link
equipped vehicles: When Manual mode
is selected in the “Spd. Limit Assist”
menu, operating the RES+ or SET-
switch can apply the indicated speed
limit to the vehicle set speed. (See
“Speed Limit Assist - a feature of ProPI-
LOT Assist with Navi-link” (P.5-103).)
Starting and driving 5-89
5-90 Starting and driving
WAF0577X
Models with full-screen display
WAF0578X
Models with analog meter and color display
PROPILOT ASSIST SYSTEM DISPLAY
AND INDICATORS
1. ProPILOT Assist activation
Displays once the ProPILOT Assist
system is activated
2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
Indicates whether the system detects
a vehicle in front of you
3. Steering Assist indicator
Indicates the status of the Steering
Assist function by the color of the
indicator
.
Steering Assist indicator (gray):
Steering Assist standby
.
Steering Assist indicator (green):
Steering Assist active
4. Set distance indicator
Displays the selected distance
5. Lane marker indicator
Indicates whether the system detects
lane markers
.
No lane markers displayed: Steering
Assist is turned off
.
Lane marker indicator (gray): No
lane markers detected
.
Lane marker indicator (green): Lane
markers detected, Steering Assist is
active
.
Lane marker indicator (orange):
Lane departure is detected
6. ProPILOT Assist status indicator
(
)
Indicates the status of the ProPILOT
Assist system by the color of the
indicator
.
ProPILOT Assist status indicator
(white): ProPILOT Assist is on but
in standby
.
ProPILOT Assist status indicator
(blue): ProPILOT Assist active
7. Steering Assist status indicator/
warning (
, )
Displays the status of the Steering
Assist by the color of the indicator/
warning
.
No Steering Assist status indicator
displayed: Steering Assist is turned
off
.
Steering Assist status indicator
(gray): Steering Assist standby
.
Steering Assist status indicator
(green): Steering Assist active
.
Steering Assist status indicator (or-
ange): Steering Assist malfunction
8. Speed control status indicator/set
distance indicator/lane marker indi-
cator (
)
Displays the status of speed control by
the color of the indicator, and displays
the selected distance by the number
of horizontal bars shown
.
Speed control status indicator
(white): ICC standby
.
Speed control status indicator
(green): ICC (distance control mode)
is active
— Green vehicle icon displayed: Vehi-
cle detected ahead
— No vehicle icon shown: No vehicle
detected ahead (Your vehicle main-
tains the driver-selected set speed.)
.
Speed control status indicator (or-
ange): Indicates an ICC malfunction
For the lane marker indicator, see
“Steering Assist display and indicators”
(P.5-115).
9. Vehicle set speed indicator
Indicates the vehicle set speed
10. Vehicle set speed indicator (if so
equipped) (
)
Indicates the vehicle set speed
11. Road information indicator (if so
equipped) (
, )
Indicates the detected road informa-
tion
For additional information, see “Speed
Adjust by Route - a feature of ProPI-
LOT Assist with Navi-link” (P.5-106).
12. Detected speed limit indicator (if so
equipped) (
)
Indicates the currently detected
speed limit
For additional information, see “Speed
Limit Assist - a feature of ProPILOT
Assist with Navi-link” (P.5-103).
13. Speed Limit Assist indicator (if so
equipped) (A,
, )
Indicates the Speed Limit Assist acti-
vation mode or system operation
For additional information, see “Speed
Limit Assist - a feature of ProPILOT
Assist with Navi-link” (P.5-103).
NOTE:
When the ProPILOT Assist system is
activated, the display will automatically
be switched to the ProPILOT Assist
system display. To disable this function,
turn “Transition (Cruise)” off under “Cus-
tomize Display” of the settings menu.
The ProPILOT Assist display is also shown
in the Head Up Display (HUD) (if so
equipped). (See “Head Up Display (HUD)”
(P.2-49).)
Starting and driving 5-91
5-92 Starting and driving
TURNING THE CONVENTIONAL
(fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL
MODE ON
NOTE:
ProPILOT Assist provides no approach
warnings, automatic braking, or Steer-
ing Assist in the conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode.
To choose the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the
ProPILOT Assist switch for longer than
approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional
information, see “Conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode” (P.5-119).
WAF0423X
Example
OPERATING PROPILOT ASSIST
1. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch .
This turns on the ProPILOT Assist
system.
.
The ProPILOT Assist status indica-
tor
illuminates in white.
.
A screen is displayed for a period of
time that indicates the status of the
Driving Aid functions.
WAF0585X
Example (all enabled)
When the Driving Aids are enabled:
Zone Driving Aid
Display
Forward
Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) with Pe-
destrian Detection
Outline
Intelligent Forward
Collision Warning (I-
FCW)
Lane
Lane Departure Warn-
ing (LDW)
Outline
Intelligent Lane Inter-
vention (I-LI)
Shaded
Blind
Spot
Blind Spot Warning
(BSW)
Outline
Intelligent Blind Spot
Intervention (I-BSI)
Shaded
.
When any of the “Warning” systems
are enabled, the “
” mark is
shown in each zone.
.
When any of the “Intervention” sys-
tems are enabled, the “
” mark is
shown in each zone.
.
When no system is enabled, “OFF” is
shown in each zone.
WAF0560X
To change the status of the Driving
Aids, use
or to navigate the
settings screen. For additional infor-
mation, see “How to use the vehicle
information display” (P.2-23).
2. Accelerate or decelerate your vehicle
to the desired speed and push down
the SET- switch
.
The ProPILOT Assist system begins to
automatically maintain the vehicle set
speed. The ProPILOT Assist activation
indicator
and ProPILOT Assist status
indicator
illuminate in blue. When a
vehicle ahead is detected and travel-
ing at a speed of 20 MPH (30 km/h) or
below and the SET- switch is pushed
Starting and driving 5-93
5-94 Starting and driving
down, the vehicle set speed is 20 MPH
(30 km/h).
NOTE:
When the I-LI and I-BSI systems are
enabled in the settings menu of the
vehicle information display, turning the
ProPILOT Assist system on will turn on
the I-LI and I-BSI systems at the same
time. If the I-LI system is disabled in the
settings menu, the I-LI system will
automatically be turned on when the
Steering Assist system is active. For
additional information, see “Intelligent
Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-52), “Intelli-
gent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-115)
and “Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention
(I-BSI)” (P.5-66).
WAF0634X
When the SET- switch is pushed down
under the following conditions, the Pro-
PILOT Assist system cannot be set and
the vehicle set speed indicator
blinks
for approximately 2 seconds:
. When traveling below 20 MPH (30
km/h) and a vehicle ahead is not
detected
. When the shift lever is moved out of
the D (Drive) position or into the
manual shift mode
. When the parking brake is applied
. When the brakes are operated by the
driver
. When the VDC system is off. For
additional information, see “Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-
157).
. When the VDC system (including the
traction control system) is activated
. When the SNOW mode or OFF-ROAD
mode is selected (AWD models)
. When a wheel is slipping
. When any door is open
. When the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened
WAF0561X
How to change the vehicle set
speed
The vehicle set speed can be adjusted.
To change to a faster cruising speed:
. Push up and hold the RES+ switch
.
The vehicle set speed increases in
increments of 5 MPH (5 km/h).
. Push up, then quickly release the RES+
switch
. Each time you do this, the
vehicle set speed increases by 1 MPH (1
km/h).
To change to a slower cruising speed:
. Push down and hold the SET- switch
. The vehicle set speed decreases in
increments of 5 MPH (5 km/h).
. Push down, then quickly release the
SET- switch
. Each time you do this,
the vehicle set speed decreases by 1
MPH (1 km/h).
For ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link
equipped vehicles: The vehicle set speed
can also be changed according to the
speed limit. (See “Speed Limit Assist - a
feature of ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link”
(P.5-103).)
How to momentarily accelerate or
decelerate
. Depress the accelerator pedal when
acceleration is required. Release the
accelerator pedal to resume the pre-
viously set vehicle speed.
. Depress the brake pedal when decel-
eration is required. Control by the
ProPILOT Assist system is canceled.
Push up the RES+ switch to resume
the previously set vehicle speed.
WARNING
When the accelerator pedal is de-
pressed and you are approaching
the vehicle ahead, the ICC system
will neither control the brake nor
warn the driver with the chime and
display. The driver must manually
control the vehicle speed to maintain
a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
Failure to do so could result in severe
personal injury or death.
NOTE:
When you accelerate by depressing the
accelerator pedal or decelerate by
pushing down the SET- switch and the
vehicle travels faster than the speed set
by the driver, the vehicle set speed
indicator will blink.
Starting and driving 5-95
5-96 Starting and driving
WAF0424X
How to change the set distance to
the vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be
selected at any time.
Each time the DISTANCE switch
is
pushed, the set distance will change to
“long”, “middle”, “short” and back to “long”
again in that sequence.
WAF0645X
Example
Distance — approximate distance at 60
MPH (100 km/h)
1. Long – 200 ft (60 m)
2. Middle – 150 ft (45 m)
3. Short – 90 ft (30 m)
. The actual distance to the vehicle
ahead adjusts automatically accord-
ing to the vehicle speed. The higher
the vehicle speed, the longer the
distance.
. The distance setting will remain at the
current setting even if the engine is
restarted.
WAF0425X
Steering-wheel-mounted control (left)
Vehicle information display
Steering Assist switch
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
STEERING ASSIST
Use the following methods to enable or
disable the Steering Assist.
Steering Assist switch:
To turn the Steering Assist on or off, push
the Steering Assist switch
on the
instrument panel.
NOTE:
. When the Steering Assist switch is
used to turn the system on or off,
the system remembers the setting
even if the ignition switch is cycled.
The switch must be pushed again to
change the setting to on or off.
. The Steering Assist switch changes
the status of the “Steering Assist”
selection made in the “Settings”
screen in the vehicle information
display.
Setting in the vehicle information dis-
play:
1. Push the
button on the
steering wheel
until “Settings” ap-
pears in the vehicle information dis-
play
and then push the scroll dial.
2. Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance.” Then push the scroll dial.
3. Select “Steering Assist” and push the
scroll dial to turn the Steering Assist
on or off.
Starting and driving 5-97
5-98 Starting and driving
NOTE:
. When the Cruise screen is displayed
on the vehicle information display,
push the scroll dial on the steering
wheel to call up the “Driver Assis-
tance” setting display.
. When enabling/disabling the system
through the vehicle information dis-
play, the system retains the current
settings even if the engine is re-
started.
HOW TO CANCEL THE PROPILOT
ASSIST SYSTEM
To cancel the ProPILOT Assist system, use
one of the following methods:
. Push the CANCEL switch.
. Tap the brake pedal (except at a
standstill).
. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to
turn the system off. The ProPILOT
Assist status indicator will turn off.
When the ProPILOT Assist system is
canceled while the vehicle is stopped,
the electronic parking brake is automati-
cally activated.
WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from moving
or rolling unexpectedly, which could
result in serious personal injury or
property damage, before exiting the
vehicle make sure to push the Pro-
PILOT Assist switch to turn the sys-
tem off, push the park button to shift
to the P (Park) position, and turn the
engine off.
INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL
(ICC)
. The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) is a
part of the ProPILOT Assist system. To
choose the ICC system without the
Steering Assist, activate the ProPILOT
Assist and then turn off the Steering
Assist with the switch or in the set-
tings menu. For additional informa-
tion, see “Operating ProPILOT Assist”
(P.5-92) and “How to enable/disable
the Steering Assist” (P.5-97).
. To choose the conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode, push and
hold the ProPILOT Assist switch for
longer than approximately 1.5 sec-
onds. For additional information, see
“Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode” (P.5-119).
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the ICC
system could result in serious injury
or death.
. The ICC system is only an aid to
assist the driver and is not a
collision warning or avoidance
device. It is recommended for
highway use only and it is not
intended for city driving. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay
alert, drive safely, and be in con-
trol of the vehicle at all times.
. There are limitations to the ICC
system capability. The ICC system
does not function in all driving,
traffic, weather, and road condi-
tions. It is the driver’s responsi-
bility to stay alert, drive safely,
keep the vehicle in the traveling
lane, and be in control of the
vehicle at all times.
. Always observe posted speed
limits and do not set the speed
over them.
. The ICC system does not react to
stationary and slow moving vehi-
cles.
. Always drive carefully and atten-
tively when using the ICC system.
Read and understand the Owner’s
Manual thoroughly before using
the ICC system. To avoid serious
injury or death, do not rely on the
system to prevent accidents or to
control the vehicle’s speed in
emergency situations. Do not
use the ICC system except in
appropriate road and traffic con-
ditions.
ICC system operation
The ICC system is designed to maintain a
selected distance from the vehicle in front
of you and can reduce the speed to
match a slower vehicle ahead. The sys-
tem decelerates the vehicle as necessary
and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,
the vehicle decelerates to a standstill.
However, the ICC system can only apply
up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking
power.
This system should only be used when
traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to
remain fairly constant or when vehicle
speeds change gradually. If a vehicle
moves into the traveling lane ahead or if
a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decele-
rates, the distance between vehicles may
become closer because the ICC system
cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly
enough. If this occurs, the ICC system
sounds a warning chime and blinks the
system display to notify the driver to take
necessary action.
The ICC system cancels and a warning
chime sounds if the speed is below
approximately 15 MPH (25 km/h) and a
vehicle is not detected ahead. For ProPI-
LOT Assist with Navi-link equipped vehi-
cles on a limited access freeway as
identified in the navigation map data,
the ICC system cancels and a warning
chime sounds if your vehicle is at a
standstill for more than approximately 3
seconds and a vehicle is not detected
ahead.
The ICC system operates as follows:
. When there are no vehicles traveling
ahead, the ICC system maintains the
speed set by the driver. The vehicle set
speed range is between approxi-
mately 20 and 90 MPH (30 and 144
km/h).
. When there is a vehicle traveling
ahead, the ICC system adjusts the
speed to maintain the distance, se-
lected by the driver, from the vehicle
ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a
stop, the vehicle decelerates to a
standstill. Once your vehicle stops,
the ICC system keeps the vehicle
stopped.
. When the vehicle traveling ahead
moves to a different traveling lane,
the ICC system accelerates and main-
tains vehicle speed up to the set
speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach
stationary and slow moving vehicles. You
must pay attention to vehicle operation
to maintain proper distance from vehicles
ahead when approaching toll gates or
traffic congestion.
Starting and driving 5-99
5-100 Starting and driving
SSD0254
When driving on the highway at a vehicle
set speed and approaching a slower
traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system
adjusts the speed to maintain the dis-
tance, selected by the driver, from the
vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead
changes lanes or exits the highway, the
ICC system accelerates and maintains the
vehicle set speed. Pay attention to the
driving operation to maintain control of
the vehicle as it accelerates to the set
speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed on winding or hilly roads. If this
occurs, you will have to manually control
the vehicle speed.
Normally when controlling the distance to
a vehicle ahead, the system automatically
accelerates or decelerates your vehicle
according to the speed of the vehicle
ahead.
Depress the accelerator to properly ac-
celerate your vehicle when acceleration is
required for a lane change. Depress the
brake pedal when deceleration is required
to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle
ahead due to sudden braking or if a
vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when
using the ICC system.
WAF0579X
System set display — no vehicle detected ahead*
No vehicle detected ahead:
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed
based on the road conditions. The ICC
system maintains the vehicle set speed,
similar to standard cruise control, as long
as no vehicle is detected in the lane
ahead. The ICC system displays the vehi-
cle set speed.
*: The design of the set display may differ
depending on the model.
WAF0580X
System set display — vehicle ahead*
Vehicle detected ahead:
When a vehicle is detected in the lane
ahead, the ICC system decelerates the
vehicle by controlling the throttle and
applying the brakes to match the speed
of a slower vehicle ahead. The ICC system
then adjusts the vehicle speed based on
the speed of the vehicle ahead to main-
tain the driver selected distance.
NOTE:
. The stop lights of the vehicle come
on when braking is performed by
the ICC system.
. When the brake is applied by the
system, a noise may be heard. This is
not a malfunction.
When the ICC system detects a vehicle
ahead, the vehicle ahead detection indi-
cator and the speed control status in-
dicator (distance control mode)
illuminates in green.
*: The design of the set display may differ
depending on the model.
Vehicle ahead stops:
When a vehicle ahead is detected and it
gradually decelerates to stop, your vehi-
cle decelerates to a standstill. When your
vehicle is at a standstill, the “(RES+) Follow
Vehicle Ahead” message is displayed on
the vehicle information display.
Vehicle ahead accelerates:
. When your vehicle is stopped for less
than approximately 3 seconds and the
vehicle ahead begins to move, your
vehicle will start moving again auto-
matically.
. When your vehicle is at a standstill for
more than approximately 3 seconds
and the vehicle ahead begins to
accelerate, push up the RES+ switch
or lightly depress the accelerator ped-
al. The ICC system starts to follow the
vehicle ahead.
. Always check surroundings before
restarting the vehicle.
. For vehicles equipped with ProPILOT
Assist with Navi-link and only when on
a limited access freeway (as identified
in the navigation map data):
— The time the vehicle can remain
stopped and automatically restart
is extended from 3 seconds to 30
seconds.
— If a vehicle ahead cuts in or out of
the lane ahead, the vehicle may not
automatically start when the traffic
ahead begins to move. You need to
push up the RES+ switch or lightly
depress the accelerator pedal to
follow the vehicle directly ahead
when it is safe to do so.
Vehicle ahead not detected:
When a vehicle is no longer detected
ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-
ates your vehicle to resume the pre-
viously vehicle set speed. The ICC
system then maintains the vehicle set
speed.
When a vehicle is no longer detected, the
vehicle ahead detection indicator and
speed control status indicator (maintain
speed control mode) turn off.
The ICC system gradually accelerates to
the vehicle set speed, but you can de-
press the accelerator pedal to quickly
accelerate. When a vehicle is no longer
Starting and driving 5-101
5-102 Starting and driving
detected and your vehicle is traveling
under approximately 15 MPH (25 km/h),
the ICC system automatically cancels. For
ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link equipped
vehicles on a limited access freeway as
identified in the navigation map data, the
ICC system cancels and a warning chime
sounds if your vehicle is at a standstill for
more than approximately 3 seconds and
a vehicle is not detected ahead.
WAF0581X
When passing another vehicle, the vehicle
set speed indicator
flashes when the
vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The
vehicle ahead detection indicator turns
off when the area ahead of the vehicle is
open. When the pedal is released, the
vehicle returns to the previously set
speed. Even though your vehicle speed
is set in the ICC system, you can depress
the accelerator pedal when it is necessary
to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.
Cut-in detection
If a vehicle moves into your traveling lane
near your vehicle, the ICC system may
inform the driver by flashing the vehicle
ahead detection indicator.
Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that
vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the
system warns the driver with the chime
and ICC system display. Decelerate by
depressing the brake pedal to maintain a
safe vehicle distance if:
. The chime sounds.
. The vehicle ahead detection indicator
and set distance indicator blink.
. You judge it necessary to maintain a
safe distance.
The warning chime may not sound in
some cases when there is a short dis-
tance between vehicles. Some examples
are:
. When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance be-
tween vehicles is not changing.
. When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between ve-
hicles is increasing.
. When a vehicle cuts in near your
vehicle.
The warning chime will not sound when:
. Your vehicle approaches other vehi-
cles that are parked or moving slowly.
. The accelerator pedal is depressed,
overriding the system.
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may
sound and the system display may
flash when the radar sensor detects
objects on the side of the vehicle or on
the side of the road. This may cause the
ICC system to decelerate or accelerate
the vehicle. The radar sensor may de-
tect these objects when the vehicle is
driven on winding, narrow, or hilly roads
or when the vehicle is entering or
exiting a curve. In these cases, you will
have to manually control the proper
distance ahead of your vehicle.
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af-
fected by vehicle operation (steering
maneuver or driving position in the
lane) or traffic or vehicle conditions
(for example, if a vehicle is being driven
with some damage).
Acceleration when passing
When the ICC system is engaged above
44 MPH (70 km/h) and following a slower
vehicle (below the vehicle set speed), and
the turn signal is activated to the left, the
ICC system will automatically start to
accelerate the vehicle to help initiate
passing on the left and will begin to
reduce the distance to vehicle directly
ahead. Only the left side turn signal
operates this feature. As the driver steers
the vehicle and moves into the passing
lane, if no vehicle is detected ahead the
ICC system will continue to accelerate to
the vehicle set speed. If another vehicle is
detected ahead, then the vehicle will
accelerate up to the following speed of
that vehicle. If the vehicle is not steered
into the left lane to pass, the acceleration
will stop after a short time and regain the
set following distance. Acceleration can
be stopped at any point by depressing
the brake pedal or the CANCEL switch on
the steering wheel.
WARNING
In order to reduce the risk of a
collision that may result in serious
injury or death, please be aware of
the following:
. This function is only activated
with the left turn signal and will
briefly accelerate the vehicle even
if a lane change is not initiated.
This can include non-passing si-
tuations such as left side exits.
. Ensure that when passing an-
other vehicle, the adjacent lane
is clear before initiating the pass.
Sudden changes in traffic may
occur while passing. Always
manually steer or brake as
needed. Never solely rely on the
system.
Speed Limit Assist - a feature of
ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link (if so
equipped)
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the Speed Limit Assist. Fail-
ure to operate the vehicle in
accordance with these system lim-
itations could result in serious injury
or death:
. It is the driver’s responsibility to
select the proper speed, follow all
traffic regulations and observe
Starting and driving 5-103
5-104 Starting and driving
other road users.
. The Speed Limit Assist may not
operate properly and the actual
speed limit may not be applied to
the vehicle set speed in all condi-
tions. The driver must manually
control the vehicle speed.
Below are some examples:
— When the Traffic Sign Recog-
nition (TSR) system is not
functioning properly or turned
off. (See “Traffic Sign Recogni-
tion (TSR)” (P.5-44).)
— When driving in countries or
areas not covered by the na-
vigation system.
— When crossing national
boundaries.
— When driving on the exit of the
limited access freeway as
identified in the navigation
map data.
— When driving in an area with
nearby parallel roads (for ex-
ample, freeway with a parallel
service drive).
— When driving in an area where
each lane has a different
speed limit sign.
— When driving on a road under
construction or in a construc-
tion zone.
— When the data from the navi-
gation system is not up-to-
date or is unavailable.
When the ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link is
active and it detects a change of the
speed limit, the new speed limit is indi-
cated and it can be applied to the vehicle
set speed automatically or manually.
The Speed Limit Assist operates:
. When the detected speed limit is 20
MPH (30 km/h) and above.
. The “Spd. Limit Assist” is enabled in the
settings menu of the vehicle informa-
tion display.
NOTE:
. While the accelerator pedal is oper-
ated with AUTO mode selected, the
Speed Limit Assist will function
(automatically adjust the vehicle set
speed) only when the detected
speed limit is faster than the vehicle
set speed.
. In the following situations, the
Speed Limit Assist will not operate:
— When an increase in the posted
speed limit is detected, but the
vehicle set speed is already faster
than the new speed limit.
— When a decrease in the posted
speed limit is detected, but the
vehicle set speed is already lower
than the new speed limit.
WAF0582X
Example
System display and indicators:
1. Detected speed limit indicator
Displays the currently detected speed
limit. For additional information, see
“Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)” (P.5-
44).
2. Applied speed limit indicator (green
frame)
Indicates the detected speed limit can
be applied to the vehicle set speed.
3. Speed Limit Assist indicator
Indicates the system activation mode
or system operation.
“
” : Manual mode is activated and a
new speed limit (faster speed value) is
indicated.
“
” : Manual mode is activated and a
new speed limit (lower speed value) is
indicated.
“A” : Auto mode is activated.
Operating the system:
When the system detects a different
speed limit, the new speed value is
indicated. The vehicle set speed can be
changed to the indicated speed limit
automatically or manually.
When Manual mode is selected on set-
tings menu (factory default setting):
. To accept the newly indicated speed
limit, operate the RES+ switch (in case
of speed limit up) or SET- switch (in
case of speed limit down).
. The Speed Limit Assist indicator (
or
) will turn off after approxi-
mately 10 seconds if the RES+ or SET-
switch is not operated. (The Speed
Limit Assist indicator can be turned off
immediately by operating the oppo-
site switch from the direction indi-
cated by the Speed Limit Assist
indicator.)
The system will not activate if a speed
limit change is not detected.
When Auto mode is selected on the
settings menu:
. The indicated speed limit is applied to
the vehicle set speed automatically
when on a limited access freeway as
identified in the navigation map data.
Also, if the ProPILOT Assist with Navi-
link system is ON, but not set (active),
and a new speed limit is detected, the
vehicle set speed is automatically
updated.
. The Auto mode may not be available
in some regions or on roads other
than limited access freeways. In this
case, the system operates as the
Manual mode.
NOTE:
Auto mode will not function in Hawaii or
US island territories.
How to activate or deactivate the sys-
tem:
1. Push the button on the
steering wheel until “Settings” appears
in the vehicle information display, and
push the scroll dial.
2. Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance”. Then push the scroll dial.
3. Select “Spd. Limit Assist”, and push the
scroll dial to select “Auto” or “Manual”
to enable (not activate) the system.
Starting and driving 5-105
5-106 Starting and driving
To deactivate the system, select “OFF”.
NOTE:
The system will retain current settings
in the vehicle information display even
if the engine is restarted.
Speed Adjust by Route - a feature
of ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link (if
so equipped)
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the Speed Adjust by Route.
Failure to operate the vehicle in
accordance with these system lim-
itations could result in serious injury
or death:
. There are limitations to the Speed
Adjust by Route system capabil-
ity. The system does not function
in all driving, traffic, weather and
road conditions. It is the driver’s
responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely, and be in control of the
vehicle at all times.
. The Speed Adjust by Route sys-
tem does not brake the vehicle to
a stop. Whenever necessary, the
driver must apply appropriate
braking.
. It is the driver’s responsibility to
select the proper speed, follow all
traffic regulations and observe
other road users.
. The Speed Adjust by Route sys-
tem will not function in Hawaii or
US island territories.
. The Speed Adjust by Route may
not operate properly in some
road and traffic conditions, the
system may unexpectedly
change the speed. The driver
must manually control the vehicle
speed.
Below are some examples:
— When the data from the navi-
gation system is not up-to-
date or is unavailable.
— When not driving along the
route suggested by the navi-
gation system.
— When the navigation system is
recalculating the route.
— When driving in countries or
areas not covered by the na-
vigation system.
— When driving on a road under
construction or newly con-
structed road.
— When driving near a road split
or junction.
— When driving in bad weather
or poor road conditions.
When the ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link is
active on a limited access freeway (as
identified in the navigation map data), the
Speed Adjust by Route uses road infor-
mation provided by the navigation sys-
tem and can adjust the vehicle speed
depending on curves, junctions and exits.
The system may not always reduce speed
for all curves, junctions or exits and the
driver may need to apply additional brak-
ing at any time.
When the vehicle is through the curve or
junction, the vehicle will accelerate again
to the set speed. When exiting the limited
access freeway, the driver will need to
apply braking at the end of the exit.
NOTE:
. The system does not operate when
the accelerator pedal is depressed.
. The system may not operate de-
pending on the set distance to the
vehicle ahead and vehicles detected
ahead.
WAF0583X
Example
System display and indicators:
1. Road information indicator
Appears when the system adjusts the
speed depending on turns or exits.
Curves and junctions
Exits
How to activate or deactivate the sys-
tem:
1. Push the
button on the
steering wheel until “Settings” appears
in the vehicle information display, and
push the scroll dial.
2. Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance”. Then push the scroll dial.
3. Select “Speed Adjust by Route” and
push the scroll dial to turn the system
on or off.
NOTE:
The system will retain current settings
in the vehicle information display even
if the engine is restarted.
ICC system limitations
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the ICC system. Failure to
operate the vehicle in accordance
with these system limitations could
result in serious injury or death:
. The ICC system is primarily in-
tended for use on highways and
freeways. It is not advisable to
use the ICC system in city/urban
traffic.
. The ICC system will not adapt
automatically to road conditions.
This system should be used in
evenly flowing traffic. Do not use
the system on roads with sharp
curves or on icy roads, in heavy
rain or in fog.
. As there is a performance limit to
the distance control function,
never rely solely on the ICC sys-
tem. This system does not correct
careless, inattentive or absent-
minded driving or overcome poor
visibility in rain, fog, or other bad
weather. Decelerate the vehicle
speed by depressing the brake
pedal, depending on the distance
to the vehicle ahead and the
surrounding circumstances in or-
der to maintain a safe distance
between vehicles.
. When the ICC system automati-
cally brings the vehicle to a stop,
your vehicle can automatically
accelerate if the vehicle is
stopped for less than approxi-
mately 3 seconds. Be prepared
to stop your vehicle if necessary.
. For vehicles equipped with ProPI-
LOT Assist with Navi-link and only
when on a limited access freeway
(as identified in the navigation
Starting and driving 5-107
5-108 Starting and driving
map data):
— The time the vehicle can re-
main stopped and automati-
cally restart is extended from
3 seconds to 30 seconds.
— If a vehicle ahead cuts in or
out of the lane ahead, the
vehicle may not automatically
start when the traffic ahead
begins to move. You need to
push up the RES+ switch or
lightly depress the accelerator
pedal to follow the vehicle
directly ahead when it is safe
to do so.
. Always check surroundings be-
fore restarting the vehicle.
. Always pay attention to the op-
eration of the vehicle and be
ready to manually control the
proper following distance. The
ICC system may not be able to
maintain the selected distance
between vehicles (following dis-
tance) or selected vehicle speed
under some circumstances.
. The ICC system does not detect
the following objects:
— Stationary or slow moving ve-
hicles (when your vehicle is
approaching them)
— Pedestrians or objects in the
roadway
— Oncoming vehicles in the
same lane
— Motorcycles traveling offset in
the travel lane
. The ICC system may not detect a
vehicle ahead in certain road,
weather or driving conditions. To
avoid accidents, never use the ICC
system under the following con-
ditions:
— On roads with heavy, high-
speed traffic or sharp curves
— On slippery road surfaces
such as on ice or snow, etc.
— On a bumpy road surface,
such as an uneven dirt road
— On steep downhill roads (the
vehicle may go beyond the
vehicle set speed and fre-
quent braking may result in
overheating the brakes)
— On repeated uphill and down-
hill roads
— During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.)
— When the sensor detection is
reduced (conditions such as
rain, snow, fog, dust storms,
sandstorms, and road spray
from other vehicles)
— When dirt, ice, snow or other
material adhere to the radar
sensor area
— When traffic conditions make
it difficult to keep a proper
distance between vehicles be-
cause of frequent accelera-
tion or deceleration
— When a complicated-shaped
vehicle such as a car carrier
trailer or flatbed truck/trailer
is near the vehicle ahead
— When there is interference by
other radar sources
— When excessively heavy bag-
gage is loaded in the rear seat
or cargo area of your vehicle
— When towing a trailer or other
vehicle
. In some road or traffic conditions,
a vehicle or object can unexpect-
edly come into the sensor detec-
tion zone and cause automatic
braking. Always stay alert and
avoid using the ICC system where
not recommended in this warn-
ing section.
. The ICC system also uses a multi-
sensing front camera. The follow-
ing are some conditions in which
the camera may not properly
detect a vehicle and detection of
a vehicle ahead may be delayed:
— Poor visibility (conditions such
as rain, snow, fog, dust
storms, sandstorms, and road
spray from other vehicles)
— The camera area of the wind-
shield is fogged up or covered
with dirt, water drops, ice,
snow, etc.
— Strong light (for example, sun-
light or high beams from on-
coming vehicles) enters the
front camera
— A sudden change in bright-
ness occurs (for example,
when the vehicle enters or
exits a tunnel or shaded area
or lightning flashes)
The ICC system is designed to automati-
cally check the radar sensor’s operation
within the limitations of the system
The detection zone of the radar sensor is
limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the
detection zone for the ICC system to
maintain the selected distance from the
vehicle ahead. A vehicle ahead may move
outside of the detection zone due to its
position within the same lane of travel.
Motorcycles may not be detected in the
same lane ahead if they are traveling
offset from the center line of the lane. A
vehicle that is entering the lane ahead
may not be detected until the vehicle has
completely moved into the lane.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn
you by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime. The driver may have
to manually control the proper distance
away from the vehicle traveling ahead.
Starting and driving 5-109
5-110 Starting and driving
SSD0252
SSD0253
When driving on some roads, such as
winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or
roads which are under construction, the
radar sensor may detect vehicles in a
different lane, or may temporarily not
detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This
may cause the ICC system to decelerate
or accelerate the vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be
affected by vehicle operation (steering
maneuver or traveling position in the
lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn
you by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime unexpectedly. You
will have to manually control the proper
distance away from the vehicle traveling
ahead.
ICC system temporarily unavailable
The following are conditions in which the
ICC system may be temporarily unavail-
able. In these instances, the ICC system
may not cancel and may not be able to
maintain the selected following distance
from the vehicle ahead.
Condition A:
Under the following conditions, the ICC
system is automatically canceled. A chime
will sound and the system will not be able
to be set:
. Any door is open.
. The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
. The vehicle ahead is not detected and
your vehicle is traveling below the
speed of 15 MPH (25 km/h). For
ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link
equipped vehicles on a limited access
freeway as identified in the navigation
map data, the ICC system cancels and
a warning chime sounds if your vehi-
cle is at a standstill for more than
approximately 3 seconds and a vehi-
cle is not detected ahead.
. Your vehicle has been stopped by the
ICC system for approximately 3 min-
utes or longer.
. The shift lever is moved out of the D
(Drive) position or into the manual
shift mode.
. The electronic parking brake is ap-
plied.
. The VDC system is turned off.
. The AEB applies harder braking
. VDC (including the traction control
system) operates.
. The SNOW mode or OFF-ROAD mode
is selected (AWD models).
. A wheel slips.
. When the front radar is impaired due
to dirt or an other obstruction block-
ing the radar sensor.
. When the radar signal is temporarily
interrupted.
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, turn the system off using
the ProPILOT Assist switch. Turn the
ProPILOT Assist system back on to use
the system.
NOTE:
When the ICC system is canceled under
any of the following conditions at a
standstill, the electronic parking brake
is automatically activated:
. Any door is open.
. The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
. Your vehicle has been stopped by
the ICC system for approximately 3
minutes or longer.
. The shift lever is moved out of the D
(Drive) position or into the manual
shift mode.
. The VDC system is turned off.
. When the front radar is impaired due
to dirt or an other obstruction block-
ing the radar sensor.
. When the radar signal is temporarily
interrupted.
Condition B:
When there is inclement weather (rain,
fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar
sensor, the ICC system will automatically
be canceled, the chime will sound and the
“Forward Driving Aids temporarily dis-
abled Front Sensor blocked” warning
message will appear in the vehicle infor-
mation display.
Action to take:
When the above condition is no longer
present, the warning message will no
longer be available in the vehicle informa-
tion display and the system will operate
normally. If the warning message con-
tinues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C:
When the radar sensor on the front of the
vehicle is covered with dirt or is ob-
structed, the ICC system will automati-
cally be canceled.
The chime will sound and the “Forward
Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front
Sensor blocked” warning message will
appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, push the park
button to engage the P (Park) position,
and turn the engine off. When the radar
signal is temporarily interrupted, clean
the sensor area and restart the engine. If
Starting and driving 5-111
5-112 Starting and driving
the warning message continues to ap-
pear, have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Condition D:
When driving on roads with limited road
structures or buildings (for example, long
bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next
to long walls), the system may display the
“Forward Driving Aids temporarily dis-
abled Front Sensor blocked” message.
Action to take:
When the above driving conditions no
longer exist, turn the system back on.
ICC system malfunction
If the ICC system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, a chime will
sound, and the speed control status
warning (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take:
If the warning illuminates, stop the vehicle
in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart
the engine and set the ICC system again.
If it is not possible to set the ICC system or
the warning stays on, it may be a
malfunction. Although the normal driving
can be continued, the ICC system should
be inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
If the ICC system is temporarily unavail-
able, the conventional cruise control
mode may still be used. For additional
information, see “Conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode” (P.5-119).
ICC sensor maintenance
The radar sensor is located on the front of
the vehicle.
To keep the ICC system operating prop-
erly, be sure to observe the following:
. Always keep the sensor area clean.
. Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor.
. Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an
accessory near the sensor. This could
cause failure or malfunction.
. Do not attach metallic objects near
the sensor area (brush guard, etc.).
This could cause failure or malfunc-
tion.
. Do not alter, remove, or paint the front
bumper.
Before customizing or restoring the front
bumper, it is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer.
The camera sensor is located above the
inside mirror.
To keep the proper operation of the
systems and prevent a system malfunc-
tion, be sure to observe the following:
. Always keep the windshield clean.
. Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an
accessory near the camera unit.
. Do not place reflective materials, such
as white paper or a mirror, on the
instrument panel. The reflection of
sunlight may adversely affect the
camera unit’s capability of detecting
the lane markers.
. Do not strike or damage the areas
around the camera unit. Do not touch
the camera lens or remove the screw
located on the camera unit.
If the camera unit is damaged due to an
accident, it is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer.
For additional information, see “Common
troubleshooting guide” (P.5-40).
Radio frequency statement:
For USA
Type approval number:
FCC ID: NF3–FR5CPEC
User Manual statement according to
§15.19:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. this device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
User Manual statement according to
§15.21:
Changes or modifications made to this
equipment not expressly approved by
Robert BOSCH GmbH may void the FCC
authorization to operate this equipment.
User Manual statement according to
§15.105:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are de-
signed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equip-
ment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the inter-
ference at his own expense.
RF Exposure Information according
2.1091/2.1093/OET bulletin 65:
Radiofrequency radiation exposure infor-
mation:
This equipment complies with FCC radia-
tion exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equip-
ment should be installed and operated
with minimum distance of 20 cm be-
tween the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
For Canada
Type approval number:
IC: 3387A-FR5CPEC
Legal warning for RF equipment:
This device complies with Industry Cana-
da licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Op-
eration is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
STEERING ASSIST
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the
Steering Assist could result in ser-
ious injury or death.
. The Steering Assist is not a re-
placement for proper driving pro-
cedures and is not designed to
correct careless, inattentive or
absent-minded driving. The
Steering Assist will not always
steer the vehicle to keep it in the
lane. It is not designed to prevent
loss of control. It is the driver’s
responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely, keep the vehicle in the
traveling lane, and be in control
of the vehicle at all times.
. As there is a performance limit to
the Steering Assist’s capability,
never rely solely on the system.
The Steering Assist does not
function in all driving, traffic,
weather, and road conditions. Al-
ways drive safely, pay attention
to the operation of the vehicle,
and manually control your vehicle
appropriately.
Starting and driving 5-113
5-114 Starting and driving
. The Steering Assist is intended
for use on well-developed high-
ways with gentle (moderate)
curves. To avoid risk of an acci-
dent, do not use this system on
local or non-highway roads.
. The Steering Assist only steers
the vehicle to maintain its posi-
tion in the center of a lane. The
vehicle will not steer to avoid
objects in the road in front of
the vehicle or to avoid a vehicle
moving into your lane.
. It is the driver’s responsibility to
stay alert, drive safely, keep the
vehicle in the traveling lane, and
be in control of the vehicle at all
times. Never take your hands off
the steering wheel when driving.
Always keep your hands on the
steering wheel and drive your
vehicle safely.
. Always drive carefully and atten-
tively when using the Steering
Assist. Read and understand the
Owner’s Manual thoroughly be-
fore using the Steering Assist. To
avoid serious injury or death, do
not rely on the system to prevent
accidents or to control the vehi-
cle’s speed in emergency situa-
tions. Do not use the Steering
Assist except in appropriate road
and traffic conditions.
Steering Assist operation
Steering Assist helps the driver keep the
vehicle near the center of the lane when
both right and left lane markers are
detected. Steering Assist only operates
when combined with the Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC) system. For additional
information, see “Intelligent Cruise Con-
trol (ICC)” (P.5-98).
The Steering Assist can be activated
when the following conditions are met:
. The ICC system is activated.
. Lane markers on both sides are clearly
detected.
. A vehicle ahead is detected (when the
vehicle is driven at speeds under 37
MPH (60 km/h)).
. The driver grips the steering wheel.
. The vehicle is driven at the center of
the lane.
. The turn signals are not operated.
. The windshield wiper is not operated
in the high speed position (the Steer-
ing Assist function is disabled after the
wiper operates for approximately 10
seconds in the high speed position).
To enable or disable the Steering Assist,
see “How to enable/disable the Steering
Assist” (P.5-97).
WAF0584X
Example
Steering Assist display and indica-
tors
1. Steering Assist status indicator/
warning
Displays the status of the Steering
Assist by the color of the indicator/
warning
.
Steering Assist status indicator
(gray): Steering Assist standby
.
Steering Assist status indicator
(green): Steering Assist active
.
Steering Assist status indicator (or-
ange): Steering Assist malfunction
2. Steering Assist indicator
Indicates the status of the Steering
Assist by the color of the indicator
.
Steering Assist indicator (gray):
Steering Assist standby
.
Steering Assist indicator (green):
Steering Assist active
3. Lane marker indicator
Indicates whether the system detects
the lane marker
.
Lane marker indicator (gray): Lane
markers not detected
.
Lane marker indicator (green): Lane
markers detected
.
Lane marker indicator (orange):
Lane departure is detected
4. Lane marker indicator/speed con-
trol status indicator/set distance
indicator
Displays the status of the Steering
Assist by the color of the lane marker
indicator.
.
Lane marker indicator (gray): Steer-
ing Assist standby
.
Lane marker indicator (green):
Steering Assist active
For the speed control status indicator
and set distance indicator, see “ProPILOT
Assist system display and indicators” (P.5-
90).
When the Steering Assist is in operation,
the Steering Assist status indicator
, the
Steering Assist indicator
, and the lane
marker indicator
and on the vehicle
information display turn green. A chime
sounds when the Steering Assist initially
activates.
When the Steering Assist deactivates, the
Steering Assist status indicator
, the
Steering Assist indicator
, and the lane
marker indicator
and on the vehicle
information display turn gray and a chime
sounds twice.
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
With the Steering Assist active, when a
curve or strong cross wind exceeds the
capabilities of the system and your vehi-
cle approaches either the left or the right
side of the traveling lane, the I-LI system
will flash the I-LI indicator on the vehicle
information display and provide steering
wheel vibration to alert the driver. The
warning chime will also sound (4 rapid
beeps). Then, the I-LI system automati-
cally applies the brakes for a short period
of time to help assist the driver to return
the vehicle to the center of the traveling
lane. This action is in addition to any
Steering Assist actions and the warnings
cannot be turned off. For more informa-
tion, see “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-
LI)” (P.5-52).
Starting and driving 5-115
5-116 Starting and driving
WAF0639X
Hands on detection
When the Steering Assist is activated, it
monitors the driver’s steering wheel op-
eration.
If the steering wheel is not operated or
the driver takes his/her hands off the
steering wheel for a period of time, the
warning
appears in the vehicle infor-
mation display and the hands OFF warn-
ing light
illuminates.
If the driver does not operate the steering
wheel after the warning has been dis-
played and the warning light illuminated,
an audible alert sounds and both the
warning and the warning light flash. If the
driver still does not operate the steering
wheel, the system applies a momentary
brake application to request the driver to
take control of the vehicle again.
If the driver still does not respond, the
system turns on the hazard flasher and
slows the vehicle to a complete stop.
The driver can cancel the deceleration at
any time by steering, braking, accelerat-
ing, or operating the ProPILOT Assist
switch.
WARNING
Steering Assist is not a system for a
hands-free driving. Always keep your
hands on the steering wheel and
drive your vehicle safely. Failure to
do so could cause a collision result-
ing in serious personal injury or
death.
NOTE:
If the driver lightly touches (instead of
firmly grips) the steering wheel, the
steering torque sensor may not detect
the driver’s hand(s) on the steering
wheel and a sequence of warnings
may occur. When the driver holds and
operates the steering wheel again, the
warnings turn off.
Steering Assist limitations
WARNING
. In the following situations, the
camera may not detect lane mar-
kers correctly or may detect lane
markers incorrectly and the
Steering Assist may not operate
properly:
— When driving on roads where
there are multiple parallel
lane markers, lane markers
that are faded or not painted
clearly, non-standard lane
markers, or lane markers cov-
ered with water, dirt, snow,
etc.
— When driving on roads with
discontinued lane markers
— When driving on roads with a
widening or narrowing lane
width
— When driving on roads where
there are multiple lanes or
unclear lane markers due to
road construction
— When driving on roads where
there are sharply contrasting
objects, such as shadows,
snow, water, wheel ruts,
seams, or lines remaining
after road repairs (the Steer-
ing Assist could detect these
items as lane markers)
— When driving on roads where
the traveling lane merges or
separates
. Do not use the Steering Assist
under the following conditions
because the system may not
properly detect lane markers.
Doing so could cause a loss of
vehicle control and result in an
accident.
— During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, dust, etc.)
— When rain, snow, sand, etc., is
thrown up by the wheels of
other vehicles
— When dirt, oil, ice, snow, water,
or another object adheres to
the camera unit
— When the lens of the camera
unit is foggy
— When strong light (for exam-
ple, sunlight or high beams
from oncoming vehicles)
shines on the camera
— When the headlights are not
bright due to dirt on the lens
or the headlights are off in
tunnels or darkness
— When a sudden change in
brightness occurs (for exam-
ple, when the vehicle enters or
exits a tunnel or is under a
bridge)
— When driving on roads where
the traveling lane merges or
separates or where there are
temporary lane markers be-
cause of road construction
— When there is a lane closure
due to road repairs
— When driving on a bumpy road
surface, such as an uneven
dirt road
— When driving on sharp curves
or winding roads
— When driving on repeated up-
hill and downhill roads
. Do not use the Steering Assist
under the following conditions
because the system will not op-
erate properly:
— When driving with a tire that is
not within normal tire condi-
tions (for example, tire wear,
abnormal tire pressure, instal-
lation of a spare tire, tire
chains, non-standard wheels)
— When the vehicle is equipped
with non-original brake or
suspension parts
— When an object such as a
sticker or cargo obstructs the
camera
— When excessively heavy bag-
gage is loaded in the rear seat
or luggage area of your vehi-
cle
— When the vehicle load capa-
city is exceeded
— When towing a trailer or other
vehicle
. Excessive noise will interfere with
the warning chime sound, and
the beep may not be heard.
. For the ProPILOT Assist system to
operate properly, the windshield
in front of the camera must be
clean. Replace worn wiper blades.
The correct size wiper blades
must be used to help make sure
the windshield is kept clean. Only
use Genuine NISSAN wiper blades,
or equivalent wiper blades, that
Starting and driving 5-117
5-118 Starting and driving
are specifically designed for use
on your vehicle model and model
year. It is recommended that you
visit your NISSAN dealer for the
correct parts for your vehicle.
Steering Assist temporary standby
Automatic standby due to driving op-
eration:
When the driver activates the turn signal,
the Steering Assist is temporarily placed
in a standby mode. (The Steering Assist
restarts automatically when the operat-
ing conditions are met again.)
Automatic standby:
In the following cases, “Not Available
Front Camera Obstructed” warning mes-
sage appears in the vehicle information
display, along with the chime, and the
Steering Assist is placed in a temporary
standby mode. (The Steering Assist re-
starts automatically when the operating
conditions are met again.)
. When lane markers on both sides are
no longer detected
. When a vehicle ahead is no longer
detected under approximately 37 MPH
(60 km/h)
NOTE:
For ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link
equipped vehicles on a limited access
freeway as identified in the navigation
map data, the Steering Assist system
may continue to operate with visible
lane markers on the both sides, even
when the vehicle speed is below ap-
proximately 37 MPH (60 km/h) and a
vehicle is not detected ahead.
Steering Assist cancel
Under the following conditions, the Steer-
ing Assist cancels, and the Steering Assist
status indicator and the Steering Assist
indicator turn off:
. When unusual lane markers appear in
the traveling lane or when the lane
marker cannot be correctly detected
for some time due to certain condi-
tions (for example, a snow rut, the
reflection of light on a rainy day, the
presence of several unclear lane mar-
kers)
. When the windshield wiper operates
in the high speed operation (the
Steering Assist is disabled when the
wiper operates for more than approxi-
mately 10 seconds)
Action to take:
Turn the ICC system off using the CANCEL
switch. When the conditions listed above
are no longer present, turn the ICC
system on again.
Steering Assist malfunction
When the system malfunctions, it turns
off automatically. The Steering Assist
status warning (orange) illuminates. A
chime may sound depending on the
situation.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, push
the park button to shift to the P (Park)
position, turn the engine off, restart the
engine, resume driving, and set the ICC
system again. If the warning (orange)
continues to illuminate, the Steering As-
sist is malfunctioning. Although the vehi-
cle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Steering Assist maintenance
The camera is located above the inside
mirror.
To keep the proper operation of the
system and prevent a system malfunc-
tion, be sure to observe the following:
. Always keep the windshield clean.
. Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an
accessory near the camera unit.
. Do not place reflective materials, such
as white paper or a mirror, on the
instrument panel. The reflection of
sunlight may adversely affect the
camera unit’s capability of detecting
the lane markers.
. Do not strike or damage the areas
around the camera unit. Do not touch
the camera lens or remove the screw
located on the camera unit.
If the camera unit is damaged due to an
accident, it is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer.
For additional information, see “Common
troubleshooting guide” (P.5-40).
CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)
CRUISE CONTROL MODE
NOTE:
ProPILOT Assist provides no approach
warnings, automatic braking, or Steer-
ing Assist in the conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode.
This mode allows driving at a speed
between 20 to 90 MPH (30 to 144 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the accel-
erator pedal.
WARNING
. In the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, a warning
chime does not sound to warn
you if you are too close to the
vehicle ahead, as neither the pre-
sence of the vehicle ahead nor
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected.
. Pay special attention to the dis-
tance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead of you or a
collision could occur.
. Always confirm the setting in the
ICC system display.
. Do not use the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode
when driving under the following
conditions:
— When it is not possible to keep
the vehicle at a set speed
— In heavy traffic or in traffic
that varies in speed
— On winding or hilly roads
— On slippery roads (rain, snow,
ice, etc.)
— In very windy areas
. Doing so could cause a loss of
vehicle control and result in an
accident.
Starting and driving 5-119
5-120 Starting and driving
WAF0426X
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control switches
1. RES+ switch:
Resumes vehicle set speed or in-
creases speed incrementally
2. SET- switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
speed incrementally
3. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without eras-
ing the vehicle set speed
4. ProPILOT Assist switch:
Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on
or off
JVS0301X
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode display and indica-
tors
The display is located in the vehicle
information display.
1. Cruise indicator:
This indicator indicates the condition
of the ICC system depending on a
color.
.
Cruise control ON indicator (gray):
Indicates that the ProPILOT Assist
switch is on
.
Cruise control SET indicator (green):
Indicates that the cruising speed is
set
.
Cruise control warning (orange):
Indicates that there is a malfunc-
tion in the ICC system
2. Vehicle set speed indicator:
This indicator indicates the vehicle set
speed.
For Canadian models, the speed is
displayed in km/h.
WAF0427X
Operating conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the
ProPILOT Assist switch
for longer than
about 1.5 seconds.
When pushing the ProPILOT Assist switch
on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode display and indicators are
displayed in the vehicle information dis-
play. After you hold the ProPILOT Assist
switch on for longer than about 1.5
seconds, the ICC system display turns
off. The cruise indicator appears. You can
now set your desired cruising speed.
Pushing the ProPILOT Assist switch again
will turn the system completely off. When
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position, the system is also automatically
turned off.
To use the ICC system again, quickly push
and release the ProPILOT Assist switch
(vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode) or push and hold it (conventional
cruise control mode) again to turn it on.
WARNING
To avoid accidentally engaging
cruise control, make sure to turn
the ProPILOT Assist switch off when
not using the ICC system.
WAF0428X
To set cruising speed, accelerate your
vehicle to the desired speed, push down
the SET—
switch and release it. (The
color of the cruise indicator changes to
green and vehicle set speed indicator
comes on.) Take your foot off the accel-
erator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain
the set speed.
. To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release
the pedal, the vehicle will return to the
previously set speed.
. The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, manually main-
tain vehicle speed.
Starting and driving 5-121
5-122 Starting and driving
To cancel the preset vehicle speed, use
any of the following methods:
1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle
set speed indicator will turn off.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle set
speed indicator will turn off.
3. Turn the ProPILOT Assist switch off.
Both the cruise indicator and vehicle
set speed indicator will turn off.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push down and release the SET-
switch.
2. Push up and hold the RES+ switch.
When the vehicle attains the desired
speed, release the switch.
3. Push up, then quickly release the RES+
switch. Each time you do this, the
vehicle set speed will increase by
about 1 MPH (1 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed,
push down the SET— switch and
release it.
2. Push down and hold the SET- switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows down to the desired speed.
3. Push down, then quickly release the
SET— switch. Each time you do this,
the vehicle set speed will decrease by
about 1 MPH (1 km/h).
To resume the preset vehicle speed, push
up and release the RES+ switch. The
vehicle will resume the last set cruising
speed when the vehicle speed is over 20
MPH (30 km/h).
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-
tem could result in serious injury or
death.
. The AEB with Pedestrian Detec-
tion system is a supplemental aid
to the driver. It is not a replace-
ment for the driver’s attention to
traffic conditions or responsibility
to drive safely. It cannot prevent
accidents due to carelessness or
dangerous driving techniques.
. The AEB with Pedestrian Detec-
tion system does not function in
all driving, traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-
tem can assist the driver when there is a
risk of a forward collision with
. a vehicle ahead in the travelling lane
. a pedestrian ahead in the travelling
lane
. a cyclist ahead in the travelling lane
AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB)
WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM
WAF0644X
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-
tem uses a radar sensor
located on the
front of the vehicle to measure the
distance to the vehicle ahead in the same
lane.
For pedestrians and cyclists, the AEB
system uses a camera
installed behind
the windshield in addition to the radar
sensor.
WAF0429X
AEB emergency warning indicator
Vehicle ahead detection indicator (on the
vehicle information display)
AEB system OFF warning light (on the
meter panel)
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION
SYSTEM OPERATION
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-
tem will function when your vehicle is
driven at speeds above approximately 3
MPH (5 km/h).
For the pedestrian and cyclists detection
Starting and driving 5-123
5-124 Starting and driving
function, the AEB with Pedestrian Detec-
tion system operates at speeds between
6 – 37 MPH (10 – 60 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected,
the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
will firstly provide the warning to the
driver by flashing the vehicle ahead
detection indicator (yellow) in the vehicle
information display and providing an
audible alert. In addition, the system
applies partial braking.
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and
forcefully after the warning, and the AEB
with Pedestrian Detection system detects
that there is still the possibility of a
forward collision, the system will auto-
matically increase the braking force.
If the driver does not take action, the AEB
with Pedestrian Detection system issues
the second visual (flashing) (red) and
audible warning. Then the system applies
partial braking.
If the risk of a collision becomes immi-
nent, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system applies harder braking automati-
cally.
While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system is operating, you may hear the
sound of brake operation. This is normal
and indicates that the AEB with Pedes-
trian Detection system is operating prop-
erly.
NOTE:
The vehicle’s stop lights come on when
braking is performed by the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance
to the vehicle, pedestrian or cyclists
ahead, as well as driving and roadway
conditions, the system may help the
driver avoid a forward collision or may
help mitigate the consequences of a
collision should one be unavoidable.
If the driver is handling the steering
wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB
with Pedestrian Detection system will
function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under
the following conditions:
. When the steering wheel is turned as
far as necessary to avoid a collision.
. When the accelerator pedal is de-
pressed.
. When there is no longer a vehicle,
pedestrian detected ahead.
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system has stopped the vehicle, the
vehicle will remain at a standstill for
approximately 2 seconds before the
brakes are released.
When the brake pedal is depressed while
the brake is applied by the system, you
may feel the pedal effort is changed and
may hear a sound and vibration noise.
This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. In addition, the braking force
can be increased by adding the pedal
effort.
WAF0430X
AEB system OFF warning light (on the
meter panel)
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
TURNING THE AEB WITH PEDES-
TRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system on
or off.
1. Push the
button until “Set-
tings” appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display and then push the scroll
dial. Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance.” Then push the scroll dial.
2. Select “Emergency Brake” and push
the scroll dial.
3. Select “Front” and use the scroll dial to
turn the system on or off.
When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system is turned off, the AEB system OFF
warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system will be automatically turned
ON when the engine is restarted.
. The Intelligent Forward Collision
Warning (I-FCW) system is inte-
grated into the AEB system. There
is not a separate selection for the I-
FCW system. When the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system is
turned off, the I-FCW system is also
turned off.
AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system. Failure to operate
Starting and driving 5-125
5-126 Starting and driving
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in
serious injury or death.
. The AEB with Pedestrian Detec-
tion system cannot detect all
vehicles, pedestrians or cyclists
under all conditions.
. The AEB with Pedestrian Detec-
tion system does not detect the
following:
— Pedestrians that are small (for
example, children), in a sitting
position, operating toys/ska-
teboards, on scooters or in
wheelchairs, or not in an up-
right standing or walking po-
sition.
— Animals of any size.
— Obstacles (for example, cargo
or debris) on the roadway or
roadside.
— Oncoming or crossing vehi-
cles.
— Vehicles where the tires are
difficult to see or the shape of
the rear of the vehicle is un-
clear or obstructed.
— Parked vehicles.
. The AEB with Pedestrian Detec-
tion system has some perfor-
mance limitations.
— If a stationary vehicle is in the
vehicle’s path, the system will
not function when the vehicle
approaches the stationary ve-
hicle at speeds over approxi-
mately 50 MPH (80 km/h).
— Pedestrian and cyclist detec-
tion will not function when the
vehicle is driven at speeds
over approximately 37 MPH
(60 km/h) or below approxi-
mately 6 MPH (10 km/h).
. For pedestrians, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system will
not issue the first warning.
. The AEB with Pedestrian Detec-
tion system may not function
properly or detect a vehicle, pe-
destrian or cyclist ahead in the
following conditions:
— In poor visibility conditions
(such as rain, snow, fog, dust
storms, sand storms, smoke,
and road spray from other
vehicles).
— If dirt, ice, snow, fog or other
material is covering the radar
sensor area or camera area of
the windshield.
— If strong light (for example,
sunlight or high beams) en-
ters the front camera or a
sudden change in brightness
occurs (for example, entering
a tunnel or driving in light-
ning).
— In dark or dimly lit conditions,
such as at night or in tunnels,
including cases where your
vehicle’s headlights are off or
dim, or the tail lights of the
vehicle ahead are off.
— When the direction of the
camera is misaligned.
— When driving on a steep
downhill slope, on roads with
sharp curves, and/or bumpy
or dirt roads.
— If there is interference by
other radar sources.
— When your vehicle’s position
or movement is changed
quickly or significantly (for
example, lane change, turning
vehicle, abrupt steering, sud-
den acceleration or decelera-
tion).
— When your vehicle or the ve-
hicle, pedestrian or cyclist
ahead moves quickly or sig-
nificantly such that the sys-
tem cannot detect and react
in time (for example, pedes-
trian moving quickly toward
the vehicle at close range,
vehicle cutting in, changing
lanes, making a turn, steering
abruptly, sudden acceleration
or deceleration).
— When the vehicle, pedestrian
or cyclist is offset from the
vehicle’s forward path.
— If the speed difference be-
tween the two vehicles is
small.
— The pedestrian’s profile is par-
tially obscured or unidentifi-
able; for example, due to
transporting luggage, push-
ing a stroller, wearing bulky
or very loose-fitting clothing
or accessories, or being in a
unique posture (such as rais-
ing hands).
— There is poor contrast of a
person to the background,
such as having clothing color
or pattern which is similar to
the background.
— For approximately 15 seconds
after starting the engine
— If the vehicle ahead has a
unique or unusual shape, ex-
tremely low or high clearance
heights, or unusual cargo
loading or is narrow (for ex-
ample, a motorcycle).
— When the vehicle, pedestrian
or cyclist is located near a
traffic sign, a reflective area
(for example, water on road),
or is in a shadow.
— When multiple pedestrians or
cyclists are grouped together.
— When the view of the pedes-
trian or cyclist is obscured by
a vehicle or other object.
— While towing a trailer or other
vehicle.
. The system performance may be
degraded in the following condi-
tions:
— The vehicle is driven on a
slippery road.
— The vehicle is driven on a
slope.
— Excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or the
cargo area of your vehicle.
. The system is designed to auto-
matically check the sensor (radar
and camera)’s functionality, with-
in certain limitations. The system
may not detect some forms of
obstruction of the sensor area
such as ice, snow or stickers, for
example. In these cases, the sys-
tem may not be able to warn the
driver properly. Be sure that you
check, clean and clear sensor
areas regularly.
. In some road and traffic condi-
tions, the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system may unexpect-
edly apply partial braking. When
acceleration is necessary, de-
press the accelerator pedal to
override the system.
. The AEB with Pedestrian Detec-
tion system may operate when a
pattern, object, shadow or lights
are detected that are similar to
the outline of vehicles, pedes-
trians or cyclists, or if they are
the same size and position as a
vehicle or motorcycle’s tail lights.
Starting and driving 5-127
5-128 Starting and driving
. The system may keep operating
when the vehicle ahead is turning
right or left.
. The system may operate when
your vehicle is approaching and
passing a vehicle ahead.
. Depending on the road shape
(curved road, entrance and exit
of the curve, winding road, lane
regulation, under construction,
etc.), the system may operate
temporarily for the oncoming ve-
hicle in front of your vehicle.
WAF0785X
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in
serious injury or death.
. The AEB with Pedestrian Detec-
tion system may react to:
— objects on the roadside (traf-
fic sign, guardrail, pedestrian,
cyclist, motorcycle, vehicle,
etc.)
— pedestrians or cyclists when
driving on the narrow alleys,
etc.
— pedestrians or cyclists who
temporarily protrude into or
approaching the driving lane
to avoid the obstacles on the
road shoulder
— objects above road (low
bridge, traffic sign, etc.)
— objects on the road surface
(railroad track, grate, steel
plate, etc.)
— objects in the parking garage
(beam, pillar, etc.)
— pedestrians, cyclists or motor-
cycles approaching the travel-
ing lane
— vehicles, pedestrians, cyclists,
motorcycles or objects in ad-
jacent lanes or close to the
vehicle
— oncoming pedestrians, cy-
clists
— objects on the road (such as
trees)
. Braking distances increase on
slippery surfaces.
. Excessive noise will interfere with
the warning chime sound, and
the chime may not be heard.
SSD0253
When driving on some roads, such as
winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or
roads which are under construction or on
a slope, the sensor may detect vehicles in
a different lane, or may temporarily not
detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may
cause the system to work inappropriately.
The detection of vehicles may also be
affected by vehicle operation (steering
maneuver or traveling position in the
lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this
occurs, the system may warn you by
blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime unexpectedly. You
will have to manually control the proper
distance away from the vehicle travel-
ing ahead.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-
ABLE
Condition A
If the following conditions, the AEB sys-
tem OFF warning light will flash (no
message appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display).
. Strong light is shining from the front
of the vehicle.
. The cabin temperature is over ap-
proximately 104°F (40°C) in direct sun-
light.
. The camera area of the windshield is
misted or frozen.
Starting and driving 5-129
5-130 Starting and driving
. The camera unit detects it’s misalign-
ment condition.
. The radar sensor picks up interference
from an another radar source.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer
exist, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system will resume automatically.
NOTE:
When the inside of the windshield on
camera area is misted or frozen, it will
take a period of time to remove it after
air conditioner turns on. If dirt appears
on this area, it is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer.
Condition B
In the following condition, the AEB system
OFF warning light will flash and the
“Forward Driving Aids temporarily dis-
abled Front Sensor blocked” warning
message will appear in the vehicle infor-
mation display.
. The sensor area of the front of the
vehicle is covered with dirt or is
obstructed
Action to take:
If the warning light flashes, stop the
vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine
off. Clean the radar cover on the front of
the vehicle with a soft cloth, and restart
the engine. If the warning message con-
tinues to appear, have the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
. When driving on roads with limited
road structures or buildings (for ex-
ample, long bridges, deserts, snow
fields, driving next to long walls).
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer
exist, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system will resume automatically.
Condition C
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system is OFF, the AEB brake will not
operate. In this case only visible and
audible warning operates. The AEB sys-
tem OFF warning light (orange) will illu-
minate.
Action to take:
When the VDC system is ON, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system will resume
automatically.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system malfunctions, it will be turned off
automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB
system OFF warning light will (orange) will
illuminate and the “Malfunction” warning
message will appear in the vehicle infor-
mation display.
Action to take:
If the warning light (orange) comes on,
stop the vehicle in a safe location. Turn
the engine off and restart the engine. If
the warning light continues to illuminate,
have the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WAF0644X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensor is located on the front
of the vehicle. The camera
is located on
the upper side of the windshield.
To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detec-
tion system operating properly, be sure to
observe the following:
. Always keep the sensor area on the
front of the vehicle and windshield
clean.
. Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensors (ex. bumper, wind-
shield).
. Do not cover or attach stickers or
similar objects on the front of the
vehicle near the sensor area. This
could cause failure or malfunction.
. Do not attach metallic objects near
the radar sensor area (brush guard,
etc.). This could cause failure or mal-
function.
. Do not place reflective materials, such
as white paper or a mirror, on the
instrument panel. The reflection of
sunlight may adversely affect the
camera unit’s detection capability.
. Do not alter, remove or paint the front
of the vehicle near the sensor area.
Before customizing or restoring the
sensor area, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
Type approval number:
FCC ID: NF3–FR5CPEC
User Manual statement according to
§15.19:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. this device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
User Manual statement according to
§15.21:
Changes or modifications made to this
equipment not expressly approved by
Robert BOSCH GmbH may void the FCC
authorization to operate this equipment.
User Manual statement according to
§15.105:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are de-
signed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equip-
ment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the inter-
ference at his own expense.
RF Exposure Information according
2.1091/2.1093/OET bulletin 65:
Radiofrequency radiation exposure infor-
mation:
This equipment complies with FCC radia-
Starting and driving 5-131
5-132 Starting and driving
tion exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equip-
ment should be installed and operated
with minimum distance of 20 cm be-
tween the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
For Canada
Type approval number:
IC: 3387A-FR5CPEC
Legal warning for RF equipment:
This device complies with Industry Cana-
da licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Op-
eration is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the I-
FCW system could result in serious
injury or death.
. The I-FCW system helps warn the
driver before a collision but will
not avoid a collision. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay
alert, drive safely and be in con-
trol of the vehicle at all times.
The I-FCW system can help alert the driver
when there is a sudden braking of a
second vehicle traveling in front of the
vehicle ahead in the same lane.
WAF0646X
The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor
located on the front of the vehicle to
measure the distance to a second vehicle
ahead in the same lane.
INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION
WARNING (I-FCW)
WAF0432X
Vehicle ahead detection indicator (on the
vehicle information display)
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) sys-
tem OFF warning light (on the meter
panel)
Starting and driving 5-133
5-134 Starting and driving
JVS0294X
I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION
The I-FCW system operates at speeds
above approximately 3 MPH (5 km/h).
If there is a potential risk of a forward
collision, the I-FCW system will warn the
driver by blinking the vehicle ahead
detection indicator, and sounding an
audible alert.
WAF0430X
AEB system OFF warning light (on the
meter panel)
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/
OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the I-
FCW system on or off.
1. Push the
button until “Set-
tings” appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display and then push the scroll
dial. Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance.” Then push the scroll dial.
2. Select “Emergency Brake” and push
the scroll dial.
3. Select “Front” and use the scroll dial to
turn the system on or off.
When the I-FCW system is turned off, the
AEB system OFF warning light (orange)
illuminates.
NOTE:
. The I-FCW system will be automati-
cally turned on when the engine is
restarted.
. The I-FCW system is integrated into
the AEB system. There is not a
separate selection for the I-FCW
system. When the AEB system is
turned off, the I-FCW system is also
turned off.
Starting and driving 5-135
5-136 Starting and driving
JVS0295X
Illustration A
JVS0296X
Illustration B
JVS0297X
Illustration C
JVS0298X
Illustration D
I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the I-FCW system. Failure to
operate the vehicle in accordance
with these system limitations could
result in serious injury or death.
. The I-FCW system cannot detect
all vehicles under all conditions.
. The radar sensor does not detect
the following objects:
— Pedestrians, animals or obsta-
cles in the roadway
— Oncoming vehicles
— Crossing vehicles
. (Illustration A) The I-FCW system
does not function when a vehicle
ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as
a motorcycle.
. The radar sensor may not detect
a vehicle ahead in the following
conditions:
— Snow or heavy rain
— Dirt, ice, snow or other materi-
al covering the radar sensor
— Interference by other radar
sources
— Snow or road spray from tra-
velling vehicles.
— Driving in a tunnel
— Towing a trailer
. (Illustration B) When the vehicle
ahead is being towed.
. (Illustration C) When the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too close,
the beam of the radar sensor is
obstructed.
. (Illustration D) When driving on a
steep downhill slope or roads
with sharp curves.
. The system is designed to auto-
matically check the sensor’s func-
tionality, within certain
limitations. The system may not
detect some forms of obstruction
of the sensor area such as ice,
snow, stickers, for example. In
these cases, the system may not
be able to warn the driver prop-
erly. Be sure that you check, clean
and clear the sensor area regu-
larly.
Starting and driving 5-137
5-138 Starting and driving
. Excessive noise will interfere with
the warning chime sound, and
the chime may not be heard.
SSD0253
When driving on some roads, such as
winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or
roads which are under construction, the
radar sensor may detect vehicles in a
different lane, or may temporarily not
detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This
may cause the I-FCW system to work
inappropriately.
The detection of vehicles may also be
affected by vehicle operation (steering
maneuver or traveling position in the
lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this
occurs, the system may warn you by
blinking the vehicle ahead detection
indicator and sounding the chime un-
expectedly. You will have to manually
control the proper distance away from
the vehicle traveling ahead.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-
ABLE
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interfer-
ence from another radar source, making
it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,
the I-FCW system is automatically turned
off. The AEB system OFF warning light
(orange) will flash.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer
exist, the I-FCW system will resume auto-
matically.
Condition B
Under the following conditions, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
I-FCW system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system OFF warning light (or-
ange) will flash and the “Forward Driving
Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor
blocked” warning message will appear in
the vehicle information display.
. When the sensor area of the front of
the vehicle is covered with dirt or is
obstructed
Action to take:
If the warning light (orange) flashes, stop
the vehicle in a safe place, push the park
button to engage the P (Park) position
and turn the engine off. Clean the radar
cover on the front of the vehicle with a
soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the
warning light continues to illuminate,
have the I-FCW system checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
. When driving on roads with limited
road structures or buildings (for ex-
ample, long bridges, deserts, snow
fields, driving next to long walls)
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer
exist, the I-FCW system will resume auto-
matically.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, a chime will
sound, the AEB system OFF warning light
(orange) will illuminate and the "Malfunc-
tion" warning message will appear in the
vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the warning light (orange) illuminates,
stop the vehicle in a safe location. Turn
the engine off and restart the engine. If
the warning light continues to illuminate,
have the I-FCW system checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
WAF0646X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensor is located on the front
of the vehicle.
To keep the system operating properly,
be sure to observe the following:
. Always keep the sensor area on the
front of the vehicle clean.
. Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor.
. Do not cover or attach stickers or
similar objects on the front bumper
near the sensor area. This could cause
failure or malfunction.
. Do not attach metallic objects near
the sensor area (brush guard, etc.).
This could cause failure or malfunc-
Starting and driving 5-139
5-140 Starting and driving
tion.
. Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. It is recommended you con-
tact a NISSAN dealer before customiz-
ing or restoring the front bumper.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
Type approval number:
FCC ID: NF3–FR5CPEC
User Manual statement according to
§15.19:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. this device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
User Manual statement according to
§15.21:
Changes or modifications made to this
equipment not expressly approved by
Robert BOSCH GmbH may void the FCC
authorization to operate this equipment.
User Manual statement according to
§15.105:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are de-
signed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equip-
ment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the inter-
ference at his own expense.
RF Exposure Information according
2.1091/2.1093/OET bulletin 65:
Radiofrequency radiation exposure infor-
mation:
This equipment complies with FCC radia-
tion exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equip-
ment should be installed and operated
with minimum distance of 20 cm be-
tween the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
For Canada
Type approval number:
IC: 3387A-FR5CPEC
Legal warning for RF equipment:
This device complies with Industry Cana-
da licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Op-
eration is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the I-
DA system could result in serious
injury or death.
. The I–DA system is only a warning
to inform the driver of a potential
lack of driver attention or drowsi-
ness. It will not steer the vehicle
or prevent loss of control.
. The I–DA system does not detect
and provide an alert of the dri-
ver’s lack of attention or fatigue
in every situation.
. It is the driver’s responsibility to:
— Stay alert.
— Drive safely.
— Keep the vehicle in the travel-
ing lane.
— Be in control of the vehicle at
all times.
— Avoid driving when tired.
— Avoid distractions (texting,
etc).
The I–DA system helps alert the driver if
the system detects a lack of attention or
driving fatigue.
The system monitors driving style and
steering behavior over a period of time,
and it detects changes from the normal
pattern. If the system detects that driver
attention is decreasing over a period of
time, the system uses audible and visual
warnings to suggest that the driver take a
break.
WAF0641X
Example
I-DA SYSTEM OPERATION
If the system detects driver fatigue or that
driver attention is decreasing, the mes-
sage “Take a Break?” appears in the
vehicle information display and a chime
sounds when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 37 MPH (60 km/h).
The system continuously monitors driver
attention and can provide multiple warn-
ings per trip.
The system resets and starts reassessing
driving style and steering behavior when
the ignition switch is cycled from the ON
to the OFF position and back to the ON
position.
Starting and driving 5-141
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA)
5-142 Starting and driving
WAF0412X
Steering-wheel-mounted control (left
side)
Vehicle information display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-DA
SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the I–DA system.
1. Push the
button until “Set-
tings” appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display and push the scroll dial.
Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance.” Then push the scroll dial.
2. Select “Driver Attention Alert” and
push the scroll dial.
NOTE:
The setting will be retained even if the
engine is restarted.
I-DA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the I–DA system. Failure to
operate the vehicle in accordance
with these system limitations could
result in serious injury or death.
. The I-DA system may not operate
properly and may not provide an
alert in the following conditions:
— Poor road conditions such as
an uneven road surface or pot
holes.
— Strong side wind.
— If you have adopted a sporty
driving style with higher cor-
nering speeds or higher rates
of acceleration.
— Frequent lane changes or
changes to vehicle speed.
. The I–DA system will not provide
an alert in the following condi-
tions:
— Vehicle speeds lower than 37
mph (60 km/h).
— Short lapses of attention.
— Instantaneous distractions
such as dropping an object.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I–DA system malfunctions, the
“Driver Attention Alert Malfunction” warn-
ing message will appear in the vehicle
information display and the function will
be stopped automatically.
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place
the vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the
engine off and restart the engine. If the
warning message continues to appear,
have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the
RAB system could result in serious
injury or death.
. The RAB system is a supplemen-
tal aid to the driver. It is not a
replacement for proper driving
procedures. Always use the side
and rear mirrors and turn and
look in the direction you will
move before and while backing
up. Never rely solely on the RAB
system. It is the driver’s respon-
sibility to stay alert, drive safely,
and be in control of the vehicle at
all times.
. There is a limitation to the RAB
system capability. The RAB sys-
tem is not effective in all situa-
tions.
The RAB system can assist the driver
when the vehicle is backing up and
approaching objects directly behind the
vehicle.
WAF0647X
Models with 4 sonar sensors
WAF0536X
Models with 6 sonar sensors
Starting and driving 5-143
REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB)
5-144 Starting and driving
The RAB system detects obstacles behind
the vehicle using the sonar sensors
located on the rear bumper.
NOTE:
You can temporarily cancel the sonar
function in the vehicle, but the RAB
system will continue to operate. For
additional information, see “Sonar sys-
tem” (P.5-162) or “Rear Sonar System
(RSS)” (P.5-168).
WAF0435X
RAB system warning indicator (on the
vehicle information display)
RAB system OFF warning light (on the
meter panel)
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
Vehicle information display
Center display (if so equipped)
RAB SYSTEM OPERATION
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position and the vehicle speed is less than
approximately 9 MPH (15 km/h), the RAB
system operates.
If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is
detected when your vehicle is backing up,
the RAB system warning indicator will
flash in the vehicle information display, a
red frame will appear in the center display
(models with the Intelligent Around View®
Monitor system), and the system will
chime three times. The system will then
automatically apply the brakes. After the
automatic brake application, the driver
must depress the brake pedal to maintain
brake pressure.
NOTE:
. The stop lights of the vehicle come
on when braking is performed by
the RAB system.
. When the brakes operate, a noise
may be heard. This is not a malfunc-
tion.
WAF0436X
RAB system OFF warning light
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted control (left
side)
TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the
RAB system ON or OFF.
1. Push the
button until “Set-
tings” appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display and then push the scroll
dial. Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Starting and driving 5-145
5-146 Starting and driving
Assistance.” Then push the scroll dial.
2. Select “Emergency Brake” and push
the scroll dial.
3. Select “Rear” and use the scroll dial to
turn the system on or off.
When the RAB system is turned off, the
RAB system OFF warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
The RAB system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is restarted.
RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the RAB system. Failure to
follow the warnings and instructions
for proper use of the RAB system
could result in serious injury or
death.
. When the vehicle approaches an
obstacle while the accelerator or
brake pedal is depressed, the
function may not operate or the
start of the operation may be
delayed. The RAB system may
not operate or may not perform
sufficiently due to vehicle condi-
tions, driving conditions, the traf-
fic environment, the weather,
road surface conditions, etc. Do
not wait for the system to oper-
ate. Operate the brake pedal by
yourself as soon as necessary.
. If it is necessary to override RAB
operation, strongly press the ac-
celerator pedal.
. Always check your surroundings
and turn to check what is behind
you before and while backing up.
The RAB system detects station-
ary objects behind the vehicle.
The RAB system does not detect
the following objects:
— Moving objects
— Low objects
— Narrow objects
— Wedge-shaped objects
— Complex-shaped objects
— Multiple object in close
— Objects close to the bumper
(less than approximately 1 ft
[30 cm])
— Objects that suddenly appear
— Thin objects such as rope,
wire, chain, etc.
. The RAB system may not operate
for pedestrians or animals.
. The RAB system may not operate
for the following obstacles:
— Obstacles located high off the
ground
— Obstacles in a position offset
from your vehicle
— Obstacles, such as spongy
materials or snow, that have
soft outer surfaces and can
easily absorb a sound wave
. The RAB system may not operate
in the following conditions:
— There is rain, snow, ice, dirt,
etc., attached to the sonar
sensors.
— A loud sound is heard in the
area around the vehicle.
— The surface of the obstacle is
diagonal to the rear of the
vehicle.
— The sonar sensors or the area
around them are extremely
hot or cold.
. The RAB system may uninten-
tionally operate in the following
conditions:
— There is overgrown grass in
the area around the vehicle.
— There is a structure (e.g., a
wall, toll gate equipment, a
narrow tunnel, a parking lot
gate) near the side of the
vehicle.
— There are bumps, protrusions,
or manhole covers on the
road surface.
— The vehicle is driving through
a draped flag or a curtain.
— The vehicle is driving on a
steep hill.
— There is an accumulation of
snow or ice behind the vehi-
cle.
— An ultrasonic wave source,
such as another vehicle’s so-
nar, is near the vehicle.
. Once the automatic brake control
operates, it does not operate
again if the vehicle approaches
the same obstacle.
. The automatic brake control can
only operate for a short period of
time. Therefore, the driver must
depress the brake pedal.
. In the following situations, the
RAB system may not operate
properly or may not function
sufficiently:
— The vehicle is driven in bad
weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
— The vehicle is driven on a
steep hill.
— The vehicle’s posture is chan-
ged (e.g., when driving over a
bump).
— The vehicle is driven on a
slippery road.
— The vehicle is turned sharply
by turning the steering wheel
fully.
— Snow chains are used.
— Wheels or tires other than
NISSAN recommended are
used.
— The brakes are cold at low
ambient temperatures or im-
mediately after driving has
started.
— The braking force becomes
poor due to wet brakes after
driving through a puddle or
washing the vehicle.
. Turn the RAB system off in the
following conditions to prevent
the occurrence of an unexpected
accident resulting from sudden
system operation:
— The vehicle is towed.
— The vehicle is carried on a
flatbed truck.
— The vehicle is on the chassis
dynamometer.
— The vehicle drives on an un-
even road surface.
— Suspension parts other than
those designated as genuine
parts are used. (If the vehicle
height or the vehicle body
inclination is changed, the
system may not detect an
obstacle correctly.)
. Excessive noise (e.g., audio sys-
tem volume, an open vehicle win-
dow) will interfere with the chime
sound, and it may not be heard.
Starting and driving 5-147
5-148 Starting and driving
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, the RAB system
OFF warning light will illuminate, and the
“Malfunction See Owner’s Manual” warn-
ing message will appear in the vehicle
information display.
Action to take
If the warning light illuminates, park the
vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine
off, and restart the engine. If the warning
light continues to illuminate, have the
RAB system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
NOTE:
If the RAB system cannot be operated
temporarily, the RAB system OFF warn-
ing light blinks.
WAF0647X
Models with 4 sonar sensors
WAF0536X
Models with 6 sonar sensors
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sonar sensors are located on the
rear bumper. Observe the following items
to ensure proper operation of the system:
. Always keep the sonar sensors clean.
. If the sonar sensors are dirty, wipe
them off with a soft cloth while being
careful to not damage them.
. The sonar sensors may be blocked by
temporary ambient conditions such
as splashing water, mist or fog. The
blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt
obstructing the sonar sensors. Check
for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the sonar sensors.
. Do not subject the area around the
sonar sensors to strong impact. Also,
do not remove or disassemble the
sonar sensors. If the sonar sensors
and peripheral areas are deformed in
an accident, etc., have the sonar
sensors checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
. Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install acces-
sories or apply additional paint on
the sonar sensors and their surround-
ing areas. This may cause a malfunc-
tion or improper operation.
. When washing the vehicle using a
high-pressure washer, do not apply
direct washer pressure on the sonar
sensors. This may cause a malfunction
of the sonar sensors.
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000
km), follow these recommendations
to obtain maximum engine perfor-
mance and ensure the future relia-
bility and economy of your new
vehicle. Failure to follow these re-
commendations may result in shor-
tened engine life and reduced engine
performance.
. Avoid driving for long periods at con-
stant speed, either fast or slow. Do not
run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
. Avoid quick starts.
. Avoid hard braking as much as possi-
ble.
. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500
miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or
other parts could be damaged.
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most
fuel economy from your vehicle.
1. Use smooth accelerator and brake
pedal application.
.
Avoid rapid starts and stops.
.
Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possi-
ble.
.
Maintain constant speed while
commuting and coast whenever
possible.
2. Maintain constant speed.
.
Look ahead to try and anticipate
and minimize stops.
.
Synchronizing your speed with traf-
fic lights allows you to reduce your
number of stops.
.
Maintaining a steady speed can
minimize red light stops and im-
prove fuel efficiency.
3. Use air conditioning (A/C) at higher
vehicle speeds.
.
Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool
the vehicle due to reduced engine
load.
.
Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the
vehicle due to increased aerody-
namic drag.
Starting and driving 5-149
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
5-150 Starting and driving
.
Recirculating the cool air in the
cabin when the A/C is on reduces
cooling load.
4. Drive at economical speeds and dis-
tances.
.
Observing the speed limit and not
exceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h)
(where legally allowed) can improve
fuel efficiency due to reduced aero-
dynamic drag.
.
Maintaining a safe following dis-
tance behind other vehicles re-
duces unnecessary braking.
.
Safely monitoring traffic to antici-
pate changes in speed permits
reduced braking and smooth accel-
eration changes.
.
Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.
5. Use cruise control.
.
Using cruise control during highway
driving helps maintain a steady
speed.
.
Cruise control is particularly effec-
tive in providing fuel savings when
driving on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the shortest route.
.
Utilize a map or navigation system
to determine the best route to save
time.
7. Avoid idling.
.
Shutting off your engine when safe
for stops exceeding 30-60 seconds
saves fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an automated pass for toll roads.
.
Automated passes permit drivers to
use special lanes to maintain cruis-
ing speed through the toll and
avoid stopping and starting.
9. Winter warm up.
.
Limit idling time to minimize impact
to fuel economy.
.
Vehicles typically need no more
than 30 seconds of idling at start-
up to effectively circulate the en-
gine oil before driving.
.
Your vehicle will reach its ideal
operating temperature more
quickly while driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your vehicle cool.
.
Park your vehicle in a covered
parking area or in the shade when-
ever possible.
.
When entering a hot vehicle, open-
ing the windows will help to reduce
the inside temperature faster, re-
sulting in reduced demand on your
A/C system.
. Keep your engine tuned up.
. Follow the recommended scheduled
maintenance.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases
tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
. Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire
wear and lowers fuel economy.
. Use the recommended viscosity en-
gine oil. (See “Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation” (P.10-7).)
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
If any malfunction occurs in the Intelligent
4x4 system while the engine is running,
warning messages appear in the vehicle
information display.
WAF0642X
If the “AWD Error” warning appears,
there may be a malfunction in the In-
telligent 4x4 system. Reduce vehicle
speed and have your vehicle checked by
a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
The “AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle” (high
temperature) warning
appears when
the oil temperature of the powertrain
parts increases due to the difference in
rotation between the front and rear
wheels is large (wheel slip), such as when
driving on rough roads, driving through
sand or mud, or freeing a stuck vehicle. If
this warning is displayed, stop the vehicle
with the engine idling, as soon as it is safe
to do so. In these cases, the AWD changes
to 2WD to protect the powertrain parts.
Then if the warning turns off, you can
continue AWD driving.
The “Tire Size Incorrect” warning
may
appear if there is a large difference
between the diameters of front and rear
wheels and tires. Pull off the road in a safe
area, with the engine idling. Check that all
tire sizes, brand, construction and tread
pattern are the same, that the tire pres-
sures are correct and that the tires are
not excessively worn. If you have any
problems, change tires or adjust tire
pressures correctly. Do not select the
SNOW or OFF-ROAD mode with the Drive
Mode Selector and do not drive fast.
If any warning message continues to be
displayed, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
Starting and driving 5-151
INTELLIGENT 4X4 (if so equipped)
5-152 Starting and driving
WARNING
. For AWD equipped vehicles, do
not attempt to raise two wheels
off the ground and shift the
transmission to any drive or re-
verse position with the engine
running. Doing so may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could
result in serious vehicle damage
or personal injury.
. Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2–wheel
dynamometer (such as the dy-
namometers used by some
states for emissions testing) or
similar equipment even if the
other two wheels are raised off
the ground. Make sure that you
inform the test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with
AWD before it is placed on a
dynamometer. Using the wrong
test equipment may result in
drive train damage or unex-
pected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle
damage or personal injury.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the engine on a
free roller when any of the wheels
raised.
. The power train may be damaged
if you continue driving with the
“AWD Error” warning on.
. If the warning message remains
on after the above operation,
have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
. If the “AWD Error” warning ap-
pears while driving, there may be
a malfunction in the AWD system.
Reduce the vehicle speed and
have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
When the vehicle is in the P (Park) posi-
tion, the operation noise may be heard
from the lower part of the vehicle. This is
not a malfunction.
SSD0488
WARNING
. Do not stop or park the vehicle
over flammable materials such as
dry grass, waste paper or rags.
They may ignite and cause a fire.
. Never leave the engine running
while the vehicle is unattended.
. Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could
unknowingly activate switches
or controls. Unattended children
could become involved in serious
accidents.
. To help avoid risk of injury or
death through unintended opera-
tion of the vehicle and/or its
systems, do not leave children,
people who require the assis-
tance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle.
Additionally, the temperature in-
side a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk
of injury or death to people and
pets.
. Safe parking procedures require
that both the parking brake be
applied and the transmission
placed into P (Park). Failure to
do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away
and result in an accident.
. Make sure the shift lever cannot
be moved without depressing the
foot brake pedal.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Push the park button to shift to the P
(Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from roll-
ing into the street when parked on a
sloping drive way, it is a good practice
to turn the wheels as illustrated.
.
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:
Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
.
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:
Turn the wheels away from the
curb and move the vehicle back
until the curb side wheel gently
touches the curb.
.
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB:
Turn the wheels toward the side of
the road so the vehicle will move
away from the center of the road if
it moves.
Starting and driving 5-153
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
5-154 Starting and driving
4. Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
WARNING
. If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the
power assist for the steering will
not work. Steering will be harder
to operate.
. When the electric power steering
warning light illuminates with the
engine running, the power assist
for the steering will cease opera-
tion. You will still have control of
the vehicle but the steering will
be harder to operate.
The electric power steering is designed to
provide power assist while driving to
operate the steering wheel with light
force.
When SPORT mode is selected, the steer-
ing wheel effort is moderately increased
for a sporty feel. (See “SPORT mode” (P.5-
34).)
When the steering wheel is operated
repeatedly or continuously while parking
or driving at a very low speed, the power
assist for the steering wheel will be
reduced. This is to prevent overheating
of the electric power steering and protect
it from getting damaged. While the power
assist is reduced, steering wheel opera-
tion will become heavy. If the steering
wheel operation is still performed, the
electric power steering may stop and the
electric power steering warning light
will illuminate. In a safe location, stop the
engine and place the ignition switch in
the OFF position. When the temperature
of the electric power steering goes down,
the power assist level will return to
normal. Avoid repeating such steering
wheel operations that could cause the
electric power steering to overheat.
You may hear a noise when the steering
wheel is operated quickly. However, this is
not a malfunction.
If the electric power steering warning
light illuminates while the engine is run-
ning, it may indicate the electric power
steering is not functioning properly and
may need servicing. Have the electric
power steering checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. (See “Electric power steer-
ing warning light” (P.2-17).)
When the electric power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine running,
the power assist for the steering will
cease operation. You will still have control
of the vehicle. However, greater steering
effort is needed, especially in sharp turns
and at low speeds.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
BRAKING PRECAUTIONS
The brake system has two separate
hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunc-
tions, you will still have braking at two
wheels.
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you
can stop the vehicle by depressing the
brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-
sure on the brake pedal will be required to
stop the vehicle and the stopping dis-
tance will be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This will cause over-
heating of the brakes, wearing out the
brake pads faster and reduce gas mile-
age.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent
the brakes from overheating, reduce
speed and downshift to a lower gear
before going down a slope or long grade.
Overheated brakes may reduce braking
performance and could result in loss of
vehicle control.
WARNING
. While driving on a slippery sur-
face, be careful when braking,
accelerating or downshifting.
Abrupt braking or accelerating
could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.
. If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the
power assist for the brakes will
not work. Braking will be harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven
through water, the brakes may get wet.
As a result, your braking distance will be
longer and the vehicle may pull to one
side during braking.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly tapping the brake
pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving
the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake pads when-
ever the stopping effect of the parking
brake is weakened or whenever the
parking brake pads and/or calipers/ro-
tors are replaced, in order to assure the
best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Starting and driving 5-155
BRAKE SYSTEM
5-156 Starting and driving
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is
activated generating greater braking
force than a conventional brake booster
even with light pedal force.
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to
assist braking operation and is not a
collision warning or avoidance de-
vice. It is the driver’s responsibility to
stay alert, drive safely and be in
control of the vehicle at all times.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
. The Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) is a sophisticated device,
but it cannot prevent accidents
resulting from careless or dan-
gerous driving techniques. It can
help maintain vehicle control dur-
ing braking on slippery surfaces.
Remember that stopping dis-
tances on slippery surfaces will
be longer than on normal sur-
faces even with ABS. Stopping
distances may also be longer on
rough, gravel or snow covered
roads, or if you are using tire
chains. Always maintain a safe
distance from the vehicle in front
of you. Ultimately, the driver is
responsible for safety.
. Tire type and condition may also
affect braking effectiveness.
— When replacing tires, install
the specified size of tires on
all four wheels.
— When installing a spare tire,
make sure that it is the proper
size and type as specified on
the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label. See “Tire and Load-
ing Information label” (P.10-
13) of this manual.
— For detailed information, see
“Wheels and tires” (P.8-31) of
this manual.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) con-
trols the brakes so the wheels do not lock
during hard braking or when braking on
slippery surfaces. The system detects the
rotation speed at each wheel and varies
the brake fluid pressure to prevent each
wheel from locking and sliding. By pre-
venting each wheel from locking, the
system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving
and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes.
The ABS will operate to prevent the
wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle
to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing
so may result in increased stopping
distances.
Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, elec-
tric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a
computer. The computer has a built-in
diagnostic feature that tests the system
each time you start the engine and move
the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a
pulsation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and does not indicate a malfunc-
tion. If the computer senses a malfunc-
BRAKE ASSIST
tion, it switches the ABS off and illumi-
nates the ABS warning light on the
instrument panel. The brake system then
operates normally, but without anti-lock
assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during
the self-test or while driving, have the
vehicle checked. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6
MPH (5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies
according to road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more
wheels are close to locking up, the
actuator rapidly applies and releases
hydraulic pressure. This action is similar
to pumping the brakes very quickly. You
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise from under the hood or
feel a vibration from the actuator when it
is operating. This is normal and indicates
that the ABS is operating properly. How-
ever, the pulsation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care
is required while driving.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-
tem uses various sensors to monitor
driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under
certain driving conditions, the VDC sys-
tem helps to perform the following func-
tions.
. Controls brake pressure to reduce
wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel
so power is transferred to a non
slipping drive wheel on the same axle.
. Controls brake pressure and engine
output to reduce drive wheel slip
based on vehicle speed (traction con-
trol function).
. Controls brake pressure at individual
wheels and engine output to help the
driver maintain control of the vehicle
in the following conditions:
— understeer (vehicle tends to not
follow the steered path despite
increased steering input)
— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due
to certain road or driving condi-
tions).
The VDC system can help the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle, but it
cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in
all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the slip
indicator light
in the instrument panel
flashes so note the following:
. The road may be slippery or the
system may determine some action
is required to help keep the vehicle on
the steered path.
. You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration
from under the hood. This is normal
and indicates that the VDC system is
working properly.
. Adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
slip indicator light
illuminates in the
instrument panel. The VDC system auto-
matically turns off.
The vehicle information display is used to
turn off the VDC system. The VDC off
indicator
illuminates to indicate the
VDC system is off. When the VDC system
is turned off, the VDC system still oper-
ates to prevent one drive wheel from
slipping by transferring power to a non
slipping drive wheel. The slip indicator
light
flashes if this occurs. All other
VDC functions are off, and the slip in-
dicator light
will not flash. The VDC
system is automatically reset to on when
the ignition switch is placed in the off
position then back to the on position.
See “Slip indicator light” (P.2-20) and
“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indi-
cator light” (P.2-20).
Starting and driving 5-157
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM
5-158 Starting and driving
The computer has a built-in diagnostic
feature that tests the system each time
you start the engine and move the vehicle
forward or in reverse at a slow speed.
When the self-test occurs, you may hear a
“clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the
brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
. The VDC system is designed to
help improve driving stability but
does not prevent accidents due
to abrupt steering operation at
high speeds or by careless or
dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be
especially careful when driving
and cornering on slippery sur-
faces and always drive carefully.
. Do not modify the vehicle’s sus-
pension. If suspension parts such
as shock absorbers, struts,
springs, stabilizer bars, bushings
and wheels are not NISSAN re-
commended for your vehicle or
are extremely deteriorated, the
VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely
affect vehicle handling perfor-
mance, and the slip indicator light
may illuminate.
. If brake related parts such as
brake pads, rotors and calipers
are not NISSAN recommended or
are extremely deteriorated, the
VDC system may not operate
properly and the slip indicator
light
may illuminate.
. If engine control related parts are
not NISSAN recommended or are
extremely deteriorated, the slip
indicator light
may illuminate.
. When driving on extremely in-
clined surfaces such as higher
banked corners, the VDC system
may not operate properly and the
slip indicator light
may illu-
minate. Do not drive on these
types of roads.
. When driving on an unstable sur-
face such as a turntable, ferry,
elevator or ramp, the slip indica-
tor light
may illuminate. This
is not a malfunction. Restart the
engine after driving onto a stable
surface.
. If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are
used, the VDC system may not
operate properly and the slip
indicator light
may illuminate.
. The VDC system is not a substi-
tute for winter tires or tire chains
on a snow covered road.
HOW TO TURN OFF THE VDC SYS-
TEM
The vehicle should be driven with the
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ON
for most driving conditions.
When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
the VDC system reduces the engine out-
put to reduce wheel spin. The engine
speed will be reduced even if the accel-
erator is depressed to the floor. If max-
imum engine power is needed to free a
stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
WAF0521X
Example
To turn off the VDC system, perform the
following steps in the vehicle information
display.
1. Push the
button on the
steering wheel until “Settings” appears
and then push the job dial.
2. Use the scroll dial to select “VDC
Setting” and then push it.
3. Select “System” and push the scroll
dial. The
indicator light will illumi-
nate.
Turn “VDC Setting” back on in the vehicle
information display or restart the engine
to turn on the VDC system.
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through
turns, the system optimizes the distribu-
tion of force to each of the four wheels
depending on the radius of the turn.
WARNING
. The VDC system is designed to
help the driver maintain stability
but does not prevent accidents
due to abrupt steering operation
at high speeds or by careless or
dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be
especially careful when driving
and cornering on slippery sur-
faces and always drive carefully.
. Do not modify the vehicle’s sus-
pension. If suspension parts such
as shock absorbers, struts,
springs, stabilizer bars, bushings
and wheels are not NISSAN re-
commended for your vehicle or
are extremely deteriorated, the
VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely
affect vehicle handling perfor-
mance, and the
indicator light
may flash or both the
and
indicator lights may illuminate.
. If brake related parts such as
brake pads, rotors and calipers
are not NISSAN recommended or
are extremely deteriorated, the
VDC system may not operate
properly and both the
and
indicator lights may illumi-
nate.
. If engine control related parts are
not NISSAN recommended or are
extremely deteriorated, both the
and indicator lights may
illuminate.
. When driving on extremely in-
clined surfaces such as higher
banked corners, the VDC system
may not operate properly and the
indicator light may flash or
both the
and indicator
lights may illuminate. Do not
drive on these types of roads.
. When driving on an unstable sur-
face such as a turntable, ferry,
elevator or ramp, the
indica-
tor light may flash or both the
and indicator lights may illu-
minate. This is not a malfunction.
Restart the engine after driving
onto a stable surface.
. If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are
Starting and driving 5-159
5-160 Starting and driving
used, the VDC system may not
operate properly and the
indicator light may flash or both
the
and indicator lights
may illuminate.
. The VDC system is not a substi-
tute for winter tires or tire chains
on a snow covered road.
The chassis control includes the following
functions:
. Intelligent Trace Control
. Active Ride Control
INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL
This system senses driving based on the
driver’s steering and acceleration/braking
patterns, and controls brake pressure at
individual wheels to aid tracing at corners
and promote smooth vehicle response.
The amount of brake control is changed
based on the drive mode selector. When
the VDC system is turned off, Intelligent
Trace Control is also turned off.
When Intelligent Trace Control is not
functioning properly, the master warning
light illuminates, and the warning mes-
sage “Chassis Control System Error” will
also appear in the vehicle information
display.
If the chassis control warning message
appears in the vehicle information dis-
play, it may indicate that Intelligent Trace
Control is not functioning properly. Have
the system checked as soon as possible.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. (See “Vehicle in-
formation display warnings and indica-
tors” (P.2-34).)
WARNING
Intelligent Trace Control may not be
effective depending on the driving
condition. Always drive carefully and
attentively.
When Intelligent Trace Control is operat-
ing, you may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise. This is normal and
indicates that Intelligent Trace Control is
operating properly. You may also feel
deceleration when Intelligent Trace Con-
trol is operating. However, this is not a
malfunction.
ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL
This system senses upper body motion
and controls four wheel brake pressure.
This will enhance ride comfort in an effort
to restrain uncomfortable upper body
movement when passing over undulated
road surfaces. When the VDC system is
turned off, Active Ride Control is also
turned off.
If the chassis control warning message
appears in the vehicle information dis-
play, it may indicate that Active Ride
Control is not functioning properly. Have
the system checked as soon as possible.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
CHASSIS CONTROL
dealer for this service.
WARNING
Active Ride Control may not be ef-
fective depending on the driving
condition. Always drive carefully
and attentively.
When Active Ride Control is operating,
you may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise. This is normal and
indicates that Active Ride Control is
operating properly. You may also feel
deceleration when Active Ride Control is
operating. However, this is not a malfunc-
tion.
WARNING
. Never rely solely on the hill start
assist system to prevent the ve-
hicle from moving backward on a
hill. Always drive carefully and
attentively. Depress the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped
on a steep hill. Be especially care-
ful when stopped on a hill on
frozen or muddy roads. Failure
to prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards may result in a loss of
control of the vehicle and possi-
ble serious injury or death.
. The hill start assist system is not
designed to hold the vehicle at a
standstill on a hill. Depress the
brake pedal when the vehicle is
stopped on a steep hill. Failure to
do so may cause the vehicle to
roll backwards and may result in
a collision or serious personal
injury.
. The hill start assist system may
not prevent the vehicle from roll-
ing backwards on a hill under all
load or road conditions. Always
be prepared to depress the brake
pedal to prevent the vehicle from
rolling backwards. Failure to do
so may result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
The hill start assist system automatically
keeps the brakes applied to help prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards in the
time it takes the driver to release the
brake pedal and apply the accelerator
when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.
The hill start assist system will operate
automatically under the following condi-
tions:
. The transmission is shifted to a for-
ward or reverse gear.
. The vehicle is stopped completely on a
hill by applying the brake.
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.
After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to
roll back and the hill start assist system
will stop operating completely.
The hill start assist system will not
operate when the transmission is shifted
to the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position or
on a flat and level road.
When the slip indicator light illuminates in
the meter, the hill start assist system will
not operate. (See “Slip indicator light” (P.2-
20).)
Starting and driving 5-161
HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
5-162 Starting and driving
WAF0648X
Example
The sonar system sounds a tone to
inform the driver of obstacles around
the vehicle using the sonar sensors
located in the front and rear bumpers.
When the sonar system is turned on, the
sonar view will automatically appear in
the vehicle information display.
WARNING
. The sonar system is a conveni-
ence but it is not a substitute for
proper parking.
. The driver is always responsible
for safety during parking and
other maneuvers. Always look
around and check that it is safe
to do so before parking.
. Read and understand the limita-
tions of the sonar system as
contained in this section. The
colors of the sonar indicator in-
dicates different distances to the
object.
. Inclement weather or ultrasonic
sources such as an automatic car
wash, a truck’s compressed-air
brakes or a pneumatic drill may
affect the function of the system;
this may include reduced perfor-
mance or a false activation.
. The sonar system is designed as
an aid to the driver in detecting
large stationary objects to help
avoid damaging the vehicle.
. The sonar system is not designed
to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. Always move
slowly. The system will not detect
small objects below the bumper/
vehicle side, and may not detect
objects close to the bumper/ve-
hicle side or on the ground.
. The sonar system may not detect
the following objects: fluffy ob-
jects such as snow, cloth, cotton,
glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such
as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or
wedge-shaped objects.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of ob-
stacles or false alarms.
SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)
CAUTION
. Excessive noise (such as audio
system volume or an open vehi-
cle window) will interfere with the
tone and it may not be heard.
. Keep the sonar sensors (located
on the bumper fascia) free from
snow, ice and large accumula-
tions of dirt. Do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects. If the
sensors are covered, the accuracy
of the sonar function will be
diminished.
WAF0538X
Center sonar sensors
Corner sonar sensors
Side sonar sensors (if so equipped)
SYSTEM OPERATION
For models without side sonar sensors:
The system informs with a visual and
audible alert of:
. front obstacles when the shift lever is
in the D (Drive) position
. front and rear obstacles when the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position
For models with side sonar sensors:
The system informs with a visual and
audible alert of obstacles in the traveling
direction, when the sensor detects them
within its detection range.
The system informs with a visual and
audible alert of potential obstacles near
the side of the vehicle. The driver will only
be notified of side obstacles located out
of detection range of the front and rear
sonar sensors if they were previously
detected as the vehicle traveled towards
them.
How the system alert of obstacles:
The system is deactivated at speeds
above 6 MPH (10 km/h). It is reactivated
at lower speeds.
The intermittent tone will stop after
several seconds when the obstacle is
identified only with the center sensor.
The tone will stop when the obstacle gets
away from the vehicle.
When the object is detected, the indicator
(green) appears and blinks and the tone
sounds intermittently. When the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the color of
the indicator turns yellow and the rate of
the blinking increases. When the vehicle is
very close to the object, the indicator
stops blinking and turns red, and the tone
sounds continuously.
Starting and driving 5-163
5-164 Starting and driving
WAF0523X
Example
When the vehicle moves closer to an
obstacle, the sonar indicator (detected
area) appears in the vehicle information
display.
WAF0524X
Example
The sonar indicator also appears on the
camera view of the center display.
WAF0412X
Steering-wheel-mounted control (left
side)
Vehicle information display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE SO-
NAR SYSTEM
The system is automatically activated
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the shift lever is in the D
(Drive) or R (Reverse) position.
Perform the following steps to set up the
sonar system function.
1. Push the
button until “Set-
tings” appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display and then push the scroll
dial. Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance.” Then push the scroll dial.
2. Select “Parking Aids” and push the
scroll dial.
3. Use the scroll dial to navigate in the
menu and select or change an item:
.
Moving Object
— Turns ON/OFF the Moving Object
Detection (MOD) (See “Moving Ob-
ject Detection (MOD)” (P.4-21).)
.
Auto Show Sonar
— Shows the sonar display in the
vehicle information display when
the sonar activates
.
Front
— Turns ON/OFF the front sonar
sensors
.
Rear
— Turns ON/OFF the rear sonar
sensors
.
Side (if so equipped)
— Turns ON/OFF the side sonar
sensors
.
Distance
— Changes the sonar sensor’s de-
tection distance to “Long,” “Med-
Starting and driving 5-165
5-166 Starting and driving
ium” or “Short”
.
Volume
— Changes the volume of the tone
sound to “High,” “Medium” or “Low”
SONAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the sonar system. Failure to
operate the vehicle in accordance
with these system limitations could
result in serious injury or death.
. Read and understand the limita-
tions of the sonar system as
contained in this section. Incle-
ment weather may affect the
function of the sonar system; this
may include reduced perfor-
mance or a false activation.
. The sonar system is deactivated
at speeds above 6 MPH (10 km/h).
It is reactivated at lower speeds.
. Inclement weather or ultrasonic
sources such as an automatic car
wash, a truck’s compressed-air
brakes or a pneumatic drill may
affect the function of the sonar
system; this may include reduced
performance or a false activation.
. The sonar system is not designed
to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. Always move
slowly. The system will not detect
small objects below the bumper
or on the ground.
. The sonar system may not detect
the following objects: fluffy ob-
jects such as snow, cloth, cotton,
glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such
as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or
wedge-shaped objects; complex-
shaped objects or multiple ob-
jects in close.
. The sonar system may not detect
objects at speed above 3 MPH (5
km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
. The sonar system may not detect
the following objects:
— Pedestrians who approach
the vehicle from the side
— Objects placed next to the
vehicle
. The sonar system may not oper-
ate in the following conditions:
— When rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc.
adheres to the sonar sensor.
— When a loud sound is heard in
the area around the vehicle.
— When the surface of the ob-
stacle is diagonal to the front
or rear of the vehicle.
— When a sonar sensor or the
area around the sensor is
extremely hot or cold.
. The sonar system may uninten-
tionally operate in the following
conditions:
— When there is overgrown
grass in the area around the
vehicle.
— When there is a structure (for
example, a wall, a toll gate
equipment, a narrow tunnel or
a parking lot gate) near the
side of the vehicle.
— When there are bumps, pro-
trusions or manhole covers on
the road surface.
— When the vehicle drives
through a draped flag or a
curtain.
— When there is an accumula-
tion of snow or ice behind the
vehicle.
— When driving on a steep hill.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-
ABLE
When sonar blockage is detected, the
system will be deactivated automatically.
The system is not available until the
conditions no longer exist.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by
temporary ambient conditions such as
splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked
condition may also be caused by objects
such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
sonar sensors.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer
exist, the system will resume automati-
cally.
WAF0649X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sonar sensors and
are located
on the front and rear bumpers.
. Always keep the area near the sonar
sensors clean.
. If the sonar sensors are dirty, wipe
them off with a soft cloth while being
careful to not damage them.
. The sonar sensors may be blocked by
temporary ambient conditions such
as splashing water, mist or fog. The
blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt
obstructing the sonar sensors. Check
for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the sonar sensors.
. Do not subject the area around the
sonar sensors to strong impact. Also,
do not remove or disassemble the
sonar sensors. If the sonar sensors
and peripheral areas are deformed in
an accident, etc., have the sonar
sensors checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
. Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install acces-
sories or apply additional paint on
the sonar sensors and their surround-
ing areas. This may cause a malfunc-
tion or improper operation.
. When washing the vehicle using a
high-pressure washer, do not apply
direct washer pressure on the sonar
sensors. This may cause a malfunction
of the sonar sensors.
Starting and driving 5-167
5-168 Starting and driving
WAF0072X
The RSS sounds a tone to inform the
driver of obstacles near the rear bumper.
When the RSS is turned on, the sonar view
will automatically appear in the vehicle
information display.
WARNING
. The RSS is a convenience but it is
not a substitute for proper park-
ing.
. The driver is always responsible
for safety during parking and
other maneuvers. Always look
around and check that it is safe
to do so before parking.
. Read and understand the limita-
tions of the RSS as contained in
this section. The colors of the
sonar indicator indicates differ-
ent distances to the object.
. Inclement weather or ultrasonic
sources such as an automatic car
wash, a truck’s compressed-air
brakes or a pneumatic drill may
affect the function of the system;
this may include reduced perfor-
mance or a false activation.
. The RSS is designed as an aid to
the driver in detecting large sta-
tionary objects to help avoid da-
maging the vehicle.
. The RSS is not designed to pre-
vent contact with small or mov-
ing objects. Always move slowly.
The system will not detect small
objects below the bumper, and
may not detect objects close to
the bumper or on the ground.
. The RSS may not detect the
following objects: fluffy objects
such as snow, cloth, cotton,
glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such
as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or
wedge-shaped objects.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of ob-
stacles or false alarms.
CAUTION
. Excessive noise (such as audio
system volume or an open vehi-
cle window) will interfere with the
tone and it may not be heard.
. Keep the sonar sensors (located
on the rear bumper fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accu-
mulations of dirt. Do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects. If the
sensors are covered, the accuracy
of the sonar function will be
diminished.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The system informs with a visual and
audible alert of rear obstacles when the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
The system is deactivated at speeds
above 6 MPH (10 km/h). It is reactivated
at lower speeds.
The intermittent tone will stop after
several seconds when an obstacle is
REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if so
equipped)
identified only with the corner sensor. The
tone will stop when the obstacle gets
away from the vehicle.
When the object is detected, the indicator
(green) appears and blinks and the tone
sounds intermittently. When the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the color of
the indicator turns yellow and the rate of
the blinking increases. When the vehicle is
very close to the object, the indicator
stops blinking and turns red, and the tone
sounds continuously.
WAF0431X
Example
When the rear of the vehicle moves closer
to an obstacle, the sonar indicator ap-
pears in the vehicle information display.
WAF0434X
Example
The sonar indicator also appears on the
camera view of the center display.
Starting and driving 5-169
5-170 Starting and driving
WAF0412X
Steering-wheel-mounted control (left
side)
Vehicle information display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RSS
The system is automatically activated
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the shift lever is in the R
(Reverse) position.
Perform the following steps to set up the
RSS function:
1. Push the
button until “Set-
tings” appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display and then push the scroll
dial. Use the scroll dial to select “Driver
Assistance.” Then push the scroll dial.
2. Select “Parking Aids” and push the
scroll dial.
3. Use the scroll dial to navigate in the
menu and select or change an item:
.
Moving Object (if so equipped)
— Turns ON/OFF the Moving Object
Detection (MOD) (See “Moving Ob-
ject Detection (MOD)” (P.4-21).)
.
Auto Show Sonar
— Shows the sonar display in the
vehicle information display when
the RSS activates
.
Rear
— Turns ON/OFF the RSS
.
Distance
— Changes the RSS sensor’s detec-
tion distance to “Long,” “Medium” or
“Short”
.
Volume
— Changes the volume of the tone
sound to “High,” “Medium” or “Low”
RSS LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limita-
tions for the RSS. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in
serious injury or death.
. Read and understand the limita-
tions of the RSS as contained in
this section. Inclement weather
may affect the function of the
RSS; this may include reduced
performance or a false activation.
. The system is deactivated at
speeds above 6 MPH (10 km/h).
It is reactivated at lower speeds.
. Inclement weather or ultrasonic
sources such as an automatic car
wash, a truck’s compressed-air
brakes or a pneumatic drill may
affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced perfor-
mance or a false activation.
. The RSS is not designed to pre-
vent contact with small or mov-
ing objects. Always move slowly.
The system will not detect small
objects below the bumper or on
the ground.
. The RSS may not detect the
following objects: fluffy objects
such as snow, cloth, cotton,
glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such
as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or
wedge-shaped objects; complex-
shaped objects or multiple ob-
jects in close.
. The RSS may not detect objects
at speed above 3 MPH (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angu-
lar or moving objects.
. The RSS may not operate in the
following conditions:
— When rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc.
adheres to the sonar sensor.
— When a loud sound is heard in
the area around the vehicle.
— When the surface of the ob-
stacle is diagonal to the rear
of the vehicle.
— When a sonar sensor or the
area around the sensor is
extremely hot or cold.
. The RSS may unintentionally op-
erate in the following conditions:
— When there is overgrown
grass in the area around the
vehicle.
— When there are bumps, pro-
trusions or manhole covers on
the road surface.
— When the vehicle drives
through a draped flag or a
curtain.
— When there is an accumula-
tion of snow or ice behind the
vehicle.
— When driving on a steep hill.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-
ABLE
When sonar blockage is detected, the
system will be deactivated automatically.
The system is not available until the
conditions no longer exist.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by
temporary ambient conditions such as
splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked
condition may also be caused by objects
such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
sonar sensors.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer
exist, the system will resume automati-
cally.
Starting and driving 5-171
5-172 Starting and driving
WAF0647X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sonar sensors
are located on the
rear bumper.
. Always keep the area near the sonar
sensors clean.
. If the sonar sensors are dirty, wipe
them off with a soft cloth while being
careful to not damage them.
. The sonar sensors may be blocked by
temporary ambient conditions such
as splashing water, mist or fog. The
blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt
obstructing the sonar sensors. Check
for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the sonar sensors.
. Do not subject the area around the
sonar sensors to strong impact. Also,
do not remove or disassemble the
sonar sensors. If the sonar sensors
and peripheral areas are deformed in
an accident, etc., have the sonar
sensors checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
. Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install acces-
sories or apply additional paint on
the sonar sensors and their surround-
ing areas. This may cause a malfunc-
tion or improper operation.
. When washing the vehicle using a
high-pressure washer, do not apply
direct washer pressure on the sonar
sensors. This may cause a malfunction
of the sonar sensors.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing,
apply deicer through the key hole. If the
lock becomes frozen, heat the key before
inserting it into the key hole, or use the
Intelligent Key system.
ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that
the outside temperature will drop below
32°F (0°C), check the anti-freeze to assure
proper winter protection. For additional
information, see “Engine cooling system”
(P.8-4) or “Intercooler cooling system”
(P.8-6).
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the
battery fluid may freeze and damage the
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,
the battery should be checked regularly.
For additional information, see “Battery”
(P.8-15).
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
anti-freeze, drain the cooling system,
including the engine block. Refill before
operating the vehicle. For details, see
“Engine cooling system” (P.8-4).
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
TIRE EQUIPMENT
SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance of
these tires will be substantially reduced in
snowy and icy conditions. If you operate
your vehicle on snowy or icy roads,
NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &
SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels. It is recommended you consult a
NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed
rating and availability information.
For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some U.S. states and Canadian provinces
prohibit their use. Check local, state and
provincial laws before installing studded
tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires, on wet or dry
surfaces, may be poorer than that of
non-studded snow tires.
Tire chains may be used. For details, see
“Tire chains” (P.8-38) of this manual.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model
If you install snow tires, they must also be
the same size, brand, construction and
tread pattern on all four wheels.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following
items be carried in the vehicle during
winter:
. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to
remove ice and snow from the win-
dows and wiper blades.
. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of
snow-drifts.
. Extra window washer fluid to refill the
reservoir tank.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
. Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing
rain), very cold snow or ice can be
slick and very hard to drive on.
The vehicle will have much less
traction or “grip” under these
conditions. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until the road is salted
or sanded.
. Whatever the condition, drive
with caution. Accelerate and slow
down with care. If accelerating or
downshifting too fast, the drive
wheels will lose even more trac-
tion.
. Allow more stopping distance
under these conditions. Braking
should be started sooner than on
dry pavement.
. Allow greater following distances
on slippery roads.
. Watch for slippery spots (glare
ice). These may appear on an
otherwise clear road in shaded
areas. If a patch of ice is seen
ahead, brake before reaching it.
Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
. Snow can trap dangerous ex-
haust gases under your vehicle.
Keep snow clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around your vehi-
cle.
Starting and driving 5-173
5-174 Starting and driving
WAF0784X
NOTE:
To operate the active noise cancellation
and active sound enhancement system
properly:
. Do not cover the speakers or woofer.
. Do not cover the microphones.
. Do not change or modify speakers
including the woofer and any audio
related parts such as the amplifier.
. Do not make any modification includ-
ing sound deadening or modifications
around the microphones, speakers or
woofer.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
The active noise cancellation uses micro-
phones
located inside the vehicle to
detect engine booming noises. The sys-
tem then automatically produces a mu-
ted engine booming noise through the
speakers
and woofer to reduce
engine booming noise.
If the microphones
or the area around
it is tapped, abnormal noise may be
output from the speaker.
ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT
The active sound enhancement gener-
ates sounds according to engine speed
and driving modes through the speakers
and woofer to enhance the quality of
the engine sound.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION (if
so equipped)/ACTIVE SOUND
ENHANCEMENT (if so equipped)
6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................... 6-2
Connection to Roadside Assistance ............................. 6-2
Emergency engine shut off .................................................. 6-3
Flat tire .................................................................................................. 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........... 6-3
Changing a flat tire .............................................................. 6-4
Jump starting .............................................................................. 6-11
Push starting ................................................................................ 6-14
If your vehicle overheats .................................................... 6-14
Towing your vehicle ............................................................... 6-16
Towing recommended by NISSAN ..................... 6-17
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ...... 6-18
6-2 In case of emergency
SIC2574
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under
emergency conditions. All turn signal
lights will flash.
WARNING
. If stopping for an emergency, be
sure to move the vehicle well off
the road.
. Do not use the hazard warning
flashers while moving on the
highway unless unusual circum-
stances force you to drive so
slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
. Turn signals do not work when
the hazard warning flasher lights
are on.
The flasher can be actuated with the
ignition switch in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
In the event of a roadside emergency,
Roadside Assistance Service is available
to you. Please refer to your Warranty
Information Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty &
Roadside Assistance Information Booklet
(Canada) for details.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH
CONNECTION TO ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the fol-
lowing procedure:
. Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch 3 consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or
. Push and hold the push-button igni-
tion switch for more than 2 seconds.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit, and the “Tire Pressure
Low - Add Air” warning message is
displayed in the vehicle information dis-
play, one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is
being driven with low tire pressure, the
TPMS will activate and warn you of it by
the low tire pressure warning light. This
system will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h). For more details, see “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible remin-
ders” (P.2-13) and “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS)” (P.5-6).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneu-
vers or abrupt braking, reduce
vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-
ing with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire
failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in ser-
ious personal injury. Check the
tire pressure for all four tires.
Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low
tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may be flat. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with
a spare tire as soon as possible.
. Since the spare tire is not
equipped with the TPMS, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for ap-
proximately 1 minute. The light
will remain on after 1 minute.
Have your tires replaced and/or
TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for these
services.
. Replacing tires with those not
originally specified by NISSAN
could affect the proper operation
In case of emergency 6-3
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE
6-4 In case of emergency
of the TPMS.
. Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction
of the tire pressure sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc-
tions below.
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road
and away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake.
4. Push the park button to engage the P
(Park) position.
5. Turn off the engine.
6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,
and to signal professional road assis-
tance personnel that you need assis-
tance.
7. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
. Make sure the parking brake is
securely applied and the shift
position is placed in the P (Park)
position.
. Never change tires when the ve-
hicle is on a slope, ice or slippery
areas. This is hazardous.
. Never change tires if oncoming
traffic is close to your vehicle.
Wait for professional road assis-
tance.
MCE0001A
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front
and back of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the flat tire to prevent the vehicle
from moving when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the
vehicle may move and result in
personal injury.
WAG0077X
Models with adjustable luggage floor
Getting the spare tire and tools
The jack, jacking tools and the spare tire
are stored in the storage in the luggage
area.
WAG0064X
To remove the jack:
1. Remove the storage door by pressing
the two release tabs simultaneously.
2. Turn the jack lever in a counter-clock-
wise direction, and then remove the
jack slowly.
When storing the jack, set the jack slowly
back, then turn the jack lever in a clock-
wise direction until the jack is fixed.
CAUTION
When removing the jack, be careful
that your hands do not hit against
the vehicle. Otherwise, this could
result in personal injury.
NOTE:
. When storing the jack, do not over-
tighten the jack lever using a screw
driver. Doing so could cause defor-
mation of the installation area for
the jack.
. Do not allow the jack to contact the
interior parts. Doing so could cause
damage to the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-5
6-6 In case of emergency
WAG0089X
Models with adjustable luggage floor
Removing the spare tire and tools
The spare tire and tools are located under
the luggage board(s).
To access the storage area:
1. Remove the luggage floorboard(s).
Models with the adjustable luggage
floor: Release the locks before remov-
ing the rear (outer) luggage board.
(See “Adjustable luggage floor” (P.2-75)
for details.)
Models with the single luggage board:
Disengage the retainer pins. (See “Sin-
gle luggage board” (P.2-75).)
2. Remove the floor carpet (if so
equipped).
Remove the tools from the tool bag
located in the storage area.
JVE0373X
Remove the spare tire by removing the
clamp holding it.
WAG0067X
Example
Removing the spare tire with sub-
woofer (if so equipped)
1. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclock-
wise.
2. Once loosened, remove the bolt.
WAG0068X
Example
3. Place the sub-woofer in the left corner
of the cargo space.
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Once the flat tire is exchanged with
the spare tire, store the flat tire where
the spare was located.
6. Place the sub-woofer inside the flat
tire.
7. Turn the bolt clockwise to tighten.
Jacking up the vehicle and remov-
ing the damaged tire
WARNING
. Never get under the vehicle while
it is supported only by the jack. If
it is necessary to work under the
vehicle, support it with safety
stands.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do
not use the jack provided with
your vehicle on other vehicles.
The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire
change.
. Use the correct jack-up points.
Never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
. Never jack up the vehicle more
than necessary.
. Never use blocks on or under the
jack.
. Do not start or run the engine
while vehicle is on the jack, as it
may cause the vehicle to move.
. Do not allow passengers to stay
in the vehicle while it is on the
In case of emergency 6-7
6-8 In case of emergency
jack.
Carefully read the caution label at-
tached to the jack body and the follow-
ing instructions.
JVE0165X
Jack-up point
1. Place the jack directly under the jack-
up point as illustrated so the top of
the jack contacts the vehicle at the
jack-up point. Align the jack head
between the two notches in the front
or the rear as shown. Also fit the
groove of the jack head between the
notches as shown.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
SCE0504
2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two
turns by turning it counterclockwise
with the wheel nut wrench. Do not
remove the wheel nuts until the tire
is off the ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the
jack lever and rod with both hands as
shown above. Carefully raise the ve-
hicle until the tire clears the ground.
Remove the wheel nuts, and then
remove the tire.
SCE0933
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. (See specific instructions
under the heading “Wheels and tires”
(P.8-31).)
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the sur-
face between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
Check that all the wheel nuts contact
the wheel surface horizontally.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in
the sequence illustrated (
, , , , ),
more than 2 times, until they are tight.
In case of emergency 6-9
6-10 In case of emergency
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence illu-
strated. Lower the vehicle completely.
WARNING
. Incorrect wheel nuts or impro-
perly tightened wheel nuts can
cause the wheel to become loose
or come off. This could cause an
accident.
. Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts. This could
cause the nuts to become loose.
. Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-
tened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that the wheel nuts
be tightened to specifications at
each lubrication interval.
.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD
pressure.
COLD pressure:
After the vehicle has been parked for
3 hours or more or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on
the Tire and Loading Information
label affixed to the driver side center
pillar.
Stowing the damaged tire and the
tools
1. Securely store the jack, tools and the
damaged tire in the storage area.
2. Replace the luggage boards and cov-
er.
3. Close the liftgate.
WARNING
. Always make sure that the spare
tire and jacking equipment are
properly secured after use. Such
items can become dangerous
projectiles in an accident or sud-
den stop.
. The spare tire is designed for
emergency use. See specific in-
structions under the heading
“Wheels and tires” (P.8-31).
To start your engine with a booster
battery, the instructions and precautions
below must be followed.
WARNING
. If done incorrectly, jump starting
can lead to a battery explosion,
resulting in severe injury or
death. It could also damage your
vehicle.
. Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the
battery. Keep all sparks and
flames away from the battery.
. Do not allow battery fluid to come
into contact with eyes, skin,
clothing or painted surfaces. Bat-
tery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric
acid solution which can cause
severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything,
immediately flush the contacted
area with water.
. Keep the battery out of the reach
of children.
. The booster battery must be
rated at 12 volts. Use of an im-
properly rated battery can da-
mage your vehicle.
. Whenever working on or near a
battery, always wear suitable eye
protectors (for example, goggles
or industrial safety spectacles)
and remove rings, metal bands,
or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump start-
ing.
. Do not attempt to jump start a
frozen battery. It could explode
and cause serious injury.
. Your vehicle has an automatic
engine cooling fan. It could come
on at any time. Keep hands and
other objects away from it.
In case of emergency 6-11
JUMP STARTING
6-12 In case of emergency
WAG0124X
PR25DD engine
WAG0123X
KR15DDT engine
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in
damage to the charging system and
cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle
, position the two vehicles (
and ) to bring their batteries into
close proximity to each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to
touch.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Push the park button to engage the P
(Park) position.
4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical
systems (headlights, heater, air condi-
tioner, etc.).
5. Connect jumper cables in the se-
quence as illustrated (
? ? ?
).
CAUTION
. Always connect positive (+) to
positive (+) and negative (−) to
body ground (for example, as
illustrated), not to the battery.
. Make sure the jumper cables do
not touch moving parts in the
engine compartment and that
the cable clamps do not contact
any other metal.
6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
7. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle
at about 2,000 rpm, and
start the engine of the vehicle
being
jump started.
In case of emergency 6-13
6-14 In case of emergency
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor en-
gaged for more than 10 seconds. If
the engine does not start right away,
place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and wait 10 seconds before
trying again.
8. After starting your engine, carefully
disconnect the negative cable and
then the positive cable (
? ?
? ).
Do not attempt to start the engine by
pushing.
CAUTION
. Continuously Variable Transmis-
sion (CVT) models cannot be
push-started or tow-started. At-
tempting to do so may cause
transmission damage.
. Three-way catalyst equipped
models should not be started by
pushing since the three way cat-
alyst may be damaged.
. Never try to start the vehicle by
towing it; when the engine starts,
the forward surge could cause
the vehicle to collide with the
tow vehicle.
WARNING
. Never continue driving if your
vehicle overheats. Doing so could
cause a vehicle fire.
. Never open the hood if steam is
coming out.
. Never remove the radiator or
coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is hot. If the radiator or
coolant reservoir cap is removed
when the engine is hot, pressur-
ized hot water will spurt out and
possibly cause burning, scalding
or serious injury.
. If steam or coolant is coming
from the engine, stand clear of
the vehicle to prevent getting
burned.
. The engine cooling fan will start
at anytime when the coolant
temperature exceeds preset de-
grees.
. Be careful not to allow your
hands, hair, jewelry or clothing
to come into contact with, or to
get caught in the cooling fan or
drive belts.
PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by
an extremely high temperature gauge
reading), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take
the following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road
and apply the parking brake.
2. Push the park button to shift to the P
(Park) position.
Do not stop the engine.
3. Turn off the air conditioner (if so
equipped). Open all the windows,
move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot
and fan control to high speed.
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
for steam or coolant escaping from
the radiator or coolant reservoir be-
fore opening the hood. (If steam or
coolant is escaping, turn off the en-
gine.) Do not open the hood further
until no steam or coolant can be seen.
5. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent get-
ting burned.
6. Visually check the drive belt for da-
mage or looseness. Also check if the
cooling fan is running. The radiator
hoses and radiator should not leak
water. If coolant is leaking or the
cooling fan does not run, stop the
engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands,
hair, jewelry or clothing to come into
contact with, or get caught in, engine
belts or the engine cooling fan. The
engine cooling fan can start at any
time.
7. After the engine cools down, check
the coolant level in the reservoir with
the engine running. Add coolant to
the reservoir if necessary. Have your
vehicle repaired. It is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
In case of emergency 6-15
6-16 In case of emergency
When towing your vehicle, all jurisdic-
tional and local regulations for towing
must be followed. Incorrect towing equip-
ment could damage your vehicle. Towing
instructions are available from a NISSAN
dealer. Local service operators are gen-
erally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure
proper towing and to prevent accidental
damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom-
mends that you have a service operator
tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the
following precautions.
WARNING
. Never ride in a vehicle that is
being towed.
. Never get under your vehicle after
it has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
. When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering sys-
tem and powertrain are in work-
ing condition. If any of these
conditions apply, dollies or a
flatbed tow truck must be used.
. Always attach safety chains be-
fore towing.
(See “Flat towing for All–Wheel Drive
vehicle” (P.10-28) or “Flat towing for
Front-Wheel Drive vehicle” (P.10-28).)
NOTE:
If the battery is completely drained, the
transmission will not manually shift to
other positions. For shifting to other
positions, charge the battery or supply
power following the jump starting pro-
cedure. Push the park button to shift to
the P (Park) position before shifting to
other positions.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
SCE0952
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or the
vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as
illustrated.
CAUTION
Never tow All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
models equipped with a Continu-
ously Variable Transmission (CVT)
with any of the wheels on the ground
as this may cause serious and ex-
pensive damage to the transfer case
and transmission.
In case of emergency 6-17
6-18 In case of emergency
SCE0950
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off
the ground or place the vehicle on a flat
bed truck as illustrated.
NOTE:
If the electronic parking brake is re-
leased, the rear wheels can be
grounded while towing. If the electronic
parking brake is not released, towing
dollies should be used. For additional
information, refer to “Parking brake”
(P.5-25).
CAUTION
Never tow CVT models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels
on the ground (forward or back-
ward), as this may cause serious
and expensive damage to the trans-
mission. If it is necessary to tow the
vehicle with the rear wheels raised,
always use towing dollies under the
front wheels.
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious
personal injury or death when reco-
vering a stuck vehicle:
. Contact a professional towing
service to recover the vehicle if
you have any questions regard-
ing the recovery procedure.
. Tow chains or cables must be
attached only to main structural
members of the vehicle.
. Do not use the vehicle tie-downs
to tow or free a stuck vehicle.
. Only use devices specifically de-
signed for vehicle recovery and
follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions.
. Always pull the recovery device
straight out from the front of the
vehicle. Never pull at an angle.
. Route recovery devices so they
do not touch any part of the
vehicle except the attachment
point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use a tow strap or other device
designed specifically for vehicle recovery.
Always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for the recovery device.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
. Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
. Do not spin your tires at high
speed. This could cause them to
explode and result in serious in-
jury. Parts of your vehicle could
also overheat and be damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system.
2. Make sure the area in front and
behind the vehicle is clear of obstruc-
tions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left
to clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
.
Shift back and forth between R
(Reverse) and D (Drive).
.
Apply the accelerator as little as
possible to maintain the rocking
motion.
.
Release the accelerator pedal be-
fore shifting between R and D.
.
Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional tow-
ing service to remove the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-19
6-20 In case of emergency
MEMO
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ........................................................................... 7-2
Washing ......................................................................................... 7-2
Waxing ............................................................................................ 7-3
Removing spots ...................................................................... 7-3
Underbody ................................................................................... 7-3
Glass ................................................................................................. 7-3
Wheels ............................................................................................. 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels ..................................................... 7-3
Chrome parts ............................................................................ 7-4
Tire dressing .............................................................................. 7-4
Cleaning interior ........................................................................... 7-4
Air fresheners ......................................................................... 7-5
Floor mats ................................................................................. 7-5
Seat belts ................................................................................... 7-7
Cleaning the seat tracks ............................................... 7-7
Corrosion protection ................................................................ 7-7
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion .................................................................. 7-7
Environmental factors influence the rate
of corrosion .............................................................................. 7-7
To protect your vehicle from corrosion............ 7-8
7-2 Appearance and care
In order to maintain the appearance of
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
. after a rainfall to prevent possible
damage from acid rain
. after driving on coastal roads
. when contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface
. when dust or mud builds up on the
surface
Whenever possible, store or park your
vehicle inside a garage or in a covered
area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park
in a shady area or protect the vehicle with
a body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint
surface when putting on or removing
the body cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet
sponge and plenty of water. Clean the
vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a
special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lu-
kewarm (never hot) water.
CAUTION
. Do not concentrate water spray
directly on the sonar sensors on
the bumper as this will result in
damage to the sensors. Do not
use pressure washers capable of
spraying water over 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) to wash your vehicle.
Use of high-pressure washers
over, 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can
result in damage to or removal
of paint or graphics. Avoid using a
high-pressure washer closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle.
Always use a wide-angle nozzle
only, keep the nozzle moving and
do not concentrate the water
spray on any one area.
. Do not use car washes that use
acid in the detergent. Some car
washes, especially brushless
ones, use some acid for cleaning.
The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, caus-
ing them to crack. This could
affect their appearance, and also
could cause them not to function
properly. Always check with your
car wash to confirm that acid is
not used.
. Do not wash the vehicle with
strong household soap, strong
chemical detergents, gasoline or
solvents.
. Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or while the vehicle body
is hot, as the surface may become
water-spotted.
. Avoid using tight-napped or
rough cloths, such as washing
mitts. Care must be taken when
removing caked-on dirt or other
foreign substances so the paint
surface is not scratched or da-
maged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty
of clean water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the
doors, hatches and hood are particularly
vulnerable to the effects of road salt.
Therefore, these areas must be regularly
cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in
the lower edge of the door are open.
Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash
away road salt.
Avoid leaving water spots on the paint
surface by using a damp chamois to dry
the vehicle.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove
built-up wax residue and to avoid a
weathered appearance before reapplying
wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choos-
ing the proper product.
. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions sup-
plied with the wax.
. Do not use a wax containing any
abrasives, cutting compounds or clea-
ners that may damage the vehicle
finish.
Machine compound or aggressive polish-
ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish
may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possi-
ble from the paint surface to avoid lasting
damage or staining. Special cleaning
products are available at a NISSAN dealer
or any automotive accessory stores. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these products.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter,
the underbody must be cleaned regularly.
This will prevent dirt and salt from build-
ing up and causing the acceleration of
corrosion on the underbody and suspen-
sion. Before the winter period and again
in the spring, the underseal must be
checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is
normal for glass to become coated with a
film after the vehicle is parked in the hot
sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will
easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the
windows, do not use sharp-edged
tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-
based disinfectant cleaners. They
could damage the electrical conduc-
tors or rear window defroster ele-
ments.
WHEELS
Wash the wheels when washing the
vehicle to maintain their appearance.
. Clean the inner side of the wheels
when the wheel is changed or the
underside of the vehicle is washed.
. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire
bead.
. NISSAN recommends that the road
wheels be waxed to protect against
road salt in areas where it is used
during winter.
CAUTION
Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
Wash regularly with a sponge dampened
in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is
used. Salt could discolor the wheels if not
removed.
Appearance and care 7-3
7-4 Appearance and care
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
. Do not use a cleaner that uses
strong acid or alkali contents to
clean the wheels.
. Do not apply wheel cleaners to
the wheels when they are hot.
The wheel temperature should be
the same as ambient tempera-
ture.
. Rinse the wheel to completely
remove the cleaner within 15
minutes after the cleaner is ap-
plied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the
finish.
TIRE DRESSING
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
coating to the tires to help reduce dis-
coloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing
is applied to the tires, it may react with
the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while
driving and stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take
the following precautions:
. Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more
easily with an oil-based tire dressing.
. Apply a light coat of tire dressing to
help prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be
difficult to remove).
. Wipe off excess tire dressing using a
dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing
is completely removed from the tire
tread/grooves.
. Allow the tire dressing to dry as
recommended by tire dressing manu-
facturer.
Occasionally remove loose dust from the
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using
a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush.
Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a
clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap
solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft
cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in
order to maintain the appearance of the
leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read
the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Some fabric protectors contain chemicals
that may stain or bleach the seat materi-
al.
Use a cloth dampened only with water, to
clean the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners
(hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This
can damage the seat or occupant
classification sensors. This can also
affect the operation of the air bag
system and result in serious perso-
nal injury.
CLEANING INTERIOR
CAUTION
. Never use benzine, thinner, or any
similar material.
. For cleaning, use a soft cloth,
dampened with water. Never use
a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,
thinner or any kind of solvent or
paper towel with a chemical
cleaning agent. They will scratch
or cause discoloration to the lens.
. Do not spray any liquid such as
water on the meter lens. Spraying
liquid may cause the system to
malfunction.
. Small dirt particles can be abra-
sive and damaging to the leather
surfaces and should be removed
promptly. Do not use saddle soap,
car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents or
ammonia-based cleaners as they
may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
. Never use fabric protectors un-
less recommended by the manu-
facturer.
. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner
on meter or gauge lens covers. It
may damage the lens cover.
. Do not spill on or make contact
with interior surfaces while hand-
ling air fresheners, aroma agents,
cosmetics, sunscreen, etc. They
may cause permanent discolora-
tion, stain, crack, paint peeling,
etc. depending on the ingredi-
ents. If they contact the interior
surface, wipe them off immedi-
ately using a soft cloth.
. Do not use the chlorine-based
cleaning liquid such as chlorine
dioxide and hypochlorous acid,
which may cause the paint peel-
ing, corrosion, etc. If it is unavoid-
able to clean or sterilize interior
surfaces, use less than 75% etha-
nol. Wipe the interior parts with a
dry cloth dampened with ethanol.
Wipe off ethanol completely. If
you leave it uncleaned, it may
cause paint peeling, discolora-
tion, etc. Since ethanol is flam-
mable, be careful of fire.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use
an air freshener, take the following pre-
cautions:
. Hanging-type air fresheners can
cause permanent discoloration when
they contact vehicle interior surfaces.
Place the air freshener in a location
that allows it to hang free and not
contact an interior surface.
. Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip
on the vents. These products can
cause immediate damage and disco-
loration when spilled on interior sur-
faces.
Carefully read and follow the manufac-
turer’s instructions before using air fresh-
eners.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision, injury
or death:
. NEVER place a floor mat on top of
another floor mat in the driver
front position or install them up-
side down or backwards.
Appearance and care 7-5
7-6 Appearance and care
. It is recommended that you use
only genuine NISSAN floor mats
specifically designed for use in
your vehicle model and model
year.
. Properly position the mats in the
floorwell using the floor mat po-
sitioning hooks. See “Floor mat
installation” (P.7-6).
. Make sure the floor mat does not
interfere with pedal operation.
. Periodically check the floor mats
to make sure they are properly
installed.
. After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make
sure they are properly installed.
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular clean-
ing and replaced if they become exces-
sively worn.
JVA0032X
Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat
positioning hook(s). The number and
shape of the floor mat positioning hook
(s) for each seating position varies de-
pending on the vehicle.
When installing genuine NISSAN floor
mats, follow the installation instructions
provided with the floor mat and the
following:
1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell
so that the floor mat grommet holes
are aligned with the hook(s).
2. Push the grommet holes into the hook
(s) and secure them. Ensure that the
floor mat is properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not
interfere with pedal operation. With
the ignition in the OFF position and
the shift position in the P (Park)
position, fully apply and release all
pedals. The floor mat must not inter-
fere with pedal operation or prevent
the pedal from returning to its normal
position. It is recommended you see a
NISSAN dealer for details about instal-
ling the floor mats in your vehicle.
JVA0031X
Positioning hook(s)
The illustration shows the location of the
floor mat positioning hook(s).
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
them with a sponge dampened in a mild
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry
completely in the shade before using
them.
See “Seat belts” (P.1-14).
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up
in the retractor. NEVER use bleach,
dye, or chemical solvents to clean
the seat belts, since these materials
may severely weaken the seat belt
webbing.
CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS
CAUTION
Periodically clean the seat tracks to
prevent reduction of ability to move
the seats.
Clean periodically with a high-powered
vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debris may
reduce the ability to adjust the seat. A
wet cleansing agent may be used if
necessary.
MOST COMMON FACTORS CON-
TRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORRO-
SION
. The accumulation of moisture-retain-
ing dirt and debris in body panel
sections, cavities, and other areas.
. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic accidents.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU-
ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the vehicle body underside can acceler-
ate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not
dry completely inside the vehicle, and
should be removed for drying to avoid
floor panel corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those
areas where the temperatures stay above
freezing where atmospheric pollution ex-
ists, or where road salt is used.
Appearance and care 7-7
CORROSION PROTECTION
7-8 Appearance and care
Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate
the rate of corrosion to those parts which
are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in
the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt
use will accelerate the corrosion process.
Road salt will also accelerate the disin-
tegration of paint surfaces.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
. Wash and wax your vehicle often to
keep the vehicle clean.
. Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.
. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumula-
tion.
. Check the underbody for accumula-
tion of sand, dirt or salt. If present,
wash with water as soon as possible.
CAUTION
. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other
debris from the passenger com-
partment by washing it out with a
hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum
cleaner.
. Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electronic
components inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface deicing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor
pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be
cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, it is recommended you consult a
NISSAN dealer.
8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions ...................................................... 8-2
Engine compartment check locations ........................ 8-3
PR25DD engine model ...................................................... 8-3
KR15DDT engine model ................................................... 8-4
Engine cooling system ............................................................. 8-4
Checking engine coolant level .................................... 8-6
Changing engine coolant................................................ 8-6
Intercooler cooling system (if so equipped) ........... 8-6
Checking intercooler coolant level .......................... 8-7
Changing intercooler coolant...................................... 8-8
Engine oil ............................................................................................. 8-8
Checking engine oil level ................................................. 8-8
Changing engine oil and filter ..................................... 8-8
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid ......................................................................................... 8-12
Brake fluid ....................................................................................... 8-12
Window washer fluid .............................................................. 8-13
Battery ................................................................................................ 8-15
Jump starting ......................................................................... 8-16
Variable voltage control system ................................... 8-17
Drive belt .......................................................................................... 8-17
Spark plugs .................................................................................... 8-18
Replacing spark plugs .................................................. 8-19
Air cleaner ....................................................................................... 8-19
Windshield wiper blades ..................................................... 8-20
Cleaning ................................................................................... 8-20
Replacing ................................................................................ 8-21
Rear window wiper blade .................................................. 8-21
Brakes ................................................................................................ 8-22
Self-adjusting brakes ..................................................... 8-22
Brake pad wear warning............................................ 8-22
Fuses ................................................................................................... 8-22
Engine compartment .................................................... 8-22
Passenger compartment ........................................... 8-24
Intelligent Key battery replacement .......................... 8-25
Lights .................................................................................................. 8-28
Headlights .............................................................................. 8-29
Exterior and interior lights ........................................ 8-29
Wheels and tires ........................................................................ 8-31
Tire pressure ........................................................................ 8-31
Tire labeling .......................................................................... 8-35
Types of tires ....................................................................... 8-37
Tire chains .............................................................................. 8-38
Changing wheels and tires ...................................... 8-39
8-2 Do-it-yourself
When performing any inspection or main-
tenance work on your vehicle, always
take care to prevent serious accidental
injury to yourself or damage to the
vehicle. The following are general precau-
tions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
. Park the vehicle on a level sur-
face, apply the parking brake
securely and block the wheels to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
Push the park button to shift to
the P (Park) position.
. Be sure the ignition switch is in
the OFF position when perform-
ing any parts replacement or
repairs.
. If you must work with the engine
running, keep your hands, cloth-
ing, hair and tools away from
moving fans, belts and any other
moving parts.
. It is advisable to secure or re-
move any loose clothing and
remove any jewelry, such as
rings, watches, etc. before work-
ing on your vehicle.
. Always wear eye protection
whenever you work on your ve-
hicle.
. If you must run the engine in an
enclosed space such as a garage,
be sure there is proper ventilation
for exhaust gases to escape.
. Never get under the vehicle while
it is supported only by a jack. If it
is necessary to work under the
vehicle, support it with safety
stands.
. Because the fuel lines are under
high pressure even when the
engine is off, it is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer for
service of the fuel filter or fuel
lines.
. Keep smoking materials, flame
and sparks away from fuel and
the battery.
. On gasoline engine models with
the Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI)
system, the fuel filter and fuel
lines should be serviced because
the fuel lines are under high
pressure even when the engine
is turned off. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
. Your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic engine cooling fan. It
may come on at any time without
warning, even if the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and
the engine is not running. To
avoid injury, always disconnect
the negative battery cable before
working near the fan.
CAUTION
. Do not work under the hood while
the engine is hot. Turn the engine
off and wait until it cools down.
. Avoid direct contact with used
engine oil and coolant. Impro-
perly disposed engine oil, and
engine coolant and/or other ve-
hicle fluids can damage the en-
vironment. Always conform to
local regulations for disposal of
vehicle fluid.
. Never leave the engine or the CVT
related component harnesses
disconnected while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
. Never connect or disconnect the
battery or any transistorized
component while the ignition
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
switch is in the ON position.
This “8. Do-it-yourself” section gives in-
structions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to
perform.
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also
available. (See “Owner’s manual/service
manual order information” (P.10-33).)
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operat-
ing difficulties or excessive emissions, and
could affect your warranty coverage. If in
doubt about any servicing, it is recom-
mended you have it done by a NISSAN
dealer.
WAA0302X
PR25DD ENGINE MODEL
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine oil dipstick
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Battery
6. Fuse/fusible link box
7. Window washer fluid reservoir
8. Drive belt
9. Air cleaner
Do-it-yourself 8-3
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS
8-4 Do-it-yourself
WAA0301X
KR15DDT ENGINE MODEL
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Battery
6. Fuse/fusible link box
7. Intercooler coolant reservoir
8. Window washer fluid reservoir
9. Drive belt
10. Air cleaner
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide
year-round anti-freeze and coolant pro-
tection. The anti-freeze solution contains
rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional
engine cooling system additives are not
necessary.
WARNING
. Never remove the radiator or
coolant reservoir cap when the
engine is hot. Wait until the en-
gine and radiator cool down.
Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator or coolant re-
servoir. See precautions in “If
your vehicle overheats” (P.6-14)
of this manual.
. The coolant reservoir is equipped
with a pressure type coolant re-
servoir cap. To prevent engine
damage, use only a genuine
NISSAN coolant reservoir cap.
. If the engine was stopped soon
when the engine is hot, the cool-
ing fan may operate for approxi-
mately 10 minutes after the
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
engine was stopped to cool the
components in the engine com-
partment. When the cooling fan is
operating, be sure that hands or
other items do not get caught in
it.
CAUTION
. Never use any cooling system
additives such as radiator sealer.
Additives may clog the cooling
system and cause damage to
the engine, transmission and/or
cooling system.
. When adding or replacing cool-
ant, be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Gen-
uine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to
provide antifreeze protection to
-34°F(-37°C). If additional freeze
protection is needed due to
weather where you operate your
vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
concentrate following the direc-
tions on the container. If an
equivalent coolant other than
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-
freeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-
low the coolant manufacture’s
instructions to maintain mini-
mum antifreeze protection to
-34°F (-37°C). The use of other
types of coolant solutions other
than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent may damage the en-
gine cooling system.
. The life expectancy of the fac-
tory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles
(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing
any other type of coolant other
than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-
ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or
the use of non-distilled water will
reduce the life expectancy of the
factory-fill coolant. Refer to the
“9. Maintenance and schedules”
section of this manual for more
details.
WAI0190X
PR25DD engine
WAI0274X
KR15DDT engine
Do-it-yourself 8-5
8-6 Do-it-yourself
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
when the engine is cold. If the coolant
level is below the MIN level
, open the
reservoir cap and add coolant up to the
MAX level
.
Tighten the cap securely after adding
engine coolant.
If the cooling system frequently re-
quires coolant, have it checked. It is
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be
found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in re-
duced heater performance and engine
overheating.
WARNING
. To avoid being scalded, never
change the coolant when the
engine is hot.
. Never remove the radiator or
coolant reservoir cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could
be caused by high pressure fluid
escaping from the radiator or
coolant reservoir.
. Avoid direct skin contact with
used coolant. If skin contact is
made, wash thoroughly with soap
or hand cleaner as soon as pos-
sible.
. Keep coolant out of the reach of
children and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of
properly. Check your local regulations.
The intercooler cooling system is filled at
the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-
freeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to
provide year-round anti-freeze and cool-
ant protection. The antifreeze solution
contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.
Additional intercooler cooling system ad-
ditives are not necessary.
WARNING
. Never remove the radiator or
coolant reservoir cap when the
engine is hot. Wait until the en-
gine cools down. Serious burns
could be caused by high pressure
fluid escaping from the radiator
or coolant reservoir.
. The coolant reservoir is equipped
with a pressure type coolant re-
servoir cap. To prevent engine
and intercooler damage, use only
a genuine NISSAN coolant reser-
voir cap.
INTERCOOLER COOLING SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
CAUTION
. Never use any additives in the
coolant such as radiator sealer in
the cooling system. This may
cause damage to the intercooler.
. When adding or replacing cool-
ant, be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Gen-
uine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to
provide antifreeze protection to
−34°F(−37°C). If additional freeze
protection is needed due to
weather where you operate your
vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
concentrate following the direc-
tions on the container. If an
equivalent coolant other than
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-
freeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-
low the coolant manufacture’s
instructions to maintain mini-
mum antifreeze protection to
−34°F (−37°C). The use of other
types of coolant solutions other
than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent may damage the In-
tercooler cooling system.
WAI0261X
CHECKING INTERCOOLER COOL-
ANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
when the engine is cold. If the coolant
level is below the MIN level
, add coolant
to the MAX level
.
Tighten the cap securely after adding
intercooler coolant.
If the intercooler cooling system fre-
quently requires coolant, have it
checked. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Do-it-yourself 8-7
8-8 Do-it-yourself
CHANGING INTERCOOLER COOL-
ANT
Intercooler coolant is maintenance-free.
If replacement is required, it is recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Improper servicing can result in inter-
cooler overheating.
WARNING
. To avoid the danger of being
scalded, never change the cool-
ant when the engine is hot.
. Never remove the radiator or
coolant reservoir cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could
be caused by high pressure fluid
escaping from the radiator or
coolant reservoir.
. Avoid direct skin contact with
used coolant. If skin contact is
made, wash thoroughly with soap
or hand cleaner as soon as pos-
sible.
. Keep coolant out of the reach of
children and pets.
Intercooler coolant must be disposed of
properly. Check your local regulations.
SDI1993
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches oper-
ating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back
into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be within the
range
. If the oil level is below ,
remove the oil filler cap and pour
recommended oil through the open-
ing. Do not overfill
.
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the se-
verity of operating conditions.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the
engine, and such damage is not
covered by the warranty.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
WARNING
. Used oil must be disposed of
properly. Never pour or dump oil
into the ground, canals, rivers,
etc. It should be disposed of at
proper waste facilities. NISSAN
recommends having your oil
changed by a NISSAN dealer.
. Be careful not to burn yourself, as
the engine oil may be hot.
ENGINE OIL
. Prolonged and repeated contact
with used engine oil may cause
skin cancer.
. Avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If contacted, wash thor-
oughly with soap or hand cleaner
and plenty of water as soon as
possible.
. Store used engine oil in marked
containers out of the reach of
children.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches the
operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait more
than 10 minutes.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
suitable floor jack and safety jack
stands.
.
Place the safety jack stands under
the vehicle jack-up points.
.
A suitable adapter should be at-
tached to the jack stand saddle.
5. Remove the engine undercover.
.
Remove clips at the around of the
undercover.
.
Then remove the other bolts that
hold the undercover in place.
CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and
support points are used to avoid
vehicle damage.
WAI0266X
PR25DD engine
Do-it-yourself 8-9
8-10 Do-it-yourself
WAI0189X
PR25DD engine
WAI0262X
KR15DDT engine
WAI0263X
KR15DDT engine
Oil filler cap
Oil drain plug
Oil filter
Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the
drain plug.
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench
and completely drain the oil.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as
the engine oil is hot.
WARNING
. Prolonged and repeated contact
with used engine oil may cause
skin cancer.
. Try to avoid direct skin contact
with used oil. If skin contact is
made, wash thoroughly with soap
or hand cleaner as soon as pos-
sible.
. Keep used engine oil out of reach
of children.
.
Waste oil must be disposed of
properly.
.
Check your local regulations.
(Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the
engine oil filter change is needed.)
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench. Remove the oil filter by turn-
ing it by hand.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting
surface with a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket
material remaining on the mounting
surface of the engine. Failure to do
so could lead to engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil.
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a
slight resistance is felt, then tighten
additionally more than 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
· PR25DD engine
11 to 15 ft-lb
(14.7 to 20.6 N·m)
· KR15DDT engine
11 to 15 ft-lb
(15.0 to 21.0 N·m)
8. Clean and re-install the drain plug
with a new washer. Securely tighten
the drain plug with a wrench.
Drain plug tightening torque:
· PR25DD engine
22 to 29 ft-lb
(29.4 to 39.2 N·m)
· KR15DDT engine
22 to 27 ft-lb
(30.0 to 37.0 N·m)
Do not use excessive force.
9. Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil through the oil filler open-
ing, and install the oil filler cap
securely.
See “Capacities and recommended
fluids/lubricants” (P.10-3) for drain
and refill capacity. The drain and refill
capacity depends on the oil tempera-
ture and drain time. Use these speci-
fications for reference only. Always
use the dipstick to determine the
proper amount of oil in the engine.
10. Start the engine and check for leak-
age around the drain plug and the oil
filter. Correct as required.
11. Turn the engine off and wait more
than 10 minutes. Check the oil level
with the dipstick. Add engine oil if
necessary.
After the operation
1. Reinstall undercover in reverse order
of removal.
2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the
ground.
Do-it-yourself 8-11
8-12 Do-it-yourself
3. Reset the Oil Control System and oil
and filter maintenance reminder. (See
“Maintenance” (P.2-29).)
When checking or replacement is re-
quired, we recommend a NISSAN dealer
for servicing.
CAUTION
. NISSAN recommends using Gen-
uine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or
equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs.
Do not mix with other fluids.
. Do not use Automatic transmis-
sion fluid (ATF) or Manual Trans-
mission fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as
it may damage the CVT. Damage
caused by the use of fluids other
than as recommended is not
covered by the NISSAN’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
. Using fluids that are not equiva-
lent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-3 may also damage the CVT.
Damage caused by the use of
fluids other than as recom-
mended is not covered under
the NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
For additional brake fluid information, see
“Capacities and recommended fluids/lu-
bricants” (P.10-3) of this manual.
WARNING
. Use only new fluid from a sealed
container. Old, inferior or con-
taminated fluid may damage the
brake system. The use of impro-
per fluids can damage the brake
system, and affect the vehicle’s
stopping ability.
. Clean the filler cap before remov-
ing.
. Brake fluid is poisonous and
should be stored carefully in
marked containers out of the
reach of children.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted
surfaces. This will damage the paint.
If fluid is spilled, immediately wash
the surface with water.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
WAI0186X
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
fluid is below the MIN line
or the brake
warning light comes on, add Genuine
NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line
and it is recommended you have your
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as
soon as possible. If fluid must be added
frequently, the system should be checked.
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
WAI0267X
Type A (if so equipped)
WAI0268X
Type B (if so equipped)
Type A: Check the fluid level in the
window washer reservoir. If the fluid level
is low, add window washer fluid.
Type B: To check the fluid level, use your
finger to plug the center hole
of the
cap/tube assembly, then remove it from
the reservoir. If there is no fluid in the
tube, add fluid.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for
better cleaning. In the winter season, add
a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for the
mixture ratio.
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir
periodically.
Add fluid when the low washer fluid
warning appears (if so equipped).
Refill the reservoir more frequently when
driving conditions require an increased
amount of window washer fluid.
Recommended fluid:
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Con-
centrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equiva-
lent
CAUTION
. Do not substitute engine anti-
freeze coolant for window
washer solution. This may result
Do-it-yourself 8-13
WINDOW WASHER FLUID
8-14 Do-it-yourself
in damage to the paint.
. Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength.
Some methyl alcohol based
washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the window
washer reservoir tank.
. Pre-mix washer fluid concen-
trates with water to the manu-
facturer’s recommended levels
before pouring the fluid into the
window washer reservoir tank. Do
not use the window washer re-
servoir tank to mix the washer
fluid concentrate and water.
WAI0270X
Do-it-yourself 8-15
BATTERY
8-16 Do-it-yourself
. If the battery is labeled “do not open” it
is maintenance free and battery fluid
should not be checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
or a qualified specialist workshop to
confirm the battery’s performance.
. Keep the battery surface clean and
dry. Clean the battery with a solution
of baking soda and water.
. Make certain the terminal connec-
tions are clean and securely tightened.
. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30
days or longer, disconnect the nega-
tive 7 battery terminal cable to pre-
vent discharging it.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery dis-
charge and potential no-start condi-
tions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume
battery power when the engine is
not running (Phone chargers, GPS,
DVD players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/
or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
WARNING
. Do not expose the battery to
flames or electrical sparks. Hy-
drogen gas generated by the
battery is explosive. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces.
After touching a battery or bat-
tery cap, do not touch or rub your
eyes. Thoroughly wash your
hands. If the acid contacts your
eyes, skin or clothing, immedi-
ately flush with water for at least
15 minutes and seek medical
attention.
. When working on or near a bat-
tery, always wear suitable eye
protection and remove all jew-
elry.
. Battery posts, terminals and re-
lated accessories contain lead
and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
. Keep the battery out of the reach
of children.
. Do not tip the battery.
WAI0200X
Example
NOTE:
Do not try to open the top of the
battery.
This battery is not equipped with remo-
vable vent caps.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump
starting” (P.6-11). If the engine does not
start by jump starting, the battery may
have to be replaced. It is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WAI0223X
CAUTION
. Do not ground accessories di-
rectly to the battery terminal.
Doing so will bypass the variable
voltage control system and the
vehicle battery may not charge
completely.
. Use electrical accessories with
the engine running to avoid dis-
charging the vehicle battery.
The variable voltage control system mea-
sures the amount of electrical discharge
from the battery and controls voltage
generated by the generator.
SDI1881
PR25DD engine
1. Alternator
2. Drive belt auto-tensioner
3. Crankshaft pulley
4. Air conditioner compressor
5. Water pump
Do-it-yourself 8-17
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM
DRIVE BELT
8-18 Do-it-yourself
WAI0264X
KR15DDT engine
1. Alternator
2. Water pump
3. Drive belt auto-tensioner
4. Crankshaft pulley
5. Idler pulley
6. Air conditioner compressor
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF position before servicing drive
belts. The engine could rotate un-
expectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of
unusual wear, cuts or fraying. If the
belt is in poor condition, have it
replaced. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt condition checked reg-
ularly.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition
switch are off and that the parking
brake is applied.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to
remove the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
SPARK PLUGS
SDI2670
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
If replacement is required, it is recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Iridium platinum-tipped spark
plugs
It is not necessary to replace the iridium
platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently
as the conventional type spark plugs
since they will last much longer. Follow
the maintenance schedule shown in the
“9. Maintenance and schedules” section.
Do not reuse the iridium platinum-tipped
spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.
Always replace spark plugs with recom-
mended or equivalent ones.
WAI0160X
To remove the filter, release the lock pins
and pull the unit upward .
The viscous paper type filter element (if so
equipped) should not be cleaned and
reused. The dry paper type filter element
(if so equipped) may be cleaned and
reused. Replace the filter according to
the maintenance schedule shown in the
“9. Maintenance and schedules” section.
When replacing the filter, wipe the inside
of the air cleaner housing and the cover
with a damp cloth.
Do-it-yourself 8-19
AIR CLEANER
8-20 Do-it-yourself
WARNING
. Operating the engine with the air
cleaner filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner filter not only cleans the
intake air, it also stops flame if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner filter is not installed and
the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Never drive with the
air cleaner filter off. Be cautious
working on the engine when the
air cleaner filter is off.
. Never pour fuel into the throttle
body or attempt to start the
engine with the air cleaner re-
moved. Doing so could result in
serious injury.
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other
material may be on the blade or wind-
shield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form
when rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild
detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear
water. If your windshield is still not clear
after cleaning the blades and using the
wiper, replace the blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.
When a washer nozzle is clogged
It is recommended you see a NISSAN
dealer if a washer nozzle is clogged or
any malfunction occurs. Do not attempt
to clean the nozzle using a needle or a
pin. Doing so may damage the nozzle.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
WAI0163X
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Open
, using a suitable tool, and then
move the wiper blade down as shown
to remove.
3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until a click sounds.
4. Close
.
CAUTION
. After wiper blade replacement,
return the wiper arm to its origi-
nal position; otherwise it may be
damaged when the hood is
opened.
. Make sure the wiper blades con-
tact the glass; otherwise the arm
may be damaged from wind
pressure.
It is recommended you contact a NISSAN
dealer if checking or replacement is
required.
Do-it-yourself 8-21
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE
8-22 Do-it-yourself
If the brakes do not operate properly, it is
recommended you have the brakes
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjust-
ing brakes.
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every
time the brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if
the brake pedal height does not
return to normal. It is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a brake pad requires
replacement, it will make a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in
motion. This scraping sound will first
occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake
pad, the sound will always be heard even
if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have
the brakes checked as soon as possible if
the wear warning sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is
normal and does not affect the function
or performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals
should be followed. For additional infor-
mation, see the maintenance schedule
shown in the “9. Maintenance and sche-
dules” section.
WAI0124X
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified
on the fuse box cover. This could
damage the electrical system or
electronic control units or cause a
fire.
If any electrical equipment does not
operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch is turned
off and the headlights are off.
BRAKES FUSES
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse/fusible link box cov-
er by using a suitable tool and pushing
the tab.
4. Locate the fuse that needs to be
replaced.
5. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller
located in the passenger compart-
ment fuse box.
SDI1753
6. If the fuse is open , replace it with a
new fuse
.
7. If a new fuse also opens, have the
electrical system checked and re-
paired. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not
operate and the fuses are in good condi-
tion, check the fusible links. If any of these
fusible links are melted, replace only with
genuine NISSAN parts.
For checking and replacing the fusible
links, it is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
Do-it-yourself 8-23
8-24 Do-it-yourself
WAI0205X
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified
on the fuse box cover. This could
damage the electrical system or
electronic control units or cause a
fire.
If any electrical equipment does not
operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch is turned
off and the headlights are off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
.
SDI1753
4. If the fuse is open , replace it with a
new fuse
.
5. If a new fuse also opens, have the
electrical system checked and re-
paired. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
WAI0271X
Extended storage switch (if so
equipped)
The extended storage switch is used
when shipping the vehicle. It is located
in the fuse panel on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel. If any electrical equip-
ment does not operate, ensure the ex-
tended storage switch is pushed fully in
place.
To inspect the extended storage switch,
ensure the ignition switch and headlights
are off.
How to remove the extended storage
switch:
1. To remove the extended storage
switch, be sure the ignition switch is
in the OFF or LOCK position.
2. Be sure the headlights are off. (See
“Headlight switch” (P.2-57) or “Intelli-
gent Auto Headlight system” (P.2-58).)
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Pinch the locking tabs
on top and
bottom of the extended storage
switch.
5. Pull the extended storage switch
straight out from the fuse box
.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to allow children to
swallow the battery and removed
parts.
. An improperly disposed battery
can harm the environment. Al-
ways confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
. When changing batteries, do not
let dust or oil get on the compo-
nents.
. There is danger of explosion if the
lithium battery is incorrectly re-
placed. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type.
Do-it-yourself 8-25
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT
8-26 Do-it-yourself
SDI2451
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key
as follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit
of the corner and twist it to separate
the upper part from the lower part.
Use a cloth to protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery:
CR2032 or equivalent
.
Do not touch the internal circuit
and electric terminals as doing so
could cause a malfunction.
.
Hold the battery by the edges.
Holding the battery across the
contact points will seriously deplete
the storage capacity.
.
Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the case.
SDI2452
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower
parts
, and then push them together
until it is securely closed.
5. Operate the buttons to check its
operation.
If you need any assistance for replace-
ment, it is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
FCC ID : KR5TXN1
FCC ID : KR5TXN3
FCC ID : KR5TXN4
FCC ID : KR5HFM401
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
For Canada:
IC ID : 7812D-TXN1
IC ID : 7812D-TXN3
IC ID : 7812D-TXN4
IC ID : 7812D–HFM401
This device complies with Industry Ca-
nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Do-it-yourself 8-27
8-28 Do-it-yourself
WAI0201X
1. Front map light
2. Vanity mirror light
3. Room light (if so equipped)
4. Side turn signal light
5. Rear personal light (if so equipped)
6. Headlight (high-beam)
7. Front fog light (if so equipped)
8. Headlight (low-beam)
9. Front parking light/Daytime running
light/Front turn signal light (LED type)
10. Front turn signal light (Bulb type)
11. Front side marker light
12. High-mounted stop light
13. Cargo light
14. License plate light
15. Back-up light/Tail light
16. Rear turn signal light/Stop light/Tail light
17. Rear side marker light
LIGHTS
HEADLIGHTS
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens
of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car
wash. A temperature difference between
the inside and the outside of the lens
causes the fog. This is not a malfunction.
If large drops of water collect inside the
lens, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for servicing.
Replacing
If LED headlight replacement is required,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.
Headlight high/low beams*
LED
-
Front turn signal light* 28/8 or LED 7444NA or -
Front parking light* LED -
Front side marker light* 5 W5W
Front fog light (if so equipped)* LED -
Side turn signal light (if so equipped)* LED -
Daytime running light* LED -
Rear combination light*
Turn signal light 21 W21W
Stop/tail light LED —
Back-up 16 W16W
Rear side marker light* 5 W5W
License plate light* 5 (assembly) W5W
Map light* 8 W8W
Rear personal light (if so equipped)* 5 W5W
Vanity mirror light* 5 W5W
High-mounted stop light* LED -
Room light (if so equipped)* 8 W8W
Cargo light 8 -
Lower center light (if so equipped)* 1.4 -
Glove box light (if so equipped)* 1.4 -
Console box light* 1.4 or LED -
*: It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
NOTE: It is recommended that you check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the
latest information about parts.
Do-it-yourself 8-29
8-30 Do-it-yourself
SDI2306
: REMOVE
: INSTALL
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D or
E. When replacing a bulb, first remove the
lens and/or cover.
WAI0202X
Cargo light
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” (P.6-
3).
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit, and the “Tire Pressure
Low - Add Air” warning message is
displayed in the vehicle information dis-
play, one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not
detect a sudden drop in tire pressure
(for example a flat tire while driving).
For more details, see “Low tire pressure
warning light” (P.2-18), “Tire Pressure Mon-
itoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-6) and “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6-
3).
Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure of the tires
(including the spare) often and al-
ways prior to long distance trips.
The recommended tire pressure
specifications are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label
under the “Cold Tire Pressure”
heading. The Tire and Loading In-
formation label is affixed to the
driver side center pillar. Tire pres-
sures should be checked regularly
because:
. Most tires naturally lose air over
time.
. Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other
objects or if the vehicle strikes
a curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be
checked when the tires are cold.
The tires are considered COLD after
the vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert pro-
vides visual and audible signals
outside the vehicle for inflating the
tires to the recommended COLD
tire pressure. (See “TPMS with Easy
Fill Tire Alert” (P.5-9).)
Incorrect tire pressure, including
under inflation, may adversely
affect tire life and vehicle hand-
ling.
WARNING
. Improperly inflated tires can
fail suddenly and cause an
accident.
. The Gross Vehicle Weight
rating (GVWR) is located on
the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. cer-
tification label. The vehicle
weight capacity is indicated
on the Tire and Loading In-
formation label. Do not load
your vehicle beyond this ca-
pacity. Overloading your ve-
hicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating
conditions due to premature
tire failure, or unfavorable
Do-it-yourself 8-31
WHEELS AND TIRES
8-32 Do-it-yourself
handling characteristics and
could also lead to a serious
accident. Loading beyond
the specified capacity may
also result in failure of other
vehicle components.
. Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load
your vehicle, use a tire pres-
sure gauge to ensure that
the tire pressures are at the
specified level.
. For additional information
regarding tires, refer to “Im-
portant Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (US) or “Tire Safety
Information” (Canada) in the
Warranty Information Book-
let.
SDI2503
Tire and Loading Information label
Seating capacity: The max-
imum number of occu-
pants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
Vehicle load limit: See “Ve-
hicle loading information”
(P.10-15).
Original size: The size of
the tires originally installed
on the vehicle at the fac-
tory.
Cold tire pressure: Inflate
the tires to this pressure
when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD
after the vehicle has been
parked for 3 or more hours,
or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate
speeds. The recommended
cold tire inflation is set by
the manufacturer to pro-
vide the best balance of
tire wear, vehicle handling,
driveability, tire noise, etc.,
up to the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire size — see “Tire label-
ing” (P.8-35).
Spare tire size or compact
spare tire size
Do-it-yourself 8-33
8-34 Do-it-yourself
SDI1949
Checking the tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from
the tire.
2.
Press the pressure gauge
squarely onto the valve stem.
Do not press too hard or force
the valve stem sideways, or air
will escape. If the hissing sound
of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pres-
sure, reposition the gauge to
eliminate this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge stem and compare it to
the specification shown on the
Tire and Loading Information
label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If
too much air is added, press the
core of the valve stem briefly
with the tip of the gauge stem to
release pressure. Recheck the
pressure and add or release air
as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other
tires, including the spare.
SIZE
COLD TIRE INFLATION
PRESSURE
FRONT ORIGINAL
TIRE
235/65 R17
250 kPa, 36 PSI
235/60 R18
230 kPa, 33 PSI
235/55 R19
230 kPa, 33 PSI
REAR ORIGINAL TIRE
235/65 R17
230 kPa, 33 PSI
235/60 R18
210 kPa, 30 PSI
235/55 R19
210 kPa, 30 PSI
SPARE TIRE
T155/80 D17 (2WD)
T165/90 D17 (AWD)
420 kPa, 60 PSI
SDI1575
Example
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufac-
turers to place standardized infor-
mation on the sidewall of all tires.
This information identifies and de-
scribes the fundamental character-
istics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification.
The TIN can be used to identify
the tire in case of a recall.
Do-it-yourself 8-35
8-36 Do-it-yourself
SDI1606
Example
Tire size (example: P215/60R16
94H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is
designed for passenger vehicles.
(Not all tires have this informa-
tion.)
2. Three-digit number (215): This
number gives the width in milli-
meters of the tire from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (60): This
number, known as the aspect
ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of
height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (16): This
number is the wheel or rim
diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (94):
This number is the tire’s load
index. It is a measurement of
how much weight each tire can
support. You may not find this
information on all tires because
it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.
JVM0694X
Example
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX
XXX XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-
partment of Transportation”.
The symbol can be placed
above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark
3. Two-digit code: Tire size
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional)
5. Four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 3103
means the 31st week of 2003. If
these numbers are missing, then
look on the other sidewall of the
tire.
Tire ply composition and materi-
al
The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
Tire manufacturers also must in-
dicate the materials in the tire,
which include steel, nylon, polye-
ster, and others.
Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest
amount of air pressure that should
be put in the tire. Do not exceed the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure.
Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maxi-
mum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire.
When replacing the tires on the
vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory
installed tire.
Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown, if the
tire has radial structure.
Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
Other tire-related terminology:
In addition to the many terms that
are defined throughout this sec-
tion, Intended Outboard Sidewall is
(1) the sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand and/or
model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same molding
on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(2) the outward facing sidewall of
an asymmetrical tire that has a
particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
. When changing or replacing tires,
be sure all four tires are of the
same type (Example: Summer, All
Season or Snow) and construc-
tion. A NISSAN dealer may be able
to help you with information
about tire type, size, speed rating
and availability.
. Replacement tires may have a
lower speed rating than the fac-
tory equipped tires, and may not
match the potential maximum
vehicle speed. Never exceed the
maximum speed rating of the
tire.
. Replacing tires with those not
originally specified by NISSAN
could affect the proper operation
of the TPMS.
Do-it-yourself 8-37
8-38 Do-it-yourself
. For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
. Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction and
tread pattern on all four wheels.
Failure to do so may result in a
circumference difference be-
tween tires on the front and rear
axles which can cause the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system to
malfunction resulting in personal
injury or death, excessive tire
wear and may damage the trans-
mission, transfer case and differ-
ential gears.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies all season tires on some
models to provide good performance all
year, including snowy and icy road con-
ditions. All Season tires are identified by
ALL SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow)
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have
better snow traction than All Season tires
and may be more appropriate in some
areas.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire trac-
tion rating M&S on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recom-
mends the use of SNOW tires or ALL
SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load
rating to the original equipment tires. If
you do not, it can adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires will have lower
speed ratings than factory equipped tires
and may not match the potential max-
imum vehicle speed. Never exceed the
maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the
same size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some U.S. states and Canadian provinces
prohibit their use. Check local, state and
provincial laws before installing studded
tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires, on wet or dry sur-
faces, may be poorer than that of non-
studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
WARNING
If tire chains are used with this
vehicle, they must allow sufficient
clearance between the tire and the
closest vehicle suspension or body
component. Failure to use the cor-
rect chains, or not properly installing
chains, can damage the brakes, sus-
pension or other vehicle parts and
cause a crash in which a person
could be seriously injured or killed.
NISSAN recommends using the fol-
lowing chains, or equivalent.
. PEERLESS SUPER Z6 SZ-429
Use of tire chains may be prohibited
according to location. Check the local
laws before installing tire chains. When
installing tire chains, make sure they are
the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to
the chain manufacturer’s suggestions.
Use only SAE Class S chains. Class “S”
chains are used on vehicles with re-
stricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles
that can use Class “S” chains are designed
to meet the SAE standard minimum
clearances between the tire and the
closest vehicle suspension or body com-
ponent required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains
or cables). The minimum clearances are
determined using the factory equipped
tire size. Other types may damage your
vehicle. Use chain tensioners when re-
commended by the tire chain manufac-
turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links
of the tire chain must be secured or
removed to prevent the possibility of
whipping action damage to the fenders
or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-
ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In
addition, drive at a reduced speed. Other-
wise, your vehicle may be damaged and/
or vehicle handling and performance may
be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on
the front wheels and not on the rear
wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads.
Driving with tire chains in such conditions
can cause damage to the various me-
chanisms of the vehicle due to some
overstress.
JVM0287X
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the
tires at the specified interval shown
in the maintenance schedule. (See
the “Maintenance and schedules”
section. For tire replacing proce-
dures, see “Flat tire” (P.6-3).)
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept
tightened to the specification at
all times. It is recommended that
wheel nuts be tightened to the
specification at each tire rotation
interval.
WARNING
. Retighten the wheel nuts
when the vehicle has been
driven for 600 miles (1,000
km) (also in cases of a flat
tire, etc.).
. Do not include the spare tire
in the tire rotation.
. For additional information
regarding tires, refer to “Im-
portant Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (US) or “Tire Safety
Information” (Canada) in the
Warranty Information Book-
Do-it-yourself 8-39
8-40 Do-it-yourself
let.
. After rotating the tires, do
not use the Easy-Fill Tire
Alert to adjust the tire pres-
sure. Instead use a gauge to
adjust the tires to the cor-
rect pressure in accordance
with Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label.
. To ensure proper operation
of the Easy-Fill Tire Alert
system after a tire rotation,
reset and register the sensor
to their new installed loca-
tions. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN deal-
er for this service.
SDI1663
1. Wear indicator
2. Wear indicator location mark
Tire wear and damage
WARNING
. Tires should be periodically
inspected for wear, cracking,
bulging or objects caught in
the tread. If excessive wear,
cracks, bulging or deep cuts
are found, the tire(s) should
be replaced.
. The original tires have built-
in tread wear indicators.
When wear indicators are
visible, the tire(s) should be
replaced.
. Tires degrade with age and
use. Have tires, including the
spare, over 6 years old
checked by a qualified tech-
nician, because some tire
damage may not be ob-
vious. Replace the tires as
necessary to prevent tire
failure and possible perso-
nal injury.
. Improper service of the
spare tire may result in ser-
ious personal injury. If it is
necessary to repair the
spare tire, it is recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
. For additional information
regarding tires, refer to “Im-
portant Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (US) or “Tire Safety
Information” (Canada) in the
Warranty Information Book-
let.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
tread design, speed rating and load
carrying capacity as originally equipped.
(See “Specifications” (P.10-9) for recom-
mended types and sizes of tires and
wheels.)
WARNING
. The use of tires other than those
recommended or the mixed use
of tires of different brands, con-
struction (bias, bias-belted or ra-
dial), or tread patterns can
adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, VDC system, ground
clearance, body-to-tire clearance,
tire chain clearance, speed-
ometer calibration, headlight
aim and bumper height. Some of
these effects may lead to acci-
dents and could result in serious
personal injury.
. For Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod-
els, if your vehicle was originally
equipped with 4 tires that were
the same size and you are only
replacing 2 of the 4 tires, install
the new tires on the rear axle.
Placing new tires on the front
axle may cause loss of vehicle
control in some driving condi-
tions and cause an accident and
personal injury.
. If the wheels are changed for any
reason, always replace with
wheels which have the same off-
set dimension. Wheels of a differ-
ent off-set could cause prema-
ture tire wear, degrade vehicle
handling characteristics and/or
interference with the brake
discs/drums. Such interference
can lead to decreased braking
efficiency and/or early brake
pad/shoe wear. See “Wheels and
tires” (P.10-10) of this manual for
wheel off-set dimensions.
. Since the spare tire is not
equipped with the TPMS, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for ap-
proximately 1 minute. The light
will remain on after 1 minute.
Have your tires replaced and/or
TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for these
services.
. Replacing tires with those not
originally specified by NISSAN
could affect the proper operation
of the TPMS.
. The TPMS sensor may be da-
maged if it is not handled cor-
rectly. Be careful when handling
the TPMS sensor.
. When replacing the TPMS sensor,
the ID registration may be re-
quired. It is recommended you
visit a NISSAN dealer for ID regis-
tration.
. Do not use a valve stem cap that
is not specified by NISSAN. The
valve stem cap may become
stuck.
. Be sure that the valve stem caps
are correctly fitted. Otherwise the
valve may be clogged up with dirt
and cause a malfunction or loss
of pressure.
. Do not install a damaged or
deformed wheel or tire even if it
has been repaired. Such wheels
or tires could have structural
damage and could fail without
warning.
Do-it-yourself 8-41
8-42 Do-it-yourself
. The use of retread tire is not
recommended.
. For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
CAUTION
. Always use tires of the same size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-
belted or radial), and tread pat-
tern on all four wheels. Failure to
do so may result in a circumfer-
ence difference between tires on
the front and rear axles which will
cause excessive tire wear and
may damage the transmission
and the drivetrain parts.
. Only use spare tires specified for
each AWD model.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is
recommended that all four tires be re-
placed with tires of the same size, brand,
construction and tread pattern. The tire
pressure and wheel alignment should
also be checked and corrected as neces-
sary. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Even with regular
use, wheels can get out of balance.
Therefore, they should be balanced as
required.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehi-
cle could lead to mechanical damage.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
Care of wheels
See “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2) for details
about care of the wheels.
Spare tire
Since the spare tire is not equipped with
the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted
(TEMPORARY USE ONLY), the TPMS will
not function.
Observe the following precautions if the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be
used, otherwise your vehicle could be
damaged or involved in an accident.
WARNING
. The TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire should be used for emer-
gency use. It should be replaced
with the standard tire at the first
opportunity to avoid possible tire
or differential damage.
. Drive carefully while the TEMPOR-
ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-
stalled. Avoid sharp turns and
abrupt braking while driving.
. Periodically check spare tire in-
flation pressure. Always keep the
pressure of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420
kPa, 4.2 bar).
. With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire installed, do not drive
your vehicle at speeds faster than
50 MPH (80 km/h).
. When driving on roads covered
with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire should be
used on the rear wheels and
original tire used on the front
wheels (drive wheels). Use tire
chains only on the front (original)
tires.
. Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a
faster rate than the standard tire.
Replace the spare tire as soon as
the tread wear indicators appear.
. Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
. Do not use more than one spare
tire at the same time.
. Do not tow a trailer when the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
is installed.
CAUTION
. Do not use tire chains on a
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire.
Tire chains will not fit properly
and may cause damage to the
vehicle.
. Because the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire is smaller than
the original tire, ground clearance
is reduced. To avoid damage to
the vehicle, do not drive over
obstacles. Also do not drive the
vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.
Do-it-yourself 8-43
8-44 Do-it-yourself
MEMO
9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirement ..................................................... 9-2
General maintenance ......................................................... 9-2
Scheduled maintenance .................................................. 9-2
Where to go for service .................................................... 9-2
General maintenance ................................................................ 9-2
Explanation of general maintenance items ...... 9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ...... 9-5
Emission control system maintenance ................ 9-5
Chassis and body maintenance .............................. 9-6
Maintenance schedules .......................................................... 9-7
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions ........................................................ 9-7
Oil control system............................................................... 9-7
Standard maintenance ........................................................... 9-8
PR25DD engine model.................................................... 9-8
KR15DDT engine model ............................................. 9-21
9-2 Maintenance and schedules
Some day-to-day and regular mainte-
nance is essential to maintain your vehi-
cle good mechanical condition, as well as
its emission and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make
sure that the scheduled maintenance, as
well as general maintenance, is per-
formed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives
the proper maintenance care. You are a
vital link in the maintenance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those
items which should be checked during
normal day-to-day operation. They are
essential for proper vehicle operation. It is
your responsibility to perform these pro-
cedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks
requires minimal mechanical skill and
only a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you
prefer, a NISSAN dealer.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this
section are required to be serviced at
regular intervals. However, under severe
driving conditions, additional or more
frequent maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and serviced. It is re-
commended you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-
cialists and are kept up-to-date with the
latest service information through tech-
nical bulletins, service tips, and training
programs. They are completely qualified
to work on NISSAN vehicles before work
begins.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is
recommended that you ask your NISSAN
dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified
Collision Center is located, or go to http://
collision.nissanusa.com.
You can be confident that a NISSAN
dealer’s service department performs
the best job to meet the maintenance
requirements on your vehicle.
During the normal day-to-day operation
of the vehicle, general maintenance
should be performed regularly as pre-
scribed in this section. If you detect any
unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be
sure to check for the cause or have it
checked promptly. In addition, it is re-
commended that you visit a NISSAN deal-
er if you think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or mainte-
nance work, see “Maintenance precau-
tions” (P.8-2).
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAIN-
TENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “*” is found in the “8. Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless
otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that all
doors and the engine hood operate
properly. Also ensure that all latches lock
securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch
pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make
sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary
latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE
other corrosive materials, check lubrica-
tion frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and
other lights are all operating properly and
installed securely. Also check headlight
aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When
checking the tires, make sure no wheel
nuts are missing, and check for any loose
wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Rotate tires at the speci-
fied interval shown in the maintenance
schedule.
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
often and always prior to long distance
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in
all tires, including the spare (if so
equipped), to the pressure specified.
Check carefully for damage, cuts or
excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the
TPMS transmitter snap-in type, valve core
and cap when the tires are replaced due
to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the
vehicle should pull to either side while
driving on a straight and level road, or if
you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear,
there may be a need for wheel alignment.
If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing
may be needed.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the NISSAN Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
regular basis. Check the windshield at
least every six months for cracks or other
damage. Have a damaged windshield
repaired by a qualified repair facility.
It is recommended that you have a
damaged windshield repaired by a
NISSAN dealer, or a NISSAN Certified
Collision Center. To locate a collision
center in your area, refer to http://colli-
sion.nissanusa.com.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
cracks or wear if they do not wipe
properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing scheduled mainte-
nance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the
pedal does not catch or require uneven
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly
goes down further than normal, the pedal
feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take
longer to stop, have your vehicle checked
immediately. It is recommended you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the
floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
the vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) P (Park) mechanism: On a fairly
steep hill, check that the vehicle is held
securely with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position without applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with
only the parking brake applied. If the
parking brake needs adjusted, it is re-
commended you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (for example, buckles, an-
chors, adjusters and retractors) operate
properly and smoothly, and are installed
securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,
fraying, wear or damage.
Maintenance and schedules 9-3
9-4 Maintenance and schedules
Seats: Check seat position controls such
as seat adjusters, seatback recliners, etc.
to ensure they operate smoothly and that
all latches lock securely in every position.
Check that the head restraints/headrests
move up and down smoothly and that
the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in
all latched positions.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering conditions, such as excessive
free play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure
that all warning lights and chimes are
operating properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets prop-
erly and in sufficient quantity when oper-
ating the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check
that the wipers and washers operate
properly and that the wipers do not
streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (for example,
each time you check the engine oil or
refuel).
Battery*: This vehicle is equipped with a
sealed maintenance free battery. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for service.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery dis-
charge and potential no-start condi-
tions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume
battery power when the engine is
not running (Phone chargers, GPS,
DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/
or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the
brake fluid level is between the MAX and
MIN lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Intercooler coolant level*: Check the
coolant level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belt*: Make sure that the
drive belt is not frayed, worn, cracked or
oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level surface and
turning off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into the
oil pan.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, im-
mediately have the exhaust system in-
spected. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. (See “Pre-
cautions when starting and driving” (P.5-
5) for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
dripping from the air conditioner after use
is normal. If you should notice any leaks
or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for
the cause and have it corrected immedi-
ately.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of
the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks,
deformation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control
dust. It is very important to remove these
substances, otherwise rust will form on
the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around
the exhaust system. At the end of winter,
the underbody should be thoroughly
flushed with plain water, being careful to
clean those areas where mud and dirt
may accumulate. For additional informa-
tion, see “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2).
Windshield washer fluid*: Check that
there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.
The following descriptions are provided
to give you a better understanding of the
scheduled maintenance items that
should be regularly checked or replaced.
The maintenance schedule indicates at
which mileage/time intervals each item
requires service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance,
your vehicle requires that some items be
checked during normal day-to-day op-
eration. Refer to “General maintenance”
(P.9-2).
Items marked with “*” are recommended
by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.
You are not required to perform main-
tenance on these items in order to
maintain the warranties which come with
your vehicle. Other maintenance items
and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information
can be found in the “8. Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of
non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-
ing systems and strongly advises
against performing these services on a
NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-
ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-
proved chemicals or solvents, the use of
which has not been validated by
NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants,
fluids, grease, and refrigerant, refer to
“Capacities and recommended fluids/
lubricants” (P.10-3) of this manual.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAIN-
TENANCE
Drive belt*:
Check engine drive belt for wear, fraying
or cracking and for proper tension. Re-
place any damaged drive belt.
Engine air filter:
Replace at specified intervals. When driv-
ing for prolonged periods in dusty condi-
tions, check/replace the filter more
frequently.
Engine coolant*:
Replace coolant at the specified interval.
When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equiva-
lent with the proper mixture. (Refer to
“Engine cooling system” (P.8-4) to deter-
mine the proper mixture for your area.)
NOTE:
Mixing any other type of coolant or the
use of non-distilled water may reduce
the recommended service interval of
the coolant.
Maintenance and schedules 9-5
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
9-6 Maintenance and schedules
Intercooler coolant:
Intercooler coolant is maintenance-free.
Engine oil and oil filter:
Replace engine oil and oil filter at the
specified intervals. For recommended oil
grade and viscosity refer to “Capacities
and recommended fluids/lubricants”
(P.10-3).
Engine valve clearance*:
Inspect only if valve noise increases.
Adjust valve clearance if necessary.
Evaporative emissions control vapor
lines*:
Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness.
Tighten connections or replace parts as
necessary.
Fuel filter
Periodic maintenance is not required (in-
tank type filter).
Fuel lines*:
Check the fuel hoses, piping and connec-
tions for leaks, looseness, or deterioration.
Tighten connections or replace parts as
necessary.
Spark plugs:
Replace at specified intervals. Install new
plugs of the type as originally equipped.
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Brake lines and cables:
Visually inspect for proper installation.
Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration,
and signs of leaking. Replace any deterio-
rated or damaged parts immediately.
Brake pads and rotors:
Check for wear, deterioration and fluid
leaks. Replace any deteriorated or da-
maged parts immediately.
Exhaust system:
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler
and hangers for leaks, cracks, deteriora-
tion, and damage. Tighten connections or
replace parts as necessary.
In-cabin microfilter:
Replace at specified intervals. When driv-
ing for prolonged periods in dusty condi-
tions, replace the filter more frequently.
Propeller shaft(s):
Check for damage, looseness, and grease
leakage. (AWD)
Steering gear and linkage, axle and
suspension parts, drive shaft boots:
Check for damage, looseness, and leak-
age of oil or grease. Under severe driving
conditions, inspect more frequently.
Tire rotation:
Rotate tires at the specified interval.
Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil
and transfer case oil:
Visually inspect for signs of leakage at
specified intervals.
If using a car-top carrier, or towing a
trailer, or using a camper, or driving on
rough or muddy roads:
. Replace the differential oil and trans-
fer case oil every 20,000 miles (32,000
km) or 24 months.
. Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000
miles (96,000 km) or request the deal-
er to inspect the fluid deterioration
data using a CONSULT. If the dete-
rioration data is more than 210,000,
replace the CVT fluid.
To help ensure smooth, safe and eco-
nomical driving, NISSAN provides two
maintenance schedules that may be
used, depending upon the conditions in
which you usually drive. These schedules
contain both distance and time intervals,
up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96
months. For most people, the odometer
reading will indicate when service is
needed. However, if you drive very little,
your vehicle should be serviced at the
regular time intervals shown in the sche-
dule.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96
months, continue maintenance at the
same mileage/time intervals.
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDI-
TIONS
Additional maintenance items for se-
vere operating conditions; should be
performed on vehicles that are driven
under especially demanding conditions.
Additional maintenance items should be
performed if you primarily operate your
vehicle under the following conditions:
. Repeated short trips of less than 5
miles (8 km).
. Repeated short trips of less than 10
miles (16 km) with outside tempera-
tures remaining below freezing.
. Operating in hot weather in stop-and-
go “rush hour” traffic.
. Extensive idling and/or low speed
driving for long distances, such as
police, taxi or door-to-door delivery
use.
. Driving in dusty conditions.
. Driving on rough, muddy or salt
spread roads.
. Using a car-top carrier.
. Towing a trailer.
. Using a camper.
If your vehicle is mainly operated under
the severe conditions, follow the severe
maintenance intervals shown in the
maintenance schedule.
OIL CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with oil control
system. It calculates engine oil and filter
change intervals based on driving condi-
tions. Driving in the following severe
conditions will shorten the engine oil
and filter change interval.
Maintenance and schedules 9-7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
9-8 Maintenance and schedules
PR25DD ENGINE MODEL
The following shows the maintenance schedule. Choose the maintenance schedule needed based on your vehicle driving conditions.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.
5,000 Miles/6 Months/8,000 Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
10,000 Miles/12 Months/16,000 Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
STANDARD MAINTENANCE
15,000 Miles/18 Months/24,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect Intelligent Key battery
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
20,000 Miles/24 Months/32,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system
.
Inspect fuel lines/connections
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
Maintenance and schedules 9-9
9-10 Maintenance and schedules
25,000 Miles/30 Months/40,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
30,000 Miles/36 Months/48,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine air filter (1)
.
Replace engine oil and filter (2)
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more
frequent maintenance may be required.
(2) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
35,000 Miles/42 Months/56,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
40,000 Miles/48 Months/64,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system
.
Inspect fuel lines/connections
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension part
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
Maintenance and schedules 9-11
9-12 Maintenance and schedules
45,000 Miles/54 Months/72,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
50,000 Miles/60 Months/80,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
55,000 Miles/66 Months/88,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
60,000 Miles/72 Months/96,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system
.
Inspect fuel lines/connections
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension part
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine air filter (1)
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace engine oil and filter (2)
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace CVT fluid
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more
frequent maintenance may be required.
(2) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
Maintenance and schedules 9-13
9-14 Maintenance and schedules
65,000 Miles/78 Months/104,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
70,000 Miles/84 Months/112,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
75,000 Miles/90 Months/120,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
80,000 Miles/96 Months/128,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system
.
Inspect fuel lines/connections
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension part
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
Maintenance and schedules 9-15
9-16 Maintenance and schedules
85,000 Miles/102 Months/136,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
90,000 Miles/108 Months/144,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine air filter (1)
.
Replace engine oil and filter (2)
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more
frequent maintenance may be required.
(2) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
95,000 Miles/114 Months/152,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
100,000 Miles/120 Months/160,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system
.
Inspect fuel lines/connections
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension part
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
Maintenance and schedules 9-17
9-18 Maintenance and schedules
105,000 Miles/126 Months/168,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
.
Replace spark plugs (1) (2)
.
Replace engine coolant* (3)
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
(1) Performed based on the number of miles
only
(2) Replace spark plug when the plug gap
exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within
specified periodic replacement mileage.
(3) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles
(168,000 km) or 84 months. After first repla-
cement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000
km) or 60 months.
*: Maintenance items and intervals with “ * ” are
recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle
operation. The owner need not perform such
maintenance in order to maintain the emission
warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other
maintenance items and intervals are required.
110,000 Miles/132 Months/176,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
115,000 Miles/138 Months/184,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
120,000 Miles/144 Months/192,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system
.
Inspect fuel lines/connections
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension part
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine air filter (1)
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace engine oil and filter (2)
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
Maintenance and schedules 9-19
9-20 Maintenance and schedules
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace CVT fluid
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more
frequent maintenance may be required.
(2) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
KR15DDT ENGINE MODEL
The following shows the maintenance schedule. Choose the maintenance schedule needed based on your vehicle driving conditions.
After 90,000 miles (144,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.
3,750 Miles/6 Months/6,000 Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
7,500 Miles/12 Months/12,000 Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
Maintenance and schedules 9-21
9-22 Maintenance and schedules
11,250 Miles/18 Months/18,000 Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect Intelligent Key battery
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
15,000 Miles/24 Months/24,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system
.
Inspect fuel lines/connections
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
18,750 Miles/30 Months/30,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
22,500 Miles/36 Months/36,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
Maintenance and schedules 9-23
9-24 Maintenance and schedules
26,250 Miles/42 Months/42,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
30,000 Miles/48 Months/48,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system
.
Inspect fuel lines/connections
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension part
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine air filter (1)
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace engine oil and filter (2)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more
frequent maintenance may be required.
(2) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
33,750 Miles/54 Months/54,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
37,500 Miles/60 Months/60,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
Maintenance and schedules 9-25
9-26 Maintenance and schedules
41,250 Miles/66 Months/66,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
45,000 Miles/72 Months/72,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system
.
Inspect fuel lines/connections
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension part
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
48,750 Miles/78 Months/78,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
52,500 Miles/84 Months/84,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
Maintenance and schedules 9-27
9-28 Maintenance and schedules
56,250 Miles/90 Months/90,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
60,000 Miles/96 Months/96,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system
.
Inspect fuel lines/connections
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension part
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine air filter (1)
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace engine oil and filter (2)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more
frequent maintenance may be required.
(2) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
63,750 Miles/102 Months/102,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
67,500 Miles/108 Months/108,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
Maintenance and schedules 9-29
9-30 Maintenance and schedules
71,250 Miles/114 Months/114,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
75,000 Miles/120 Months/120,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system
.
Inspect fuel lines/connections
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension part
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
78,750 Miles/126 Months/126,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
82,500 Miles/132 Months/132,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine oil and filter (1)
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
Maintenance and schedules 9-31
9-32 Maintenance and schedules
86,250 Miles/138 Months/138,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
90,000 Miles/144 Months/144,000
Km
Standard maintenance:
.
Inspect brake lines and cables
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect CVT fluid
.
Inspect engine drive belts
.
Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system
.
Inspect fuel lines/connections
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension part
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect differential gear oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect AWD coupling oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace engine air filter (1)
.
Replace brake fluid
.
Replace engine oil and filter (2)
.
Replace In-cabin microfilter
.
Replace Intelligent Key battery
.
Perform tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
.
Inspect brake pads and rotors
.
Inspect exhaust system
.
Inspect steering gear and linkage
.
Inspect axle and suspension parts
.
Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)
.
Inspect drive shaft boots
.
Replace brake fluid
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more
frequent maintenance may be required.
(2) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil and filter within two
weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
Additional information
NOTE FOR ENGINE COOLANT *:
(1) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles
(168,000 km) or 84 months. After first repla-
cement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000
km) or 60 months.
(2) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-
freeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with
proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and
50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing
any other type of coolant or the use of non-
distilled water may reduce the life expec-
tancy of the factory fill coolant.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “ * ”
are recommended by NISSAN for reliable
vehicle operation. The owner need not per-
form such maintenance in order to maintain
the emission warranty or manufacturer recall
liability. Other maintenance items and inter-
vals are required.
NOTE FOR SPARK PLUGS:
(1) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
(2) Replace spark plug when the plug gap
exceeds 0.041 in (1.05 mm) even if within
specified replacement mileage.
Maintenance and schedules 9-33
9-34 Maintenance and schedules
MEMO
10 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants .................................... 10-3
Fuel information .................................................................. 10-5
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation........ 10-7
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations ...................................... 10-8
Specifications ................................................................................ 10-9
Engine .......................................................................................... 10-9
Wheels and tires .............................................................. 10-10
Dimensions and weights .......................................... 10-10
When traveling or registering in
another country ..................................................................... 10-10
Vehicle identification .......................................................... 10-11
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) plate .............................................................................. 10-11
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) ............................................................. 10-11
Engine serial number................................................... 10-12
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label............. 10-12
Emission control information label .................. 10-12
Tire and Loading Information label ................. 10-13
Air conditioner specification label ..................... 10-13
Installing front license plate ......................................... 10-14
Vehicle loading information .......................................... 10-15
Terms........................................................................................ 10-15
Vehicle load capacity ................................................... 10-15
Securing the load ......................................................... 10-17
Loading tips ...................................................................... 10-17
Measurement of weights ....................................... 10-18
Towing a trailer ...................................................................... 10-18
Maximum load limits ................................................. 10-19
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/
maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW) .............. 10-20
Towing load/specification..................................... 10-22
Towing safety .................................................................. 10-23
Flat towing ................................................................................. 10-28
Flat towing for All–Wheel Drive vehicle (if
so equipped) ..................................................................... 10-28
Flat towing for Front-Wheel Drive vehicle
(if so equipped)............................................................... 10-28
Uniform tire quality grading ........................................ 10-29
Treadwear .......................................................................... 10-29
Traction AA, A, B and C ........................................... 10-29
Temperature A, B and C ......................................... 10-29
Emission control system warranty ......................... 10-30
Reporting safety defects ................................................ 10-30
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) test ....................................................................................... 10-31
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ......................................... 10-32
Additional data recording (on vehicles
equipped with optional
ProPILOT Assist)............................................................. 10-32
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the
procedure instructed in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type
Capacity (approximate)
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
Fuel 55 L 14-1/2
gal
12-1/8
gal
ā See “Fuel information” (P.10-5).
Engine oil
*1
PR25DD With oil filter change 5.1 L 5-3/8 qt 4-1/2 qt ā Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” (or equivalent) is recommended.
ā If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic 0W-20
GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage caused by the use
of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as recommended is not covered
under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional informa-
tion, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” (P.10-7).
Drain and refill
*1
: For additional
information, see
“Changing engine
oil and filter” (P.8-
8).
Without oil filter change 4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt
KR15DDT With oil filter change 4.7 L 5 qt 4-1/8 qt
Without oil filter change 4.6 L 4-7/8 qt 4 qt
Engine coolant PR25DD With reservoir 8.8 L 9-1/4 qt 7-3/4 qt ā Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent
Reservoir 0.8 L 7/8 qt 3/4 qt
KR15DDT With reservoir 8.5 L 9 qt 7-1/2 qt
Reservoir 0.8 L 7/8 qt 3/4 qt
Intercooler coolant With reservoir 3 L 3-1/8 qt 2-5/8 qt
Reservoir 0.5 L 1/2 qt 1/2 qt
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — ā Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
ā NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equiva-
lent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that
are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the
CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is
not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Differential gear oil — — — ā Genuine NISSAN HYPOID FLUID·S1 GL-5 75W-80 or equivalent
Transfer fluid ———ā Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-S GL-5 synthetic 75W-90 or
equivalent
Brake fluid Refill to the proper oil level
according to the instructions
in the “8. Do-it-yourself” sec-
tion.
ā Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
*2
or equivalent DOT 3
*2
: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.
Multi-purpose grease — — — ā NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — ā See “Vehicle identification” (P.10-11) for air conditioner specification label.
ā HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
Air conditioning system oil — — — ā See “Vehicle identification” (P.10-11) for air conditioner specification label.
ā A/C System Oil ND-OIL12(PAG) or equivalent
Window washer fluid With liquid level sensor 5 L 1-3/8gal 1-1/8gal ā Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or
equivalent
Without liquid level sensor 2.4 L 5/8gal 1/2gal
Technical and consumer information 10-3
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS
10-4 Technical and consumer information
Fluid type
Capacity (approximate)
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
Coupling oil ———ā LSC Transmission Fluid 12-301 or equivalent
FUEL INFORMATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an
octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-
Knock Index) number (Research octane
number 91).
CAUTION
. Using a fuel other than that spe-
cified could adversely affect the
emission control system, and
may also affect warranty cover-
age.
. Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because
this will damage the three-way
catalyst.
. Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to
run on a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel
containing more than 15% etha-
nol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing
more than 15% ethanol can ad-
versely affect the emission con-
trol devices and systems of the
vehicle. Damage caused by such
fuel is not covered by the NISSAN
new vehicle limited warranty.
. Do not use fuel that contains the
octane booster methylcyclopen-
tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). Using fuel containing
MMT may adversely affect vehicle
performance and vehicle emis-
sions. Not all fuel dispensers are
labeled to indicate MMT content,
so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California
laws prohibit the use of MMT in
reformulated gasoline.
. U.S. government regulations re-
quire ethanol dispensing pumps
to be identified by a small,
square, orange and black label
with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for
that region.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter
(WWFC) specifications where it is avail-
able. Many of the automobile manufac-
turers developed this specification to
improve emission control system and
vehicle performance. Ask your service
station manager if the gasoline meets
the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing
reformulated gasolines. These gasolines
are specially designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. NISSAN supports efforts to-
wards cleaner air and suggests that you
use reformulated gasoline when avail-
able.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-
ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE
and methanol with or without advertising
their presence. NISSAN does not recom-
mend the use of fuels of which the
oxygenate content and the fuel compat-
ibility for your vehicle cannot be readily
determined. If in doubt, ask your service
station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel sys-
tem damage.
. The fuel should be unleaded and
have an octane rating no lower than
that recommended for unleaded
gasoline.
. If an oxygenate-blend, other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 15% oxyge-
nate.
Technical and consumer information 10-5
10-6 Technical and consumer information
. If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable
amount of appropriate cosolvents
and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-
erly formulated with appropriate
cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors,
such methanol blends may cause
fuel system damage and/or vehicle
performance problems. At this time,
sufficient data is not available to
ensure that all methanol blends are
suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as en-
gine stalling and difficult hot-starting are
experienced after using oxygenate-blend
fuels, immediately change to a non-oxy-
genate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of
MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during
refueling. Gasoline containing oxyge-
nates can cause paint damage.
E-15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately
15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gaso-
line. E-15 can only be used in vehicles
designed to run on E- 15 fuel. U.S. govern-
ment regulations require fuel ethanol
dispensing pumps to be identified with
small, square, orange and black label with
the common abbreviation or the appro-
priate percentage for that region.
E-85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately
85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gaso-
line. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible
Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel in
your vehicle. U.S. government regulations
require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to
be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbre-
viation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-
nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting
additive. NISSAN does not recommend
the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel
may adversely affect vehicle perfor-
mance, including the emissions control
system. Note that while some fuel pumps
label MMT content, not all do, so you may
have to consult your gasoline retailer for
more details.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
any aftermarket fuel additives (for exam-
ple, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster,
intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which
are sold commercially. Many of these
additives intended for gum, varnish or
deposit removal may contain active sol-
vent or similar ingredients that can be
harmful to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can
cause persistent, heavy “spark knock”.
(Spark knock is a metallic rapping
noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine
damage. If you detect a persistent
heavy spark knock even when using
gasoline of the stated octane rating, or
if you hear steady spark knock while
holding a steady speed on level roads, it
is recommended you have a NISSAN
dealer correct the condition. Failure to
correct the condition is misuse of the
vehicle, for which NISSAN is not respon-
sible.
Incorrect ignition timing will result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheat-
ing, which may cause excessive fuel
consumption or engine damage. If any
of the above symptoms are encountered,
have your vehicle checked. It is recom-
mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for
servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is
not a cause for concern, because you
get the greatest fuel benefit when there
is light spark knock for a short time
under heavy engine load.
JVT0351X
API certification mark
API service symbol
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE-
COMMENDATION
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance,
see “Capacities and recommended fluids/
lubricants” (P.10-3). NISSAN recommends
the use of an energy conserving oil in
order to improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-
cation or International Lubricant Standar-
dization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
These oils have the API certification mark
on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label
should not be used as they could cause
engine damage.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
oil additives. The use of an oil additive is
not necessary when the proper oil type is
used and maintenance intervals are fol-
lowed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.
Technical and consumer information 10-7
10-8 Technical and consumer information
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important to select the engine oil
viscosity based on the temperatures at
which the vehicle will be operated before
the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended
could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with
a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter.
When replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil
filter or its equivalent for the reason
described in “Change intervals”.
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
specified quality oils and filters. Using an
engine oil and filter other than the
specified quality, or exceeding recom-
mended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the
engine caused by improper maintenance
or use of incorrect oil and filter quality
and/or viscosity is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not
have to change the oil before the first
recommended change interval.
Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle. Opera-
tion under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter
changes:
. repeated short distance driving at
cold outside temperatures
. driving in dusty conditions
. extensive idling
. towing a trailer
. stop and go commuting
(See “9. Maintenance and schedules” sec-
tion.)
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE-
FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE-
COMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with
the specified refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-
1234yf) and A/C system oil ND-OIL12
(PAG) or the exact equivalent.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air
conditioning system and will require
the replacement of all air conditioner
system components.
The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in
your NISSAN vehicle will not harm the
earth’s ozone layer. Although this refrig-
erant does not affect the earth’s atmo-
sphere, certain government regulations
require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air condi-
tioner system service. Air conditioner
system should only be serviced by trained
and certified technicians to ensure proper
and safe operation (SAE J2845). A NISSAN
dealer has the trained technicians and
equipment needed to recover and recycle
your air conditioner system refrigerant.
Only new and SAEJ2842 certified eva-
porator(s) shall be used as replacement
parts.
A damaged or leaking air conditioning
evaporator shall never be repaired or
replaced with one removed from a used
or salvaged vehicle. To replace a da-
maged or leaking evaporator, use only
new and SAE J2842 certified evaporator
(s). It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer when servicing your air
conditioner system.
ENGINE
Model PR25DD KR15DDT
Type
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement
4-cylinder, in-line 3-cylinder, in-line
Bore × Stroke in (mm)
3.504 × 3.937 (89.0 × 100.0) -
when compression ratio = 8 in (mm)
-
3.307 × 3.547 (84.0 × 90.1)
when compression ratio = 14 in (mm)
-
3.307 × 3.500 (84.0 × 88.9)
Displacement cu in (cm
3
) 151.85 (2,488) -
when compression ratio = 8 cu in (cm
3
)-
91.41 (1,497)
when compression ratio = 14 cu in (cm
3
)-
90.19 (1,477)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-2-3
Idle speed rpm
No adjustment is necessary.
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm
Spark plug
Standard
DXE22H11C ILMAR8G8GS
Spark plug gap (Normal)
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
0.031 (0.8)
Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
Technical and consumer information 10-9
SPECIFICATIONS
10-10 Technical and consumer information
WHEELS AND TIRES
Road wheel
Type Size Offset in
(mm)
Conven-
tional
17 × 7.5J 1.57 (40)
18 × 7.5J 1.57 (40)
19 × 7.5J 1.57 (40)
Spare
17 × 4T 1.18 (30)
Tire
Type Size
Pressure PSI
(kPa) [Cold]
Con-
ven-
tional
235/65 R17
Front: 36
(250)
Rear: 33 (230)
235/60 R18
Front: 33
(230)
Rear: 30 (210)
235/55 R19
Spare
T155/80 D17
(2WD)
T165/90 D17
(AWD)
60 (420)
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length in
(mm)
182.9 (4,645)*1
183.5 (4,660)*2
Overall width in
(mm)
72.4 (1,840)
Overall height in
(mm)
67.9 (1,725)
Front tread in
(mm)
62.4 (1,585)
Rear tread in
(mm)
62.6 (1,590)
Wheelbase in
(mm)
106.5 (2,705)
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
(GVWR)
lb (kg)
See the F.M.V.S.S. or
C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label on the
driver’s side center
pillar.
Gross Axle
Weight Rating
(GAWR)
Front lb (kg)
Rear lb (kg)
*1: Without license plate
*2: With license plate
When planning to travel in another
country, you should first find out if the
fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s
engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is
too low may cause engine damage. All
gasoline vehicles must be operated with
unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid tak-
ing your vehicle to areas where appro-
priate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of
your vehicle to another country, state,
province or district, it may be necessary
to modify the vehicle to meet local laws
and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor
vehicle emission control and safety stan-
dards vary according to the country,
state, province or district; therefore, vehi-
cle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into
another country, state, province or dis-
trict and registered, its modifications,
transportation, and registration are the
responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not
responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
JVT0352X
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
The vehicle identification number plate is
attached as shown. This number is the
identification for your vehicle and is used
in the vehicle registration.
JVT0253X
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is lo-
cated as shown.
WAJ0103X
PR25DD engine
WAJ0221X
KR15DDT engine
Technical and consumer information 10-11
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
10-12 Technical and consumer information
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.
STI0718
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.)
certification label is affixed as shown. This
label contains valuable vehicle informa-
tion, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc.
Review it carefully.
WAJ0232X
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
LABEL
The emission control information label is
attached to the underside of the hood as
shown.
STI0494
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label affixed
to the pillar as shown.
WAJ0153X
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is
affixed to the underside of the hood as
shown.
Technical and consumer information 10-13
10-14 Technical and consumer information
Air conditioner specification label symbols:
Symbol Name Reference Graphic
Caution ISO 7000 0434
Air Conditioning System
(MAC)
ISO 2575 D01
MAC System Lubricant Type
(PAG–POE)
Requires Registered Techni-
cian to Service MAC System
Flammable Refrigerant
WAJ0104X
To mount the front license plate , attach
the licence plate to the location marks
(small dimples)
of the bumper using the
two screws
provided.
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
WARNING
. It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside
the vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas
are more likely to be ser-
iously injured or killed.
. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
. Be sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and using
a seat belt properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize your-
self with the following terms before
loading your vehicle:
. Curb Weight (actual weight of
your vehicle) - vehicle weight
including: standard and optional
equipment, fluids, emergency
tools, and spare tire assembly.
This weight does not include
passengers and cargo.
. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -
curb weight plus the combined
weight of passengers and cargo.
. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trai-
ler tongue load and any other
optional equipment. This infor-
mation is located on the F.M.V.S.
S./C.M.V.S.S. label.
. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
- maximum weight (load) limit
specified for the front or rear
axle. This information is located
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.
. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - The maximum total
weight rating of the vehicle,
passengers, cargo, and trailer.
. Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load
limit, Total load capacity - max-
imum total weight limit specified
of the load (passengers and
cargo) for the vehicle. This is
the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo that can
be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer,
the trailer tongue weight must
be included as part of the cargo
load. This information is located
on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label.
. Cargo capacity - permissible
weight of cargo, the subtracted
weight of occupants from the
load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Ca-
pacity” on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
To get “the combined weight of
occupants and cargo”, add the
weight of all occupants, then add
the total luggage weight. Examples
are shown in the following illustra-
tion.
Technical and consumer information 10-15
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
10-16 Technical and consumer information
STI0445
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For ex-
ample, if the XXX amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs) or (640 − 340 (5 x 70) =
300 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step
4.
Before driving a loaded vehicle,
confirm that you do not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. (See
“Measurement of weights” (P.10-
18).)
Also check tires for proper inflation
pressures. See the Tire and Loading
Information label.
WAC0534X
SECURING THE LOAD
There are luggage hooks located in the
cargo area as shown. The hooks can be
used to secure cargo with ropes or other
types of straps.
Do not apply a total load of more than
22 lbs. (10 kg) to a single metal floor
hook when securing cargo.
WARNING
. Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
. The child restraint top tether
strap may be damaged by con-
tact with items in the cargo area.
Secure any items in the cargo
area. Your child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision if the
top tether strap is damaged.
. Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle
can break, tire damage could
occur, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could
result in loss of control and cause
personal injury.
LOADING TIPS
. The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the F.M.
V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-
bel.
. Do not load the front and rear
axle to the GAWR. Doing so will
exceed the GVWR.
Technical and consumer information 10-17
10-18 Technical and consumer information
WARNING
. Properly secure all cargo
with ropes or straps to help
prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo
higher than the seatbacks.
In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
. Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or
the maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of
your vehicle can break, tire
damage could occur, or it
can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could
result in loss of control and
cause personal injury.
. Overloading not only can
shorten the life of your ve-
hicle and the tire, but can
cause unsafe vehicle hand-
ling and longer braking dis-
tances. This may cause a
premature tire failure, which
could result in a serious
accident and personal in-
jury. Failures caused by
overloading are not covered
by the vehicle’s warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent
weight shifts that could affect the
balance of your vehicle. When the
vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale
and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine
axle loads. Individual axle loads
should not exceed either of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR).
The total of the axle loads should
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). These rat-
ings are given on the vehicle certi-
fication label. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to
bring all weights below the ratings.
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely
affect vehicle handling, braking and
performance and may lead to acci-
dents.
CAUTION
. Do not tow a trailer or haul a
heavy load for the first 500 miles
(800 km). Your engine, axle or
other parts could be damaged.
. For the first 500 miles (800 km)
that you tow a trailer, do not drive
over 50 MPH (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Your new vehicle was designed to be
used primarily to carry passengers and
cargo. Remember that towing a trailer
places additional loads on your vehicle’s
engine, drivetrain, steering, braking and
other systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is
TOWING A TRAILER
available on the website at
www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes
information on trailer towing capability
and the special equipment required for
proper towing.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to
exceed the value specified in the “Towing
load/specification” (P.10-22) chart found
in this section. The total trailer load
equals trailer weight plus its cargo
weight.
The maximum Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the
value specified in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart.
STI0541
The GCWR equals the combined weight of
the towing vehicle (including passengers
and cargo) plus the total trailer load.
Towing loads greater than these or using
improper towing equipment could ad-
versely affect vehicle handling, braking
and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer
is not only related to the maximum trailer
loads, but also the places you plan to tow.
Tow weights appropriate for level high-
way driving may have to be reduced for
low traction situations (for example, on
slippery boat ramps).
Temperature conditions can also affect
towing. For example, towing a heavy
trailer in high outside temperatures on
graded roads can affect engine perfor-
mance and cause overheating. The trans-
mission high fluid temperature and
engine protection mode, which helps
reduce the chance of transmission and
engine damage, could activate and auto-
matically decrease engine power. Vehicle
speed may decrease under high load.
Plan your trip carefully to account for
trailer and vehicle load, weather and road
conditions.
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced
engine power and vehicle speed.
The reduced speed may be lower
than other traffic, which could in-
crease the chance of a collision. Be
especially careful when driving. If the
vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-
ing speed, pull to the side of the road
in a safe area. Allow the engine to
cool and return to normal operation.
(See “If your vehicle overheats” (P.6-
14).)
Technical and consumer information 10-19
10-20 Technical and consumer information
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from im-
proper towing procedures is not
covered by NISSAN warranties.
STI0542
Tongue load
When using a weight carrying or a weight
distributing hitch, keep the tongue load
between 10 – 15% of the total trailer load
or use the trailer tongue load specified by
the trailer manufacturer. The tongue load
must be within the maximum tongue
load limits shown in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue
load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo
to allow for proper tongue load.
TI1012M
MAXIMUM GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
(GVW)/MAXIMUM GROSS AXLE
WEIGHT (GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label. The GVW equals the
combined weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue
load and any other optional equipment. In
addition, front or rear GAW must not
exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
Towing capacities are calculated assum-
ing a base vehicle with driver and any
options required to achieve the rating.
Additional passengers, cargo and/or op-
tional equipment, such as the trailer hitch,
will add weight to the vehicle and reduce
your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity
and trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be
weighed to confirm the vehicle is within
the GVWR, Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross
Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) and
Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be
measured using platform type scales
commonly found at truck stops, highway
weigh stations, building supply centers or
salvage yards.
To determine the available payload capa-
city for tongue/king pin load, use the
following procedure.
1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.
M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with
all of the passengers and cargo that
are normally in the vehicle when
towing a trailer.
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight
from the GVWR. The remaining
amount is the available maximum
tongue/king pin load.
To determine the available towing capa-
city, use the following procedure.
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
“Towing Load/Specification” chart
found later in this section.
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight
from the GCWR. The remaining
amount is the available maximum
towing capacity.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,
weigh your trailer on a scale with all
equipment and cargo, that are normally
in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure
the Gross trailer weight is not more than
the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on
the trailer and is not more than the
calculated available maximum towing
capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the
scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle
Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are
not more than Front Gross Axle Weight
and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.
S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The cargo
in the trailer and vehicle may need to be
moved or removed to meet the specified
ratings.
Example:
. Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as
weighed on a scale - including pas-
sengers, cargo and hitch - 6,350 lb.
(2,880 kg).
. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label - 7,250 lb. (3,289 kg).
. Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) from “Towing Load/Specifica-
tion” chart - 15,100 lb. (6,849 kg).
. Maximum Trailer towing capacity
from “Towing Load/Specification”
chart - 9,100 lb (4,128 kg).
7,250 lb. (3,289 kg)
GVWR
− 6,350lb. (2,880 kg)
GVW
= 900 lb. (409 kg)
Available for tongue
weight
15,100 lb. (6,849 kg)
GCWR
− 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg)
GVW
= 8,750 lb. (3,969 kg)
Capacity available for
towing
900 lb. (409 kg) /
Available tongue
weight
8,750 lb. (3,969 kg)
Available capacity
= 10 % tongue weight
The available towing capacity may be less
than the maximum towing capacity due
to the passenger and cargo load in the
vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight
between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or
within the trailer tongue load specifica-
Technical and consumer information 10-21
10-22 Technical and consumer information
tion recommended by the trailer manu-
facturer. If the tongue load becomes
excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain
the proper tongue load. Do not exceed
the maximum tongue weight specifica-
tion shown in the “Towing load/specifica-
tion” chart even if the calculated available
tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the
calculated tongue weight is less than 10%,
reduce the total trailer weight to match
the available tongue weight.
Always verify that available capacities are
within the required ratings.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
WARNING
The towing capacities provided in
this manual are for general reference
only. The safe towing capacity of
your vehicle is affected by dealer
and factory installed options and
passenger and cargo loads. You
must weigh the vehicle and trailer
as described in this manual to de-
termine the actual vehicle towing
capacity. Do not exceed the pub-
lished maximum towing capacity, or
the GCWR or the GVWR shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-
bel. Doing so can result in an acci-
dent causing serious personal injury
or property damage.
Towing load/specification chart
Engine Type
PR25DD
KR15DDT
Axle Type
Two-Wheel
Drive (2WD)
All-Wheel Drive
(AWD)
Two-Wheel
Drive (2WD)
All-Wheel Drive
(AWD)
Maximum Towing Capa-
city*1
1,350 lbs (612 kg)
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
Maximum Tongue Load
135 lbs (61 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
Maximum Gross Com-
bined Weight Rating
5,836 lbs (2,647
kg)
5,969 lbs (2,707
kg)
6,053 lbs (2,745
kg)
6,185 lbs (2,805
kg)
1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any
options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional
equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing
capacity.
TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle
and trailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is
securely attached to the vehicle to help
avoid personal injury or property damage
due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough
road surfaces or passing trucks.
WARNING
Trailer hitch components have spe-
cific weight ratings. Your vehicle may
be capable of towing a trailer heavier
than the weight rating of the hitch
components. Never exceed the
weight rating of the hitch compo-
nents. Doing so can cause serious
personal injury or property damage.
Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and
weight rating for your trailer:
. The required hitch ball size is stamped
on most trailer couplers. Most hitch
balls also have the size printed on top
of the ball.
. Choose the proper class hitch ball
based on the trailer weight.
Technical and consumer information 10-23
10-24 Technical and consumer information
. The diameter of the threaded shank of
the hitch ball must be matched to the
ball mount hole diameter. The hitch
ball shank should be no more than
1/16″ smaller than the hole in the ball
mount.
. The threaded shank of the hitch ball
must be long enough to be properly
secured to the ball mount. There
should be at least 2 threads showing
beyond the lock washer and nut.
Ball mount
The hitch ball is attached to the ball
mount and the ball mount is inserted into
the hitch receiver. Choose a proper class
ball mount based on the trailer weight.
Additionally, the ball mount should be
chosen to keep the trailer tongue level
with the ground.
Weight carrying hitches
A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball
mount is one that is designed to carry the
whole amount of tongue weight and
gross weight directly on the ball mount
and on the receiver.
Weight distribution hitch
This type of hitch is also called a “load-
leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars
attach to the ball mount and to the trailer
to distribute the tongue weight (hitch
weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles
cannot carry the full tongue weight of a
given trailer, and need some of the
tongue weight transferred through the
frame and pushing down on the front
wheels. This gives stability to the tow
vehicle.
A weight-distributing hitch system (Class
IV) is recommended if you plan to tow
trailers with a maximum weight over
5,000 lbs (2,267 kg). Check with the trailer
and towing equipment manufacturers to
determine if they recommend the use of a
weight-distributing hitch system.
NOTE:
A weight-distributing hitch system may
affect the operation of trailer surge
brakes. If you are considering use of a
weight-distributing hitch system with a
surge brake-equipped trailer, check
with the surge brake, hitch or trailer
manufacturer to determine if and how
this can be done.
Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the
weight-distributing hitch system.
General set-up instructions are as follows:
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level sur-
face. With the ignition switch in the ON
position and the doors closed, allow
the vehicle to stand for several min-
utes so that it can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference
point on the front and rear bumpers
at the center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and
adjust the hitch equalizers so that the
front bumper height is within 0 - .5
inches (0 - 13 mm) of the reference
height measured in step 2. The rear
bumper should be no higher than the
reference height measured in step 2.
WARNING
Properly adjust the weight distribut-
ing hitch so the rear of the bumper is
no higher than the measured refer-
ence height when the trailer is at-
tached. If the rear bumper is higher
than the measured reference height
when loaded, the vehicle may handle
unpredictably which could cause a
loss of vehicle control and cause
serious personal injury or property
damage.
Sway control device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts and buf-
feting caused by other vehicles can affect
trailer handling. Sway control devices
may be used to help control these affects.
If you choose to use one, contact a
reputable trailer hitch supplier to make
sure the sway control device will work
with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the
trailer’s brake system. Follow the instruc-
tions provided by the manufacturer for
installing and using the sway control
device.
Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
tow trailers of a maximum weight of
2,000 lb (907 kg).
Tire pressures
. When towing a trailer, inflate the
vehicle tires to the recom-
mended cold tire pressure indi-
cated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
. Trailer tire condition, size, load
rating and proper inflation pres-
sure should be in accordance
with the trailer and tire manu-
facturers’ specifications.
Safety chains
Always use a suitable chain between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains
should be crossed and should be at-
tached to the hitch, not to the vehicle
bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough
slack in the chains to permit turning
corners.
Trailer lights (if so equipped)
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle elec-
trical system, a commercially avail-
able power-type module/converter
must be used to provide power for
all trailer lighting. This unit uses the
vehicle battery as a direct power
source for all trailer lights while
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight
and turn signal circuits as a signal
source. The module/converter must
draw no more than 15 milliamps
from the stop and tail lamp circuits.
Using a module/converter that ex-
ceeds these power requirements
may damage the vehicle’s electrical
system. See a reputable trailer retai-
ler to obtain the proper equipment
and to have it installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal
and/or local regulations. For assistance in
hooking up trailer lights, contact a NISSAN
dealer or reputable trailer retailer.
Pre-towing tips
. Be certain your vehicle maintains a
level position when a loaded or un-
loaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive
the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-
up or nose-down condition; check for
improper tongue load, overload, worn
suspension or other possible causes
of either condition.
. Always secure items in the trailer to
prevent load shift while driving.
. Keep the cargo load as low as possible
in the trailer to keep the trailer center
of gravity low.
. Load the trailer so approximately 60%
of the trailer load is in the front half
and 40% is in the back half. Also make
sure the load is balanced side to side.
. Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,
vehicle tire pressure, trailer light op-
eration, and trailer wheel lug nuts
every time you attach a trailer to the
vehicle.
. Be certain your rearview mirrors con-
form to all federal, state or local
regulations. If not, install any mirrors
required for towing before driving the
Technical and consumer information 10-25
10-26 Technical and consumer information
vehicle.
. Determine the overall height of the
vehicle and trailer so the required
clearance is known.
Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understand-
ing of the vehicle’s behavior, you should
practice turning, stopping and backing up
in an area which is free from traffic.
Steering stability, and braking perfor-
mance will be somewhat different than
under normal driving conditions.
. Always secure items in the trailer to
prevent load shift while driving.
. Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a
pin or lock to prevent the coupler from
inadvertently becoming unlatched.
. Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or
stops.
. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
. Always drive your vehicle at a moder-
ate speed. Some states or provinces
have specific speed limits for vehicles
that are towing trailers. Obey the local
speed limits.
. When backing up, hold the bottom of
the steering wheel with one hand.
Move your hand in the direction in
which you want the trailer to go. Make
small corrections and back up slowly.
If possible, have someone guide you
when you are backing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle
and trailer when parking. Parking on a
slope is not recommended; however, if
you must do so:
CAUTION
If you push the park button to
engage the P (Park) position before
blocking the wheels and applying
the parking brake, transmission da-
mage could occur.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the
downhill side of the vehicle and trailer
wheels.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place,
slowly release the brake pedal until
the blocks absorb the vehicle load.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Push the park button to engage the P
(Park) position.
6. Turn off the engine.
To drive away:
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and
trailer are clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the
blocks.
. While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may
decrease overall stability. Therefore, to
maintain adequate control, reduce
your speed and shift to a lower gear.
Avoid long or repeated use of the
brakes when descending a hill, as this
reduces their effectiveness and could
cause overheating. Shifting to a lower
gear instead provides “engine braking”
and reduces the need to brake as
frequently.
. If the engine coolant temperature
rises to a high temperature, see “If
your vehicle overheats” (P.6-14).
. Trailer towing requires more fuel than
normal circumstances.
. Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s
first 500 miles (800 km).
. For the first 500 miles (800 km) that
you do tow, do not drive over 50 MPH
(80 km/h).
. Have your vehicle serviced more often
than at intervals specified in the
recommended maintenance schedule
shown in the "9. Maintenance and
schedules" section.
. When making a turn, your trailer
wheels will be closer to the inside of
the turn than your vehicle wheels. To
compensate for this, make a larger
than normal turning radius during the
turn.
. Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-
versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,
possibly causing vehicle sway. When
being passed by larger vehicles, be
prepared for possible changes in
crosswinds that could affect vehicle
handling.
Do the following if the trailer begins to
sway:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal to allow the vehicle to coast
and steer as straight ahead as the
road conditions allow. This combina-
tion will help stabilize the vehicle.
.
Do not correct trailer sway by
steering or applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently
apply the brakes and pull to the side
of the road in a safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is
balanced as described earlier in this
section.
. Be careful when passing other vehi-
cles. Passing while towing a trailer
requires considerably more distance
than normal passing. Remember the
length of the trailer must also pass the
other vehicle before you can safely
change lanes.
. Downshift the transmission to a lower
gear for engine braking when driving
down steep or long hills. This will help
slow the vehicle without applying the
brakes.
. Avoid holding the brake pedal down
too long or too frequently. This could
cause the brakes to overheat, result-
ing in reduced braking efficiency.
. Increase your following distance to
allow for greater stopping distances
while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops
and brake gradually.
. NISSAN recommends that the cruise
control not be used while towing a
trailer.
. While towing a trailer, do not use the
following systems (if so equipped):
— Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys-
tem
— Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
system
— Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system
— Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention
(I-BSI) system
— Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) sys-
tem
— ProPILOT Assist system (Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC), ProPILOT As-
sist with Navi-link and Steering
Assist)
— Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) with Pedestrian Detection
system
— Intelligent Forward Collision Warn-
ing (I-FCW) system
— Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) sys-
tem
. Some states or provinces have speci-
fic regulations and speed limits for
vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey
the local speed limits.
. Check your hitch, trailer wiring har-
ness connections, and trailer wheel
lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of
travel and at every break.
. When launching a boat, do not allow
the water level to go over the exhaust
tail pipe or rear bumper.
. Make sure you disconnect the trailer
lights before backing the trailer into
Technical and consumer information 10-27
10-28 Technical and consumer information
the water or the trailer lights may
burn out.
When towing a trailer, the Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid, trans-
fer fluid and differential gear oil should
be changed more frequently. For addi-
tional information, see the "9. Mainte-
nance and schedules" section.
FLAT TOWING FOR ALL–WHEEL
DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground is sometimes called flat
towing. This method is sometimes used
when towing a vehicle behind a recrea-
tional vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
. Failure to follow these guidelines
can result in severe transmission
damage.
. Never flat tow your All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) vehicle.
. DO NOT tow your All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) vehicle with any wheels on
the ground. Doing so may cause
serious and expensive damage to
the powertrain.
. For emergency towing proce-
dures refer to “Towing recom-
mended by NISSAN” (P.6-17).
FLAT TOWING FOR FRONT-WHEEL
DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground is sometimes called flat
towing. This method is sometimes used
when towing a vehicle behind a recrea-
tional vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
. Failure to follow these guidelines
can result in severe transmission
damage.
. Whenever flat towing your vehi-
cle, always tow forward, never
backward.
. Never tow your front wheel drive
vehicle with the front tires on the
ground. Doing so may cause ser-
ious and expensive damage to
the powertrain.
. DO NOT tow your front wheel
drive Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground (flat
towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE
internal transmission parts due
to lack of transmission lubrica-
tion.
FLAT TOWING
. For emergency towing proce-
dures refer to “Towing recom-
mended by NISSAN” in the “In
case of emergency” section of
this manual.
Continuously Variable Transmis-
sion (CVT)
To tow a vehicle equipped with a CVT, an
appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed
under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels.
Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s
recommendations when using their pro-
duct.
DOT (Department Of Transportation)
Quality Grades: All passenger car tires
must conform to federal safety require-
ments in addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where ap-
plicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-
ture A
TREADWEAR
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon ac-
tual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
TRACTION AA, A, B AND C
The traction grades, from highest to low-
est, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades
represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hy-
droplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
TEMPERATURE A, B AND C
The temperature grades A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
sponds to a level of performance which
Technical and consumer information 10-29
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
10-30 Technical and consumer information
all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
sive speed, under-inflation, or exces-
sive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat build-
up and possible tire failure.
Your vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties.
For USA:
. Emission Defects Warranty
. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found
with other vehicle warranties in your
Warranty Information Booklet which
comes with your vehicle. If you did not
receive a Warranty Information Booklet,
or it has become lost, you may obtain a
replacement by writing to:
. Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada:
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found
with other vehicle warranties in your
Warranty Information Booklet which
comes with your vehicle. If you did not
receive a Warranty Information Booklet,
or it has become lost, you may obtain a
replacement by writing to:
. Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario,
L4W 4Z5
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the Na-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-
ministration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual pro-
blems between you, your dealer, or
NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.
gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
You may notify NISSAN by contact-
ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-
ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Trans-
port Canada in addition to notifying
NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may request that NISSAN con-
duct a recall campaign. However,
Transport Canada cannot become
involved in individual problems be-
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
You may contact Transport Cana-
da’s Defect Investigations and Re-
calls Division toll free at 1-800-333-
0510. You may also report safety
defects online at: https://
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng
(English speakers) or https://
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra
(French speakers).
Additional information concerning
motor vehicle safety may be ob-
tained from Transport Canada’s
Road Safety Information Centre at
1-800-333-0371 or online at www.
tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-
ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiterou-
tiere (French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety
concerns please contact our Con-
sumer Information Centre toll free
at 1-800-387-0122.
WARNING
A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) should never be tested
using a two wheel dynamometer
(such as the dynamometers used by
some states for emissions testing),
or similar equipment. Make sure you
inform test facility personnel that
your vehicle is equipped with AWD
before it is placed on a dynam-
ometer. Using the wrong test equip-
ment may result in transmission
damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
Due to legal requirements in some states/
areas or provinces, your vehicle may be
required to be in what is called the “ready
condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) test of the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the “ready condition”
can be obtained by ordinary usage of
the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is
repaired or the battery is disconnected,
the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready
Technical and consumer information 10-31
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
10-32 Technical and consumer information
condition”. Before taking the I/M test,
check the vehicle’s inspection/mainte-
nance test readiness condition. Place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. If the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 sec-
onds, the I/M test condition is “not ready”.
If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds,
the I/M test condition is “ready”.
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer to set “ready condition” or to
prepare the vehicle for testing.
This vehicle is equipped with an Event
Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obsta-
cle, data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fas-
tened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
. Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your
vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and
crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN
dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data
will only be accessed with the consent of
the vehicle owner or lessee or as other-
wise required or permitted by law.
ADDITIONAL DATA RECORDING (on
vehicles equipped with optional
ProPILOT Assist)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
optional ProPILOT Assist, it will also be
equipped with supplemental data record-
ing function intended to assist in under-
standing how ProPILOT Assist performs in
certain nontrivial crash or near-crash
scenarios. Specifically, supplemental re-
cording is designed to capture the follow-
ing:
. Driver operational status of the accel-
erator, brakes, steering, etc.
. Detection status of a vehicle ahead
and lane markers
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
. Vehicle information including distance
to vehicle ahead and lateral position
. Information on the operation of the
ProPILOT Assist and other crash
avoidance features
. ProPILOT Assist malfunction diagnosis
information
. External images from the multi-sen-
sing front camera (Available only
when the SRS air bag or AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system is acti-
vated)
The ProPILOT Assist does not record
conversations, sounds or images of the
inside of the vehicle.
To read this supplemental data, special
equipment is required and access to the
vehicle or the recording unit is needed.
This supplemental data will only be ac-
cessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required
or permitted by law. If downloaded,
NISSAN and third parties entrusted by
NISSAN may use the data recorded for the
purpose of improving NISSAN’s vehicle
safety performance.
NISSAN and third parties entrusted by
NISSAN will not disclose/provide the re-
corded data to a third party except:
. With the consent of the vehicle owner
or with the consent of the lessee
. In response to an official request from
law enforcement, court order, govern-
mental agency, or other legally en-
forceable request
. For research purposes after the data
is modified such that it is no longer
tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner (anonymized)
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the
best source of service and repair informa-
tion for your vehicle. This manual is the
same one used by the factory trained
technicians working at a NISSAN dealer.
Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can
also be purchased.
In the USA:
For current pricing and availability of
genuine NISSAN Service Manuals con-
tact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of
genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals con-
tact:
1-800-247-5321
In Canada:
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this
model year and prior please contact a
NISSAN dealer. For the phone number
and location of a NISSAN dealer in your
area call the NISSAN Information Center
at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN
representative will assist you.
Technical and consumer information 10-33
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
10-34 Technical and consumer information
MEMO
11 Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .................... 5-156
Active noise cancellation.................................... 5-174
Active Ride Control ................................................. 5-160
Active sound enhancement............................. 5-174
Adjustable luggage floor ....................................... 2-75
Advanced Air Bag System.................................... 1-53
Air bag system
Advanced Air Bag System............................. 1-53
Driver and front passenger
supplemental knee air bag system ....... 1-62
Front and rear seat-mounted
side-impact supplemental air
bag system................................................................ 1-64
Front central seat-mounted
side-impact supplemental air
bag system................................................................ 1-64
Front passenger air bag and
status light................................................................. 1-55
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag system..................... 1-64
Air bag warning labels ............................................ 1-67
Air bag warning light................................. 1-67, 2-16
Air cleaner housing filter ....................................... 8-19
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation............................... 4-26
Air conditioner service...................................... 4-37
Air conditioner specification label....... 10-13
Air conditioning system refrigerant
and lubricant recommendations............. 4-37
Air conditioning system refrigerant
and oil recommendations............................. 10-8
Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle
security system)............................................................ 2-53
Alcohol, drugs and driving................................... 5-12
Alert
Rear Door Alert....................................................... 2-67
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (See
Intelligent 4x4)............................................................ 5-151
Android Auto....................................................................... 4-2
Antenna............................................................................... 4-38
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .................... 5-156
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light................................................................... 2-17
Appearance care
Exterior appearance care ................................. 7-2
Interior appearance care................................... 7-4
Apple CarPlay®................................................................... 4-2
Armrest.................................................................................... 1-9
Audible reminders....................................................... 2-22
AUTO mode...................................................................... 5-32
Automatic
Door locks...................................................................... 3-7
Automatic air conditioner
and heater ......................................................... 4-31, 4-34
Automatic brake hold.............................................. 5-28
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
system OFF warning light.................................... 2-17
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
with Pedestrian Detection system ............. 5-122
Automatic moonroof and sunshade........... 2-85
Average fuel consumption................................... 2-46
Average speed............................................................... 2-46
Avoiding collision and rollover.......................... 5-10
AWD (See Intelligent 4x4)................................... 5-151
B
Battery.................................................................................. 8-15
Battery replacement, Intelligent Key..... 8-25
Battery saver system......................................... 2-63
Variable voltage control system .............. 8-17
Before starting the engine................................... 5-17
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)..................................... 5-58
Booster seats.................................................................. 1-44
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ............ 5-156
Brake fluid .................................................................. 8-12
Brake system ....................................................... 5-155
Electronic parking brake system
warning light............................................................ 2-18
Parking brake .......................................................... 5-25
Warning light............................................................ 2-14
Break-in schedule .................................................... 5-149
Brightness control
Instrument panel.................................................. 2-11
Bulb check/instrument panel............................ 2-14
Bulb replacement........................................................ 8-28
C
Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants...................... 10-3
Car phone or CB radio............................................ 4-38
Card holder....................................................................... 2-79
Cargo cover ..................................................................... 2-80
Cargo light ........................................................................ 2-89
Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst ....... 5-6
Charger
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
charging connector............................................ 2-69
Wireless charger.................................................... 2-70
Chassis control ........................................................... 5-160
Child restraints.............................................................. 1-24
Booster seats........................................................... 1-44
LATCH system......................................................... 1-26
11-2
Precautions on child restraints................. 1-24
Child safety....................................................................... 1-21
Child safety rear door lock ...................................... 3-7
Chimes
Seat belt warning light
and chime.................................................... 1-16, 2-16
Chimes, Audible reminders.................................. 2-22
Circuit breaker, Fusible link ................................. 8-23
Cleaning exterior and interior................... 7-2, 7-4
Clock...................................................................................... 2-48
Coat hook.......................................................................... 2-79
Cockpit..................................................................................... 2-3
Cold weather driving............................................. 5-172
Connection to Roadside Assistance ................ 6-2
Console box..................................................................... 2-78
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid........................................................................... 8-12
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator ........................................................ 2-11
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode (with ProPILOT Assist)........................... 5-119
Coolant
Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-3
Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-6
Changing intercooler coolant ....................... 8-8
Checking engine coolant level...................... 8-6
Checking intercooler coolant level............ 8-7
Corrosion protection.................................................... 7-7
Cover, Cargo cover..................................................... 2-80
Cruise control
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode....................................................... 5-119
Cruise control (with ProPILOT Assist)
(See Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode)...................................................... 5-119
Cruise control (without
ProPILOT Assist)..................................................... 5-83
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) .................. 5-98
Cup holders...................................................................... 2-73
CVT, Driving with CVT (Continuously
Variable Transmission)............................................ 5-19
D
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system....... 2-63
Defroster switch, Rear window and
outside mirror defroster switch....................... 2-57
Dimensions and weights.................................... 10-10
Display
Head Up Display (HUD)..................................... 2-49
Vehicle information display.......................... 2-22
Drive belt ............................................................................ 8-17
Drive Computer............................................................. 2-46
Drive Mode Selector .................................................. 5-31
Driver and front passenger supplemental
knee air bag..................................................................... 1-62
Driver Assistance systems.................................... 5-35
Common troubleshooting guide ............. 5-40
Driving
Cold weather driving..................................... 5-172
Drive Mode Selector ........................................... 5-31
Driving with CVT (Continuously
Variable Transmission)..................................... 5-19
Intelligent 4x4..................................................... 5-151
On-pavement and off-road driving ....... 5-10
Precautions when starting
and driving.................................................................... 5-5
Safety precautions .............................................. 5-12
E
Easy-Fill Tire Alert system......................................... 5-9
ECO mode ......................................................................... 5-32
ECO mode system
ECO Drive Report.................................................. 2-11
Economy, Fuel............................................................. 5-150
Elapsed time.................................................................... 2-46
Electric power steering........................................ 5-154
Electric power steering warning light ........ 2-17
Electric shift control system
warning light................................................................... 2-15
Emergency Call (SOS) button ............................ 2-72
Emission control information label............ 10-12
Emission control system warranty ............ 10-30
Engine
Before starting the engine............................ 5-17
Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-149
Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-3
Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-6
Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-8
Checking engine coolant level...................... 8-6
Checking engine oil level................................... 8-8
Coolant temperature gauge .......................... 2-9
Emergency engine shut off.............. 5-16, 6-3
Engine compartment
check locations......................................................... 8-3
Engine cooling system........................................ 8-4
Engine oil........................................................................ 8-8
Engine oil and oil
filter recommendation ..................................... 10-7
Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-8
Engine serial number .................................... 10-12
Engine specifications......................................... 10-9
Engine start operation indicator.............. 2-34
If your vehicle overheats................................ 6-14
Remote engine start.......................................... 3-19
Starting the engine............................................. 5-18
Event Data Recorders (EDR)............................. 10-32
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ......................... 5-5
Explanation of scheduled
maintenance items........................................................ 9-5
F
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12
Filter
Air cleaner housing filter ................................ 8-19
Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-8
Flashers (See hazard warning
flasher switch).................................................................... 6-2
Flat tire..................................................................................... 6-3
Flat towing..................................................................... 10-28
Floor mat cleaning ......................................................... 7-5
Fluid
Brake fluid .................................................................. 8-12
Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-3
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid.................................................................... 8-12
Engine coolant........................................................... 8-4
Engine oil........................................................................ 8-8
Intercooler coolant................................................. 8-6
Window washer fluid ......................................... 8-13
Fog light switch ............................................................ 2-64
Forward Driving Aids ................................................ 5-35
Front manual seat adjustment............................ 1-4
Front passenger air bag and
status light........................................................................ 1-55
Front seat, Front seat adjustment .................... 1-4
Fuel
Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-3
Fuel economy...................................................... 5-150
Fuel information.................................................... 10-5
Fuel octane rating ............................................... 10-5
Fuel-filler door......................................................... 3-29
Gauge............................................................................. 2-10
Fuel Efficient Driving Tips................................... 5-149
Fuses...................................................................................... 8-22
Fusible links...................................................................... 8-23
G
Garage mode system............................................... 3-27
Gauge........................................................................................ 2-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge......... 2-9
Fuel gauge ................................................................. 2-10
Odometer....................................................................... 2-8
Speedometer .............................................................. 2-8
Tachometer.................................................................. 2-9
General maintenance................................................... 9-2
Glove box ........................................................................... 2-77
H
Hazard warning flasher switch ............................ 6-2
Head restraints/headrests................................... 1-10
Head Up Display (HUD)............................................ 2-49
Headlights
Bulb replacement................................................. 8-29
Headlight switch ................................................... 2-57
Heated seats ................................................................... 2-65
Heated steering wheel............................................ 2-65
Heater
Heater and air
conditioner operation....................................... 4-26
High beam assist ......................................................... 2-61
Hill start assist system ......................................... 5-161
Hood release ................................................................... 3-22
Hook
Coat hook................................................................... 2-79
Luggage hook......................................................... 2-80
Horn........................................................................................ 2-65
I
Ignition switch ............................................................... 5-14
Ignition switch positions ....................................... 5-15
Immobilizer system.................................................... 2-53
Indicator
Lights.............................................................................. 2-17
Vehicle information display.......................... 2-22
indicator light
Electronic parking brake
warning light............................................................ 2-15
Inside mirror .................................................................... 3-33
Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ............ 10-31
Instrument brightness control ......................... 2-11
Instrument panel............................................................. 2-4
Intelligent 4x4............................................................. 5-151
Intelligent Around View® Monitor....................... 4-9
Intelligent Auto Headlight system ................. 2-58
Intelligent Blind Spot
Intervention (I-BSI) ...................................................... 5-66
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ......................... 5-98
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)................. 5-141
Intelligent Forward Collision
Warning (I-FCW).......................................................... 5-132
Intelligent Key button operation light........ 3-17
Intelligent Key system ................................................. 3-7
Key operating range............................................. 3-9
Key operation.......................................................... 3-11
Remote keyless operation ............................ 3-15
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI).................. 5-52
Intelligent Trace Control..................................... 5-160
Intercooler cooling system...................................... 8-6
11-3
11-4
Interior light replacement..................................... 8-29
Interior light switch.................................................... 2-88
Interior lights................................................................... 2-87
ISOFIX child restraint ................................................ 1-26
J
Jump starting ................................................................. 6-11
K
Key
Ignition switch positions ................................ 5-15
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system)......................... 3-15
Keys............................................................................................ 3-3
For Intelligent Key system................................ 3-7
KR15DDT engine model ............................................ 8-4
L
Labels
Air bag warning labels ..................................... 1-67
Air conditioner specification label....... 10-13
Emission control information label .... 10-12
Engine serial number .................................... 10-12
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label .............................................. 10-12
Tire and Loading
information label................................ 8-33, 10-13
Vehicle identification number (VIN) .... 10-11
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)........................ 5-47
LATCH system................................................................ 1-26
License plate, Installing front
license plate.................................................................. 10-14
Liftgate................................................................................. 3-23
Auto closure ............................................................. 3-28
Liftgate release lever ......................................... 3-28
Operating manual liftgate............................. 3-23
Operating power liftgate................................ 3-24
Light
Air bag warning light......................................... 1-67
Bulb replacement................................................. 8-28
Cargo light ................................................................. 2-89
Fog light switch ..................................................... 2-64
Headlight switch ................................................... 2-57
Headlights bulb replacement ..................... 8-29
Indicator lights........................................................ 2-17
Interior lights............................................................ 2-87
Map lights................................................................... 2-88
Rear personal lights ........................................... 2-89
Room lights............................................................... 2-88
Vanity mirror lights ............................................. 2-89
Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders................................................ 2-14
Lights, Exterior and interior
light replacement........................................................ 8-29
Loading information (See vehicle
loading information) .............................................. 10-15
Lock
Automatic door locks........................................... 3-7
Door locks...................................................................... 3-5
Power door lock ....................................................... 3-5
Low tire pressure warning (Tire
Pressure Low)................................................................. 2-35
Low tire pressure warning light ...................... 2-18
Low tire pressure warning system
(See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)).................................................................. 5-6
Lower console tray .................................................... 2-78
Luggage
Adjustable luggage floor ................................ 2-75
Single luggage board........................................ 2-75
Luggage hooks ............................................................. 2-80
M
Maintenance
Battery........................................................................... 8-15
General maintenance........................................... 9-2
Maintenance precautions................................. 8-2
Maintenance requirements............................. 9-2
Maintenance schedules...................................... 9-7
Seat belt maintenance..................................... 1-21
Standard maintenance....................................... 9-8
Maintenance schedules.............................................. 9-7
Malfunction indicator light (MIL)...................... 2-19
Manual air conditioner and heater............... 4-27
Manual front seat adjustment.............................. 1-4
Map lights.......................................................................... 2-88
Master warning light.................................. 2-16, 2-20
Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system)....... 3-4
Memory seat ................................................................... 3-37
Meters and gauges........................................................ 2-5
Instrument brightness control .................. 2-11
Mirror
Inside mirror ............................................................. 3-33
Outside mirrors...................................................... 3-35
Vanity mirror ............................................................ 3-36
Moonroof............................................................................ 2-85
Moving Object Detection (MOD) ...................... 4-21
N
Neutral hold mode ..................................................... 5-22
New vehicle break-in ............................................. 5-149
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ............ 2-53
O
Odometer............................................................................... 2-8
OFF-ROAD mode.......................................................... 5-32
Off-road recovery........................................................ 5-11
Oil
Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-3
Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-8
Checking engine oil level................................... 8-8
Engine oil........................................................................ 8-8
Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-8
Oil control system.................................... 2-29, 9-7
Other lights....................................................................... 2-21
Outside air temperature........................................ 2-49
Outside mirrors............................................................. 3-35
Overheat, If your vehicle overheats.............. 6-14
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual
order information..................................................... 10-33
P
Panic alarm....................................................................... 3-17
Parking
Brake break-in .................................................... 5-155
Parking brake .......................................................... 5-25
Parking on hills................................................... 5-153
Parking Aids..................................................................... 5-35
Parking brake
Electronic parking brake
warning light............................................................ 2-15
Power
Electric power steering................................ 5-154
Power door lock ....................................................... 3-5
Power outlet............................................................. 2-68
Power windows ..................................................... 2-82
PR25DD engine model................................................ 8-3
Precautions
Braking precautions....................................... 5-155
Child restraints....................................................... 1-24
Driving safety........................................................... 5-12
Maintenance................................................................ 8-2
On-pavement and off-road driving ....... 5-10
Seat belt usage ...................................................... 1-14
SRS ................................................................................... 1-47
When starting and driving................................ 5-5
ProPILOT Assist............................................................. 5-85
ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link.......................... 5-85
Speed Adjust by Route ................................ 5-106
Speed Limit Assist............................................ 5-103
Push starting................................................................... 6-14
Push-button ignition switch............................... 5-14
R
RAB system ................................................................... 5-143
Rapid air pressure loss............................................ 5-11
Readiness for inspection/maintenance
(I/M) test........................................................................... 10-31
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)....................... 5-143
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system
OFF warning light........................................................ 2-20
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)......................... 5-77
Rear Door Alert.............................................................. 2-67
Rear door lock, Child safety rear
door lock ................................................................................ 3-7
Rear Driving Aids.......................................................... 5-35
Rear personal lights .................................................. 2-89
Rear seats.............................................................................. 1-7
Rear Sonar System (RSS).................................... 5-168
Rear sunshade............................................................... 3-32
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch ........................................................... 2-57
Rear window wiper and washer switch .... 2-55
RearView Monitor............................................................ 4-2
Recorders, Event data .......................................... 10-32
Registering in another country..................... 10-10
Remote engine start................................................. 3-19
Remote keyless entry function, For
Intelligent Key system ............................................. 3-15
Reporting safety defects.................................... 10-30
Road Assistance............................................................... 6-2
Rollover................................................................................ 5-10
Roof rack............................................................................ 2-81
Room lights...................................................................... 2-88
S
Safety
Child seat belts....................................................... 1-21
Reporting safety defects............................ 10-30
Towing safety...................................................... 10-23
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment.................... 1-4
Front power seat adjustment....................... 1-5
Front seats.................................................................... 1-4
Seat belt(s)
Child safety................................................................ 1-21
Infants............................................................................ 1-22
Injured persons ...................................................... 1-17
Larger children ....................................................... 1-22
Precautions on seat belt usage................ 1-14
Pregnant women.................................................. 1-17
Seat belt cleaning ................................................... 7-7
Seat belt extenders............................................. 1-20
Seat belt hook......................................................... 1-20
Seat belt maintenance..................................... 1-21
Seat belt warning light
and chime.................................................... 1-16, 2-16
Seat belts.................................................................... 1-14
Seat belts with pretensioners.................... 1-66
11-5
11-6
Shoulder belt height adjustment ............ 1-19
Small children.......................................................... 1-22
Three-point type with retractor............... 1-17
Seat(s)
Heated seats ............................................................ 2-65
Memory seat ............................................................ 3-37
Seats.................................................................................. 1-3
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System), Engine start................. 2-53
Security system, Vehicle
security system............................................................. 2-52
Servicing air conditioner........................................ 4-37
Shifting
CVT (Continuously
Variable Transmission)..................................... 5-19
Shoulder belt height adjustment, For
front seats......................................................................... 1-19
Side Driving Aids........................................................... 5-35
Single luggage board............................................... 2-75
SNOW mode..................................................................... 5-32
Soft bottle holders...................................................... 2-74
Sonar
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)............... 5-143
Rear Sonar System (RSS)............................ 5-168
Sonar system....................................................... 5-162
SOS button (See Emergency Call
(SOS) button) ................................................................... 2-72
Spare tire.......................................................... 8-42, 10-10
Spark plugs....................................................................... 8-18
Speed Adjust by Route (ProPILOT Assist
with Navi-link).............................................................. 5-106
Speed and Average speed................................... 2-46
Speed Limit Assist (ProPILOT Assist
with Navi-link).............................................................. 5-103
Speedometer ...................................................................... 2-8
SPORT mode ................................................................... 5-34
SRS
Precautions on SRS ............................................ 1-47
Standard maintenance............................................... 9-8
STANDARD mode......................................................... 5-32
Starting
Before starting the engine............................ 5-17
Jump starting .......................................................... 6-11
Precautions when starting
and driving.................................................................... 5-5
Push starting............................................................ 6-14
Starting the engine............................................. 5-18
Status light, Front passenger air bag ......... 1-55
Steering
Electric power steering................................ 5-154
Heated steering wheel..................................... 2-65
Tilt/telescopic steering.................................... 3-31
Steering Assist ............................................................ 5-113
Steering Assist switch.............................................. 2-67
Storage ................................................................................ 2-73
Sun visors .......................................................................... 3-32
Sunglasses holder....................................................... 2-78
Sunshade (rear)............................................................. 3-32
Supplemental air bag warning labels......... 1-67
Supplemental air bag
warning light.................................................... 1-67, 2-16
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 1-47
switch
Drive Mode Selector ........................................... 5-31
Emergency Call (SOS) button ..................... 2-72
Fog light switch ..................................................... 2-64
Hazard warning flasher switch .................... 6-2
Headlight switch ................................................... 2-57
Intelligent Auto Headlight switch............ 2-58
Memory seat switch........................................... 3-37
Power door lock switch ..................................... 3-6
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch .................................................... 2-57
Steering Assist switch....................................... 2-67
Turn signal switch ............................................... 2-64
Wiper and washer switch .............................. 2-54
T
Tachometer.......................................................................... 2-9
Temperature gauge, Engine coolant
temperature gauge ....................................................... 2-9
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), Engine start ............................................... 2-53
Three-way catalyst......................................................... 5-6
Tilt/telescopic steering........................................... 3-31
Tire pressure, Low tire pressure
warning light................................................................... 2-18
Tires
Easy-Fill Tire Alert system................................. 5-9
Flat tire............................................................................. 6-3
Low tire pressure warning system ........... 5-6
Tire and Loading
information label................................ 8-33, 10-13
Tire chains.................................................................. 8-38
Tire dressing................................................................ 7-4
Tire pressure ............................................................ 8-31
Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS)................................................. 5-6, 6-3
Tire rotation.............................................................. 8-39
Types of tires ........................................................... 8-37
Uniform tire quality grading.................... 10-29
Wheel/tire size .................................................... 10-10
Wheels and tires.................................................... 8-31
Towing
Tow truck towing................................................. 6-16
Towing a trailer.................................................. 10-18
Towing safety...................................................... 10-23
TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system....... 5-6
TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert......................... 5-9
TPMS, Tire pressure warning system.............. 6-3
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)........................... 5-44
Trailer towing .............................................................. 10-18
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid.................................................................... 8-12
Driving with CVT (Continuously
Variable Transmission)..................................... 5-19
Transmitter, With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system)................................ 3-15
Traveling or registering in
another country ........................................................ 10-10
Trip computer ................................................................ 2-46
Trip odometer................................................................ 2-46
Troubleshooting guide
Driver Assistance systems............................. 5-40
Turbocharger system .................................................. 5-6
Turn signal switch ...................................................... 2-64
U
Underbody cleaning...................................................... 7-3
Uniform tire quality grading............................ 10-29
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
charging connector................................................... 2-69
V
Vanity mirror ................................................................... 3-36
Vanity mirror lights .................................................... 2-89
Variable Compression Turbo ............................. 2-12
Variable voltage control system ..................... 8-17
Vehicle
Dimensions and weights............................ 10-10
Identification number (VIN)....................... 10-11
Loading information ...................................... 10-15
Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).......... 6-18
Security system...................................................... 2-52
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system........................................................ 5-157
Vehicle information display................................. 2-22
Settings......................................................................... 2-24
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators......................................................... 2-34
Ventilators......................................................................... 4-25
W
Warning
Blind Spot Warning (BSW).............................. 5-58
Driver Assistance systems
troubleshooting guide...................................... 5-40
Hazard warning flasher switch .................... 6-2
Intelligent Forward Collision
Warning (I-FCW).................................................. 5-132
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)................. 5-47
Lights.............................................................................. 2-14
Low tire pressure warning............................ 2-35
Rear Door Alert....................................................... 2-67
Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS)................................................. 5-6, 6-3
Vehicle information display.......................... 2-22
Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders................................................ 2-13
Warning labels, Air bag warning labels...... 1-67
Warning light
Air bag warning light.......................... 1-67, 2-16
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light............................................................ 2-17
Brake warning light ............................................ 2-14
Electric power steering
warning light............................................................ 2-17
Electric shift control system
warning light............................................................ 2-15
Electronic parking brake system
warning light............................................................ 2-18
Low tire pressure warning light ............... 2-18
Seat belt warning light
and chime.................................................... 1-16, 2-16
Warranty, Emission control
system warranty....................................................... 10-30
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and
washer operation................................................. 2-55
Wiper and washer switch .............................. 2-54
Washing................................................................................... 7-2
Waxing...................................................................................... 7-3
Weights (See dimensions
and weights)................................................................. 10-10
Wheel/tire size ............................................................ 10-10
Wheels and tires........................................................... 8-31
Care of wheels........................................................... 7-3
Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels................ 7-3
Window washer fluid ................................................ 8-13
Window(s)
Cleaning.......................................................................... 7-3
Power windows ..................................................... 2-82
Wiper
Rear window wiper blade.............................. 8-21
Wiper and washer switch .............................. 2-54
Wiper blades ............................................................. 8-20
Wiper and washer switch ..................................... 2-54
Wireless charger........................................................... 2-70
11-7
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
FUEL INFORMATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an
octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-
Knock Index) number (Research octane
number 91).
CAUTION
. Using a fuel other than that spe-
cified could adversely affect the
emission control system, and
may also affect warranty cover-
age.
. Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because
this will damage the three-way
catalyst.
. Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to
run on a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel
containing more than 15% etha-
nol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing
more than 15% ethanol can ad-
versely affect the emission con-
trol devices and systems of the
vehicle. Damage caused by such
fuel is not covered by the NISSAN
new vehicle limited warranty.
. Do not use fuel that contains the
octane booster methylcyclopen-
tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). Using fuel containing
MMT may adversely affect vehicle
performance and vehicle emis-
sions. Not all fuel dispensers are
labeled to indicate MMT content,
so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California
laws prohibit the use of MMT in
reformulated gasoline.
. U.S. government regulations re-
quire ethanol dispensing pumps
to be identified by a small,
square, orange and black label
with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for
that region.
For additional information, see “Capaci-
ties and recommended fluids/lubricants”
(P.10-3).
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
See “Capacities and recommended fluids/
lubricants” (P.10-3) for engine oil and oil
filter recommendation.
COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
For additional information, see “Tire and
Loading Information label” (P.10-13).
The label is typically located on the driver
side center pillar. For additional informa-
tion, see “Wheels and tires” (P.8-31).
NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE-
DURES RECOMMENDATION:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the recommendations
outlined in the “Break-in schedule” (P.5-
149) of this Owner’s Manual. Follow these
recommendations for the future reliability
and economy of your new vehicle.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
T33-D
Printing : September 2021
Publication No.:
Printed in the U.S.A.
OM21EA 0T33U4
